CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual
Reference Manual
How to Use This Reference Manual
The CL5/CL3/CL1 Reference Manual (this document) allows you to search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software you're using to view this document.
If you're using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to search for occurrences of that term.
Displaying the next/previous view
If you're using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to jump back to the previous page after you've used a link to jump to a different page.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the CL series is provided on page 4 and
following. You can use this function tree to find the page that explains an on-screen display or function.
EN
Table of contents
Function Tree
.............................................................................. 4
SELECTED CHANNEL section
........................................................ 6
Centralogic section
............................................................... 12
Input and output patching
.................................................... 16
CL console internal patching and Dante audio network patching .............................. 16
Input channels
...................................................................... 26
Sending the signal from an input channel to the STEREO/MONO bus ....................... 33
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus .................................. 37
OUTPUT channels
..................................................................... 49
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/MONO bus ................................. 51
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/MONO channels to
2
Table of contents
EQ and Dynamics
......................................................................58
Channel Job
..............................................................................65
Scene memory
..........................................................................86
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall
Monitor and Cue functions
..................................................... 102
Talkback and Oscillator
....................................................... 114
Meters
.................................................................................... 119
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3 or CL1 console ........................ 123
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Reference Manual
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and Premium Rack libraries ............... 153
I/O devices and external head amps
...................................... 154
MIDI
........................................................................................ 165
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items ....................................... 168
Recorder
................................................................................. 173
Setup
...................................................................................... 186
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs .......................................... 204
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders ..................................... 207
GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder) functions .......................................... 208
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB flash drive .................................. 211
3
Table of contents
Help function
...................................................................... 243
Other functions
................................................................... 245
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen (Calibration function) ............... 245
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration function) .................................. 246
Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings ......................... 249
Warning/Error Messages
.................................................... 250
Index
................................................................................... 253
Reference Manual
Function Tree
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner's Manual(booklet).
Main
SELECTED CHANNEL
OVERVIEW
FUNCTION ACCESS AREA
CHANNEL PARAMETER
PATCH/NAME
GAIN/PATCH
1ch
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
INPUT DELAY
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
DELAY SCALE
INSERT/DIRECT OUT
1ch
8ch
HPF/EQ
1ch
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
DYNAMICS
1ch
8ch
KEY IN SOURCE SELECT
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
(18)
Indication only
CHANNEL PARAMETER
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND
TO STEREO/MONO
8ch
CH1-48
CH49-72/ST IN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
LIBRARY
CHANNEL LIBRARY
EQ LIBRARY
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
GEQ/PEQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
Portico5033/Portico5043/U76/Opt-2A/
EQ-1A/DynamicEQ LIBRARY
DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY
RACK
VIRTUAL RACK
RACK MOUNTER
GEQ EDIT
RACK LINK
EFFECT RACK
EFFECT EDIT
EFFECT TYPE
PREMIUM RACK
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
PREMIUM RACK EDIT
AUTOMIXER
PARAMETRIC EQ
I/O DEVICE
DANTE PATCH
DANTE INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
4
I/O DEVICE
I/O
AMP
WIRELESS
EXTERNAL HA
EXTERNAL HA RACK
EXTERNAL HA EDIT
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT
MONITOR
SETUP
MONITOR
USER SETUP
CUE
PREFERENCE
MONITOR
USER DEFINED KEYS SETUP
OSCILLATOR
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP (List)
TALKBACK
USER DEFINED KNOBS SETUP
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP (List)
METER
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP
CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER
CREATE KEY
SAVE KEY
LOGIN
SAVE/LOAD
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP
CASCADE IN/OUT PATCH
Function Tree
Reference Manual
SETUP
OUTPUT PORT
MIDI/GPI
MIDI SETUP
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
GPI
FADER START
BUS SETUP
CONSOLE LOCK
DATE/TIME
NETWORK
DANTE SETUP
SCENE
SCENE LIST
GLOBAL PASTE
Fade time
SONG SELECT
FOCUS RECALL
RECORDER
USB
NUENDO LIVE
CH JOB
CH LINK MODE
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
RECALL SAFE MODE
CH COPY MODE
CH MOVE MODE
CH DEFAULT MODE
PATCH
PORT SELECT
CH SELECT
Others
CONFIRMATION
SOFT KEYBORD
LOGIN
Startup Menu
MODE SELECT
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
INPUT PORT TRIM
OUTPUT PORT TRIM
SLOT OUTPUT TRIM
FADER CALIBRATION
LED COLOR CALIBRATION
(21)
NOTE
• The explanations in this reference manual will use the CL5.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, some screens will not show channels and faders that do not exist on those models.
5
Function Tree
Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL section
The SELECTED CHANNEL section located at the left of the display corresponds to a channel module of a conventional analog mixer, and allows you to use the knobs on the panel to set all the major parameters of the currently-selected channel.
Operations in this section will affect the channel that was most recently selected by its [SEL] key. If you have assigned an ST IN channel or STEREO channel to a single channel strip, either the L or the R channel will be selected, and the major parameters for L and R channels will be linked.
Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL Section
Follow the steps below to perform operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
STEP
1.
Use the [SEL] key in the top panel INPUT section, ST IN section, or the STEREO/
MONO section, to select the channel to control.
2.
Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
3.
Use the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section and the buttons in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen to edit the parameters of the selected channel.
NOTE
• To select a MIX or MATRIX channel, use the Bank
Channel number
Channel name
Select keys to recall the desired channel to the
Centralogic section, and then press the [SEL] key for the desired channel.
• The number and name of the currently-selected channel is shown in the channel select field located in the Function Access Area of the touch screen.
• If an ST IN channel or STEREO channel has been assigned to a single channel strip, you can switch between L and R by repeatedly pressing the same
[SEL] key.
• You can also switch channels by pressing the channel select field located in the Function Access Area.
Press the left side of the field to select the preceding channel. Press the right side of the field to select the next channel.
• If you have turned on the option“POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED” on the
PREFERENCE tab (accessed by pressing the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button), pressing a knob repeatedly will open or close the screen (1 ch).
• Even if a different screen is selected, the channel selected with the
[SEL] key can be set using the knobs of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, a window indicating the value of that parameter will appear on screen when you operate a knob.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
6
Reference Manual
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
◆ SEND field
In this field, you can view the send level and pre/post from the channel to each MIX/MATRIX bus. You can also switch the on/off status of the send signals. The view and the function of the knobs and buttons in the SEND field vary depending on whether a pair of bus channels
(odd-numbered and even-numbered) are comprised of two mono channels or a stereo channel.
1
Tabs
Enable you to select a group of 16 output bus channels to be displayed in the SEND field.
• MIX1-16 tab............................ displays MIX buses 1-16.
• MIX17-24/MATRIX tab ........... displays MIX buses 17-24 and
MATRIX buses 1-8.
1
SELECTED CHANNEL section
If the destination bus channels are two mono channels:
1
2
3
1
SEND knob
Adjusts the send level to the corresponding bus.
2
PRE indicator
The type of the corresponding bus is indicated. If the type is VARI [PRE EQ] or VARI [PRE
FADER], and if the PRE button on the MIX SEND 8ch screen is turned ON, the type is displayed.
3
ON button
Switches the send signal to the corresponding bus on or off.
If the destination bus is a stereo channel:
1
2
3
1
SEND/PAN knob
The right-hand knob adjusts the level of the signal sent to a pair of bus channels (even- numbered and odd-numbered). The left-hand knob adjusts the pan and balance of the same signal.
2
PRE indicator
The type of the corresponding bus is indicated.
3
ON button
Switches the send signal to the two buses on or off.
NOTE
• If the type of the destination bus is set to FIXED, controllers
2 3 mentioned above will not be displayed.
• Press the SEND knob or PAN knob on screen to open the SEND 8ch window.
7
Reference Manual
◆ GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also view the operational status of the head amp.
1
GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain/digital gain of the head amp.
Press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 1ch window.
2
GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation function is turned on.
2
1 3 4
5 6 7 8
3
OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
4
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the status of the phase setting.
5
+48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp.
6
HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
7
AG-DG LINK indicator
Indicates a link between the analog gain and digital gain of the head amp.
8
Digital/Analog gain value
If analog gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the digital gain value is shown here. If digital gain is assigned to the GAIN knob, the analog gain value is shown here.
NOTE
• For an input channel that is patched to an input that has no head amp, 1
,
2, 5, 6, and
7 will not be shown. For an output channel,
1 7
• If a GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the USER SETUP PREFERENCE screen, the digital gain knob will appear for
1
, and
2, 5, 6, and 7
For details, refer to
will not be displayed.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
◆ PAN/BALANCE field
This field enables you to switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the STEREO/MONO bus, and adjust the pan and balance.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1
TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the
STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the
BALANCE knob in this window. For a MIX channel,
1 2 the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
NOTE
• For mono input channels, the pan level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.
• For ST IN channels, if the PAN knob is selected, the pan level is nominal when panned either left or right and -3dB at center. If the BALANCE knob is selected the balance level is nominal at center and +3dB when panned either left or right. These levels do not change even if channel link is used.
2
ST/MONO button
Switches the on/off status of a signal sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an INPUT/MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the
LCR button appears in location
2
.The LCR button is an overall on/off switch for the signals sent from the channel to the STEREO/MONO bus.
When a MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel is selected:
2
1
BALANCE knob
If the signal on the selected channel is stereo, the
BALANCE knob will appear, enabling you to adjust the volume balance for the left and right channels.
If the channel signal is monaural, the BALANCE knob is not shown and cannot be used.
1
Press the knob to open the TO STEREO 8ch window.
8
Reference Manual
When using Surround mode (MIX1- MIX6)
3
DOWN MIX
This field enables you to view the downmix coefficient and L/R button settings.
Press this field to open the TO STEREO/MONO window.
◆ INPUT DELAY field
This field enables you to view the delay settings.
3
1
1
ON indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
2
2
Delay time
The delay value is displayed by milliseconds (ms) and also by currently-selected scale. If the scale uses units of ms, the value in the bottom row will not be displayed. Only the ms value appears in the middle row.
Press this field to open the INPUT DELAY 8ch window.
◆ HPF field (input channels only)
This field enables you to set the HPF. If an output channel is selected, a gray circle will appear in location
1
, and
2
1 will not be displayed.
2
1
HPF knob
Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
2
ON button
Switches the HPF on or off.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
◆ EQ parameter field
This field displays the 4-band EQ parameter settings. Press each knob to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
1
Q knob
Specifies the Q for each band.
If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF or H.SHELF (high- shelving), or the LOW band filter type is set to L.SHELF (low- shelving), the Q knob will not be displayed. Only the filter type name will be displayed.
NOTE
• Fully rotating the HIGH band Q knob on the panel counter- clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to LPF. Fully rotating the Q knob clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to high-shelving.
• Fully rotating the LOW band Q knob on the panel clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to low- shelving.
• If an output channel has been selected, fully rotating the LOW
1 2 3 band Q knob on the panel counter-clockwise while pressing and holding it down will set the filter type to HPF.
• You can also switch the filter type in the HPF/EQ 1ch window.
2
FREQUENCY knob
Sets the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) for each band.
Sets the amount of cut/boost for each band.
NOTE
• If the HIGH band filter type is set to LPF, you can switch LPF on or off using the HIGH band GAIN knob on the panel.
• If the LOW band filter type is set to HPF, you can switch HPF on or off using the LOW band GAIN knob on the panel.
9
Reference Manual
◆ EQ graph field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the attenuator, HPF, and EQ.
◆ DYNAMICS1/DYNAMICS2 field
This field enables you to set the Dynamics 1/2 parameters.
1 2
3
4
1
OVER indicator
Warns you when the signal is clipping.
2
Level meter
Displays the output signal level (green) and the amount of gain reduction (orange) when the Dynamics is on. The current threshold setting is shown as a white vertical line.
3
Threshold
Specifies the threshold.
4
Parameters
Indicate the values of parameters that vary depending on the currently-selected dynamics type.
Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/DYNAMICS 2 1ch window, in which you can make detailed parameter settings.
SELECTED CHANNEL section
◆ INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings.
1
Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT
1ch window.
2
ON button
Switches the insert on or off.
3 4
2
3
RACK EDIT button
Appears if an effect or Premium Rack is inserted. Press this button to display the edit screen for the inserted rack.
4
IN indicator
Appears if a port has been assigned to the insert-in patch. It lights when the signal is sent to the insert-in.
◆ DIRECT OUT field
This field enables you to make Direct Out settings.
1
Popup button
Press this button to open the INSERT/DIRECT OUT 1ch window. The Direct Out level value will appear below the button.
1
2
ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
◆ RECALL SAFE field
This field enables you to make Recall Safe settings.
1
Popup button
Press this button to open the RECALL SAFE window.
2
ON button
Switches the Recall Safe status on or off.
1
3
3
PARTIAL indicator
Lights only if some of the channel parameters are set to Recall Safe.
2
2
1
10
Reference Manual
◆ FADER field
This field enables you to make settings for the channel on/off status and the level.
1
Fader
Displays the current level.
Use the faders on the top panel to set the levels.
2
Level indicator
1
Displays the current level setting by numerical value. If the signal is clipping at any point in the channel, the Σ CLIP indicator will light.
2
3
Switches the channel on and off. The button is linked with the corresponding [ON] key on the top panel.
NOTE
For CL V2.0 and later, the TOUCH AND TURN function assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs enables you to control the fader in the FADER field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
◆ DCA/MUTE field
This field enables you to select the DCA or mute group to which the channel is assigned.
1
1
Tabs
Select a DCA or mute group. Press the selected tab once again to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
When the DCA group tab is selected:
2
DCA group select buttons
Select the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
3
Mute group indicators
Indicate the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
3
2
When the mute group tab is selected:
4
Mute group select buttons
Select the mute group to which the channel is assigned.
NOTE
If the dimmer level is set to the mute group, this button lights orange.
5
SAFE button
Temporarily removes the channel from the mute group.
6
DCA group indicators
Indicate the DCA group to which the channel is assigned.
6
SELECTED CHANNEL section
5
4
11
Reference Manual
Centralogic section
The Centralogic section located below the touch screen lets you recall and simultaneously control a set of eight input channels, output channels, or DCA groups. If you press one of the
Bank Select keys, the channels or DCA groups corresponding to that key will be assigned to the Centralogic section, and can be controlled using the faders, [ON] keys, and [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section.
Centralogic section
Operations in the Centralogic section
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels or DCA
groups that you want to control.
2. Use the faders and [ON] keys of the Centralogic section to adjust the level of the (up
to) eight selected channels and switch them on/off.
3.
Use the fields on the OVERVIEW screen and the multifunction knobs to adjust the
parameters for the group of up to eight channels.
NOTE
• When the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed, you can switch to the OVERVIEW screen by pressing any of the multifunction knobs 1-8. This is convenient when you want to quickly switch to the OVERVIEW screen while leaving the same channels or DCA groups selected for control.
• The bottom line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels or DCA groups that can be controlled by the faders, [ON] keys and [CUE] keys of the Centralogic section.
• The top line of the OVERVIEW screen shows the channels that can be controlled by multifunction knobs 1 - 8 in the Centralogic section.
Bank Select keys
12
Reference Manual
OVERVIEW Screen
◆ CHANNEL NAME field
This field appears at the top and bottom of the screen and displays the channel number, name, and icon for the currently-selected eight channels. The name of the currently-selected channel is highlighted.
: Selected channel
: Unselected channel
NOTE
If you have retained a specific channel (that is controlled by the faders or knobs in the Centralogic section) by pressing and holding down the corresponding Bank Select key, the channel name display at the top of the channel strip graphic may differ from the name displayed at the bottom of the same channel strip.
Centralogic section
◆ GAIN/PATCH field
This field enables you to make HA (head amp) analog or digital gain settings. You can also view the operational status of the head amp.
The view and the function of the controllers in this field vary depending on the type of the selected channel.
1
2
3
4
1
GAIN knob
Sets the analog gain of the head amp.
• Press this field to assign the GAIN knob to the corresponding multifunction knob in the
Centralogic section, which enables you to adjust the gain. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the level of the signal output to the audio network.
• If the GAIN knob has been assigned to a multifunction knob, press the knob to open the GAIN/PATCH 8ch window.
2
OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
+48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on or off status for the head amp. This indicator is not displayed unless the head amp is patched to the channel.
4
Ø (Phase) indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the input phase setting for the head amp
NOTE
• If the slot is not connected to the head amp, the patch and the type of the MY card will be displayed.
• If GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is set to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen, the DIGITAL
GAIN knob will appear instead of knob
1
, and indicator
3 will not be displayed.
• Press the SETUP button, then the USER SETUP button, select the PREFERENCE tab, and then set the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION to DIGITAL GAIN. You will be able to adjust the digital gain value by using the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
• You can also operate the digital gain by assigning INPUT GAIN DIGITAL GAIN to a USER
DEFINED knob, or by assigning an ALTERNATE function to a USER DEFINED key and then adjusting the USER DEFINED knob or the GAIN knob for the selected channel while
ALTERNATE is on.
13
Reference Manual
If the slot is patched:
The slot name will appear.
If the rack is connected:
The patch and module name will appear.
If the output is connected:
Only the patch will appear.
◆ INPUT DELAY field (input channels only)
This field displays the delay status for the input channel. Press this field to open the INPUT
DELAY 8ch window.
1
1
DELAY ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the on/off status of the delay.
◆ INSERT/DIRECT OUT field
This field displays the Insert/Direct out status. Press this field to open the INSERT/DIRECT
OUT 8ch window.
1
2
1
INSERT ON/OFF indicator
Indicates the insert on/off status.
2
DIRECT OUT ON/OFF indicator (input channels only)
Indicates the Direct Out on/off status.
◆ EQ field
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. Press this field to open the HPF/EQ 1ch window, in which you can set the HPF and EQ.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
◆ DYNAMICS 1/2 field
This field displays the threshold value and meter for Dynamics
1/2. Press this field to open the DYNAMICS 1/2 1ch window.
NOTE
If DCA or monitor has been selected, this field will be blank.
◆ SEND field
This field displays the send level, send on/off status, and pre/post settings for 16 buses.
To select the 16 destination buses, use the [MIX 1-16] key/[MIX 17-24/
MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
To adjust the send level for each bus, use the SEND knob of the
SELECTED CHANNEL section
This field varies depending on the type of the destination bus.
If the destination bus is VARI (mono):
The knob color and scale color indicate the send on/off and pre/post status. If the send is off, the knob color turns gray. With the post setting, the knob scale color turns black.
If the destination bus is VARI (stereo):
If a pair of buses (odd-numbered and even-numbered) are in stereo, the left-hand knob will function as the PAN knob, and the right-hand knob will function as the SEND knob.
Centralogic section
14
Reference Manual
If the destination bus is set to FIXED:
The SEND ON/OFF button for each bus is shown instead of the knob.
Centralogic section
◆ DCA group field
A DCA group (1-16) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the first or second row in this field.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
◆ TO STEREO/MONO field
This field displays the on/off status and pan/balance setting of the signal sent to the STEREO/
MONO bus.
This field varies depending on the type of the selected channel.
When an input channel or MIX channel is selected:
1
2
1
TO STEREO PAN knob
Sets the pan position of a signal routed to the STEREO bus.
Press the knob to open the STEREO/MONO 8ch window. If the ST IN channel is selected, you can specify whether to view the PAN knob or the BALANCE knob in this window.
For a MIX channel, the PAN knob will appear if the signal is mono, and the BALANCE knob will appear if the signal is stereo.
2
ST/MONO indicator
Indicates the status of a signal sent to the STEREO/MONO bus.
If an input or MIX channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed.
2
When a MATRIX channel (monaural) or MONO channel is selected:
The
Σ CLIP indicator will light if the signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
◆ Mute group field
A mute group (1-8) to which the channel is assigned is displayed on the third row in this field.
If the channel has been temporarily removed from the mute group, S (Safe) will appear on the third row. If a dimmer level has been specified for a mute group, the color of the characters will change from red to orange.
Press this field to open the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
For a stereo MATRIX channel or STEREO channel, the BALANCE knob appears, indicating the balance of the left/right channels.
15
Reference Manual
Input and output patching
Input and output patching
This chapter explains how to edit the input patching and output patching, how to connect inserts, and how to use direct outputs.
When the CL series is in the initial state, the following input ports (jacks/ports) are patched to each input channel.
For CL5
Input channels
CH1-48
CH49-64
CH65-72
ST IN 1L-8R
Input port (jack/port)
DANTE1-48
DANTE49-64
OMNI1-8
FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)
For CL3
Input channels
CH1-48
CH49-64
ST IN 1L-8R
For CL1
Input channels
CH1-48
ST IN 1L-8R
Input port (jack/port)
DANTE1-48
DANTE49-64
FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)
Input port (jack/port)
DANTE1-48
FX 1L(A)-FX 8R(B)
When the CL is in the initial state, the output ports (jacks/ports) are patched to the following output channels.
Output channels Output port (jack/port)
DANTE1-24
DANTE25-32
DANTE33-34
DANTE35
DANTE36-37
DANTE38
DANTE39-40
DANTE41-64
SLOT1 (1)-(16)
SLOT2 (1)-(8)
MIX 1-24
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
MONITOR L/R
MONITOR C
CUE L/R
NO ASSIGN
MIX1-16
MIX17-24
16
Output port (jack/port) Output channels
SLOT2 (9)-(16)
SLOT3 (1)-(2)
SLOT3(3)
SLOT3 (4)-(5)
SLOT3(6)
SLOT3 (7)-(8)
SLOT3 (9)-(16)
OMNI OUT 1 - OMNI OUT 6
OMNI OUT 7 - OMNI OUT 8
FX1L(A), FX2L(A), FX3L(A),
FX4L(A), FX5L(A), FX6L(A),
FX7L(A), FX8L(A)
DIGITAL OUT L/R
RECORDER INPUT L/R
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
MONITOR L/R
MONITOR C
CUE L/R
NO ASSIGN
MIX 1-6
STEREO L/R
MIX17, MIX18, MIX19, MIX20, MIX21, MIX22, MIX23,
MIX24
STEREO L/R
STEREO L/R
CL console internal patching and Dante audio
network patching
The following diagram shows the signal flow through the CL series console, I/O devices, and
Dante audio network.
I/O Device
ID #3
Dante-MY16-AUD
Dante Network
Up to 512 channels
(logical value)
SW
I/O Device
ID #1
I/O Device
ID #2
64/512
Dante
patching
OMNI
8
MY
16
MY
16
MY
16
“Dante” (ports)
64
INPUT PATCH
CL series internal
patching
CL series
Reference Manual
Input patching
CL series consoles and I/O devices feature two types of patching: Dante audio network patching and CL console internal patching.
For Dante audio network patching, you will use the DANTE INPUT PATCH window. In this window, you can patch the CL console and I/O device inputs. Sixty-four (64) channels can be input from a Dante audio network to a CL series console. You can choose up to 64 channels from a maximum of 512 channels (logical value) of Dante audio network signals. Select the I/
O device (up to 64 channels) that you want to control from the CL series console.
Then, route the input signals (that were patched in the DANTE INPUT PATCH screen) to channels on the CL series console. To do this, choose input ports from DANTE 1-64 in the
GAIN/PATCH screen.
NOTE
By default, DANTE 1-64 are assigned to input channels 1-64.
Output patching
Use the OUTPUT PORT screen to patch the CL console's output channels and Dante audio network. In this window, assign output channel signals to DANTE 1-64 ports.
NOTE
By default, MIX 1 - 24 are assigned to DANTE 1 - 24, MATRIX 1 - 8 are assigned to DANTE 25
- 32, STEREO L/R are assigned to DANTE 33/34, and MONO is assigned to DANTE 35.
Next, patch the output signals from DANTE 1-64 (assigned in the OUTPUT PORT SETUP screen) to I/O rack outputs. Use the OUTPUT PATCH screen of the I/O RACK to make these assignments.
Input and output patching
Changing the input patching
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channels that
you want to control.
2.
Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and
use the port select buttons to select the input port.
OVERVIEW screen
PATCH/NAME screen
NOTE
You can also select an input port from the GAIN/PATCH screen.
17
Reference Manual
PATCH/NAME screen
2 3
1
5
4
7
6
1
PATCH button
Indicates the currently-selected input port. If you press this button when selecting an icon or changing the channel name, you will return to the input port select screen.
2
Icon button
Indicates the icon that is selected for the corresponding channel. When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3
Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to change the channel name will appear.
4
Category select list
Selects the category of input port. The categories correspond to the following input ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• DANTE1-32 ............DANTE1 - DANTE32
• DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64
• OMNI/PB OUT .......OMNI 1 - OMNI 8, PB OUT (L), PB OUT (R)
• SLOT1 ....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)
• EFFECT RACK ......FX1L(A) - FX8R(B)
18
Input and output patching
• PREMIUM RACK ...PR1L(A) - PR2R(B)
5
Port select buttons
Select the input port that is assigned to the currently-selected channel.
6
Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
7
Close button
Closes the screen.
Changing the output patching
To change the patching, you can either select the output port that will be the output destination of each output channel, or you can select the output channel that will be the output source for each output port.
Selecting the output port for each output channel
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the output channels.
2.
Press the channel number/channel name field on the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Select the type of port in the category select list on the PATCH/NAME screen, and
use the port select buttons to select the output port.
OVERVIEW screen
PATCH/NAME screen
Reference Manual
PATCH/NAME screen
3 4 5
9
1
2
7
6
8
1
PATCH button
Indicates the port that is patched to the output channel. If you press this button when another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2
Channel select button
Selects the channel to set.
NOTE
Switching channels on this screen will not affect the channel selection on the console.
3
Channel icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
4
Channel number display box
Indicates the channel number. This item cannot be changed.
5
Channel name input box
Indicates the name that is assigned to the corresponding channel. When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to assign a name will appear.
6
Category select list
Select the type of port.
Input and output patching
7
Port select buttons
From the category, these buttons let you select the port to patch. To cancel the selection, press the button once again.
8
Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
9
Close button
Closes the screen.
Selecting the output channel for each output port
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of
the SETUP screen.
3. In the tabs below the OUTPUT PORT screen, select the output port you want to
control.
4.
Press the channel select button of the port you want to operate.
5. Use the category select list and the channel select buttons to select the send-source
channel.
SETUP screen
OUTPUT PORT screen
NOTE
If PATCH CONFIRMATION in the PREFERNCE tab on the USER SETUP screen is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change the patch settings. If STEAL
PATCH CONFIRMATION is ON, a confirmation dialog box will appear when you attempt to change a location that is already patched elsewhere.
19
Reference Manual
CH SELECT screen
1
2
3
1
Category select list
Select the category of the channel. The categories correspond to the following channels.
They vary depending on the output port type.
• MIX/MATRIX .......................... MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8
• ST/MONO/MONI/CUE ........... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), MONI L, MONI R,
MONI C, CUE L, CUE R, SMON L, SMON R, SMON C,
SMON LFE, SMON Ls, SMON Rs, MMTX L, MMTX R,
MMTX C, MMTX LFE, MMTX Ls, MMTX Rs
• DIRECT OUT 1-32 ................. CH 1 - CH 32 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 33-64 ............... CH 33 - CH 64 Direct Outs
• DIRECT OUT 65-72 ............... CH 65 - CH 72 Direct Outs
• INSERT OUT 1-32 ................. CH 1 - CH 32 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT 33-64 ............... CH 33 - CH 64 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT 65-72 ............... CH 65 - CH 72 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8 Insert Outs
• INSERT OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C) Insert Outs
• CASCADE MIX/MATRIX ........ MIX 1 - MIX 24, MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8
• CASCADE ST/MONO/CUE ... STEREO L, STEREO R, MONO (C), CUE L, CUE R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2
Channel select button
Select the channel to be assigned to the output port from the current category.
3
CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
20
Input and output patching
Inserting an external device into a channel
You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal path of an INPUT,
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel. When doing so, the type of input/output port used for the insertion and the location of the insertion in/out can be specified individually for each channel.
STEP
1.
Connect your external equipment to an OMNI IN/OUT jack or to an I/O card
installed in slots 1 - 3.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel to which
you want to assign the input source.
3.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field.
4.
Press the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button.
5.
Select an output port or an input port.
6.
Press the INSERT ON button.
OVERVIEW screen
INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch)
NOTE
• If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device ( page 218 ).
• There is a limit to the sum of INSERT 1 and INSERT 2 for each channel group, as shown in the table below. You can select any output or input ports.
INSERT
OUT
INSERT IN
CH1-16 CH17-32 CH33-48
CH49-64
(CL5 and
CL3
only)
16 16 16 16
CH65-72
(CL5
only)
MIX1-24/
ST/
MONO
MATRIX
1-8
8 30(24)* 8
16 16 16 16 8 30(24)* 8
* When using Surround mode
Reference Manual
• If you exceed the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN limitation, the indicator will light up on the left.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch)
3 < 6 7 8
1
2
• If the limit is exceeded, invalid ports will be marked with a strike-out line.
• If the limit is exceeded, the following ports will take priority per channel group (listed in the table above).
1
INSERT 1 will take priority over INSERT 2.
2
Lower-number channel will take priority.
Input and output patching
< 9
4 5
◆ INSERT field
This field enables you to make insert settings. Press one of three fields to choose PRE EQ
(immediately before the EQ), PRE FADER (immediately before the fader), or POST ON
(immediately after the [ON] key) as the insert position.
NOTE
You can set the I/O ports to function as an insert for each block.
1
INSERT OUT button
Displays the currently-selected output port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
2
INSERT IN button
Displays the currently-selected input port for insert 1 and insert 2. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port.
3
INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off.
4
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert position and direct out point setting will be applied to all input channels.
5
APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (output channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point setting will be applied to all output channels.
NOTE
Insert 1 and insert 2 are serial connections with fixed sequential numbers.
21
Reference Manual
◆ INSERT IN HA field
This field will appear if you have selected an input port (that features a head amp) as the insert-in.
6
+48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) (currently-selected for insert 1 and insert 2) on or off.
7
A.GAIN knob
Indicates the currently-selected head amp analog gain setting for insert 1 and insert 2.
Press these knobs to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs.
NOTE
• If you have selected the OMNI IN jack on the CL console as the input port for insert-in, make the HA settings in the
INSERT IN HA field.
• Even if the INSERT ON/OFF button is OFF, the signal selected for insert-out will continue to be sent.
8
HA meter
Displays the level of the currently-selected head amp input signal for insert 1 and insert
2.
9
Close button
Closes the screen.
10
Resource Meter
Displays the settings for each channel for INSERT IN and INSERT OUT.
NOTE
If surround mode is set on the CL series console, the INSERT resources for output channels
[MIX/ST MONO] are reduced from 30 to 24.
Input and output patching
INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (8ch)
1
2
3
4
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel to set. The channel icon, color, and number appear.
2
INSERT ON/OFF button
Switches the insert on or off. The currently-specified insert point setting appears above the button.
3
INSERT OUT button
Indicates the currently-selected port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen, in which you can select an output port.
4
INSERT IN button
Indicates the currently-selected port. Press this button to open the PORT SELECT screen, in which you can select an input port. You can also view the insert-in level by checking the indicator located to the right of the this button.
22
Reference Manual
PORT SELECT screen
Displayed when you press either the INSERT OUT or INSERT IN button in the one-channel or the eight-channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the input/output port used for insertion.
2
1
3
1
Category select list
Selects the category of port. The categories correspond to the following ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI...................................... OMNI1 - OMNI8
• SLOT1 .................................... SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 .................................... SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 .................................... SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)
• GEQ RACK ............................ GEQ1L(A) - GEQ16R(B)
(MIX/MATRIX/STEREO/MONO channels only)
GEQ1L(A) - GEQ8R(B) (INPUT channels only)
• EFFECT RACK ...................... FX1L(A) - FX8R(B)
• PREMIUM RACK ................... PR1L(A) - PR8R(B)
2
Port select buttons
Assign the port that will be used as insert-out/insert-in for the currently-selected channel.
NOTE
If a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted is specified as the insert-out or insert-in, the other patch point will automatically be assigned to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a rack in which a GEQ, PEQ, or Premium Rack is mounted, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
3
CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
23
Input and output patching
Directly outputting an INPUT channel
The signal of an INPUT channel can be output directly from an OUTPUT jack on the I/O device, from the desired OMNI OUT jack, or from the output channel of a desired slot.
STEP
1. Connect your external device to an OMNI OUT jack, OUTPUT jack, or to an I/O card
installed in slot 1-3.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel that
you want to output directly.
3.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.
4.
Press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen.
5.
Select an output port.
OVERVIEW screen
INSERT/DIRECT OUT Screen (8ch)
NOTE
If you install a digital I/O card in a slot and digitally connect an external device, you must
synchronize the word clock of the CL console and the external device ( page 218 ).
Reference Manual
INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (1ch)
6
1
4
2 3 5
1
DIRECT OUT field
Enables you to make settings for direct output. Press one of four fields to choose PRE HPF
(immediately before the HPF), PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE FADER
(immediately before the fader), or POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) as the direct output position.
2
DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
3
DIRECT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off.
4
DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using the multifunction knob.
5
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Specifies whether the insert point/Direct Out point settings will be applied to all input channels.
6
Close button
Closes the screen.
INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen (8ch)
1
2
3
4
Input and output patching
1
DIRECT ON button
Switches the Direct Out on or off. The currently-selected Direct Out point is indicated above the button.
2
DIRECT OUT PATCH button
Displays the currently-selected Direct Out output port. Press this button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port.
3
DIRECT OUT LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the Direct Out. Press this button to control the level using the multifunction knob.
4
Close button
Closes the screen.
24
Reference Manual
PORT SELECT screen
Displayed when you press the DIRECT OUT PATCH button in the one-channel or the eight- channel INSERT/DIRECT OUT window. Set the output port used for direct output.
2
1
3
1
Category select list
Selects the category of output port. The categories correspond to the following output ports. The displayed categories vary depending on the channel type.
• OMNI/REC .............OMNI1-OMNI8, REC IN(L), REC IN(R)
• SLOT1 ....................SLOT1(1) - SLOT1(16)
• SLOT2 ....................SLOT2(1) - SLOT2(16)
• SLOT3 ....................SLOT3(1) - SLOT3(16)
• DANTE1-32 ............DANTE1 - DANTE32
• DANTE33-64..........DANTE33 - DANTE64
2
Output port select buttons
Assign the output port used for direct output of the currently-selected INPUT channel.
3
CLOSE button
Closes the screen.
25
Input and output patching
Reference Manual
Input channels
This chapter explains various operations for input channels.
Signal flow for input channels
The input channels comprise the section that processes signals received from the I/O devices, rear panel input jacks, or slots 1-3, and sends them to the STEREO bus, MONO bus,
MIX buses, or MATRIX buses. There are two types of input channels, as follows.
MONO channels
These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the Dante connector is assigned.
MIX
M
O
ST
MATRIX CUE
1 2 ...2324 L R(C) 1 2 ... 7 8 L R
Input channels
STEREO channels
These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the CL series console is in the default state, the input signal from the EFFECT RACK 1 - 8 is assigned.
MIX
ST
M
O
O
N
MATRIX CUE
1 2 2324 L R(C) 1 2 7 8 L R
• INPUT PATCH
Assigns input signals to the input channels.
• Ø (phase)
Switches the phase of the input signal.
• DIGITAL GAIN
Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.
• HPF (High Pass Filter)
Cuts the region below the specified frequency.
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating and ducking, or as an expander or compressor.
• DYNAMICS 2
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, compander, or de-esser.
• INPUT DELAY
Corrects input signal delay. You can specify up to 1000ms.
• LEVEL/DCA 1-16
Adjusts the input level of the effect.
• ON (On/off)
Turns the input channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
26
Reference Manual
• Pan
Adjusts the panning of signals sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. For the
STEREO channel, you can switch between PAN and BALANCE. The BALANCE parameter adjusts the volume balance of the left/right signals sent from the STEREO channel to the
STEREO bus. You can turn on PAN LINK in the BUS SETUP window so that the setting of the PAN parameter will also be applied to signals sent to two MIX or MATRIX buses that are set to stereo.
• LCR (Left/Center/Right)
Sends the input channel signal to the STEREO bus/MONO bus as a three-channel signal that consists of the L/R channels plus the center channel.
• MIX ON/OFF (MIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1 - 24.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1-24 (MATRIX send levels 1-24)
Adjusts the send level of signals sent from the input channel to VARI type MIX buses 1 -
24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8.
• MATRIX LEVEL 1 - 8 (MATRIX send levels 1 - 8)
Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8.
As the position from which the signal is sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose from the following: immediately before the EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.
• INSERT (MONO channels only)
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. For the position of the insert-out/insert-in point, you can choose immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• DIRECT OUT (MONO channels only)
This can be patched to any output port, and the input signal sent directly from that output port. For the position of the direct output, you can choose immediately before the HPF, immediately before the EQ, immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
• METER
Indicates the input channel level. You can switch the position at which the level is
Input channels
Specifying the channel name/icon
On the CL series unit, you can specify the on-screen name and icon for each input channel.
Here we will explain how to specify the channel name and icon.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channels.
2. Press the channel number/channel name field of the channel you want to specify on
the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Switch between items in the tabs on the PATCH/NAME screen, and specify a channel
name and icon.
OVERVIEW screen
PATCH/NAME screen
27
Reference Manual
PATCH/NAME screen
◆ When selecting the PATCH tab
2 3
1
4
5
1
PATCH button
Indicates the currently-patched port. If you press this button when another tab is active, a window will appear, enabling you to select the network and port.
2
Icon button
Indicates the icon and color that are currently selected for the corresponding channel.
When you press this button, a screen will appear in which you can select an icon or sample name.
3
Channel name input box
Indicates the currently-specified channel. When you press the inside of this box, the
SOFT KEYBOARD window will appear, enabling you to edit the channel name.
4
Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
5
Close button
Closes the screen.
◆ When selecting the ICON tab
1
2
Input channels
3
1
Channel color select buttons
Select a channel color.
2
Icon select buttons
Select a channel icon.
3
Sample name setup buttons
Select a preset sample name. You can edit the name on the NAME tab later.
NOTE
• You can also add or edit characters in the channel name field after you have entered the sample name. If you want to quickly assign channel names that consist of a common name plus a consecutive number, such as
“Vocal 1” or “Vocal 2,” enter a sample name first, and then add a number.
• In CL V1.7 and later, you can set the channel color to black (OFF). The channel indicators on channels for which black is selected will go off.
28
Reference Manual
◆ When selecting the NAME tab
You can directly enter a channel name on the keyboard screen.
Input channels
HA (head amp) settings
You can make HA (Head Amp) related settings (phantom power on/off, gain, phase) for the input channel.
• To adjust only the HA analog gain, use the GAIN knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
Setting the gain
Head amp settings are made in the GAIN/PATCH window.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels.
2.
Press the HA/PHASE field in the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Press the 1ch or 8ch tab in the GAIN/PATCH window.
4.
Make settings for the head amp.
OVERVIEW screen
GAIN/PATCH window (1 ch)
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power.
• The GAIN knob, +48V button, and Ø button are valid only on channels for which the assigned
1 8 connected to an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or SB168-ES).
GAIN/PATCH window (1 ch)
2 3 4 5 6 7
29
Reference Manual
Input channels
1
Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name indicator
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name.
2
HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.
30
Reference Manual
NOTE
• If a slot is patched to the channel, the type of the slot/MY card and the slot meter will be displayed.
• If a rack is patched, the type of rack and type of effect will be displayed.
• +48V button
Switches head amp phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Adjust the gain by using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on.
• HA meter
Displays the level of the HA input signal.
• GC (Gain Compensation) ON/OFF button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, the level of the signal output from the I/O device to the audio network will be stabilized. For example, if the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing an I/O device, or if you are performing digital recording via Dante connections, using this function will maintain the signal output at a constant level from the I/O device to the network even if the analog gain value on the I/O device is changed. If the Gain Compensation function is turned off, the analog gain and digital gain will return to the level that was obtained when you turned on the function.
Therefore, the signal level on the digital network will remain the same.
• Gain compensation meter
Indicates the level of the signal output to the audio network after gain compensation.
3
INPUT PORT button
Indicates the port that is assigned to the channel. Press this button to display the PATCH window, in which you can select a port to patch.
4
Icon / Channel name button
Indicates the channel number, icon, and name. Press this button to access the PATCH/
NAME window, in which you can patch the input port and specify the channel name.
5
Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head amp.
6
D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Adjust the digital gain by using the multifunction knobs.
If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the input channels.
7
Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
8
GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
Input channels
9
AG-DG LINK button
If this button is turned on and GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the digital gain to the analog gain operation.
While you are controlling the analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you to modify the level on your own console without affecting the level of other consoles.
10
AG-DG ALL ON/OFF buttons
You can turn on/off the link between the analog and digital gain for all input channels simultaneously.
You can also view the link status in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
: Link is on.
: Link is off.
GAIN/PATCH window (8ch)
7 9
1
2
3
8
4
5
6
30
Reference Manual
1
Channel select button
Indicates the channel icon, number, and name. When you press this button, the corresponding channel will become a target for operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, and the corresponding [SEL] key will light.
TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
2
PATCH button
Press this button to display the PORT SELECT window to patch the input port to the input channel.
PORT SELECT window
• TAKE FROM PORT button
The HA settings of the port will take priority. Even if you change the patching, the HA settings of the port will remain unchanged.
• TAKE FROM CHANNEL button
The HA settings of the channel will take priority. The HA settings of the port that had been previously patched will be copied to the newly-patched port.
If the channel's HA settings are selected, the following HA settings will be copied from the channel to the port that is patched. If you patch the input channel from an input that does not have these settings (i.e., that does not have a HA), the default values will be specified.
HA setting
HA gain amount
HPF on/off
Phantom power on/off
Gain compensation on/off
-6dB
Off
Off
Off
Default value
NOTE
If you're newly patching a previously-unpatched input channel, the default values will be specified if the HA INFO field's TAKE FROM CHANNEL button is pressed.
Input channels
3
HA section
Appears if the head amp is patched to the input channel.
NOTE
If the slot (for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized) is patched, the type of the
MY card will be displayed.
• +48V button
This button will appear for the input channel to which the head amp has been patched.
Press the button to switch phantom power (+48V) on or off.
• A.GAIN (analog gain) knob
Indicates the analog gain of the head amp. Press this knob to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain
Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on.
• Level meter
Indicates the input signal level .
• GC (Gain Compensation) button
Switches the Gain Compensation function on or off for that channel.
4
Ø (Phase) button
Switches between normal and reverse phase settings of signals input from the head amp.
5
D. GAIN (digital gain) knob
Indicates the digital gain value. Press this knob to control the parameter values using the multifunction knobs. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, digital gain will be used to adjust the level of the signal input to the input channels.
6
Digital gain meter
Indicates the level after the signal passes through the digital gain.
7
GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
8
AG-DG LINK button
If this button is turned on and GC (Gain Compensation) is enabled, you can link the digital gain to the analog gain operation.
While you are controlling the analog gain, the Gain Compensation function enables you to modify the level on your own console without affecting the level of other consoles.
9
AG-DG ALL ON/OFF buttons
You can turn on/off the link between the analog and digital gain for all input channels simultaneously.
31
Reference Manual
3
GAIN/PATCH window
(1-48, 49-72/ST IN (CL5), 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))
This window displays the head amp settings of the corresponding input channels. Here you can also adjust the head amp gain in groups of the selected eight channels by using the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section.
2 1 2 1
1
Parameter select buttons
Switch parameters to view in the window.
• ANALOG GAIN...................... Analog gain
• DIGITAL GAIN ....................... Digital gain
• PATCH ................................... Patch selection
2
GC ALL ON/GC ALL OFF buttons
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
3
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
◆ If you press the ANALOG GAIN parameter select button:
1
2
3
4
1
GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel, and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob. If the Gain Compensation function is turned on, an indicator appears, showing the analog gain position at the time the function was turned on.
Input channels
2
OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
+48V indicator
Indicates the +48V on/off status for each channel.
4
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
NOTE
If the input channel is patched to a slot for which the connection to the head amp is not recognized, the knob
1 3 will not be displayed.
If the input channel is patched to a rack, the knob
1 will be replaced with the port ID of the rack.
If nothing is patched to the input channel, the knob
1 will be replaced with a dotted line
“----”.
1
3
1
GAIN knob
Indicates the digital gain setting for each channel. Press this knob to select a channel, and then control the gain value using the multifunction knob.
2
OVER indicator
Lights when a signal at the input port or from the rack output exceeds the full scale level.
This indicator is available only if an input channel is selected.
3
Ø (Phase) indicator
Indicates the phase setting for each channel.
◆ If you press the PATCH parameter select button:
1
1
PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port to patch to the channel.
32
Reference Manual
Relationship between analog and digital gain while Gain
Compensation is on
If Gain Compensation is on, adjusting the analog gain by a specific amount will cause the I/O device to output to the audio network a signal that is attenuated by the same amount.
Therefore, the signals on the audio network will maintain a constant corrected level in the digital domain.
For example, assume that the analog gain value has been set to +30 dB and Gain
Compensation is now turned on. Under this condition, if you raise the analog gain value to
+45 dB, the level of the signal sent to the audio network will stay at +30 dB (that is, attenuated by -15 dB).
At this time, the gain of each signal input to the CL series console will be adjusted by the digital gain parameter of the CL series console.
If the FOH console and the monitoring console are sharing one I/O device, adjusting the analog gain on the FOH console will not affect the input level on the monitoring console, because the level of the signal on the audio network is maintained at a constant level.
However, please note that if the signal is distorted due to a high level of analog gain, you must first turn the Gain Compensation function off, set the gain to an appropriate input level, and then turn the function back on. If you try to lower the analog gain level while the Gain
Compensation function is on, the signal on the audio network will be amplified by the same amount due to the Gain Compensation function, and the signal will remain distorted.
NOTE
You can perform this operation by assigning the Gain Compensation on/off function to one of the
USER DEFINED keys.
Sending the signal from an input channel to the
STEREO/MONO bus
The STEREO bus and MONO bus are used to send signals to the main speakers. There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. These two modes differ as follows.
◆ ST/MONO mode
This mode sends signals from the input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus independently.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and to the MONO bus can be switched on or off individually.
Input channels
• The panning of a signal sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus L/R is controlled by the TO ST PAN knob. (Signals sent to the MONO bus are not affected by this knob.)
• The left/right volume balance of a signal sent from an ST IN channel to the STEREO bus is controlled by this knob.
If PAN/BALANCE mode is set to PAN, you will be able to adjust the pan position of signals
sent to the STEREO bus L/R individually ( page 34 ).
◆ LCR mode
This mode sends input channel signals to three buses (STEREO (L/R) and MONO (C)) simultaneously.
• Signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus will be switched on or off collectively.
• The CSR (Center Side Ratio) knob specifies the level ratio between signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
• The TO ST PAN knob/BALANCE knob specifies the level of signals sent from an input channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
NOTE
If you want to monitor the signal of the STEREO bus or MONO bus through headphones or similar devices, press the MONITOR button in the Function Access Area to select
“LCR” as the monitor source before you continue with the following procedure.
33
Reference Manual
STEP
1.
Set the phantom power, gain, and phase of the input channel from which you want
to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the input channel from
which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
3.
In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
4. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
5.
In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO
channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
6. In the INPUT section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the input channel
you want to control, and then raise the fader to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 4.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
7. In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the STEREO/MONO button to turn on/off
the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus / MONO bus.
8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of a signal sent from the input channel
to the STEREO bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
7.
In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the LCR button to turn signals sent from the
input channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off collectively.
8. Use the CSR knob to adjust the level difference between the signals sent from that
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus.
9.
Use the TO ST PAN knob to specify the panning of signals sent from the input
channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus.
34
OVERVIEW screen
TO STEREO/MONO window
Input channels
Reference Manual
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO window (8ch)
Here you can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from input channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ST/MONO mode
LCR mode
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2
Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.
3
MODE select button
For a MONO channel, the mode can be switched between ST/MONO and LCR.
For a STEREO channel, the mode can be switched between PAN and BALANCE.
4
ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5
Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
35
Reference Manual
6
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
For MONO channels, this acts as a PAN knob that adjusts the left/right panning of signals sent to the STEREO bus. For STEREO channels, this acts as a PAN knob, and also as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume of the left and right signals sent to the
STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
7
Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8
9
8
LCR button
If the MODE button is set to LCR mode, this button is displayed instead of
4
. This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and
MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9
CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to
select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob. ( page 36 ).
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO window
(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN
(CL1))
Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO/
MONO bus. Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels.
1
2
3
4
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2
Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
If the signal reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the
Σ indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4
ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/ off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
36
Reference Manual
Signal level when LCR mode is selected
If LCR mode is selected, the signal level sent to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus will vary according to the settings of the CSR knob and the TO ST PAN knob.
◆ When the CSR knob is set to 0% (MONO channel)
The TO ST PAN knob operates as a conventional PAN knob, and no signal is sent to the
MONO (C) bus.
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST PAN knob
R
◆ When the CSR knob is set to 0% (STEREO channel)
The TO ST BALANCE knob operates as a conventional BALANCE knob, and no signal is sent to the MONO (C) bus.
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the STEREO (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent from the STEREO (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
◆ When the CSR knob is set to 100%
Signal sent to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (L) bus
Signal sent to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
PAN knob
R
◆ When the CSR knob is set to 100% (ST IN channel)
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (L) channel to the STEREO (L) bus
Input channels
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the MONO (C) bus
Signal sent from the ST IN (R) channel to the STEREO (R) bus
L C
TO ST BALANCE knob
R
37
Reference Manual
Sending a signal from an input channel to a MIX/
MATRIX bus
The MIX buses are used mainly for the purpose of sending signals to foldback speakers on stage, or to external effect processors. The MATRIX buses are used to produce a mix that is independent of the STEREO bus or MIX buses, and is typically sent to a master recorder or to a backstage monitoring system.
You can send a signal from an input channel to a MIX/MATRIX bus in the following three ways.
◆ Using the Selected Channel section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses can be adjusted collectively.
◆ Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, the signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
◆ Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
With this method, you switch the CL series unit to SENDS ON FADER mode, and use the faders on the top panel to adjust the level of signals sent to the MIX/MATRIX buses. When using this method, signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus can be adjusted simultaneously.
Using the Selected Channel section
This section explains how to use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels of signals sent from a specific input channel to all MIX/MATRIX buses.
STEP
1.
Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects processor, or other device to the
corresponding output port.
2.
Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals
to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
3.
Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.
4.
Turn on the ON button in the SEND field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5.
Turn on the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND ON/OFF button for the send-destination MIX
bus.
6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust
the send levels to the MIX/MATRIX buses.
Input channels
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
NOTE
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
MIX buses can be either a FIXED type whose send level is fixed, or a VARI type whose send level is variable. The MATRIX buses are all VARI type. You can switch between FIXED and
VARI types for each two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX buses. To do so, press the SETUP button and then the BUS SETUP button to open the BUS SETUP window.
◆ If the MIX bus is a FIXED type
A gray circle is displayed instead of the TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob, and you cannot adjust the send level.
◆ For a VARI type MIX bus or a MATRIX bus
The TO MIX SEND LEVEL knob is displayed in the same color as the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. In this case, you can use the corresponding knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level.
38
Reference Manual
◆ If the MIX/MATRIX bus is a stereo bus
Input channels
You can link the main parameters of two adjacent odd/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX buses. If the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus is assigned as stereo, the left knob of the two adjacent TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knobs will operate as the TO MIX/MATRIX
PAN knob. (If BALANCE mode is selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, it will operate as a BALANCE knob).
NOTE
• For a MONO channel, the right knob will adjust the common send level to the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob will adjust the panning between the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus.
• For a STEREO channel, if BALANCE mode has been selected on the TO STEREO/MONO window, the right knob adjusts the common send level for the two MIX/MATRIX buses, and the left knob adjusts the volume balance of the left and right signals sent to the two MIX/MATRIX buses. Rotating the left TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob counter-clockwise will increase the amount of signal sent from the L-channel to the odd-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus, and rotating it clockwise will increase the amount sent from the R-channel to the even-numbered MIX/MATRIX bus. If PAN mode has been selected in the TO STEREO/MONO window, the left knob will function as the PAN knob. The right knob function will be the same as in BALANCE mode.
Using the Centralogic section
You can use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send level of signals sent from eight consecutive input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
STEP
1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the
corresponding output port.
2.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you
want to control.
3. In the OVERVIEW scree, press the TO MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the
desired send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus, and then press it again.
4.
Use the SEND ON/OFF button in the MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND screen to turn the
signal on/off and to adjust the send level.
OVERVIEW screen
NOTE
• If you want to monitor a signal being sent to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to assign the corresponding MIX channel to the Centralogic section, and then press the
[CUE] key for that MIX/MATRIX channel.
• In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the MIX/MATRIX that you want to adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it.
4
5
6
7
8
MIX SEND/MATRIX SEND window
3 1 2
4
5
6
7
8
3 1 2
9 9
1
ALL PRE button
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will light.
2
ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.) At this time, the PRE/POST button will turn off.
3
Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
39
Reference Manual
4
Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5
Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button.
6
PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
NOTE
• If the PRE/POST button is on, you can also select PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) or PRE
FADER (immediately before the fader) for each MIX/MATRIX bus. This setting is made in the BUS
• The PRE/POST button is not displayed for FIXED type MIX buses.
7
SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
8
SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send source is stereo, you can use PAN/BALANCE mode setting in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select whether PAN/BALANCE will function as a PAN or BALANCE knob. The knob for the mode selected here will appear.
9
SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
If the send destination is set to FIXED, only a gray circle will appear.
Input channels
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from all input channels to a specific MIX/MATRIX bus.
STEP
1. Assign an output port to each MIX/MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and connect your monitor system, external effects, or other device to the
corresponding output port.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
3. Use the MIX/MTRX ON select buttons in the Function Access Area to switch between
MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the
send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
5.
Use the faders in the Channel Strip section on the top panel to adjust the send level
of signals routed from the input channels to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
Function
access area
NOTE
• Press the SENDS ON FADER button to switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The most recently selected group of MIX/MATRIX buses will be assigned to the Centralogic section. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to indicate the send level of signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
• Alternatively, you can press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a window from which you can select the send-destination MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
Centralogic section. If you select the MIX buses or MATRIX buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button will be changed automatically.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
40
Reference Manual
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again.
SENDS ON FADER mode
1
3
2
1
MIX/MTRX ON FADER switch button
Use this button to switch between MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX for the bus displayed in the Function Access Area.
2
MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons
Select the buses that will be controlled by the faders.
3
Close button
Closes the SENDS ON FADER mode.
Channel name display indication
In SENDS ON FADER mode, ON/OFF is indicated for the channel.
Channel number
display
CHANNEL ON
CHANNEL OFF
Input channels
On the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP pop-up window, the channel number is shown if NAME DISPLAY is set to “NAME ONLY”.
Correcting delay between channels (Input Delay)
This section explains how to correct delay between input channels by using the Input Delay function.
This function is useful when you want to correct the phase variance caused by microphone locations on the stage, to add depth to the sound by using phase variance, or to correct a delay (a time gap) that may exist between video and audio that are sent from a site for broadcast on TV.
STEP
1.
Use the [SEL] keys on the top panel to select the input channel that will send signals
to the MIX/MATRIX bus.
2.
Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.
3.
Press the INPUT DELAY field in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
4.
Press the 8 ch tab in the INPUT DELAY screen.
5.
Use the on-screen buttons and the multifunction knobs to set the delay.
40
Reference Manual
Input channels
2
3
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
INPUT DELAY screen
NOTE
If you are viewing the 8 ch INPUT DELAY screen, you can use the Bank Select keys in the
Centralogic section to switch the channels being controlled in groups of eight.
INPUT DELAY screen (8ch)
You can set the on/off status and the value of the input channel delay.
1 5
4
1
DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
There are five delay scales: meter (meter/sec), feet (feet/sec), sample (number of samples), ms (milliseconds), and frame (frames). If you select frame as the units, you can choose from six frame rates: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, and 24. In this case, fr will appear as the units in the channel name display.
2
Channel select button
The currently-selected input channel is indicated in blue. Press the button to select the channel.
3
Delay setting knob (input channels only)
You can use the multifunction knob to adjust the delay. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown using the currently-selected scale). If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY
SCALE, nothing will appear above the knob.
4
Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
5
Close button
Closes the screen.
41
Reference Manual
INPUT DELAY (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5),
CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))
1
2
3
1
DELAY SCALE button
Press the button to display the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
2
Channel select button
Lights to indicate the currently-selected input channel. Press the button to select the channel.
3
Delay setting knob (input channels only)
Press this knob to adjust the value using the multifunction knob. You can view the current value immediately above the knob (always shown in unit of ms) and below the knob (shown using the currently-selected scale).
NOTE
If ms (millisecond) has been selected for the DELAY SCALE, nothing will appear to the right of the knob.
Input channels
Additional functions for stereo input channels
With V3, you can temporarily set the signals sent to a stereo input channel as mono. You can select from the following three settings.
◆ L-MONO
Only the L channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.
STEREO L
STEREO R
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Lch
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Rch
◆ R-MONO
Only the R channel is temporarily set as a mono signal.
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Lch
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Rch
STEREO L
STEREO R
42
Reference Manual
◆ LR-MONO
The signals sent to both channels are temporarily set as mono signals.
STEREO L
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO R
STEREO IN Lch
ON PAN/BAL
STEREO IN Rch
◆ Setting procedure
If a stereo input channel is selected, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen will appear as shown below.
1
Input channels
1
LR-MONO SELECT field
Select one of the four buttons. The button you select lights up, and the others go off.
Normal STEREO setting
L-MONO
R-MONO
LR-MONO
If a stereo input channel is selected, the OVERVIEW screen will appear as shown below.
2
2
LR-MONO SELECT button
This a toggle button. The setting switches each time the button is pressed.
43
Reference Manual
Surround output for input channels
Setting Surround mode
You can enable surround mixes by changing bus settings to Surround mode.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the SURROUND SETUP button ( page 187
3.
Press the 5.1 SURROUND button.
4.
Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output.
5.
Press the APPLY button.
6.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
1
2
3
Input channels
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen appears as shown below.
3 6 7
4
5
SETUP screen
SURROUND SETUP screen
NOTE
When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 change to MONO x2.
However, when you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and
5/6 remain as MONO x2.
1
L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
2
F/R knob
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
3
Assign buttons for each bus
If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.
44
Reference Manual
4
DIV knob
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
5
LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
6
Surround position
The color of the ball shown here changes depending on whether the surround position is a hard pan (panned fully left or right) or any other setting.
Hard pan: Red
Any other setting: Orange
7
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen.
OVERVIEW screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the OVERVIEW screen appears as shown below.
1
2
3
Adjusting L/R
Input channels
1
2
3
Adjusting F/R
1
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions. Press here to open the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen.
2
L/R
F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for adjusting F/R.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
3
LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
45
Reference Manual
SURROUND PAN 1CH screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN 1CH screen appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
3 8 9 >
1
2
3
Input channels
6
DIV knob
This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels.
When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels. When set to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to
100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
7
LFE knob
This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 6) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
8
DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all parameters to the initial values.
9
COPY button
All parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
10
PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current settings. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-
64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1))
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the SURROUND PAN screen (CH 1-48,
CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1)) appears as shown below. This screen is displayed when you press the pan display area in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen or the OVERVIEW screen.
1
2
4 5 6 7
1
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
2
Surround position
You can set the surround position by touching and dragging the ball in the graph.
3
Assign buttons for each bus
All of these buttons are turned on by default. If there is a bus from which you do not want to output an audio signal, turn that button off.
4
L/R knob
This parameter is used to set the left/right surround position.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 1) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
5
F/R knob
This parameter is used to set the front/rear surround position.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 3) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
Adjusting L/R
46
Reference Manual
1
2
Adjusting F/R
1
Surround graph
This graph shows the surround positions.
2
L/R
F/R switch button
Use this toggle button to switch between the screen for adjusting L/R and the screen for adjusting F/R.
Use the SEND knob (MIX 5) of the Selected Channel section to make adjustments.
Input channels
TO STEREO/MONO screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the TO STEREO/MONO 8CH screen for
MIX 1-8 appears as shown below. MIX 1-6 are for setting downmixes.
1
2
1
L/R buttons
Use these buttons to set the output destination.
2
Coefficient Setting fader
Use this fader to set the downmix coefficient. There is a ∑ clip indicator.
47
Reference Manual
The TO STEREO/MONO OUTPUT screen appears as shown below. Parameters cannot be set for MIX 1 - 6; this screen is only for displaying parameters.
Channel library operations
The
“INPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to store and recall various parameters
(including the head amp settings) for input channels.
To recall a library item, press the corresponding LIBRARY button in the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen. For details on using the library, refer to the
“Using libraries” section in the separate Owner's Manual.
LIBRARY button
48
Input channels
Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
This chapter explains output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO channels,
MONO channels).
Signal flow for output channels
The output channel section takes the signals sent from the input channels to the various buses, processes them with EQ and dynamics, and sends them to output ports or other buses. The following types of output channels are provided.
MIX channels
These channels process signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them to the corresponding output port, MATRIX bus, STEREO bus, or MONO (C) bus.
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
M
O
N
O
MATRIX CUE
L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R
OUTPUT channels
STEREO channel/MONO (C) channel
Each of these channels process the signal sent from the input channels to the STEREO bus or MONO (C) bus, and send it to the corresponding output port or MATRIX bus. If input channels are in LCR mode, the STEREO (L/R) channels and the MONO (C) channel can be used together as a set of three output channels.
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
M
O
N
O
MATRIX CUE
L R (C) 1 2 7 8 L R
MATRIX channel
These channels process the signals sent from input channels, MIX channels, and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses, and send them to the corresponding output ports.
MIX
1 2 2324
ST
M
O
N
O
L R (C)
MATRIX CUE
1 2 7 8 L R
49
• 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)
A parametric EQ with four bands: HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW.
• DYNAMICS 1
This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or compander.
• LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the channel.
• ON (On/off)
Turns the output channel on or off. If this is off, the corresponding channel will be muted.
Reference Manual
• MATRIX ON/OFF (MATRIX send on/off)
This is an on/off switch for signals sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus.
• MATRIX (MATRIX send level)
This adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the MIX channels, STEREO (L/R) channel, or MONO (C) channel to each MATRIX bus 1 - 8. For the position from which the signal will be sent to the MATRIX bus, you can choose either immediately before the fader, or immediately after the [ON] key.
If the send-destination MATRIX bus is set to stereo, you can use the PAN knob to adjust the panning between the two MATRIX buses. If the send-source is a stereo MIX channel or the STEREO channel, use the BALANCE knob to adjust the volume balance of the left and right channels sent to the two MATRIX buses.
• INSERT
You can patch the desired output/input ports to insert an external device such as an effect processor. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.
• METER
Indicates the level of the output channel.
You can switch the position at which the level is detected.
• KEY IN (MIX channels 21-24 only)
You can send the output signals of MIX channels 21 - 24 to Dynamics processors and use them as key-in signals to control the Dynamics.
• RACK IN PATCH
Patches the output signal of an output channel to an input of the rack.
• OUTPUT PATCH
Assigns an output port to an output channel.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the output signal of an output channel as a monitor source.
OUTPUT channels
Specifying the channel name/icon
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the output channels.
2.
On the OVERVIEW screen, press the channel number/channel name field of the
channel for which you want to specify a channel name/icon.
3.
Follow the steps for the input channels ( page 27
OVERVIEW screen
PATCH/NAME screen
50
Reference Manual
OUTPUT channels
Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO/
MONO bus
There are two ways to send signals to the STEREO bus or MONO bus: ST/MONO mode and
LCR mode. You can select the mode individually for each channel. Features of each mode are the same as for input channels.
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the MIX channel from
which you want to send the signal to the STEREO/MONO bus.
2.
In the STEREO/MONO field, press a knob to select the channel you want to adjust in
the OVERVIEW screen, and then press the knob once again.
3. Use the MODE select button in the TO STEREO/MONO window to select either ST/
MONO mode or LCR mode for each channel.
4. In the MASTER section on the top panel, turn on the [ON] key for the STEREO
channel/MONO channel, and then raise the fader to an appropriate level.
5.
In the Centralogic section, press an OUTPUT bank select key so that the MIX
channels you want to control are assigned to the Centralogic section.
6. Turn on the [ON] keys for those channels, and use the fader in the Centralogic
section to raise the master level of the MIX channel to an appropriate position.
The subsequent steps will differ depending on whether ST/MONO mode or LCR mode was selected for the channel in step 3.
Channels for which ST/MONO mode is selected
7.
In the TO STEREO/MONO window, use the ST/MONO button to turn a signal sent
from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus on or off .
8. Use the TO ST PAN knob to set the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel
to the STEREO bus.
Channels for which LCR mode is selected
7. Turn on the LCR button in the TO STEREO/MONO window.
8. Press the CSR knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the level difference between signals sent from that channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to
the MONO (C) bus.
9.
Press the TO ST PAN knob to select it, and use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust
the panning of signals sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and
MONO (C) bus, and the level balance of signals sent to the MONO (C) bus and
51
OVERVIEW screen
TO STEREO/MONO window
NOTE
Refer to
Signal level when LCR mode is selected
” ( page 36 ) for details on how the signal level
sent from an LCR mode MIX channel to each bus will change according to the operation of the
TO ST PAN knob.
TO STEREO/MONO window(8ch)
You can control the on/off and pan/balance settings of the signal sent from MIX channels to the STEREO (L/R) bus and MONO (C) bus, in groups of eight channels.
1
2
3
4
8
9
5
6
7
Reference Manual
STEREO (L/R) bus.
ST/MONO mode
LCR mode
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2
Mode LEDs
The LED of the currently-selected mode will light.
OUTPUT channels
52
Reference Manual
3
MODE select button
Press this button repeatedly to toggle between ST/MONO and LCR.
4
ST/MONO buttons
These buttons are individual on/off switches for signals that are sent from each channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus when the MONO button is set to ST/MONO mode.
5
Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
6
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
If the type of the MIX channel signal is MONO, this knob will function as a PAN knob that adjusts the left and right pan position of the signal sent to the STEREO bus. If the type of MIX channel signal is STEREO, this knob will function as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume level balance of left and right signals sent to the STEREO bus. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
7
Tabs
Enable you to switch between windows.
8
LCR button
This button is an overall on/off button for signals sent from a channel to the STEREO bus and MONO bus. If this button is off, no signals will be sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus or MONO bus.
9
CSR knob
Adjusts the relative level of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO (L/R) bus and to the MONO (C) bus, in the range of 0 - 100%. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
OUTPUT channels
TO STEREO/MONO screen
(CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3),
ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)
Adjusts the status of a signal sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO/MONO bus. Here you can also adjust the pan or balance in groups of the selected eight channels.
1
2
3
4
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel. You can select multiple channels simultaneously.
2
Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3
TO ST PAN/TO ST BALANCE knob
Adjusts the panning or balance.
To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and then operate the corresponding multifunction knob.
If the signal level reaches the overload point at any meter detection point in that channel, the Σ clipping indicator to the right of the knob will light.
4
ST/MONO indicator
If a channel is set to ST/MONO mode, these indicators will individually indicate the on/ off status of signals sent from the channel to the STEREO bus/MONO bus.
If that channel is set to LCR mode, the LCR indicator will be displayed in this location.
The LCR indicator indicates the on/off status of all signals sent from that channel to the
STEREO bus/MONO bus.
53
Reference Manual
Sending signals from MIX channels and STEREO/
MONO channels to MATRIX buses
You can send a signal from a MIX or STEREO/MONO channel to MATRIX buses 1 - 8 in the following two ways.
Using the Selected Channel section
With this method, you use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from a specific MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
Using the Centralogic section
With this method, you use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the send levels to the MATRIX buses. This method allows you to simultaneously control signals sent from up to eight MIX, STEREO (L/R), or MONO (C) channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
Using the Selected Channel section
Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust the send level of signals sent from the desired MIX, STEREO (L/R) or MONO (C) channel to all MATRIX buses.
STEP
1.
Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and
connect an external device.
2. Using the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section, assign the desired MIX
channels or the STEREO/MONO channels to the Centralogic section.
3.
Use the [SEL] keys of the Centralogic section to select the input channel that will
send signals to the MATRIX buses.
4.
Press one of the knobs in the Selected Channel section.
5.
In the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, turn on the TO MATRIX SEND ON/OFF
button for the send-destination MATRIX bus.
6. Use the MIX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to adjust
the send levels to the MATRIX buses.
OUTPUT channels
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW
screen
NOTE
• You can also use the [SEL] key in the MASTER section to directly select the STEREO/MONO channels.
• If you want to monitor the signal being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel, and then press the appropriate [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
Using the Centralogic section
This method lets you use the multifunction knobs (in the Centralogic section) to simultaneously adjust the send levels from the eight channels selected in the Centralogic section to the desired MATRIX bus.
STEP
1. Assign an output port to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and
connect an external device to that output port.
2. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you
want to control.
3. In the OVERVIEW screen, press the TO MATRIX SEND LEVEL knob to select the
desired send-destination MATRIX bus, and then press it again.
4. Set the SEND ON/OFF button to ON, and use the SEND LEVEL knob to adjust the
send level.
54
Reference Manual
8
9
4
5
6
7
OVERVIEW screen
NOTE
• If you want to monitor signals being sent to a specific MATRIX bus, use the Bank Select keys to access the corresponding MATRIX channel in the Centralogic section, and then press the [CUE] key for that MATRIX channel.
• If you again press the currently-selected MATRIX bus select button, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor a signal that is being sent to the selected MATRIX bus.
• In the OVERVIEW screen, you can also adjust the send level of the signal sent to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. To do so, press the SEND LEVEL knob for the TO MIX/MATRIX that you want to adjust, and then use the multifunction knob in the Centralogic section to adjust it.
MATRIX SEND screen
3 1 2
Sets the send point to PRE. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.)
55
OUTPUT channels
2
ALL POST button
Sets the send point to POST. (The send point is the point at which signals are sent from all send-source channels - including the input and output channels - to the selected send destination.)
3
Send destination indicator
Indicates the currently-selected send destination.
4
Send destination select buttons
Select MIX/MATRIX buses as the send destination.
5
Channel select button
Selects the send-source channel that you wish to control. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button, and the channel name appears below the button.
6
PRE/POST button
Switches the send point of each send-source channel between PRE and POST. If the button is lit, the send point is set to PRE.
7
SEND ON/OFF button
Switches the send of each send-source channel on or off.
8
SEND PAN/BALANCE knob
Sets the panning or balance of signals sent to the stereo send destination. If the send destination is monaural or set to FIXED, this knob will not appear.
If the send source is monaural, this knob functions as a PAN knob.
If the send destination is stereo, this is fixed to BALANCE.
9
SEND LEVEL knob
Indicates the level of signals sent to the selected send destination. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
Reference Manual
Using the faders (SENDS ON FADER mode)
You can use the faders on the top panel to adjust signals that are sent from the MIX and
STEREO/MONO channels to a specific MATRIX bus.
STEP
1. Make sure that an output port is assigned to the MATRIX bus to which you want to send signals, and that your monitor system etc. is connected to the corresponding output
port.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SENDS ON FADER button.
The CL series unit will switch to SENDS ON FADER mode. The faders in the Channel Strip section and Master section will move to the send levels of the signals that are routed from each channel to the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus. The [ON] keys will also change to the SEND ON status.
In SENDS ON FADER mode, the Function Access Area in the display will show the buttons that enable you to switch between MIX 1-16 ON FADER mode and MIX 17-24/MATRIX
ON FADER mode, and the buttons that enable you to select the destination MIX/MATRIX buses.
3. Use the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX select buttons to switch between MIX 1-16 and
MIX 17-24/MATRIX
.
Now you can use the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons to specify the destination MIX/
MATRIX buses.
4. Use the MIX/MATRIX bus selection buttons in the Function Access Area to select the
send-destination MATRIX bus.
5. Use the faders in the top panel Centralogic section to adjust the send level from the MIX
and STEREO/MONO channels to the selected MATRIX bus.
6.
Repeat steps 4 - 5 to adjust the send level for other MATRIX buses in the same way.
7. When you're finished adjusting the MATRIX send levels, press the X symbol in the
Function Access Area.
The Function Access Area display will return to its prior state, and the CL console will exit
SENDS ON FADER mode and return to normal mode.
OUTPUT channels
NOTE
• Alternatively, press a SEND LEVEL knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to display a popup window, from which you can select a MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can also select a MIX/MATRIX bus by using the Bank Select keys and the [SEL] keys in the
Centralogic section. If you switch buses by pressing the [SEL] keys, the setting of the MIX 1-16 and MIX 17-24/MATRIX ON FADER switch buttons will also change automatically.
• If you press the currently-selected MIX/MATRIX bus select button again, cue monitoring will be turned on for the related MIX/MATRIX channel. This method is convenient if you want to monitor the signal that is being sent to the selected MIX/MATRIX bus.
• You can assign the SENDS ON FADER function to a USER DEFINED key. This lets you quickly switch to SENDS ON FADER mode for a specific MIX/MATRIX bus, and quickly switch back again.
Function
Access Area
56
Reference Manual
Correcting delay between channels (Output Delay)
This Output Delay function is useful when you want to correct the timing of output signals sent to speakers that are located at a distance from each other.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. Press the OUTPUT PORT button in the SYSTEM SETUP field located in the center of the
SETUP screen.
3. Specifies the delay time, and turns on the DELAY button.
OUTPUT PORT screen
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SETUP screen OUTPUT PORT screen
2
OUTPUT channels
0
1
Slot number/Card type
If an output channel of slot 1 - 3 is selected for operations, this shows the slot number and the type of I/O card installed in that slot.
2
DELAY SCALE button
Press this button to open the DELAY SCALE window, in which you can select the unit for the delay time.
3
Output Port
This is the type and number of the output port to which the channel is assigned.
4
Channel select button
Enables you to select the channel that you want to assign to the output port. The name of the currently-selected channel is displayed.
5
Delay time knob
Sets the delay time of the output port. Press this knob to select it, and then use multifunction knobs 1 - 8 to adjust the settings. The millisecond delay time value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in the units selected in the DELAY
SCALE window is indicated below the knob.
NOTE
If the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob.
57
Reference Manual
6
DELAY button
Switches the output port delay on or off.
7
Ø (Phase) button
Switches the phase of the signal assigned to the output port between normal phase
(black) and reverse phase (yellow).
8
GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain of the output port. To adjust this value, press the knob in the screen to select it, and then operate multifunction knobs 1 - 8. Rotate the knob to set the value in 1.0 dB steps. Rotate the knob while pressing and holding it down to set the value in 0.1 dB steps. The current value appears immediately below the knob.
9
Level meter
Indicates the level of the signal assigned to the output port.
10
Tabs
Switch the output ports controlled in groups of up to eight ports. Tabs are categorized into three groups: DANTE, SLOT, and PATCH VIEW. To display tabs in the desired group, press the group name button located at the right or left end of the bottom row.
Channel library operations
The “OUTPUT CHANNEL LIBRARY” enables you to store and recall various parameters for output channels.
To recall a library item, select an output channel and press the LIBRARY button on the SELECTED
CHANNEL VIEW screen.
For details on using the library, refer to the “Using the library” section in the separate Owner's Manual.
LIBRARY button
58
OUTPUT channels
Reference Manual
EQ and Dynamics
Each input channel and output channel on a CL series console provides a four-band EQ and dynamics.
EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An attenuator is provided immediately before the EQ, allowing you to attenuate the level of the input signal so that the
GAIN setting for EQ will not cause the signal to clip. Input channels also provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ.
Input channels provide two dynamics processors: Dynamics 1 can be used as a gate, ducking device, compressor, or expander, while Dynamics 2 can be used as a compressor, hard compander, soft compander, or de-esser. Output channels provide one dynamics processor, which can be used as a compressor, expander, hard compander, or soft compander.
Using EQ
This section explains the four-band EQ that is provided on input channels and output channels.
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channels that you
want to control.
2.
Press the EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen.
3. Press the 1ch tab in the HPF/EQ window.
4.
Press the EQ ON button, and adjust the EQ parameters.
OVERVIEW screen
HPF/EQ window
5
EQ and Dynamics
NOTE
• The EQ field in the OVERVIEW screen shows the response of the EQ. In this OVERVIEW screen, you can edit the parameter settings by using the EQ knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• EQ settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ and high-pass filter ( page 9 ).
• Even when the HPF/EQ window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the EQ.
HPF/EQ window (1ch)
This lets you edit all EQ parameters of the currently-selected channel. This is convenient if you want to make detailed EQ settings for a specific channel.
7 8 9 < A B C D
1
2
3
F
E
G
H
4
I
K
J
L
M
N
O
6
1
Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number and name of the currently-selected channel.
2
LOW SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the LOW band.
3
HPF ON/OFF button (Output channels only)
Turn on this button to switch the LOW band to a high pass filter.
NOTE
Output channels do not feature a high-pass filter that is independent of the EQ. However, you can turn on the high-pass filter button on the window to use the LOW band EQ as a high-pass filter.
59
Reference Manual
4
EQ type select button
Switches between TYPE I (an algorithm used in previous Yamaha digital mixers) and
TYPE II (an algorithm that reduces interference between bands).
5
ATT knob
Indicates the attenuation value before the signal enters the EQ. You can use the [TOUCH
AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
6
Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
7
EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter.
8
RTA button
If you turn this button ON, a graph indicating the frequency analysis for the input signal after EQ processing is overlaid on the bottom of the EQ frequency graph.
9
HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays RTA.
10
LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the EQ Library window.
A
DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all EQ/filter parameters to the initial values.
B
COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
C
PASTE button
Press this button to paste the setting in buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
D
COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use the
?
-
D buttons, refer to
“Using the tool buttons” in the separate
Owner's Manual.
E
EQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all EQ band to 0 dB.
F
HIGH SHELVING ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the shelving-type filter for the HIGH band.
G
LPF ON/OFF button
Turn on this button to select the low pass filter for the HIGH band.
EQ and Dynamics
H
EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off.
Indicates the peak level of signals before and after the EQ. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
J
EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the LOW, LOW MID, HIGH MID, and HIGH bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
NOTE
• If the shelving type has been selected for the LOW band, or if HPF is selected for an output channel, the LOW band Q parameter will not appear.
• If shelving type has been selected for the HIGH band, or if LPF is selected, the HIGH band Q parameter will not appear.
K
HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
NOTE
Input channels provide a high-pass filter that is independent of the four-band EQ. Turn on the
HPF ON/OFF button, and use the HPF FREQUENCY knob to adjust the cutoff frequency.
L
HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
M
HPF type select button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF attenuation per octave between -12 dB/oct and -6 dB/oct.
N
HA HPF ON indicator
Indicates the HPF on/off status of the external head amp.
O
FREQUENCY
Indicates the HPF cutoff frequency of the external head amp.
60
Reference Manual
HPF/EQ window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel EQ settings in groups of 8 channels simultaneously. Use the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ settings.
1
2
3
4
5
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2
EQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the EQ and filter. The currently-selected EQ type appears below the graph.
3
EQ ON/OFF button
Switches the EQ on or off. The Σ clipping indicator (located to the right above the button) lights if the input signal is clipping.
4
HPF FREQUENCY knob (input channels only)
Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF. Press this button to make adjustments using the multifunction knob.
5
HPF ON/OFF button (input channels only)
Switches the HPF on or off.
EQ and Dynamics
HPF/EQ window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5),
CH 49-64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)
This window displays the corresponding input channels (or output channels) simultaneously.
This window is only for display, and does not allow the parameters to be edited. It is useful when you need to quickly check multiple EQ settings, or when you want to copy and paste EQ settings between distant channels.
1
2
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The current channel icon, number, and color appear on the button.
2
EQ graph
This field graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ and filters.
60
Reference Manual
Using dynamics
Input channels feature two dynamics processors; output channels feature one dynamics processor.
STEP
1.
Use the Bank Select keys to select the channel for which you want to control the
dynamics.
2.
Press the DYNAMICS 1/2 field in the OVERVIEW screen.
3.
Press the 1 ch tab in the DYNAMICS1/2 window.
4.
Press the DYNAMICS ON button, and adjust the dynamics parameters.
Dynamics 1 field
Dynamics 2 field
OVERVIEW screen
DYNAMICS 1/2 window
NOTE
• The DYNAMICS 1/2 field on the OVERVIEW screen displays the dynamics on/off status and the amount of gain reduction.
• Dynamics settings can be saved and recalled at any time using the dedicated library. You can also take advantage of a wide variety of presets suitable for various instruments or situations.
• You can also access the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, and use the knobs in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the dynamics settings ( page 10 ).
• Even when the DYNAMICS 1/2 window is displayed, you can use the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section to control the dynamics.
EQ and Dynamics
DYNAMICS 1/2 window (1ch)
All dynamics parameters can be viewed and edited by channel. This is convenient when you want to make detailed dynamics settings for a specific channel.
6
8 1 2 3 4 5
0
7
C
9
D
1
LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the DYNAMICS Library window.
B
A
2
DEFAULT button
Press this button to reset all dynamics parameters to the initial values.
3
COPY button
All dynamics parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
4
PASTE button
Press this button to apply the settings in buffer memory to the current dynamics. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
5
COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current dynamics settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
NOTE
For details on how to use buttons (1)-(5), refer to
“Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner's
Manual.
6
Channel icon/Channel number/Channel name
This area indicates the icon, number, and name of the currently-selected channel.
61
Reference Manual
7
Dynamics type buttons
Enables you to select the dynamics type. You can choose from the following dynamics types.
• Dynamics 1 for an input channel
GATE, DUCKING, COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER
• Dynamics 2 for an input channel
COMPRESSOR, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S, DE-ESSER
• Dynamics 1 for an output channel
COMPRESSOR, EXPANDER, COMPANDER-H, COMPANDER-S
8
Dynamics graph
Displays the input/output response of the dynamics processors.
9
Dynamics parameter setting knobs
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs. The type of parameters will vary depending on the currently- selected dynamics type.
• GATE or DUCKING:
• COMPRESSOR or EXPANDER:
• COMPANDER-H or COMPANDER-S:
• DE-ESSER:
10
Dynamics IN/OUT level meters, GR meter
These meters indicate the peak level of the signals before and after the dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. For a stereo channel, these meters indicate the level of both the L and R channels.
62
EQ and Dynamics
A
KEY IN SOURCE select button
Press this button to display the KEY IN SOURCE window, in which you can select a key- in signal that will trigger the dynamics.
• SELF PRE EQ ......... The pre-EQ signal of the same channel
• SELF POST EQ ....... The post-EQ signal of the same channel
• MIX OUT 21-24 ........ Output signals of MIX channels 21-24
• CH 1-72 POST EQ, ST IN 1L-8R POST EQ, MIX 1-24 POST EQ,
MTRX 1-8 POST EQ, ST L/R, MONO POST EQ
........ The post-EQ signal of the corresponding channel
*1
*1 Choose from a group of eight channels.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
B
KEY IN FILTER parameter area (Displayed only for Gate or Ducking)
Enables you to make various settings for a filter that lets the key-in signal pass.
• Filter select buttons ............. Select the type of filter from HPF, BPF, or LPF. To disable the filter, press the button that is turned on.
• Q knob................................... Indicates the filter Q. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• FREQUENCY knob ............... Indicates the filter cutoff frequency. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
C
KEY IN CUE button
Enables you to cue-monitor the signal that has been selected as the KEY IN SOURCE signal. Cue will be canceled if you have selected a dynamics type that does not feature this button, or if you move to a different screen.
D
Tabs
Use these tabs to select a channel that you want to view on the screen.
Reference Manual
DYNAMICS1/2 window (8ch)
This window displays the input channel or output channel dynamics settings in groups of 8 channels simultaneously. This window is convenient if you want to adjust the threshold or certain other parameters while watching the adjacent channels to the left and the right.
1
2
3
4
5
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon and number appear on the button, and the channel name appears immediately below the button.
2
DYNAMICS OUTPUT meters, GR meter
Indicate the output levels of signals after dynamics processing, and the amount of gain reduction. If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, a three-step indicator appears, indicating the open/close status of the gate.
Type = Any type other than GATE
Type = GATE
If GATE is selected as the dynamics type, the indicator status means the following:
Gate status
Red
On
Yellow
On
Green
On
Off (dark)
Off On/Off status
Open/Close
status
Amount of gain
reduction
Close Open
30 dB or more less than 30 dB
Open
0 dB
-
-
EQ and Dynamics
3
Dynamics graph
Indicates the dynamics parameter values. The currently-selected dynamics type appears below the graph. Press the graph to access the DYNAMICS 1ch window for that channel.
4
THRESHOLD knob
Indicates the threshold value for the dynamics. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.
5
DYNAMICS ON/OFF button
Switches dynamics on or off.
63
Reference Manual
DYNAMICS 1/2 window (CH 1-48, CH 49-72/ST IN (CL5), CH 49-
64/ST IN (CL3), ST IN (CL1), OUTPUT)
This window enables you to make settings of the global dynamics parameters for the corresponding channel.
1
2
1
Channel select button
Selects the channel that you want to control. The current channel icon, number, threshold, and color appear on the button.
2
Dynamics parameter area
This area displays the dynamics type and various meters. Press the area to access the
DYNAMICS 1ch window of that channel.
If DUCKING, EXPANDER, COMPANDER (-H/-S), or DE-ESSER has been selected as the dynamics type, the type appears near the top of this area.
The lower part of this area displays meters that indicate the levels of signals after dynamics processing, the GR meter, and the threshold (a numeric value). If the dynamics processor is any type other than GATE, the threshold setting is indicated as a vertical line.
EQ and Dynamics
Using the EQ/Dynamics libraries
You can use dedicated libraries to store and recall EQ and dynamics settings. For details on using the EQ and dynamics libraries, refer to the
“Using the library” section in the separate
Owner's Manual.
EQ library
There is an
“INPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store/recall EQ settings for input channels, and an
“OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY” that lets you store and recall EQ settings for output channels.
To recall settings from a library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the /HPF/EQ window.
LIBRARY button
NOTE
You can recall 199 different settings from both the input EQ library and output EQ library. Forty
(40) of the input library items are read-only presets, and three (3) of the output library items are read-only presets.
Dynamics library
Use the
“Dynamics Library” to store and recall dynamics settings. All of the dynamics processors on CL series units use this dynamics library. (However, the available types will differ between an input channel's Dynamics 1 and Dynamics 2, and an output channel's
Dynamics 1. You can't recall a type that cannot be used.
To recall an item from the dynamics library, press the LIBRARY tool button in the DYNAMICS
1/2 window.
NOTE
You can recall 199 different settings from the library. Forty-one (41) of these are read-only presets.
64
Reference Manual
Channel Job
This chapter explains the DCA Group and Mute Group functions that enable you to control the level or muting of multiple channels together, the Channel Link function that links the parameters of multiple channels, and the operations that enable you to copy or move parameters between channels.
DCA group
CL series consoles feature sixteen DCA groups that enable you to control the level of multiple channels simultaneously.
DCA groups enable you to assign input and output channels to sixteen groups, so that the
Centralogic section faders 1 - 8 can be used to control the level of all channels in each group.
A single DCA fader will control the level of all input channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics, for example, can be grouped.
Assigning channels to a DCA group
There are two ways to assign a channel to a DCA group.
• You can select a specific DCA group and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the DCA group to which it should be assigned.
NOTE
• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.
• With CL V3.0 and later, you can now assign the Stereo/Mono bus master, Mix bus master, and
Matrix bus master channels to a DCA group on channels other than input channels. DCA groups were formerly used exclusively for input channels. However, with this new feature, you can use the DCA groups for output master channels, which enables for more flexible simultaneous controls.
◆ Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific DCA group
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the DCA GROUP button.
3. Use the DCA GROUP select button to select the DCA group to which you want to
assign channels.
4.
Use the [SEL] keys in the INPUT section or ST IN section to select the channels that
you want to assign to the group (multiple selections are allowed).
Channel Job
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
NOTE
• You can also access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window by pressing the DCA/
MUTE GROUP field in the OVERVIEW screen.
• You can assign a single channel to more than one DCA group. In this case, the value will be the sum of the levels of all assigned DCA group faders.
• The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the DCA group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit yellow in the upper and middle row of this field indicate the DCA groups to which that channel belongs.
65
Reference Manual
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Here you can specify the channels that will be assigned to each DCA group.
5
6
1
2
3
4
7
9 8
1
DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
2
DCA group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the DCA group. The channel will be assigned to the DCA group, and the on- screen fader for that channel will turn yellow. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3
NAME EDIT button
Edits the group name of the currently-selected DCA group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or edit the text.
The DCA group name is displayed on the DCA group select button.
The registered group name is displayed on the PATCH/NAME tab in the RECALL SAFE
MODE popup window.
4
DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to assign.
66
Channel Job
5
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected DCA group.
6
DCA ROLL-OUT button
Enter the DCA ROLL OUT mode.
This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA fader in the Centralogic section, you can access (roll-out) and control the faders
(assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the left of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the
Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader bank on the left.
7
PRE&POST button
Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as PRE and POST.
The PRE&POST indicator is shown below a DCA group that has this setting.
8
POST ONLY button
Specifies the object of muting in the DCA group as POST only.
NOTE
• You can set the object of muting in the DCA group individually for each DCA group.
• If you mute any of the DCA groups on a channel assigned to multiple DCA groups, the signal route for that channel (including sends to the corresponding bus) will be muted.
9
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Reference Manual
◆ Selecting the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong
STEP
1.
Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to
operate.
2.
Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
3. Use the DCA group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select the DCA group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned (multiple
selections are allowed).
Channel Job
◆ Using DCA groups
Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group.
• Level adjustment: Faders .... The level of the channels assigned to that DCA group can be adjusted while preserving the level differences of each channel. The input faders will not operate at this time.
• On/Mute switch: [ON] key.... When you press an [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make the key indicator go dark, the channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted (the same state as when the faders are lowered to the -
∞ dB position).
• Cue Monitor: [CUE] key ....... When you press the Centralogic section [CUE] key to make it light, the [CUE] keys of the channels assigned to that DCA group will blink, and cue monitoring will be enabled. For more information about cue, refer to
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
DCA/MUTE
field
Controlling DCA groups
Use the faders of the Centralogic section to control DCA groups.
STEP
1.
Assign input and output channels to DCA groups.
2. Using the faders in the Channel Strip section or Master section on the top panel, adjust the relative balance between the input and output channels that belong to
the DCA group you want to use.
3. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the [DCA 1-8] key or the
[DCA 9-16] key.
4.
Use the Centralogic section to operate the DCA group.
NOTE
• You can also press the [DCA], [DCA 1-8], or [DCA 9-16] key in the Channel Strip section to select the DCA group that you want to control.
• In the DCA member display on the OVERVIEW screen, you can use the multifunction knob in the
Centralogic section to scroll through channels when there are 15 or more channels assigned.
67
Reference Manual
DCA Roll-out function
You can now access all of the channels assigned to a DCA group simultaneously through the fader banks.
This function enables flexible fader operations. For example, while controlling the DCA fader in the Centralogic section, you can use the Roll-out function to access (roll-out) and control the faders (assigned to the corresponding DCA group) through the fader bank located to the left of the Centralogic section. Alternatively, you can control the faders rolled out to the
Centralogic section via DCA Roll-out, while operating the DCA faders through the fader bank on the left.
◆ DCA ROLL-OUT operation
STEP
1. Use a bank select key to select the DCA group that you want to control, then press the
[SEL] key for that DCA group.
DCA Roll-out mode is engaged, and the faders that have been assigned to the DCA group will be rolled out.
2. If you press the [SEL] key for another DCA group, faders that have been assigned to that
DCA group will be rolled out.
3.
Press the same [SEL] key again to exit DCA Roll-out mode.
NOTE
• You cannot turn Roll-out mode on while operating the DCA group (for example, while assigning channels or editing the group name).
• Even if Roll-out mode is turned on while you are controlling a GEQ via faders, you cannot edit the DCA group using the faders.
• If the number of channels assigned to a DCA group exceeds the number of faders in the block
(that is a roll-out target),you will be unable to control extra channels.
• All bank select keys in the block (to which the displayed channels belong) will light up.
• If the faders are rolled out to the Centralogic section (block B), the IN/OUT select keys in the
Centralogic section will be disabled.
• Bank select keys in blocks in which no faders are rolled out will operate normally.
Channel Job
◆ Setting the DCA Roll-out function
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2. Press the DCA GROUP button to access the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup
window.
3.
Press the DCA ROLL-OUT button.
4.
Select a DCA group.
If you press a [SEL] key for a DCA group other than the selected one, the group selection will change.
5.
Select a block (in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders) and the alignment.
6.
Press the CLOSE button to close the popup window.
NOTE
You cannot turn DCA Roll-out mode on if one of the following popup windows is open. If DCA
Roll-out mode is already turned on, opening one of the windows will cause DCA Roll-out mode to quit.
- DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE popup window
- RECALL SAFE MODE popup window
Function
Access Area
ASSIGN MODE popup window
68
Reference Manual
DCA ROLL-OUT screen
2
1
3
1
ROLL-OUT BLOCK
Enables you to select a block in which the DCA group is rolled out to the faders.
CL5 : Blocks A, B, C
CL3/CL1 : Blocks A, B
2
ALIGN button
Enables you to choose whether the DCA group is rolled out to the faders from the left or right.
3
DCA group select button
Selects the DCA group that you want to control.
Channel Job
Using the temporary unmute function
If one of the DCA group buttons on a channel is OFF (muted), press the [ON] key for that channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in Preview mode, any operation during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.
Example 1: CH 1 is OFF. Assigned to DCA GROUP 1.
Operation Example 1
1.
Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off.
The indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 remains off. DCA 1 is muted.
2.
Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
3.
Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp comes on.
DCA 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key for CH 1 comes on.
Example 2: CH 1 is ON. Assigned to MUTE GROUP 1 and DCA GROUP 1.
Operation Example 2
1.
Set MUTE MASTER 1 to ON (MUTE).
CH 1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.
2.
Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
3.
Press the ON key for DCA 1. The indicator lamp goes off.
CH 1 is muted, and the ON key flashes.
4.
Press the ON key for CH 1.
CH 1 is temporarily unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
5.
Press the ON key for CH 1 again.
CH 1 is muted again, and the ON key flashes.
6.
Set DCA1 to ON, and MUTE MASTER 1 to OFF.
CH 1 is unmuted, and the indicator lamp for the ON key comes on.
69
Reference Manual
Mute group
CL series consoles feature eight mute groups.
Mute groups enable you to use USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16] to mute or unmute multiple channels in a single operation. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously.
Mute groups 1 - 8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channels can exist in the same group.
Assigning channels to mute groups
As with the DCA group, there are the following two ways to assign channels to mute groups.
• You can select a specific mute group first and then specify the channels to be assigned to the group, or
• You can select a specific channel and then specify the mute group to which it should be assigned.
◆ Selecting the channels that will belong to a specific mute group
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Use the mute group master buttons in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE
window to select the mute group to which you want to assign channels.
4.
Press the [SEL] key for the input channels/output channels that you want to operate
(multiple selections are allowed).
Channel Job
NOTE
•
You may assign a single channel to more than one mute group.
•
The DCA/MUTE GROUP field of the OVERVIEW screen indicates the mute group(s) to which each channel is assigned. Numbers that are lit red in the lower line of this field indicate the mute groups to which that channel belongs.
•
If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -
∞ dB, these numbers will light orange.
For a channel for which the Mute Safe function ( page 72 ) has been turned on, an
“S” indicator will light up green at the right end of the bottom row.
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window
Here you can select the channels that will be assigned to each mute group.
7
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
1
2
3
4
8
5
6
9
1
DCA GROUP ASSIGN/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN buttons
Toggle between the DCA GROUP ASSIGN window and MUTE GROUP ASSIGN window.
70
Reference Manual
2
Mute group assign field
This area displays the channels assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
While this window is displayed, press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to assign to the mute group. The channel will be assigned to the mute group, and the on- screen fader for that channel will turn red. Press the same [SEL] key once again if you want to remove the channel from the group.
If the MUTE SAFE button is on, this field displays the channels that enabled for mute safe
(that is, excluded from the mute groups). The operation procedure to apply or cancel mute safe to the channels is the same as that for assigning or removing channels to or from a mute group. The on-screen faders of the assigned channels will turn green.
3
NAME EDIT
Edits the group name of the currently-selected mute group.
When you press this button the keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter or edit the text.
The mute group name is displayed on the mute group select button.
4
Mute group select button
Selects the mute group that you want to assign.
5
MUTE GROUP MASTER button
Switches the mute for the corresponding mute group on or off.
6
DIMMER LEVEL knob
Sets the dimmer level for the corresponding mute group when the dimmer function is enabled.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If the dimmer level is set to any level other than -∞ dB, and the corresponding MUTE GROUP
MASTER button is turned on, this button will light orange.
7
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all channels that are assigned to the currently-selected mute group.
8
MUTE SAFE button
Use this button when you want to temporarily exclude a specific channel from all mute groups. The mute group assign field displays the channels that are temporarily excluded
from the mute groups. For more information on mute safe, refer to “ Using the Mute
9
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Channel Job
◆ Selecting the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong
STEP
1.
Press the [SEL] key of the input channels and output channels that you want to
operate.
2.
Press one of the knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
3. Use the mute group select buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to select
the mute group(s) to which the currently-selected channel will be assigned.
(Multiple selections are allowed.)
SELECTED CHANNEL
VIEW screen
DCA/MUTE
field
71
Reference Manual
Using mute groups
To control mute groups, you can use the MUTE GROUP MASTER buttons in the MUTE
GROUP ASSIGN window. In addition, it may prove convenient if you assign the Mute On/Off function for a mute group 1 - 8 to a USER DEFINED key.
◆ Assigning mute groups to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4.
Press the button for the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Mute
On/Off function.
5. Choose “MUTE MASTER” in the FUNCTION column, and choose“MUTE GROUP x”
(where “x” is the mute group number) in the PARAMETER 1 column.
6. When you press the OK button, the Mute On/Off function will be assigned to the USER
DEFINED key that you selected in step 4.
SETUP screen
USER SETUP window
Channel Job
NOTE
The USER SETUP window enables you to limit available functionality by user, and also to make system-wide settings. This window includes several pages, which you can switch between using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.
◆ Turning mute groups on/off with USER DEFINED keys
To mute a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Mute
On/Off function.
The LED of the USER DEFINED key will light, and all channels that belong to the selected mute group will be muted. At this time, the [ON] key of the muted channels will blink. You can turn on multiple USER DEFINED keys to mute multiple mute groups.
To defeat muting for a mute group, press the USER DEFINED key that you lit.
NOTE
Even if a channel is assigned to a mute group, it will not be affected by operations of the USER
DEFINED key if the [ON] key for that channel is already turned off to begin with.
◆ Temporarily unmuting a channel
You can unmute a muted channel in the mute group temporarily.
Using the Mute Safe function
Specific channels that belong to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute Safe). Channels that are set to Mute Safe will not be affected when you mute a mute group to which that channel belongs.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MUTE GROUP button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press the MUTE SAFE button in the DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN MODE window.
4.
Press a [SEL] key for the channel(s) you want to exclude from mute groups (multiple
selections are allowed).
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
72
Reference Manual
Channel Job
CH JOB
menu
DCA/MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
MODE window
NOTE
The [SEL] key of the channel set for Mute Safe will light, and the on-screen fader for that channel will be highlighted in green. You can cancel the Mute Safe status by pressing a lit [SEL] key once again to make it go dark.
Using the temporary unmute function
If one of the mute group master buttons on a channel is ON, press the [ON] key for that channel to temporarily unmute the channel. However, in PREVIEW mode, any operation during mute with pressing of the [ON] key is disabled.
Using the Recall Safe function
“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels (DCA groups) from
Recall operations. Unlike the Focus Recall function ( page 94 ), which you can apply to
individual scenes, the Recall Safe settings are globally applied to all scenes.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the RECALL SAFE button in the CH JOB menu.
3. Press the [SEL] key for the channel or DCA group that will be affected by Recall Safe
operations.
4.
Use the Safe Parameter select button in the RECALL SAFE MODE window to select
the target for Recall Safe operations.
5.
To enable Recall Safe for the selected channel, turn the SAFE button on. (If you
selected a DCA group, turn on either the LEVEL/ON button or the ALL button.)
6. To enable Recall Safe for global parameters, turn on the buttons of the GLOBAL
RECALL SAFE field.
7. When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to close the
window. Then perform a Recall operation.
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
NOTE
• Simply selecting a parameter in step 4 does not enable Recall Safe. To turn Recall Safe on or off, you must also perform the operation described in step 5.
• Channel Link ( page 76 ) and bus settings are not subject to Recall Safe; they will always be
reproduced in the recalled scene.
This means that if Recall Safe is enabled for one of several channels included in a link group or one of two channels set to stereo, the parameter settings of that channel may differ from those of the other channel(s). In such cases, the applicable parameter will be automatically re-linked the next time it is operated.
You can globally apply Recall Safe to channel links by using the global parameter.
• You can use the Recall Safe function along with the Focus Recall function ( page 94
or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
• If you perform a Recall operation while holding down a [SEL] key, the Recall Safe settings for the corresponding channel will temporarily be enabled for that Recall operation.
73
Reference Manual
RECALL SAFE MODE window
2 14
3
5
6
9
A 7 0 8
1
CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button turns off (disables) the Recall Safe function (that is currently set for individual channels) and the Global Recall Safe function simultaneously. The SET ALL button turns on (enables) these functions simultaneously.
NOTE
If you press the CLEAR ALL button, the Recall Safe function will temporarily be disabled.
However, the parameters that would be affected by the Recall Safe function will not change.
2
Safe channel display section
Indicates the channels that are currently set to Recall Safe.
All parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Some parameters are affected by Recall Safe on these channels.
Recall Safe has been canceled on these channels.
3
SET BY SEL button
Enables you to use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select channels that will be affected by the Recall Safe function. Turn this button on, and then press the [SEL] key for the channel to which you want to apply Recall Safe. Recall Safe will turn on. Press the same
[SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
4
GLOBAL RECALL SAFE display section
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by the Recall Safe function for all scenes. Press this section to open the GLOBAL RECALL SAFE window.
74
Channel Job
These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH
INPUT NAME
All input patches
All input channel names
OUTPUT PATCH All output patches
OUTPUT NAME All output channel names
HA
CH LINK
All I/O devices, and HA-related parameters for external head amps
All channel link group settings
MUTE GROUP
NAME
Setting a MUTE group name
Custom fader bank Custom fader bank settings
GEQ RACK
EFFECT RACK
PREMIUM RACK
FADER BANK
SELECT
Apply Recall Safe to GEQ racks 1 - 16, Effect racks 1 - 8, Premium racks 1
- 8 individually.
FADER BANK selection status, MASTER FADER assign status
NOTE
If a dual-type GEQ rack or Premium rack has been selected, you can apply Recall Safe to rack
A and B individually. For other racks, the setting for racks A and B will be linked.
5
Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Recall Safe function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6
Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Recall Safe parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels.
Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all input channels.
8
APPLY TO ALL OUTPUT button (shown only for output channels)
Turn on this button to apply Recall Safe parameter selection for one output channel to all other output channels.
Turn this on if you want to apply Recall Safe to the same parameters for all output channels.
9
Safe parameter select button (excluding DCA groups)
Selects Recall Safe parameters for the selected channel.
The button indication varies depending on the channel type.
Reference Manual
• Input channel
NOTE
ST IN channels do not feature INSERT, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT button.
• MIX channel
• MATRIX channel
• STEREO channel
• MONO channel
If Recall Safe is turned on for global parameters, the safe parameter select buttons of the selected channel will light green, as follows.
This figure indicates that the INPUT PATCH, INSERT PATCH, and DIRECT OUT parameters have been set to Safe by the INPUT PATCH Global parameter settings.
In the same way, turning on the Global parameters INPUT NAME, OUTPUT PATCH, and
OUTPUT NAME will cause the corresponding safe parameters of each channel to light green. On-screen buttons and corresponding parameters apply to the following channels:
Channel Job
Button name Corresponding parameter
Input
channel
MIX
channel
MATRIX
channel
STEREO/
MONO
channel
WITH MIX SEND Send level to the MIX bus
WITH MATRIX
SEND
ALL
*1
Send level to MATRIX bus
All parameters
HA
HPF
HA-related settings
HPF settings
EQ
EQ settings
DYNA 1
DYNA 2
MIX SEND
MATRIX SEND
FADER
CH ON
Dynamics 1 settings
Dynamics 2 settings
Send level to MIX bus
Send level to MATRIX bus
Fader settings
TO ST
[ON] key settings
On/off setting for STEREO bus assignment, PAN, etc.
MONO
On/off setting for MONO bus assignment
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
INPUT PATCH
DIGITAL GAIN
INSERT
INSERT PATCH
Input patch settings
Digital gain settings
Insert on/off
Insert patch settings
O
O
O
*2
O
*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
DIRECT OUT
MIX ON
MATRIX ON
Direct Out settings
MIX Send On/Off
MATRIX Send On/Off
O
*2
O
O O O
DELAY Delay settings O
NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
Channel name
Output patch settings
O O
O
O
O
O
O
BAL
DCA ASSIGN
*3
BLANCE parameter settings
Settings registered in DCA group O O
O
O
O
(STEREO only)
O
*1. The default setting is ALL on.
*2. ST IN channels do not feature these buttons.
*3. When these buttons are turned on, the settings registered for the DCA group are targeted for RECALL SAFE.
Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
75
Reference Manual
9
Safe parameter select button (DCA)
For each DCA group, selects the parameters for which Recall Safe is enabled. If the ALL button is on, all DCA master parameters will be subject to Recall Safe. If LEVEL/ON is on,
Recall Safe will apply to the DCA master level and on/off status. If NAME is on, Recall
Safe will apply to the DCA group name. Although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button.
10
SAFE button (excluding DCA groups)
When this button is turned on, Recall Safe will be enabled for the selected channel.
NOTE
Even if a parameter is selected with the Safe Parameter Select button, Recall Safe will not be enabled if this button is off.
A
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Channel Link function
Channel Link is a function that links the operation of parameters such as fader and EQ between input and output channels. Two or more channels that are linked are called a
“link group”. There is no limit on the number of link groups you can create, or on the number and combinations of channels that can be included in these link groups. You can select the types of parameters to be linked for each link group. However, input channels and output channels cannot coexist on the same link group.
The parameters to be linked can be selected from the following choices.
For an input channel:
• Head amp settings
• Digital gain settings
• HPF settings
• EQ settings
• Dynamics 1 settings
• Dynamics 2 settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Direct Out on, Direct Out level, and Direct Out point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
• Fader operations
76
Channel Job
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
• DELAY setting
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings
For an output channel:
• EQ settings
• Dynamics settings
• Insert on and insert point settings
• Send levels and PRE/POST settings of signals sent to MATRIX buses
*1
• On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
*1
• Fader operations
• [ON] key operations
• TO STEREO/MONO setting
*1
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN setting
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN settings
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
Linking the desired input channels
This section explains how to link specific parameters of input channels.
NOTE
Channel link settings are saved as part of the scene.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the CH LINK button in the CH JOB menu.
3. To link channels, hold down the [SEL] key for the link-source input channel and press
the [SEL] key for the link-destination channel.
4.
Use the buttons of the LINK PARAMETER field in the CH LINK MODE window to
select the parameter(s) that will be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
5. If you turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX SEND buttons in step 4, use the buttons of the SEND PARAMETER field to specify the bus(es) for
which you want operations to be linked (multiple selections are allowed).
Reference Manual
Function
Access Area
CH JOB menu
NOTE
• You can also access the CH LINK MODE window by simultaneously pressing and then releasing the [SEL] keys of two or more channels that will be linked.
• When you press the [SEL] key for a channel (that belongs to a link group) to make it light, the
[SEL] keys of all channels that belong to the same link group will blink.
• If you link an input channel to a ST IN channel, parameters that do not exist for a ST IN channel will be ignored.
Channel Job
CH LINK MODE window (input channels)
You can view the input channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.
5
1
2
3
4
1
Input channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding input channels will be highlighted. If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link input channels in this window.
NOTE
• Left and right of the ST IN channel are always linked.
• In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2
Link indicator
If an input channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel that does not belong to any link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that had been previously displayed.
77
Reference Manual
3
LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can do this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
HA
HPF
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ
DYNAMICS 1, 2
INSERT
DIRECT OUT
MIX SEND
MIX ON
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
FADER
DCA
CH ON
MUTE
TO STEREO
DELAY
Head amp settings
HPF settings
Digital gain settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
Insert settings
Direct Out settings
Send levels of signals sent to MIX buses
On/off status of signals sent to MIX buses
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses
Fader operations
DCA group assignment
Channel on/off
Mute group assignment
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses
Channel delay settings
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics 1 or 2 for two or more input channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in
signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see “
* Units of 8ch refers to Ch 1-8/Ch 9-16/Ch 17-24/Ch 25-32/Ch 33-40/Ch 41-48/Ch 49-56/Ch 57-64/Ch 65-72/
ST IN 1L-ST IN 4R/ST IN 5L-ST IN 8R.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS 1/2 button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• The HA analog gain setting and the fader operation will be linked and will maintain the same relative level difference between the channels.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
Channel Job
4
SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MIX ON, MIX SEND, MATRIX ON, or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
MIX 1-24
MTRX 1-8
MIX buses 1-24
MATRIX buses 1-8
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked.
5
INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels screen.
◆ Channel link operations
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each input channel you want to add to the link group.
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination input channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. For example, this may be the case for parameters such as the HA analog gain and fader. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the HA analog gain and fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading”phase of a recalled scene.)
78
Reference Manual
CH LINK MODE window (output channels)
You can view the output channels that are linked and specify the parameters that will be linked.
5
1
2
3
4
1
Output channel display field
When you create a link group, the corresponding output channels will be highlighted.
If there are two or more link groups, each group is shown in a different color. Press this field to open the CH LINK SET window. You can also link output channels in this window.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3 and CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2
Link indicator
If an output channel belonging to a link group is selected, the associated link group is shown. The LINK PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the link settings.
While you hold down the [SEL] key of an output channel that does not belong to any link group, the link indicator shows the link group that will be created next. The LINK
PARAMETER field and SEND PARAMETER field show the settings of the link group that had been previously displayed.
Channel Job
3
LINK PARAMETER field
Use the buttons in this field to select the parameters that you want to be linked. You can do this independently for each link group.
The table below lists the parameters you can select in the LINK PARAMETER field.
EQ
DYNAMICS
INSERT
MATRIX SEND
MATRIX ON
FADER
CH ON
TO STEREO
DCA
MUTE
EQ settings
Dynamics settings
Insert settings
Send levels of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
On/off status of signals sent to MATRIX buses *1
Fader operations
Channel on/off
On/off status of signals sent to STEREO/MONO buses *1
DCA group assignment
Mute group assignment
*1 MATRIX channel not applicable
NOTE
• If you link Dynamics for two or more output channels, the parameter values will be linked, but the key-in sources are not linked and can instead be set for each channel. The behavior of key-in signals is linked in units of 8ch*. For details about dynamics, see
* Units of 8ch refers to MIX 1 - MIX 8/MIX 9 - MIX 16/MIX 17 - MIX 24/MATRIX 1 - MATRIX 8.
• If you turn on the EQ button or DYNAMICS button, library recall operations will also be linked.
• In the insert settings, the parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
4
SEND PARAMETER field
If you have turned on the MATRIX ON or MATRIX send buttons in the LINK PARAMETER field, use the buttons in this field to specify the send-destination bus(es).
MTRX 1-8 MATRIX buses 1-8
NOTE
If nothing is selected in the SEND PARAMETER field, send on/off and send level will not be linked.
5
INPUT/OUTPUT button
Use this button to switch between the Input Channels screen and the Output Channels screen.
79
Reference Manual
◆ Channel link operations
• Linking three or more channels
Hold down the link-source [SEL] key and successively press the [SEL] key of each output channel you want to add to the link group.
• Adding a new channel to an existing link group
Hold down any [SEL] key within the group and press the [SEL] key that you want to add to the group.
NOTE
If the link-destination output channel is already assigned to another link group, its assignment to the previous group will be canceled, and it will be added to the newly assigned group.
• Removing a channel from a link group
Hold down any [SEL] key in the same link group, and press the [SEL] key for the channel that you want to remove.
• Changing the level balance between channels that belong to the same link group
While pressing and holding down the [SEL] key for the desired linked channel, adjust the parameter value. You can also remove all linked channels from the same link group temporarily. This can be helpful if you want to edit parameters that are linked to each other while maintaining the same relative level differences. While you are holding down the [SEL] key, the fader values will not be linked. (However, you cannot temporarily cancel this link during the “fading” phase of a recalled scene.)
Channel Job
CH LINK SET window
Displayed when you press the channel display field in the CH LINK MODE window. You can also link channels in this window.
1
2 3 5 4
1
Channel select button
Select a channel that you want to link. The selected input channel will be indicated in blue, the selected output channel will be indicated in orange, and the alphabetical character that indicates the link group will appear for linked channels.
80
When selecting a channel
When linking channels
2
LINK buttons
Link the channel selected in
,
1 .
3
UNLINK button
Cancels the link selected in
,
1 .
De-selects all selected channels.
4
UNSELECT ALL
Reference Manual
5
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
NOTE
If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
You can copy or move mix parameters between channels, or restore the parameters of a specific channel to their default settings.
Copying the parameters of a channel
You can copy the mix parameter settings of a channel to another channel. When you execute the copy operation, the settings will overwrite the parameters of the copy-destination.
You can copy between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between the STEREO L/R channel and MONO channel
• Between MIX channels
• Between MATRIX channels
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the COPY button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press a [SEL] key to select the copy-source channel.
4. Press the [SEL] key for the copy-destination channel (multiple selections are
allowed).
5.
If you have selected a MIX/MATRIX channel as the copy-source, use the buttons in
the COPY TARGET field to select the parameters you want to copy.
6.
Press the COPY button to execute the copy.
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
CH COPY MODE window
This window enables you to copy channel settings.
1 4 2 3
Channel Job
81
Reference Manual
1
SOURCE CH field
Displays the copy-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select a channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field.
If you want to re-select the copy-source channel, press this field.
Before selection
After selection
If the copy source is a MIX/MATRIX channel, buttons will appear so you will be able to select parameters to copy.
If these buttons are turned on, the following parameters will be copied:
• MODULE PARAMETERS button
Selected channel module parameters
• WITH MIX SEND/WITH MATRIX SEND button
SEND parameters of signals sent to the selected channel
2
DESTINATION CHs field
Displays the copy-destination channel. When you specify the copy source, you can then select a copy-destination channel (multiple selections are allowed) by pressing its
[SEL] key on the panel, and this field will be highlighted.
If you want to defeat all of the selected copy-destination channels, press the DESTINATION CHs field.
Channel Job
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3
COPY button
Executes the copy operation. After selecting the copy-source channel and copy- destination channel(s), press this button to execute the copy operation.
4
CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Moving the parameters of a channel
The settings of a specific input channel can be moved to a different input channel. When you execute a Move operation, the numbering of the channels between the move-source and move-destination will move forward or backward by one.
Move
1 2 3 4 5
1 5 2 3 4
Move by one.
You can move settings between the following combinations of channels.
• Between input channels
• Between ST IN channels
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the MOVE button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press a [SEL] key to select the move-source channel.
4.
Press the [SEL] key for the move-destination channel.
5.
To execute the move, press the MOVE button.
82
Reference Manual
Channel Job
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
CH MOVE MODE window
1 2
3
4
1
SOURCE CH field
Displays the move-source channel. While this window is displayed, press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel. The selected channel will be highlighted in this field. If you want to re-select the move-source channel, press this field.
2
DESTINATION CH field
Displays the move-destination channel. When you specify the move-source, you can then select the move-destination input channel by pressing its [SEL] key on the panel.
When the move-destination channel is selected, this field will be highlighted. If you want to change the move-destination channel, press the [SEL] key for the desired input channel. If you want to defeat the selected move-destination channel, press the
DESTINATION CH field.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3
MOVE button
Executes a move operation. After selecting the move-source channel and move- destination channel, the channel settings move from the move-source to the move- destination. The settings of all channels between the move-source and move- destination will shift toward the move-source by one channel.
4
CLOSE button
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Initializing the parameters of a channel
You can restore the parameters of a channel to an initialized state. This operation can be performed on any channel(s).
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the CH JOB button.
2.
Press the DEFAULT button in the CH JOB menu.
3.
Press the [SEL] key of the channel(s) to be initialized to make it light (multiple
selections are allowed).
4.
Press the DEFAULT button to execute the Initialization.
83
Reference Manual
Channel Job
Press this button to close the window and return to the previous screen.
Function
Access Area
CH JOB
menu
NOTE
After initialization, the TARGET CHs field will be empty (nothing is selected).
CH DEFAULT MODE window
Enables you to initialize parameters.
1
2
3
1
TARGET CHs field
Indicates the channel selected for initialization. While this window is displayed, press a
[SEL] key on the top panel to select an input channel (multiple selection is allowed). The field will indicate the selected channel(s). Press the same [SEL] key once again to de- select the channel.
NOTE
• If you press this field while a channel is selected, all selected channels will be de-selected.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
2
DEFAULT button
After selecting the channel, press this button to execute the initialization operation.
84
About Mix Minus
The Mix Minus function removes a specific channel signal from the signals sent to the MIX/
MATRIX buses. You can use this function to quickly send monitoring signals to a performer or announcer simply by removing his or her audio signal.
NOTE
This Mix Minus function is a shortcut for settings, rather than an operation to switch between modes. Therefore, even after using this function, you can still edit any parameter on the window without restrictions.
STEP
1.
Hold the [SEL] key while pressing the MIX/MATRIX bus key in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section.
2.
The MIX MINUS popup window will open.
3.
If you wish to remove an additional input channel, press the corresponding [SEL]
key.
4.
If necessary, in the DESTINATION field, select a bus.
You cannot select a FIXED bus.
5.
Press the OK button to set the parameters as follows:
• The send level of the signals sent from the selected input channels is lowered to -∞dB.
• The send level of the signals sent from all other input channels is set to nominal
(0.0dB).
• Send to the destination bus is turned on, and the send point is switched to POST.
• For the stereo input channels, the send level of the signal sent from both channels is set to -
∞ dB.
Reference Manual
NOTE
You can also access the MIX MINUS popup window by pressing the CH JOB button in the
Function Access Area, then pressing the MIX MINUS button.
85
Channel Job
Reference Manual
Scene memory
On CL series consoles, you can assign a name to a set of mix parameter and input/output port patch settings, and store the mix settings in memory (and later recall them from memory) as a
“scene.”
Each scene is assigned a number in the range of 000-300. Scene 000 is a read-only scene used to initialize the mix parameters. Scenes 001-300 are writable scenes.
Each scene contains the position of the top panel faders and [ON] key status, as well as the following parameters.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input/output port patching
Bus settings
Head amp settings
EQ settings
Dynamics 1 and 2 settings
Rack (GEQ/Effect/Premium Rack) settings
Pan/balance settings
Insert/Direct Out settings
On/off status and send level of signals sent to MIX buses
On/off status and send level of signals sent to MATRIX buses
DCA group settings
Mute group settings
Channel link settings
The number of the currently-selected scene appears in the SCENE field of the Function
Access Area.
SCENE field
1 2
2
4
3
You can press the SCENE field to access the SCENE LIST window, where you can view and edit more detailed settings for the scene.
1
Scene number
Indicates the number of the currently-selected scene. When you select a new scene number, the number will blink. This blinking indicates that the displayed scene number is different than the currently-loaded scene number.
2
R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
Read-only scenes are indicated by an R symbol (READ ONLY) displayed here. Write- protected scenes are indicated by a Protect symbol.
Scene memory
3
Scene title
Indicates the title of the currently-selected scene.
4
E symbol (EDIT symbol)
This symbol appears when you edit the mix parameters for the currently-loaded scene.
This symbol indicates that you must execute the Store operation if you want to keep the changes you made.
NOTE
You cannot store data to a scene number for which the Protect symbol or R symbol is displayed.
Storing and recalling scenes
To store the current mix settings as a scene in memory and recall it later, you can use the keys in the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section on the top panel, or you can use the SCENE LIST window.
Storing a scene
◆ Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
STEP
1.
Use the pad controls of the top panel or the buttons in the touch screen to set the
mix parameters as desired.
2. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the store-destination scene
number.
3.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.
4.
Assign a title or comment to the scene in the SCENE STORE window as desired.
5.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key or the STORE button located in the lower
part of the SCENE STORE window.
6.
Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store
operation.
86
SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys SCENE STORE window
Reference Manual
NOTE
• If you press and hold down either of the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys, the scene number will increment or decrement continuously.
• If you press the SCENE MEMORY [INC] and [DEC] keys simultaneously, the SCENE field indication will return to the number of the currently-loaded scene.
• You can make settings such that the Store Confirmation dialog box will not appear ( page 195 ). In
this case, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once will display the SCENE STORE window as usual, and pressing it once again will execute the Store operation. Alternatively, you can rapidly press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice to store without seeing the SCENE
STORE window.
SCENE STORE window
1 2
Scene memory
◆ Using the SCENE LIST window
STEP
1.
Use the controllers on the top panel or the buttons on the touch screen to set the
mix parameters as desired.
2.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the store-destination scene number.
4.
Press the STORE button in the SCENE LIST window.
5.
Assign a title or comment to the scene as desired.
6.
Press the STORE button located in the lower part of the SCENE STORE window.
7. Press the OK button in the STORE CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Store
operation.
NOTE
• You can select multiple scene numbers as the store-destination. To do so, press the MULTI
SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
• If you selected multiple scenes as the store-destination, the same contents will be stored in all selected scene numbers. This is convenient if you want to create several variations based on the same mix settings.
• You can also use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select scene numbers.
1
SCENE TITLE field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a title for the scene (maximum 16 characters).
2
COMMENT field
Press this field to select it, and then enter a comment for the scene. You can use this as a memorandum for each scene (maximum 32 characters).
NOTE
For details on entering text, refer to
“Entering names” in the separate Owner's Manual.
87
Reference Manual
2
5
4
3
6
7
SCENE LIST window
Here you can perform various scene-related operations. This window will appear when you press the SCENE field.
C 1
8
9> A B
1
Scene list
This area lists various data about the scenes stored in memory.
2
NO./TITLE buttons
Press these buttons to sort the listed scenes by number or title. Press the same button repeatedly to toggle between ascending order and descending order.
3
Scene number
Indicates the scene number.
4
Scene title
Indicates the scene title. Press this button to display the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can edit the title.
5
R symbol (READ ONLY)/Protect symbol
An “R” symbol is displayed for read-only scenes, and a protect (lock) icon is displayed for write-protected scenes.
To enable/disable the scene protect setting, press the R symbol or protect symbol of the selected scene. Pressing the protect (lock) symbol or the R (read-only) symbol repeatedly will switch between displaying and hiding the corresponding symbol.
88
Scene memory
• Protect (lock) symbol
You will be unable to overwrite the scene.
• R (READ ONLY) symbol
Not only will the scene be protected, it will also not be overwritten by any file loaded from a USB flash drive. You can only apply the protect setting to scenes with consecutive scene numbers starting with scene #001.
• No symbol
No scene will be protected.
NOTE
The R symbol for scene number 000 cannot be disabled.
6
Current scene
The currently-selected scene (that is, the current scene) is highlighted in blue in the list.
If you press another scene number in the list, the list will scroll and that scene will become the current scene.
7
SCENE SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knobs to select a scene. You can view the currently-selected scene number immediately below the SCENE SELECT knob. You can select consecutive multiple scenes by pressing and rotating the multifunction knob.
8
MULTI SELECT button
You can select consecutive multiple scenes by turning on this button and rotating the multifunction knob.
9
LAST SCENE button
Selects the scene that was recalled most recently.
10
SCENE STORE button
Press this button to display the SCENE STORE window, which will enable you to assign a name to a scene and store it.
A
STORE UNDO button
Undoes the Store operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform an
Overwrite-store operation.
NOTE
• The STORE UNDO button is available only immediately after overwrite-storing.
• You can also assign the function of the STORE UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
B
Page switching tabs
Switch the views for the right side of the SCENE LIST window.
C
PREVIEW button
Press this to select PREVIEW mode, which allows you to view and edit the scene settings in the display and the panel without affecting the signal processing of the current scene.
Reference Manual
Recalling a scene
◆ Using the keys of the SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section
STEP
1. Use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the scene number you want to
recall.
2.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.
3.
Press the OK button to execute the recall.
◆ Using the SCENE LIST window
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number to recall.
3.
Press the RECALL button in the SCENE LIST window.
4.
Press the OK button to execute the recall.
SCENE LIST window
Scene memory
1
RECALL SCENE button
Recalls the currently-selected scene.
2
RECALL UNDO button
Undoes the Recall operation. This button is valid only immediately after you perform a
Recall operation.
NOTE
• You can also assign the function of the RECALL UNDO button to a USER DEFINED key
• You can also use MIDI messages (Program Changes) to recall scenes ( page 168 ).
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall
You can use the USER DEFINED keys to recall a selected scene with a single keystroke, or to step through the scenes. To do this, you must first assign a scene recall operation to a
USER DEFINED key. The following recall operations can be assigned to a USER DEFINED key.
• INC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene of the number that follows the currently-loaded scene.
• DEC RECALL
Immediately recalls the scene of the number that precedes the currently-loaded scene.
NOTE
If no scene is stored in the number that precedes or follows the currently-loaded scene, the closest scene number in which a scene is stored will be recalled.
• DIRECT RECALL
Directly recalls the scene number that you assigned to the USER DEFINED key. When you press a USER DEFINED key to which this function is assigned, the assigned scene will be recalled immediately.
1 2
89
Reference Manual
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign a function.
5.
In the FUNCTION column, select “SCENE.”
6.
Selects the function you want to assign.
• To assign INC RECALL or DEC RECALL
Choose “INC RECALL” or “DEC RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column.
• To assign DIRECT RECALL
Choose “DIRECT RECALL” in the PARAMETER 1 column, and choose“SCENE #xxx” (xxx is the scene number) in the PARAMETER 2 column.
7.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
8.
Press the USER DEFINED key to which you want to assign a recall function.
SETUP screen
USER SETUP window
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP
window
Scene memory
Editing scene memories
This section explains how to sort the scenes stored in scene memory, edit their titles, and copy and paste them.
Sorting scene memories and editing titles
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the COMMENT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs on the top panel to select a scene.
4.
Edit the scene.
SCENE LIST window
1 2 1 1
3
6
5
4
7
8
1
Sort button
The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
• NO.
Sorted in order of scene number.
• TITLE
Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of title.
90
Reference Manual
• COMMENT
Sorted in numeric/alphabetical order of comment.
• TIME STAMP
Sorts the list in order of date of creation.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the sorting order (ascending or descending).
2
Write-protect
Indicates the Write Protect on/off status. Press this button to write-protect the scene. A lock icon will appear. Press it again to cancel write protection.
3
TITLE field
Press this field to open the SCENE TITLE EDIT window, in which you can enter the title for the scene. You can edit titles in this window.
4
COMMENT field
Press this field to open the SCENE COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter comments for the scene. You can edit comments in this window.
5
STATUS field
Indicators in this field indicate the setting status of the FOCUS, FADE TIME, PLAYBACK
(playback link), and GPI (General Purpose Interface) functions. (The Playback Link function plays a desired song in a specified time duration after a scene is recalled.)
6
TIME STAMP field
Indicates the date and time the scene was stored.
7
CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console.
8
Tabs
Enable you to switch between items. You can use tabs to switch the view of the right half of the window between four different fields (COMMENT/FOCUS/FADE TIME/
PLAYBACK LINK).
Scene memory editing
The scenes stored in scene memory can be copied and pasted to other scene numbers, or cleared (erased). You can edit scene memories using the buttons located in the upper part of the SCENE LIST window.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Scene memory
1
COPY button
Press this button to copy the scene to buffer memory.
2
PASTE button
Press this button to overwrite the selected scene with the scene in buffer memory.
3
CLEAR button
Press this button to erase the selected scene.
4
CUT button
Press this button to delete the selected scene and copy it to buffer memory.
5
INSERT button
Press this button to insert the scene copied to buffer memory into the selected scene number. The numbers of the subsequent scenes will be incremented by one.
6
UNDO button
Cancels the most recent scene memory paste, clear, cut, or insert operation and restores the previous state.
Copying and pasting a scene
You can copy a scene into buffer memory, and then paste it to a different scene number.
NOTE
The Global Paste function enables you to copy any channel or any parameter settings for the
current scene, then paste the data into any single or multiple scenes in memory ( page 93 ).
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the copy-source scene number, and
then press the COPY button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the copy.
4.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the paste-destination scene number,
and then press the PASTE button.
5. Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the paste
operation.
NOTE
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
• You cannot select multiple scenes as the copy-source.
• You can select multiple paste-destination scenes. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down. In this case, the same content will be pasted to all selected scenes.
• A copied scene can also be inserted ( page 92 ).
• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the PASTE button will be unavailable.
91
Reference Manual
Clearing a scene
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to
clear, and then press the CLEAR button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Clear
operation.
NOTE
• You may select multiple scenes to be cleared. To do so, press the MULTI SELECT button to turn it on, and then rotate a multifunction knob. Alternatively, rotate the multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cleared.
Cutting a scene
This section explains how to cut a scene.
When you cut a scene, the numbers of the subsequent scenes will be decremented accordingly. You can paste or insert a cut scene at the desired location. To cut a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the SCENE LIST window of the Function Access Area.
2. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the scene number that you want to
cut, and then press the CUT button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Cut operation.
4.
If desired, you can paste ( page 91 ) or insert the cut scene (that was copied to the
buffer memory).
NOTE
• Read-only scenes or write-protected scenes cannot be cut.
• Be aware that if you copy or cut another scene before you paste or insert, the newly copied or cut scene will overwrite the scene in the buffer memory.
Scene memory
Inserting a scene
You can insert a scene copied to buffer memory at a desired scene number location. To insert a scene, sort the scene list in order of scene number.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
) or cut the scene you want to insert.
3. Rotate one of the multifunction knobs to select the insert-destination scene number,
and then press the INSERT button in the SCENE LIST window.
4.
Press the OK button in the CONFIRMATION dialog box to execute the Insert
operation.
NOTE
• If you select multiple scenes as the insert-destination, the same scene will be inserted the selected number of times.
• If nothing has been copied to the buffer memory, the INSERT button is not available.
• The INSERT button will also be unavailable if the Insert operation would cause the number of stored scenes to exceed 300.
• When you insert a scene, scenes that were stored in subsequent numbers following that location will be updated and increase by the number of scenes that were inserted.
92
Reference Manual
Using the Global Paste function
“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings for the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed).
This can be convenient if you want to apply changes (that you made to the current scene) to multiple scenes that have already been stored.
NOTE
The Global Paste function will be available for a user if the SCENE LIST STORE/SORT parameter is turned on in his or her user level settings.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the GLOBAL PASTE button in the SCENE LIST window.
3.
Use the tabs in the GLOBAL PASTE window to select the item you want to copy.
4. Press the [SEL] key on the top panel to select the copy-source channel , and then
press the button in the window to select a parameter.
5.
Use multifunction knobs 7 and 8 to select the range of paste-destination scenes.
6.
Press the PASTE button to execute the paste operation.
1
2
3
GLOBAL PASTE window
Scene memory
SCENE LIST window GLOBAL PASTE window
NOTE
• A progress bar will be displayed as the data is being pasted.
• During the paste operation, the STOP button will appear. Press the STOP button if you want to abort the operation. In that case, part of the data will be pasted and you will be unable to undo the operation.
• You cannot select different parameters from different channels.
93
1
SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key.
2
CLEAR ALL button/SET ALL button
The CLEAR ALL button clears all of the selected channels. The SET ALL button selects all channels simultaneously.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3
Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
• INPUT tab
Select an input channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
All input channel parameters
Input patch settings
Channel name, icon, and channel color
Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel
Input delay settings
HPF settings
Digital gain settings for the corresponding input channel
EQ settings
ALL
INPUT PATCH
NAME
HA
DELAY
HPF
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ
Reference Manual
DYNA 1
DYNA 2
MIX SEND
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
Dynamics 2 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE)
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MIX bus
MATRIX SEND
FADER
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
Fader level
CH ON
INSERT
*1
On/off status of [ON] keys
Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH
*1
Insert in/out patch settings
DIRECT OUT Direct Out on/off, Direct Out level, Direct Out point and patch settings
MIX ON
MATRIX ON
TO STEREO
MONO
DCA ASSIGN
*2
Send on/off to a MIX bus
Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings
TO MONO on/off
Settings registered in DCA group
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
• OUTPUT tab
Select an output channel in the upper left area, and select its parameter in the lower left area.
You can select the following parameters.
ALL
All output channel parameters
OUTPUT PATCH Output patch settings
NAME
EQ
Channel name, icon, and channel color
EQ settings
DYNA 1
Dynamics 1 settings (including KEY IN SOURCE and KEY IN FILTER)
INSERT
*1
Insert on/off status and insert point
INSERT PATCH
*1
Insert in/out patch settings
FADER Fader level
CH ON
TO STEREO/BAL
On/off status of [ON] keys
Mode, TO ST/TO LCR on/off status, CSR, pan/balance settings (MIX 1-24 only)
MONO
MATRIX SEND
TO MONO on/off status (MIX 1-24 only)
Send level, pan, and PRE/POST of the signal sent to a MATRIX bus
MATRIX ON Send on/off to a MATRIX bus
WITH SEND FROM
SOURCE CHs
DCA ASSIGN
*2
SEND parameters of the send-source signal that will be sent to a channel
Settings registered in DCA group
*1. The parameters for Insert 1 and Insert 2 are selected together.
*2. Settings are linked according to the channel link for the current scene when the settings are made.
Scene memory
• RACK tab
Enables you to choose from GEQ RACK, EFFECT RACK, or PREMIUM RACK. You can select an individual rack for each effect used in dual mode.
• PATCH/OTHERs tab
You can select the following parameters.
INPUT PATCH All input channel patches, insert in/out patches, Direct Out patches
OUTPUT PATCH All output channel patches, insert in/out patches
INPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all input channels
OUTPUT NAME Channel names, icons, and colors for all output channels
HA
CH LINK
MUTE GROUP
NAME
CUSTOM FADER
BANK
*1
Analog gain, phantom power on/off status, Gain Compensation settings
Channel link settings
Setting a MUTE group name
Custom fader bank settings
*1. While in PREVIEW mode, changes that are made in CL Editor are not applied immediately. They are applied after PREVIEW mode is exited.
• DCA tab
You can select ALL, LEVEL/ON, or NAME. If ALL is selected, all channel parameters will be copied. If LEVEL/ON is selected, the master level and DCA channel on/off status will be copied. If NAME is selected, the DCA group name will be copied. You can select the copy-source channels individually for each DCA group 1-16.
For DCA, although you can turn on both the LEVEL/ON button and the NAME button, they will then both be switched off if you turn on the ALL button.
Using the Focus Recall function
“Focus Recall” is a function that lets you specify the parameters that will be updated when you recall a scene. For example, it is convenient to use this if you want to recall only the input channel settings of a certain scene.
NOTE
In contrast to Focus, the CL series console also features a
“Recall Safe” function that enables you to exclude specific channels and parameters from recall operations. However, while the Focus
Recall function is specified individually for each scene, the Recall Safe settings are applied to all scenes.
94
Reference Manual
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the FOCUS tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4.
Follow the procedure starting with step 3 in the “ Using the Recall Safe function ”
5.
If you want to cancel the specified restrictions so that all parameters will be subject
to recall, turn on the ALL button.
6.
Recall a scene for which you have made Focus Recall settings.
FOCUS RECALL window
Sets the parameters that will be recalled.
2
3
5
6
8
SCENE field
SCENE LIST window
NOTE
• The FOCUS field enables you to make settings for the Focus function. The buttons in this field correspond to the scene list shown on the left side of the SCENE LIST window.
• Scenes for which Focus settings are made are indicated by a “FOCUS” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window.
• You can use the Focus function in conjunction with the Recall Safe function. Channels or parameters that are excluded from Recall operations by either Focus or Recall Safe will not be recalled.
• For FOCUS RECALL, the NAME parameter is included in the DCA indicator.
4
1
7
9
Scene memory
0
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all the settings.
2
Focus channel display section
Indicates the target channel for a Recall operation. The view of this field is the same as that in the RECALL SAFE window.
All parameters are affected by Recall on these
Some parameters are affected by Recall on
Recall has been canceled on these channels.
3
SET BY SEL button
Turn on this button to add a channel by using the corresponding [SEL] key. To add channels as the target, turn on this button, and then press the corresponding [SEL] keys for the channels you want to add.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
95
Reference Manual
4
FOCUS PARAMETER display section
Indicates the parameters and racks that will be affected by Recall operations for any scene. Procedures and contents are the same as those in the RECALL SAFE MODE
5
Channel select button
Selects the channel for which you want to set the Focus Recall function.
NOTE
Switching channels using this button will not affect the channel selection on the top panel.
6
Selected channel display
This area indicates the icon, number, color, and name of the currently-selected channel.
7
APPLY TO ALL INPUT button (input channels only)
Turn on this button to apply the Focus Recall parameter selection for one input channel to all other input channels.
This can be convenient if you want to apply Focus Recall to the same parameters for all input channels.
8
Recall parameter select button
Selects Focus Recall parameters for the selected channel.
Enables you to select parameters for each channel that will be affected by Recall operations. You can use the same procedure as that in the RECALL SAFE window
NOTE
• If the DCA ASSIGN button is turned on, the parameters assigned to the DCA groups (1-16) for that channel are targeted for FOCUS RECALL. Settings for DCA 1-16 are made simultaneously.
• DCA ASSIGN button settings are linked according to the channel link for the scene.
9
FOCUS button
Switches the Focus Recall function on or off.
10
CLOSE button
Closes the window.
Scene memory
Using the Fade function
“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes the faders of specified channels and DCA groups to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene.
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the FADE TIME tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3.
In the SCENE LIST window, press the SET button for the scene you want to set.
4. Press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups to select the channels or DCA
groups to which the Fade effect will be applied (multiple selections are allowed).
5.
Use the multifunction knob to adjust the fade time.
6.
Press the OK button to close the FADE TIME window.
7.
Press the FADE button in the SCENE LIST window to enable the Fade function.
8.
Recall a scene for which the Fade function is turned on.
The faders will begin to move immediately after Recall occurs, and will reach the values of the recalled scene over the course of the specified fade time.
SCENE field
SCENE LIST window
(FADE TIME field)
NOTE
• Scenes for which Fade settings are made are shown by a “FADE” indication in the STATUS field of the SCENE LIST window.
• The Fade function settings can be applied individually even if faders are linked by Channel Link.
• You can stop a fade effect by holding down a [SEL] key while you stop the corresponding moving fader.
• If you recall the same scene while faders are moving, the faders of all channels or DCA groups will move immediately to their target positions.
96
Reference Manual
SCENE LIST window (FADE TIME field)
2
1
3
4
1
SET button
Press this button to open the FADE TIME window, in which you can select a channel for which you want to use the Fade function, and specify the fade time (the duration of time over which the fader will reach its new value).
2
FADE button
Enables or disables the Fade function for each scene.
3
FADE TIME display
This area indicates the fade time specified for each scene.
4
CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console.
Scene memory
FADE TIME window
You can select the channels to which Fade will be applied, and adjust the fade time. To display this window, press the SET button in the FADE TIME field in the SCENE LIST window.
1 3 4
2
1
Channel display field
The channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied are highlighted. To select the channels or DCA groups to which Fade is applied, press the [SEL] keys for the channels or DCA groups. Press the same [SEL] key once again to de-select the channel.
2
FADE TIME knob
Sets the fade time. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.
The range is 0.0 sec to 60.0 sec.
NOTE
The fade time is used for all channels and DCA groups selected in the channel display field.
3
SET ALL button
Press this button to apply the Fade effect to all faders of that scene.
4
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to cancel the Fade function for all faders of that scene.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
97
Reference Manual
Outputting a control signal to an external device
in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
A control signal can be output to an external device connected to the GPI connector of the CL series console when you recall a specific scene. Proceed as follows.
NOTE
For more information on GPI OUT settings, refer to
STEP
1.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
2.
Press the GPI OUT tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
3. For each scene, specify the control signal that you want to output to each GPI OUT
port.
4.
Recall the scene for which you want to output GPI OUT signals.
SCENE LIST window
(GPI OUT field)
SCENE LIST window (GPI OUT field)
1
2
Scene memory
1
Output control signal select buttons
These specify the control signal will be output from each GPI OUT.
Pressing a button repeatedly will switch between the following functions.
• ---- (OFF).................. Nothing will be output.
• TRIGGER................. A trigger will be output when the scene is recalled.
• TALLY ...................... A tally will be output when the scene is recalled.
2
CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console.
98
Reference Manual
Playing back an audio file that links to a scene
recall
You can also specify an audio file that you want to play back from a USB flash drive when a specific scene is recalled. This can be convenient if you want an effect sound or BGM to be played automatically in a specific scene.
NOTE
• Save audio files for playback in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder. If you save them in the root directory or in other folders, you will be unable to specify them for playback. When an audio file is played, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will indicate \YPE\SONGS\.
• You cannot play audio files during recording or in recording standby mode.
• A specified audio file will be played back only once, regardless of the playback mode settings.
• Audio file names must be eight characters plus three extension characters. If you change the file name after specifying the file for playback, or if you delete or copy the file repeatedly, the specified file may become unrecognizable in rare cases.
STEP
1.
Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2.
Press the SCENE field in the Function Access Area.
3.
Press the PLAYBACK LINK tab at the bottom of the SCENE LIST window.
4.
Press the song select button for a scene to which you want to link the audio file.
5.
Press a list in the SONG SELECT window or use the multifunction knobs to select a
file that you want to link to a scene.
6. Use the corresponding multifunction knob to set the offset (the time duration until
the start of audio file playback).
7.
Press the OK button.
8.
Press the PLAY button to turn on the link to the audio file.
9.
Recall a scene to which an audio file has been linked.
Scene memory
NOTE
• After a scene has been recalled and until the offset time has elapsed, a countdown will appear in the Function Access Area.
• If another song is playing during a scene recall, the song playback will stop when the scene is recalled, regardless of the offset time setting.
SCENE LIST window (PLAYBACK LINK field)
1
3
2
4
1
PLAY button
Sets the Playback Link function's on/off status for each scene.
2
Song select button
Press this button to open the SONG SELECT window, in which you can select a song and set the offset time (time duration from scene recall until the start of playback). Also, the title of the selected song will appear on the button.
3
Offset time display
Indicates the time duration from scene recall until the start of playback of the specified audio file. Set the offset time in the SONG SELECT window.
4
CURRENT SETTING field
Specifies the content that will be saved by the next scene store operation. Changes you make here are immediately applied to the CL console.
SCENE LIST window
(PLAYBACK LINK field)
99
Reference Manual
SONG SELECT window
You can select an audio file you want to link with the scene, and set the offset time. This window will appear when you press the song select button.
2 3
1
4
5
6
7
8
1
Change directory button
Press this button to move to the next higher folder level.
NOTE
You cannot move to levels higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
2
PATH indicator
This area indicates the current directory path. It will show only the \YPE\SONGS\ level.
3
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME switch buttons
Switch between the song title list and the file name list.
4
SONG TITLE list button
5
ARTIST list button
Press these buttons to sort the audio file list (at the current directory level) by song title and artist name respectively.
6
List
Displays the name of the folder or audio file, artist name, and audio file time duration.
You can select an audio file by pressing the folder name or audio file name.
Scene memory
7
OFFSET knob
You can use the multifunction knob 8 to set the time interval from scene recall until the start of audio file playback. The offset time can be adjusted in the range of 0.0-99.0 in
0.5 sec steps.
8
Scroll knob
Use the multifunction knob to scroll the list.
Using Preview mode
Preview mode lets you view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the panel of the CL series console, but the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. Even if you modify the settings and save them as a new scene or by overwriting, the signal processing of the current scene will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it.
STEP
1.
Press the [PREVIEW] key. Or, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
2. Use the [INC]/[DEC] keys, multifunction knobs, or [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs in the
SCENE MEMORY section to operate the SCENE SELECT knob in the SCENE LIST
window, and select the scene number that you want to recall.
3.
Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. Or, press the RECALL SCENE button in the
SCENE LIST window. To execute the Recall operation, press the OK button.
4.
If desired, use the panel controls to edit the settings.
5.
If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. Or,
press the SCENE STORE button in the SCENE LIST window.
6. When you have finished viewing or editing the settings of the scene, press the
PREVIEW key. Or, press the PREVIEW button in the SCENE LIST window.
NOTE
• PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters.
• RECALL SAFE and FOCUS RECALL are enabled in PREVIEW mode.
100
Reference Manual
Functions in Preview mode
The current scene will be modified by the following software and external operations.
• CL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Rx
• GPI IN
Similarly, edits for the current scene will be conveyed to the following software and external devices.
• CL Editor
• StageMix
• MIDI Tx
• GPI OUT
The meters will indicate the state of signal processing for the current scene.
Playback Link will operate for recalling the current scene.
If cascade-connected, both master and slave units will operate independently. Link will not occur while in Preview mode.
The following functions will not operate in Preview mode.
• Synchronization with CL Editor
• Switching users
• Changing the User Level
• Load/Save functions
• Cue changes
• USER DEFINED KEY operations
• USER DEFINED KNOB operations
• Monitor (MONITOR, CUE, OSCILLATOR, TALKBACK) changes or display
• Changing or viewing Nuendo Live settings
• Changing or viewing the recorder
• Changing DANTE SETUP or DANTE PATCH settings
• FADE TIME
• EFFECT FREEZE playback or recording
• MIDI clock and tap tempo for effects
• Internal metering for Premium Effects (GR for DynamicEQ and Portico 5043; VU for Opt-2A and U76)
In addition, you cannot enter Preview mode while performing the following operations.
• While pasting scene or EQ settings
• While executing Global Paste
• While synchronizing with CL Editor
• While saving/loading a file
101
Scene memory
NOTE
The scene titles shown in StageMix will be changed to the titles used when using the store operation on a CL series console operated in PREVIEW mode.
Reference Manual
Monitor and Cue functions
The Monitor function lets you monitor various outputs through your nearfield monitors or headphones. Below the front pad of the CL series console is a PHONES out jack which always outputs the monitor source signal that you've selected for monitoring. By assigning the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels to the desired output jacks, you can also monitor the same signal through external speakers.
You can select the following signals as the monitor source.
• STEREO channel output signal
• MONO channel output signal
• STEREO + MONO channel output signal
• OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 channel input signal (for monitoring each two channel pair)
• RECORDER PLAYBACK output signal
• A combination of up to eight MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, or MONO channel output signals, RECORDER PLAYBACK output signals, and OMNI IN 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 input signals
The Cue function lets you check an individual selected channel/DCA group by temporarily monitoring it via MONITOR OUT or PHONES. When you press the [CUE] key on the top panel, the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group is sent as the monitor output from the selected output port.
NOTE
The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will no longer be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the
Monitor function. However, the cue signal will always be sent to the PHONES output jack.
The following diagram shows the cue/monitor signal flow.
• MONITOR SELECT
Selects the monitor source.
• METER
Detects and indicates the level of the monitor signal or cue signal.
• DIMMER
Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.
Monitor and Cue functions
102
Reference Manual
• MONITOR LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• MONITOR FADER
Use the STEREO MASTER fader or MONO MASTER fader to adjust the output level of the
MONITOR OUT L/R/C channels. MONITOR FADER is positioned in series with
MONITOR LEVEL. If PHONES LEVEL LINK is ON, this setting will also affect the level at the PHONES Out jack.
• ON (On/off)
Switches the Monitor function on or off.
• DELAY (Monitor delay)
Delays monitor signals. The Delay function is disabled if cue signals are being output.
• PHONES LEVEL (Headphone level)
Adjusts the dedicated output level of the PHONES Out jack.
• PHONES LEVEL LINK (Headphone Level Link function)
If this function is turned on, the MONITOR LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack.
• CUE INTERRUPTION (Cue Interruption function)
If this function is turned on, pressing the [CUE] key on the top panel will cause the cue signal of the corresponding channel or DCA group to be sent as the monitor output from the selected output port. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on.
Turn it off if you do not want to output cue signals to the monitoring speakers.
Monitor and Cue functions
Using the Monitor function
This section explains how to select the desired monitor source, and monitor it from the
PHONES Out jack or external monitor speakers.
STEP
1. Connect your monitor system to the OMNI OUT jacks or 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack on the rear panel. To monitor through headphones, connect your headphones to the
PHONES Out jack below the front panel.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
3.
Press the MONITOR display button or the meter field in the MONITOR screen.
4.
Use the source select buttons in MONITOR screen to select the monitor source.
5.
Press one of the MONITOR OUT PATCH buttons (L/R/C) in the meter field to specify the port that will be the output destination for monitor signals L, R, and C (multiple
selections are allowed).
6.
Turn the OUTPUT button on to enable monitoring.
7.
To adjust the monitor level, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob located in the SCENE
MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel.
8.
Make settings for Dimmer, Delay, and Monaural as desired.
MONITOR screen
NOTE
Monitor on/off operations, selection of the monitor source, and dimmer on/off operations can also
be assigned to USER DEFINED keys. ( page 197 )
103
Reference Manual
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the MONITOR field lets you check the current monitor settings, and turn monitoring on/off.
2 3 4 5
6
1
7
8
1
MONITOR display button
When you press this button, the MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make detailed monitor settings.
2
SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the monitor source. If DEFINE has been selected in this field, access the
MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3
DIMMER field
Enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
• DIMMER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor signals will be attenuated when the dimmer is on.
• DIMMER ON button
Turn on this button to enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
Monitor and Cue functions
4
MONITOR FADER field
Enables you to set and view the monitor fader that adjusts the monitor level.
• MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Adjusts the monitor fader level. Pressing this knob will enable you to use the multifunction knobs in the Centralogic section to adjust the level.
• FADER ASSIGN display
This area displays the type of faders that are currently assigned to the monitor fader.
Indicator assignments are as follows.
• ---- .......................................... No assignment
• MASTER A ............................ Master A only
• MASTER A+ .......................... Master A, Master B, Custom fader bank
• MASTER B ............................ Master B only
• MASTER B+ .......................... Master B, Custom fader bank
• CUSTOM................................ A single fader in the Custom fader bank
• CUSTOMs.............................. Multiple faders in the Custom fader bank
5
Meter field
Indicates the output level of Monitor Out channels L, R, and C. Press this field to open the MONITOR window.
6
MONITOR OUTPUT button
Switches Monitor Out on or off.
7
PHONES LEVEL LINK button
If this is on, the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob will adjust the level of signals sent to the
PHONES Out jack.
8
MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch monitor signals to mono.
104
Reference Manual
MONITOR window
You can make detailed settings for monitoring. This window appears when you press the
MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen.
3 B
2 4 6 7 8
9
1
D
E
F
5 A 0 C
◆ SOURCE SELECT field
This field enables you to select the source signal for the MONITOR bus.
1
Source selection buttons
Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
STEREO L/R
MONO (C)
LCR
STEREO L/R channel signals
MONO channel signal
STEREO L/R + MONO channel signals
OMNI 1-2 - 7-8 OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 signals (per two channels)
PB OUT Recorder's PLAYBACK OUT signals
DEFINE The signal(s) selected in the ASSIGN field
Monitor and Cue functions
◆ DIMMER field
This field enables you to make settings for the Dimmer function, which temporarily attenuates monitor signals.
2
DIMMER knob
Adjusts the amount by which monitor signals will be attenuated when the Dimmer function is on.
3
DIMMER ON/OFF button
Switches the Dimmer function on or off.
4
TALKBACK DIMMER knob
Adjusts the amount by which the monitor level will be attenuated when talkback is on.
5
TALKBACK ON indicator
Indicates the talkback on/off status.
6
PHONES LEVEL LINK button
Enables you to link the signal level at the PHONES Out jack to the monitor signal level.
Turn on this button to adjust the level of signals sent to the PHONES Out jack by using the MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
0 or the fader
A to which this knob function has been assigned.
NOTE
If the PHONES LEVEL LINK button is ON, use the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the monitor fader, as well as the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor level when monitoring through headphones.
7
CUE INTERRUPTION button
Press this button to interrupt the monitor signal by the cue signal. If this button is on and the cue is enabled, the cue signal will be sent to the monitor output. With the factory default settings, this function is turned on. If you do not wish to send the cue signal to the monitor output, switch this button off.
8
MONO MONITOR button
Turn on this button to switch the monitor output signal to mono.
9
MONITOR OUTPUT button
This button turns the monitor output on/off. When this button is turned on, the monitor source selected in
1 is sent to output destination
E
.
NOTE
The PHONES output jack will always output the monitor signal, regardless of whether the OUTPUT button is on or off.
105
Reference Manual
◆ MONITOR FADER field
10
MONITOR FADER LEVEL knob
Indicates the monitor level. Press this knob to adjust the monitor level using the multifunction knob. Or, press the Centralogic section bank select [STEREO] key, and then use the monitor fader to adjust the level.
A
FADER ASSIGN indicator
Indicates the fader(s) to which the monitor level is assigned. Indicator assignments are as follows:
MASTER A MASTER A fader only
MASTER A+ MASTER A, as well as MASTER B fader and Custom fader bank
MASTER B MASTER B fader only
MASTER B+
MASTER B, as well as Custom fader bank
CUSTOM
CUSTOMs
One of the Custom fader bank faders
Multiple Custom fader bank faders
◆ MONITOR DELAY field
This field enables you to specify the monitor delay setting by which the monitor out signal is delayed.
B
AUTO BYPASS button
Turn this on to automatically bypass monitor delay when the cue is on.
C
MONITOR DELAY knob
Indicates the currently-specified delay time. The millisecond value is indicated above the knob, and the delay time value in currently-selected units and the currently-selected scale type are indicated below the knob. However, if the scale is set to ms, the delay time value is not shown above the knob.
Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
◆ Meter field
Indicates the monitor output level.
D
Meters
This field indicates the output level of the monitor L/R/C channels.
Monitor and Cue functions
E
MONITOR OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the monitor out L/R/C channels.
DANTE 1-64 Output channels 1-64 to audio network
OMNI1-8
DIGI OUT L/R
OMNI OUT jacks 1-8
DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3
NOTE
• You can specify output ports only for MONITOR OUT L and R, and monitor through two speakers.
• If you have not specified an output port for MONITOR OUT C, selecting the MONO (C) button or
LCR button as the monitor source will automatically cause the MONO channel signal to be distributed to MONITOR OUT L/R.
F
ASSIGN field
If you have selected DEFINE in the SOURCE SELECT field, you can use the ASSIGN field to specify multiple monitor sources. The following table shows the monitor sources that you can select in the ASSIGN field.
MIX 1-24
MTRX 1-8
STEREO
MONO (C)
OMNI 1-2 - OMNI 7-8
PB OUT
Output signals of MIX channels 1-24
MATRIX buses 1 - 8 output signals
STEREO L/R channel output signals
MONO channel output signal
OMNI IN jacks 1 - 8 input signals (per two channels)
Recorder's PLAYBACK OUT signals
NOTE
You can select a maximum of eight monitor sources in the ASSIGN field. If you select eight monitor sources, no further selections will be possible. Turn off the buttons of unneeded sources.
106
Reference Manual
MONITOR screen (Monitor field in Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the Monitor field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below.
2 3 4 5
1
1
SURROUND MONITOR display button
When you press this button, the SURROUND MONITOR window will appear, in which you can make detailed surround monitor settings.
2
SOURCE SELECT field
Selects the surround monitor source. If 2CH MONITOR has been selected in this field, use the SURROUND MONITOR window to specify the source channel.
3
Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
4
DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
• STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
• MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
5
Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
Monitor and Cue functions
SURROUND MONITOR window (Surround mode)
You can make detailed settings for surround monitoring. If Surround mode is set for the bus settings in BUS SETUP, this window appears when you press the MONITOR display button or meter field in the MONITOR screen.
2 3 4
5
1
6
7
1
SOURCE SELECT field
Select one of the following as the surround source that will be output to the MONITOR bus.
MIX1-6
EXT5.1-1-3
2CH MONITOR
Surround signals in the current mix
Surround signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP (3 channels)
Stereo signals set in MONITOR SOURCE SETUP
2
MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button
Use this button to open the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen. Set the sources and names for EXT 5.1 - 1-3 (EXTERNAL SURROUND) and EXT ST - 1-4 (EXTERNAL STEREO).
107
Reference Manual
3
DOWNMIX field
Select in which field to perform downmixes.
•STEREO button
Downmix in stereo mode.
•MONO button
Downmix in mono mode.
4
DOWNMIX SETUP button
Use this button to open the DOWNMIX SETUP screen. Set the parameters for downmixes.
5
Meter field
Shows the meters for the surround signal being monitored. The layout of the meters is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
6
Speaker Mute field
You can individually mute each speaker that is monitored.
7
SOLO button
Turns on the solo function for the monitor speakers. When turned on, all speaker buttons in the speaker mute field are turned on. At this time, if you press one of the speaker buttons, only that button remains on; the other buttons go off. If you press a different speaker button, the other buttons go off.
NOTE
If you switch to Surround mode, the patch for monitor output can be set in the OUTPUT PORT
screen rather than this screen. (Refer to page 56 .)
Monitor and Cue functions
MONITOR SOURCE SETUP screen
Press the MONITOR SOURCE SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this screen.
1 2
1
1
NAME field
Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the NAME tab selected). Enter the source name in the Keyboard screen.
2
PATCH field
Press this button to open the PATCH/NAME screen (with the PATCH tab selected). Select the port to patch.
108
Reference Manual
DOWNMIX SETUP screen
Press the DOWNMIX SETUP button in the SURROUND MONITOR screen to open this screen. The layout of the channels is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
3
Monitor and Cue functions
Using the Cue function
About Cue groups
Cue signals on the CL series console can be categorized into the following four groups.
1
INPUT CUE group
The cue signals of input channels make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, press the [CUE] key for any input channel to turn Cue on.
1
2
Input channel [CUE] key
NOTE
If input channels or ST IN channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the
[CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.
The cue signals of DCA groups make up this group. To enable Cue for this group, assign the DCA groups to the Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section to turn Cue on.
1
Output channel field
Selects the output channel. You can use the L and R buttons to switch each between on/ off.
2
Downmix parameter field
Sets the downmix parameters for each channel and the master channel monitors.
3
APPLY TO MIX1-6 TO STEREO button
Press this button to apply the downmix parameters for the set monitors to the downmix parameters for the main channel (MIX1-6 to STEREO).
[CUE] key in the Centralogic section
(When using DCA groups)
3
OUTPUT CUE group
The cue signals of output channels make up this group. To switch Cue on or off for this group, press the [CUE] key in the Master section, or assign MIX channels or MATRIX channels to the Centralogic section and press a [CUE] key in the Centralogic section.
[CUE] key in the Master section
109
Reference Manual
[CUE] key in the Centralogic section
(When operating the MIX channel or
MATRIX channel)
NOTE
If STEREO/MONO channels are assigned to the Centralogic section, you can also use the [CUE] keys in the Centralogic section to enable Cue for this group.
4
Other CUE group
These cue signals are operated via buttons displayed on the touch screen. This group is enabled if you turn on the CUE button in the EFFECT window or the PREMIUM window, or if you turn on the KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS 1 window. This group will automatically be disabled when you exit the corresponding window.
On-screen CUE button
NOTE
You cannot turn on cue monitoring between different groups simultaneously. Normally, the group to which the most recently-pressed [CUE] key (or on-screen CUE/KEY IN CUE button) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys for the previously-selected group will be defeated.
However, if you switch the Cue signal group in a specific order, the state of the [CUE] keys of the previously-selected group will be restored when the current Cue signal is defeated.
The following illustration shows the priority order of the [CUE] keys. After you have switched groups from lower to upper levels, if you then defeat cue
Other CUE group for the upper group, the previous
[CUE] key status of the group
INPUT CUE group immediately below will be restored.
DCA CUE group
For example, if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group INPUT CUE group
then
OUTPUT CUE group successively defeat the [CUE] keys
(CUE/KEY IN CUE buttons) to successively restore the [CUE] key status of the previously-selected group.
Monitor and Cue functions
Operating the Cue function
This section explains how to use the [CUE] key for a channel or DCA group to monitor cue signals.
NOTE
The cue signal is sent to the same output destination as the monitor signal. Be aware that for this reason, the cue signal will not be sent to the connected monitor speakers if you turn off the
Monitor function. However, the PHONES Out jack below the front pad will always output cue
signals regardless of the Monitor on/off setting. See
details about the Monitor function.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2.
Press the CUE display button or the INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field in the MONITOR
screen.
3. Use the CUE MODE button in the CUE screen to specify what will happen when
multiple [CUE] keys within the same CUE group are turned on.
4.
Use the buttons and knobs of the INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE field to specify
the output position and output level for each CUE group.
5. Press one of the CUE OUT PATCH buttons (L/R) in the meter field to specify a port
as the output destination for cue signals L and R (multiple selections are allowed).
6.
Press the [CUE] key of the channel or DCA group to be monitored to turn it on.
7. Adjust the Cue signal level by using the [MONITOR LEVEL] knob located in the
SCENE MEMORY/MONITOR section of the top panel.
8.
To defeat cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. To clear all cue
selections, press the CLEAR CUE button in the Meter field.
MONITOR screen
110
Reference Manual
NOTE
• The cue signal is sent to the monitor output and PHONES Out jacks regardless of whether the
CUE OUTPUT button is on or off. However, the cue signal will no longer be sent to monitor output if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned off. The cue signal is always sent to the PHONES Out jack, regardless of the CUE INTERRUPTION setting.
• When using the MIX/MATRIX bus select buttons in the SENDS ON FADER window, you can press the selected button once again to turn on Cue for the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel
• If you want cue operations and channel select operations to be linked, open the USER SETUP window,
• You can also assign the function of the CLEAR CUE button to a USER DEFINED key ( page 197 ).
• If PHONES LEVEL LINK ( page 104 ) in the MONITOR screen is ON, the cue signal level when
monitoring through headphones can be adjusted using both the MONITOR LEVEL knob and the
PHONES LEVEL knob.
• To adjust the level to the output destination port for the cue signal, adjust the gain of the output port that is patched to it.
• If you turn on the [CUE] key, the background of the cue meter in the Function Access Area will turn blue, indicating the cue output level. The upper part of the cue meter shows an abbreviation indicating the currently-on cue group or cue button. The abbreviations displayed for the cue meters have the following meaning.
IN
DCA
OUT
EFFECT
KEY IN
INPUT CUE group
DCA CUE group
OUTPUT CUE group
CUE button in the EFFECT and PREMIUM RACK windows
(Other CUE groups)
KEY IN CUE button in the DYNAMICS1 window
(Other CUE groups)
CUE meter
Monitor and Cue functions
MONITOR screen
The CUE field of the MONITOR screen lets you check the current Cue settings, and turn Cue on/off.
2 3
4
1
5
1
CUE display button
When you press this button, the CUE window will appear, in which you can make detailed cue settings.
2
CUE MODE buttons
Select the cue mode. You can select MIX CUE mode (all selected channels will be cued), or LAST CUE mode (only the channel selected most recently will be cued).
3
INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE section
Indicates the settings for input cue, DCA cue, and output cue. Press this field to open the CUE window.
4
CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on or off.
5
CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously. If MIX CUE mode has been selected, all of the selected channels will be cleared.
111
Reference Manual
CUE window
You can make detailed settings for the cue. This window will appear when you press the
INPUT/DCA/OUTPUT CUE field.
1 2 4 7 A B C
E
F
3 5 6 8 D 9 >
1
CUE MODE buttons
Select one of the following two cue modes:
• MIX CUE
All selected channels will be mixed and monitored.
• LAST CUE
Only most recently selected channel will be monitored.
NOTE
All cue selections will be cleared if you switch between MIX CUE mode and LAST CUE mode in the CUE MODE section.
◆ INPUT CUE field
This field enables you to make settings related to the input channel cue.
2
Cue point select button
Sets the cue point to PFL (immediately before fader), AFL (immediately after fader), or
POST PAN (immediately after PAN).
NOTE
Be aware that if you turn on the POST PAN button, you will be unable to monitor signals sent to the MONO bus from an input channel in LCR mode.
3
PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the multifunction knob.
You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.
Monitor and Cue functions
◆ DCA CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to DCA cue.
4
Cue point select button
Sets the cue point for the DCA group to PRE PAN (immediately before PAN) or POST
PAN (immediately after PAN).
5
DCA TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor level of cue signals from a DCA group. You can adjust the level using the multifunction knob.
You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.
6
UNITY button
Turn on this button to monitor signals at the same volume level that was obtained when the master level for each DCA group was set to 0 dB (unity gain).
◆ OUTPUT CUE field
This section enables you to make settings related to output channel cue.
Sets the cue point for the output channel to PFL (immediately before fader) or AFL
(immediately after fader).
8
PFL TRIM knob
Indicates the monitor levels when PFL is selected. You can adjust the level using the multifunction knob.
You can adjust the monitor levels in the range of -30dB to +20dB.
◆ Meter field
9
ACTIVE CUE indicator
Lights to indicate the type of cue currently being monitored (input: blue, DCA: yellow, output: orange).
10
CLEAR CUE button
Cancels all cue selections simultaneously.
NOTE
If you press the CUE meter in the Function Access Area, all cue selections will be cleared.
A
Meter section
This field indicates the output level of the cue L/R channels.
B
CUE OUTPUT button
Switches the cue output on or off.
C
CUE LEVEL knob
Indicates the output level of the cut out. You can adjust the values by using the multifunction knobs.
112
Reference Manual
D
CUE OUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an output port to patch to the cue out L/R channels.
Monitor and Cue functions
MONITOR screen (CUE field in Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE field in the MONITOR screen appears as shown below.
1
DANTE 1-64
OMNI1-8
Output channels 1-64 to audio network
OMNI OUT jacks 1-8
DIGI OUT L/R DIGITAL OUT jack on the CL unit
SLOT1-1 - SLOT3-16 Output channels 1-16 of an I/O card installed in slots 1-3
◆ FADER CUE RELEASE field
Move the fader of the channel that is cued to set the FADER CUE RELEASE function for releasing the cue.
E
ON button
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
F
THRESHOLD knob
Sets the fader value for releasing the cue. If the fader value exceeds the value set with this knob, the cue is released.
Used to cue only the input channels to be used in the 5.1 channel mix. Outputs,
PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued.
CUE screen (Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the CUE screen (where you can make detailed cue settings) appears as shown below.
1
5.1 SOLO is only for input channels. Outputs, PLAYBACK OUT, and EFFECT cannot be cued.
113
Reference Manual
Talkback and Oscillator
Talkback is a function that sends the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack to the desired bus. This is used mainly to convey instructions from the operator or sound engineer to the performers and staff. If necessary, you can also use a mic connected to an INPUT jack on the I/O device or the OMNI IN jack on the CL unit for talkback.
CL series consoles also feature an oscillator that can output a sine wave or pink noise to the desired bus, so that you will be able to check external equipment or to test the acoustical response of the room or hall.
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the talkback and oscillator signals.
Talkback and Oscillator
Using Talkback
The Talkback function sends the signal (that is input at the input jacks) to the desired bus.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2.
Press the TALKBACK display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3. Connect a mic to the front panel TALKBACK jack, and turn the TALKBACK GAIN knob
to adjust the input sensitivity of the mic.
4.
Press a button in the ASSIGN field in the TALKBACK window to specify the bus(es)
to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
5.
To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK ON button to turn it on.
MONITOR screen
NOTE
• The PAD will be switched on or off internally when the HA gain is adjusted between +17 dB and
+18 dB.
• Keep in mind that noise may be generated if there is a difference between the Hot and Cold output impedance of the external device connected to the INPUT connector when using phantom power.
• You can also assign talkback on/off or an ASSIGN change to a USER DEFINED key. In this case, you can select either a Latch operation or an Unlatch operation (the function will be enabled only
while you continue holding down the key) ( page 197 ).
• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than the
114
Reference Manual
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the TALKBACK field enables you to check the current talkback settings, and turn talkback on or off.
Talkback and Oscillator
4
TALKBACK ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected output destination of the talkback signal.
5
TALKBACK ON button
Switches talkback on or off.
TALKBACK window
You can make detailed settings for talkback. This window appears when you press the
TALKBACK display button in the MONITOR screen.
3 54 6 7 8 9
1
2
1 2 3 4 5
1
TALKBACK display buttons
When you press this button, the TALKBACK screen will appear, in which you can make detailed talkback settings.
2
TALKBACK IN field
• +48V indicator ........................ Indicates the on/off status of the +48V phantom power supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain at the
TALKBACK jack.
3
INPUT TO TALKBACK field
• INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
........................ Press the button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can patch a desired input port to talkback.
The selected port name will appear on the button.
• INPUT GAIN knob ................. Sets the input gain of the selected port.
• Input level meter................... Indicates the level of signals after the input gain.
0
A
◆ TALKBACK IN field
This field enables you to make settings for the TALKBACK jack on the front panel.
Switches on or off the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the TALKBACK jack.
2
TALKBACK level meter
This indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack.
◆ INPUT TO TALKBACK field
This field enables you to route a signal from a mic (connected to a normal input jack) to talkback. If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack as supplementary input for talkback, select an input port here and set the input level.
3
INPUT TO TALKBACK patch button
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window, in which you can select an input port.
115
Reference Manual
4
+48V button
This is an on/off switch for the phantom power (+48V) supplied to the selected input port.
NOTE
This button will not appear if no input port is selected.
5
ANALOG GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain value for the selected input port. Press this knob to control the level using the multifunction knobs.
6
Level meter
Indicates the input level of a mic connected to the selected input port.
7
GC button
Turns the Gain Compensation (gain correction function) on or off. The button will appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.
8
Level meter
Indicates the level after gain compensation. This will appear if the input jack of an I/O device is patched.
9
TALKBACK ON/OFF button
This switches talkback on/off. While talkback is on, the signal from the INPUT jack selected as the TALKBACK jack will be output to the send-destination bus.
◆ ASSIGN field
10
Channel select buttons
These buttons enable you to select a channel on which the talkback signal is sent.
A
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Using the Oscillator function
You can send a sine wave or pink noise from the internal oscillator to the desired bus.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the MONITOR button.
2.
Press the OSCILLATOR display button or the ASSIGN field in the MONITOR screen.
3.
Press a button in the OSCILLATOR MODE field in the OSCILLATOR window to select
the type of signal you want to output.
4.
Use the knobs and buttons in the parameter field to adjust the oscillator parameters.
5. Press a button in the ASSIGN field to specify the input channel(s) or bus(es) to which
the oscillator signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed).
6.
Press the OUTPUT button to enable the oscillator.
Talkback and Oscillator
MONITOR screen
MONITOR screen
In the MONITOR screen, the OSCILLATOR field lets you check the current oscillator settings, and turn the oscillator on or off.
1
2
3 4 5
1
OSCILLATOR display button
When you press this button, the OSCILLATOR screen will appear, in which you can make detailed oscillator settings.
116
Reference Manual
2
OSCILLATOR LEVEL field
Indicates the frequency and level of the currently-selected oscillator. A meter in this field indicates the output level of the oscillator. Press the LEVEL knob to adjust the oscillator level using the multifunction knob.
3
OSCILLATOR MODE field
Indicates the currently-selected oscillator mode. Pressing the MODE button repeatedly will switch modes.
4
OSCILLATOR ASSIGN field
An indicator lights to indicate the currently-selected oscillator output destination (input channels or buses). Use the tabs on the left to select channels or buses to display.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
5
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off.
OSCILLATOR window
You can make detailed settings for the oscillator. This window appears when you press the
OSCILLATOR display button in the MONITOR screen.
1 2
5
4
Talkback and Oscillator
1
OSCILLATOR MODE buttons
Select one of the following four operating modes when the oscillator is turned on:
SINE WAVE
SINE WAVE 2CH
PINK NOISE
BURST NOISE
A sine wave will be output continuously.
Two sine waves of different frequencies will be output separately.
Pink noise will be output continuously.
Pink noise will be output intermittently.
2
Parameter field
Enables you to set the oscillator parameters. The controllers and their functions in this field vary depending on the selected mode.
Mode = SINE WAVE
• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the sine wave. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• FREQ knob ...........Indicates the frequency of the sine wave. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
Mode = SINE WAVE 2CH
3
• LEVEL knob (ODD/L) ........ Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the ODD/L side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• FREQ knob (ODD/L).......... Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the ODD/L side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• LEVEL knob (EVEN/R) ...... Indicates the output level of the sine wave on the EVEN/
R side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• FREQ knob (EVEN/R)........ Indicates the frequency of the sine wave on the EVEN/R side. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
By default, ODD(L) is set to 1kHz and EVEN(R) is set to 400Hz. At this time, there are two meters (L and R).
117
Reference Manual
Mode = PINK NOISE
• LEVEL knob ..........Indicates the output level of the pink noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• HPF knob ..............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the HPF that processes pink noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
Use the button below the knob to switch the HPF on or off.
• LPF knob...............Indicates the cutoff frequency of the LPF that processes pink noise. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
Use the button below the knob to switch the LPF on or off.
Mode = BURST NOISE
• LEVEL knob, HPF knob, and LPF knob
....................Same as in PINK NOISE mode.
• WIDTH ...................Indicates the length of noise being output intermittently. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
• INTERVAL..............Indicates the length of silence between noise bursts. You can adjust the value by using the multifunction knob.
Level
Pink noise output
INTERVAL
WIDTH
Time
Turn BURST NOISE button on.
Talkback and Oscillator
3
ASSIGN section
Enables you to select a channel to which the oscillator signal will be sent. Press one of the three tabs below to select the type of channels displayed, and then press the button(s) for the desired channel(s) (multiple selections are allowed). The
“ASSIGNED” indicator is lit green for a tab that contains a selection.
If the mode is set to SINE WAVE 2CH, the signal is output to either odd (ODD(L) side) or even (EVEN(R) side) of the selected channel. For example, the signal set to ODD(L) is output in MIX1, and the signal set to EVEN(R) is output in MIX2.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button to defeat all selections.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
4
Meter section
Indicates the oscillator output level.
5
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT button
Turns the oscillator output on or off. If you turn this button on, the oscillator signal will be sent to the input channel or bus you selected in the ASSIGN section. When you press the button again, the oscillator will turn off.
118
Reference Manual
Meters
This chapter explains the METER screen that shows the input and output level meters for all channels, and operations related to the optional MBCL meter bridge.
Operations in the METER screen
By accessing the METER screen, you can view the input and output levels of all channels on the screen, and switch the level meter's metering points (the points in the signal route at which the level is detected). To access the METER screen, press the METER field of the Function
Access Area.
INPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all input channels.
INPUT/OUTPUT/RTA tab
Use these tabs to switch between the INPUT METER screen, OUTPUT METER screen, and
RTA screen.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
OUTPUT METER screen
This screen shows the meters and faders for all output channels.
Meters
119
Reference Manual
Fader level and meter display
This area displays the meter and fader for each channel.
1
2
3
4
5
When the [ON] key for channel 7 is ON, and the [ON] key for channel 8 is OFF
1
Channel number
Indicates the channel number.
2
Σ clipping indicator
Lights to indicate that a signal is clipping at some point in the channel.
3
OVER indicator
Lights if the signal is clipping at the input section of the channel.
4
Meters
Indicates the input or output level of the channel.
5
Faders
The channel level is indicated by the fader position and by a numeric value (in dB) that appears immediately below the fader. If the channel’s [ON] key is OFF, the fader turns gray.
NOTE
Press any part of the meter area to assign the corresponding fader bank to the Centralogic section.
Centralogic fader display
This area displays the level of faders that are currently set in the Centralogic section.
Meters
METERING POINT field
Select one of the following as the metering point at which the level will be detected. The metering point for the level meter can be specified independently for input channels and output channels.
◆ For INPUT METER
•
PRE GC .................Immediately before GAIN
COMPENSATION
•
PRE D.GAIN ..........Immediately before DIGITAL GAIN
•
•
POST D. GAIN .......Immediately after DIGITAL GAIN
PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader
(Immediately before INPUT DELAY)
•
POST ON ...............Immediately after the [ON] key
◆ For OUTPUT METER
•
PRE EQ .................Immediately before the EQ
•
PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader
•
POST ON ...............immediately after the [ON] key
NOTE
On the CL3 or CL1 console, the metering point for output channels will also affect the optional meter bridge (MBCL).
PEAK HOLD button
Turn on this button to hold the peak level indication on each meter. Turn off this button to clear the peak hold indication. PEAK HOLD button on/off operations will affect both input channels and output channels as well as the MBCL meter bridge. When you turn this button off, the peak level indication that had been held will be cleared.
NOTE
You can also assign the PEAK HOLD button on/off function to a USER DEFINED key ( page 197 ).
120
Reference Manual
SHOW SEND LEVEL button
If you switch to SENDS ON FADER mode when this button is on, the color and position of the faders in the INPUT METER screen show the type of send destination bus, the send level to that bus, and ON/OFF status.
◆ For INPUT METER
RTA METER screen
This is the real time analyzer screen. The results of a frequency analysis for the selected source are shown in the 1/6 octave band (61 band).
3 4
Meters
5
Fader color
The channel color is the same as the currently selected MIX/MATRIX bus (SEND MASTER).
The position of the fader is the level of the signal sent to the bus.
The fader turns gray if you switch the SEND button to OFF or switch the channel OFF.
◆ For OUTPUT METER
Only the fader for the signal sent from the MIX bus to the MATRIX bus changes color.
1
2
6
7
1
Frequency Response graph
A graph of a frequency analysis is shown in the 1/6 octave band.
2
Source selection buttons
Use these buttons to specify the output channel whose frequency response you want to see.
3
OVER display
Data that exceeds 0dB is shown the same as the OVER indicator.
4
Cross-hair cursor display
The frequency and level at the point you touch on the graph are displayed.
121
Reference Manual
5
CUE OVERRIDE button
If this button is switched on, the cue signal set in the CUE screen is sent to the real time analyzer, and an analysis is displayed.
• If CUE MODE is set to MIX CUE, the frequency analysis is performed on a signal that is a mix of all channels selected in the CUE screen.
• If CUE MODE is set to 5.1 SOLO, the signal is treated as LAST CUE. In other words, the frequency analysis is performed on the POST ON signal of the input channel.
6
BALLISTICS field
• BALLISTICS button
Setting this switch to ON allows you to add rate of decay to the graph.
• FAST/SLOW switch button
Use this button to set the rate of decay (FAST/SLOW).
7
HOLD button
Press this button to hold the graph that displays frequency response.
METER screen (Surround mode)
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen appears as shown below.
Meters
1 2
1
MONITOR
Meters for MIX1-6. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the
SURROUND SETUP screen.
2
SURROUND METER select button
Selects the meters displayed in the Function Access Area.
• MIX1-6
Source for MIX1-6.
• MONITOR
Source selected in SURROUND MONITOR. For 2CH MONITOR, the layout remains 5.1, but with meters only for L and R.
122
Reference Manual
Function Access Area screen
If you set a bus to Surround mode in BUS SETUP, the METER screen in the Function Access
Area appears as shown below.
The display specifications are as follows.
• The meter for the SURROUND signal is shown on the left side, and the meter for the
STEREO signal is shown on the right side. The layout for L R C LFE Ls and Rs is the same as the layout set in the SURROUND SETUP screen.
When cue is operating
• EFFECT CUE is shown on the right side, as usual.
• The 5.1 SOLO CUE display is updated on the left side. However, if CUE MODE is set to
5.1 SOLO, no cue other than 5.1 SOLO CUE is possible.
• Touch the CUE (or 5.1 SOLO) display area to clear the cue, as usual.
Using an MBCL meter bridge (optional) on the CL3
or CL1 console
If an optional meter bridge (MBCL) is installed on the CL3 or CL1 console, you will always be able to view the output levels of MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, MONO, and CUE channels, in the same way as in the meter section of CL5.
The MBCL meters indicate the MIX channel and MATRIX channel output levels in 12-segment steps (OVER, -3dB, -6dB, -9dB, -12dB, -15dB, -18dB, -24dB, -30dB, -40dB, -50dB, -60dB).
You can select the metering point (the point at which the level is detected) from the following
choices. For information on how to change the metering point, refer to
• PRE EQ..................Immediately before the EQ
• PRE FADER...........Immediately before the fader
• POST ON ...............immediately after the [ON] key
123
Meters
Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and
PREMIUM RACK
This chapter explains how to use the built-in graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effects, and Premium
Rack.
About the virtual rack
CL series consoles enable you to use the built-in graphic EQ (subsequently abbreviated as
“GEQ” ), parametric EQ (subsequently abbreviated as “PEQ” ), and effects/processors to modify signals. You can use two types of GEQ: 31BandGEQ which enables you to freely adjust thirty-one bands (frequency regions), and Flex15GEQ which enables you to adjust any fifteen of thirty-one bands. The 8Band PEQ allows you to freely adjust 8 bands (frequency regions), and also features an HPF, an LPF, and 3 notch filters.
You can also use 54 different effect types. The CL series consoles feature Premium Rack, which employs VCM technology. This technology models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce amazing analog sounds. The Premium Rack offers seven types of processors.
In order to use a GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack, you must mount the GEQ, PEQ, effect, or Premium Rack in each virtual rack, and patch the input and output of that rack to the desired signal route. In other words, the operation is just as though you had installed a signal processor or effect device in an actual rack, and used patch cords to connect it. You can mount a GEQ or PEQ instance in each of the sixteen racks 1-16 and EFFECT, an effect rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8, and a Premium Rack instance in each of the eight racks 1-8.
Up to two channels of input and output can be used for each rack. (However, if the
“31BandGEQ” is mounted in a rack, there will be only one channel each for input and output.)
The figure below shows the signal flow for the virtual racks.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
NOTE
• In addition to the virtual racks for GEQ, PEQ, effects and Premium Rack, the CL console also provides racks for mounting an I/O device (such as an R series) or external head amps (Yamaha
AD8HR, SB168-ES, etc.). For details, refer to
I/O devices and external head amps
• With CL V1.7 and later, you can use the [SEL] key to switch channels in the EFFECT popup window, GEQ popup window, and PREMIUM RACK popup window.
Pressing a top panel [SEL] key in the EFFECT popup window while operating the effect parameter will switch to the window of the effect that is inserted in that channel. The same applies to the GEQ popup window and the PREMIUM RACK popup window. You can also switch from the EFFECT popup window to the GEQ popup window or PREMIUM RACK popup window. The following items change according to the target channel.
• Selected channel display in the Function Access Area
• Operated channel in synchronized CL Editor
If there are no insert settings on a channel that has been selected, a notification dialog box will be displayed.
124
Reference Manual
Virtual rack operations
This section explains how to mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the virtual rack, and patch the input and output of the rack as an example.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2. In the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window, press the GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or
EFFECT tab.
3. To mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack, press the rack mount button for that
rack.
4. Use the buttons in the MODULE SELECT field in the RACK MOUNTER window to
select the item you want to mount, and press the OK button.
5.
Press the INPUT PATCH button.
6.
In the CH SELECT window, select the input source and then press the OK button.
7.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH button.
8.
In the CH SELECT window, select the output destination and then press the OK
button.
VIRTUAL RACK screen
1
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
1
2 3 4 6 5 2 3 4 6 5
1
Rack tabs
Selects the type of rack you want to display on the screen. Choose from GEQ 1-8, GEQ
9-16 (GEQ rack), EFFECT (effect rack), or PREMIUM (Premium Rack).
2
Rack mount button
Press this button to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the type of the rack you want to mount.
Function
Access Area
VIRTUAL RACK window
NOTE
• In steps 6 and 8, you can make settings such that the confirmation dialog box will not appear
• The type of GEQ, PEQ, or effect mounted in each rack, its parameter settings, and the input- source and output-destination settings are saved as part of the scene.
3
SAFE button
Switches Recall Safe on or off for the rack. If this button is turned on for a rack, the contents and parameters of that rack will not change when a scene is recalled. For more
information on Recall Safe, refer to “ Using the Recall Safe function ” ( page 73 ).
The Recall Safe settings of each rack will not preserve the input/output patching to that rack. Recall Safe settings for patching must be made on the input-source or output- destination channel.
125
Reference Manual
4
INPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or
8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack input.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
5
OUTPUT PATCH button
If the type is EFFECT, two buttons (L/R) will appear. If the type is Flex15GEQ or
8BandPEQ, two buttons (A/B) will appear. If the type is 31BandGEQ, one button will appear.
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the path of the signal patched to the rack output.
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• OUT CH .................................... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8 *1
• ST/MONO ................................. STEREO L/R, MONO
*1
• INSERT 1 OUT 1-32 ................. CH1-32 *1
• INSERT 1 OUT 33-64 ............... CH33-64 *1
• INSERT 1 OUT 65-72 ............... CH65-72
*1
• INSERT 1 OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
• INSERT 1 OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 OUT 1-32 ................. CH1-32 *1
• INSERT 2 OUT 33-64 ............... CH33-64
*1
• INSERT 2 OUT 65-72 ............... CH65-72
*1
• INSERT 2 OUT MIX/MATRIX.... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
• INSERT 2 OUT ST/MONO........ STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• In the case of the GEQ or PEQ, patching it to either an insert-out or insert-in will automatically assign the other patch point to the same rack. Also, insert mode will automatically be switched on. Additionally, if you defeat the insert-out or insert-in of a GEQ or PEQ, the other patch point will automatically be defeated and at the same time insert mode will automatically be switched off.
• For effects, if you select “DYNAMICS&EQ” for EFFECT TYPE, the operation is the same as for
GEQ above.
• For PREMIUM RACK, the operation is the same as for GEQ above.
• For more information on insert-in/out, refer to “
Inserting an external device into a channel
The categories and channels that can be selected are shown below.
• CH1-32 ................................... CH1-32
*1
• CH33-64................................. CH33-64
*1
• CH65-72................................. CH65-72 *1
• INSERT 1 IN 1-32 .................. CH1-32 *1
• INSERT 1 IN 33-64 ................ CH33-64
*1
• INSERT 1 IN 65-72 ................ CH65-72
*1
• INSERT 1 IN MIX/MATRIX .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
• INSERT 1 IN ST/MONO......... STEREO L/R, MONO
• INSERT 2 IN 1-32 .................. CH1-32
*1
• INSERT 2 IN 33-64 ................ CH33-64
*1
• INSERT 2 IN 65-72 ................ CH65-72 *1
• INSERT 2 IN MIX/MATRIX .... MIX 1-24, MATRIX 1-8
• INSERT 2 IN ST/MONO......... STEREO L/R, MONO
*1. Not displayed for GEQ 9-16 RACK.
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• If you use CL5 settings data on the CL3/CL1, or CL3 settings data on the CL1, buttons will be shown crossed-out if they are assigned to a channel that does not exist on that model.
126
Reference Manual
6
Rack container
Indicates the contents of the rack. This container varies depending on the rack type you selected in the RACK MOUNTER window.
• If nothing is mounted:
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
• If 16ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-8):
Press this area to open the RACK MOUNTER window, in which you can select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack.
• If 31BandGEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, GEQ on/off status, and input/output level.
Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings.
• If Flex15GEQ is mounted:
This area indicates the settings for each band, the GEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the GEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the GEQ settings for A and B.
• If 8BandPEQ is mounted:
• If 8ch Automixer is mounted (GEQ rack 1-4):
This area indicates the EQ frequency response, the PEQ on/off status, and the input and output levels for A and B respectively. Press this area to open the PEQ EDIT window, in which you can modify the PEQ settings for A and B.
• If an effect is mounted (EFFECT rack only):
This area indicates the effect type, number of inputs and outputs, bypass on/off status, and the input/output level. Press this area to open the EFFECT EDIT window, in which you can modify the effect settings.
127
Press this area to open the AUTOMIXER EDIT window, in which you can modify the automixer settings.
Reference Manual
7
7
Link indicator
Indicates that an odd-numbered rack and even-numbered rack of the 31BandGEQ, A and B of the Flex15GEQ, or A and B of the 8BandPEQ are linked to each other.
RACK MOUNTER window
Mount a GEQ, PEQ, or effect in the rack. This window will appear if you press the rack mount button in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
1 2 1 2
3 4 5 3 4 5
1
Rack number
Indicates the number for the selected rack.
2
Virtual rack
This area indicates the GEQ or effect selected via the MODULE SELECT buttons.
3
MODULE SELECT field
Select the GEQ or effect that will be mounted in the rack. Each button has the following function.
• BLANK button....................... Removes the GEQ or effect currently mounted in the rack; the rack will be empty.
• 31BandGEQ button .............. Mounts a 31BandGEQ in the rack.
• Flex15GEQ button ................ Mounts a Flex15GEQ in the rack.
• 8BandPEQ button................. Mounts an 8BandPEQ in the rack.
• EFFECT button (only for EFFECT rack)
........................ Mounts an effect in the rack.
• 16ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)
........................ Mounts a 16ch Automixer in the rack.
• 8ch Automixer button (GEQ rack 1 only)
........................ Mounts an 8ch Automixer in the rack.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
NOTE
• Input/output patching will be defeated when you change the item mounted in a rack.
• The 16ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 8, and the 8ch Automixer is used in racks 1 to 4.
4
CANCEL button
Cancels the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
5
OK button
Applies the changes you made in the RACK MOUNTER window, and closes the window.
NOTE
Be aware that if you remove a GEQ, PEQ, or effect that was mounted in a rack and close the
RACKMOUNTER window, all edits to the parameter settings for that GEQ, PEQ, or effect will be discarded. If you have not yet closed the window, you can recover the parameter settings by mounting the same GEQ, PEQ, or effect once again.
Graphic EQ operations
The CL series console enables you to mount a GEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a STEREO/
MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insert- out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel. The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section's faders and [ON] keys.
The following two types of GEQ are provided.
◆ 31BandGEQ
This is a monaural 31-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB, and the gain of all thirty-one bands can be adjusted.
If a 31BandGEQ is mounted in a rack, one channel of input and output can be used for that rack.
◆ Flex15GEQ
INPUT OUTPUT
Rack
31BandGEQ
This is a monaural 15-band GEQ. Each band is 1/3 octave wide, and the adjustable gain range is ±15 dB.
The Flex15GEQ enables you to adjust the gain for
INPUT
Rack
OUTPUT
Flex15GEQ (A) any fifteen of the same bands as the thirty-one bands of the 31bandGEQ. (Once you have used up fifteen
Flex15GEQ (B) bands of adjustment, you will not be able to adjust the gain of another band until you reset a previously-adjusted band to the flat setting.)
A rack for which the Flex15GEQ is selected will have two Flex15GEQ units (shown as
“A” and
“B” respectively) mounted in that rack, and will allow two channels of input and output.
128
Reference Manual
1
Inserting a GEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a GEQ into the selected channel for use.
STEP
1.
Refer to steps 1-8 in “ Virtual rack operations ” ( page 125 ) to mount a GEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2.
In the GEQ field, press the rack container in which you mounted the GEQ.
3. If you're using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two GEQ
units.
4.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the GEQ on.
NOTE
• If you are using a stereo source, you can mount a Flex15GEQ, or mount two 31BandGEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks. This will let you link the two GEQ units in a later step.
• You can view the input and output levels of the GEQ in the rack in the GEQ field.
• For details on GEQ operations, refer to the following section “
GEQ EDIT window
NOTE
The windows for the 31BandGEQ and the Flex15GEQ are nearly identical. However, the
Flex15GEQ individually displays two GEQ units (A and B) mounted in a single rack.
2 3 4 5 6
1
Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1-8 or among GEQ 9-16. For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
129
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
2
INPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
GEQ field.
3
OUTPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field.
4
RACK LINK button
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent GEQ units.
In the case of a 31bandGEQ, the GEQ units in adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered racks will be linked. In the case of a Flex15GEQ, the GEQ(A) and GEQ(B) within the same rack will be linked.
• GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link
GEQ units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
5
FLAT button
Returns all bands of the currently-selected GEQ to 0 dB.
6
GEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently-selected GEQ on or off.
Reference Manual
For GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ, Flex15GEQ)
1
2
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
• With CL version 2.0 or later, pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted gain value. In this way, comparison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ± 0dB.
• If you switch the display to a different screen or rack, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the faders will automatically move to the group of bands you had previously been controlling.
• When you close the GEQ EDIT window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
GEQ EDIT window (31BandGEQ)
4
1
RTA button
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
2
HOLD button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
Using the 31BandGEQ
You will use the Centralogic section's faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the 31BandGEQ.
STEP
1. In the GEQ field rack, press the rack container in which you mounted the
31BandGEQ.
2.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the 31BandGEQ on.
3.
Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you
will control.
4.
Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band.
5.
When you've finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
NOTE
• When a fader of the Centralogic section is in the center (flat) position, the corresponding [ON] key will go dark. This indicates that the corresponding band is not being modified. If you raise or lower the fader even the slightest amount, the [ON] key will light, indicating that this band has been modified. If you press a lit [ON] key to make it go dark, the corresponding band will immediately return to the flat state.
1
2
3
1
EQ graph
Indicates the approximate response of the current 31Band GEQ.
2
Faders
Indicate the amount of boost and cut for each band of the 31BandGEQ. The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below.
3
FADER ASSIGN field
In this field you can select the group of bands that will be controlled by the Centralogic section's faders. The buttons of the FADER ASSIGN field correspond to the following groups of bands.
The eight bands 20.0 Hz--100 Hz
The eight bands 63.0 Hz--315 Hz
The eight bands 200 Hz--1.00 kHz
The eight bands 630 Hz--3.15 kHz
The eight bands 2.00 kHz--10.0 kHz
The eight bands 4.00 kHz--20.0 kHz
20-100
63-315
200-1k
630-3.15k
2k-10k
4k-20k
130
Reference Manual
When you press one of these buttons, the faders for the bands selected on screen will turn white, and the numbers of the corresponding faders in the Centralogic section will be displayed. Now you can use the faders in the Centralogic section to control the bands.
NOTE
The above operation is possible even if the Centralogic section is locked. When you turn off the button in the FADER ASSIGN field, it will return to the locked state.
4
Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displayed 31BandGEQ settings to the GEQ of another rack, or initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner's Manual.
NOTE
• Only 31BandGEQ settings that use fifteen bands or less can be copied to a Flex15GEQ.
• GEQ settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the dedicated library.
Using the Flex15GEQ
You will use the Centralogic section's faders 1-8 and [ON] keys to control the Flex15GEQ.
A rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted will show information for two GEQ units (A and B) in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
• With CL version 2.0 or later, pressing the [ON] key again for this band will restore the adjusted gain value. In this way, comparison is easy and quick. However, please note that if the [ON] key for this band is off and if you press the [ON] key for the fader of a different frequency band, the adjusted gain value will be canceled and will return to ± 0dB.
• If you switch the display to a different screen, the fader assignments in the Centralogic section will forcibly be defeated. However if you once again display the same rack, the group of bands you had previously been controlling will automatically be assigned to the faders.
• When you close the GEQ window, the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field automatically turn off.
GEQ EDIT window (Flex 15GEQ)
NOTE
If you mount a Flex15GEQ, two monaural 31BandGEQ units will be placed in a single rack.
However, only up to fifteen bands can be adjusted for each unit.
STEP
1.
Press the rack container in which you mounted Flex15GEQ.
2.
Press the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn the Flex15GEQ on.
3.
Press one of the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN field to select the group of bands you
will control.
4.
Use the faders in the Centralogic section to adjust the selected band.
5. When you've finished making settings, turn off the buttons in the FADER ASSIGN
field.
NOTE
• The [ON] key will light if you raise or lower a fader even the slightest amount. This indicates that the corresponding band is being modified.
• To quickly return a boosted or cut band to the flat position, press the corresponding [ON] key in the Centralogic section to make it go dark.
This window is the same as that for the 31BandGEQ, except that the AVAILABLE BANDS parameter box indicates the real-time number of additional bands (maximum 15) that can be controlled in the current GEQ.
For a rack in which a Flex15GEQ is mounted, the rack switch tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
131
Reference Manual
Parametric EQ operations
In addition to the standard 4-band EQ, CL series consoles also feature an 8-band parametric
EQ (PEQ) that can be rack mounted. You can mount this PEQ in GEQ racks 1-16 and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel (GEQ 1-8 rack only), a MIX/MATRIX channel, or a
STEREO/MONO channel. You can also mount it in EFFECT racks 1-8 (FX 1-8) and patch it to the insert-out/in of an input channel, MIX/MATRIX channel or STEREO/MONO channel.
The gain of each band can be adjusted using the Centralogic section's faders and [ON] keys.
The following type of PEQ is provided.
8BandPEQ
This is a monaural 8-band PEQ. There are also an independent HPF, LPF, and 3 notch filters.
Two 8BandPEQ units (shown as
“A” and “B” respectively) can be mounted in a rack, and therefore you can use two channels of input and output for each rack.
PEQ EDIT window
1 2
D
E
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
4 3 5 6 7 8
9
0
A
B
◆ Inserting a PEQ in a channel
This section explains how to insert a PEQ into the selected channel for use.
STEP
1.
Refer to steps 1-8 in “ Virtual rack operations ” ( page 125 ) to mount a PEQ in a rack
and set its input source and output destination.
2.
In the GEQ field rack or the EFFECT field rack, press the rack container in which you
mounted the PEQ.
3.
If you're using a stereo source, press the RACK LINK button to link the two PEQ units.
4.
Press the PEQ ON/OFF button to turn the PEQ on.
NOTE
• You can view the input and output levels of the PEQ in the rack in the GEQ or EFFECT field.
• For details on PEQ operations, refer section “
C
1
PEQ graph
Displays the parameter values for the PEQ and filter.
2
INPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the input source of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the INPUT button in the
GEQ field.
3
OUTPUT button
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the output destination of the rack. The operating procedure is the same as for the OUTPUT button in the GEQ field.
4
LIBRARY button
Press this button to open the PEQ Library window.
5
DEFAULT button
Press this button to restore the default parameter setting.
132
Reference Manual
6
COPY button
All EQ parameter settings will be copied in buffer memory.
7
PASTE button
Press this button to paste the copied settings from buffer memory to the current EQ. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
8
COMPARE button
Press this button to swap between the current EQ settings and the data stored in buffer memory. If no valid data has been copied in the buffer memory, nothing will happen.
9
RACK LINK button
Press this button to open the RACK LINK window, in which you can link adjacent PEQ units.
In the case of an 8BandPEQ, PEQ (A) and PEQ (B) within the same rack will be linked.
• GEQ x y button ( “x” and “y” are the rack number, or the rack number and
alphabetical character A or B)
The parameters of “x” will be copied to “y,” and then linked.
• GEQ y x button
The parameters of “y” will be copied to “x,” and then linked.
• RESET BOTH button
The parameters of both will be initialized, and then linked.
• CANCEL button
Cancels the link and closes the window.
NOTE
The RACK LINK button is shown only if linking is possible. When you link RACK units, a symbol will appear in the GEQ field to indicate the linked status.
10
PEQ ON/OFF button
Switches the currently selected PEQ on/off.
A
PEQ FLAT button
Press this button to reset the GAIN parameters of all PEQ bands to 0 dB.
All ON buttons for HPF, LPF, and notch filters are turned off.
All other parameter values are maintained and are not reset.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
B
PEQ IN/OUT level meters
Indicate the peak level of signals before and after the PEQ.
C
Rack select tabs
Switch among GEQ 1-8, GEQ 9-16, or EFFECT 1-8. For a rack in which an 8BandPEQ is mounted, the tabs will be split as xA and xB (x is the rack number).
NOTE
For details on how to use the buttons, refer to
“Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner's
Manual.
D
RTA button
Turn this button on to overlay a frequency response graph on the EQ.
E
HOLD button
Press this button to hold the peak of the graph that displays RTA.
PEQ EDIT window (8PEQ)
1
2
3 1 3
133
Reference Manual
1
BYPASS button
You can bypass each band.
2
HPF/LPF NOTCH button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating HPF/LPF/notch filters.
1
3
EQ parameter setting knobs
Indicates the Q, FREQUENCY, and GAIN parameters for the BAND1 - BAND8 bands. You can use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust this.
PEQ EDIT window (HPF/LPF NOTCH)
3
4
3
4
1
2
5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6
1
Attenuation select button
There are four types of HPF and LPF. This button switches the attenuation per octave between -24 dB/oct, -18dB/oct, -12 dB/oct, and -6dB/oct.
2
8PEQ button
Press this button to switch to the screen for operating the 8-band PEQ.
134
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
3
HPF/LPF frequency knob
This knob is used to adjust the HPF/LPF frequency.
4
ON button
There is an ON button for the HPF, LPF, and each of the three notch filters.
5
Notch Filter Q knob
Adjusts the Q of the notch filter.
6
Notch Filter frequency knob
Adjusts the frequency of the notch filter.
Reference Manual
About AUTOMIXER
Automixer is included as a standard feature on the CL series. Automixer searches for enabled mics and automatically optimizes gain distribution, for uses such as speeches without scripts.
This allows uniform system gain to be maintained among multiple mics, freeing the engineer from making constant fader adjustments.
Automixer operating principle
With the Dugan speech system used in Automixer, you can automatically adjust the automix gain for up to 16 mics used for speeches.
When 1 person speaks on multiple mics When 2 people speak on multiple mics
Mic input audio
(dB)
Mic input audio
(dB)
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Inserting Automixer in channels post-fader
This section explains how to mount Automixer in a virtual rack, and insert Automixer input and output into channels (excluding ST IN channels) post-fader (POST ON). For details on
Automixer operations, refer to the following section “Using Automixer.”
STEP
1.
Refer to steps 1-8 in “ Virtual rack operations ” ( page 125 ) to mount Automixer in
rack 1 and set its input source and output destination.
2.
Refer to “ Inserting an external device into a channel ” ( page 20 ) to insert Automixer
in post-fader (POST ON field).
Using Automixer
Master field
Channel control field
Gain (dB) in
Automix
When 1 person is speaking, the gain on the mic being used is immediately increased and the gain on all other mics is reduced. The same operation occurs even if another person is speaking.
Gain (dB) in
Automix
If 2 people are speaking at the same time, gain is automatically distributed so that the total gain is consistent across both mics, and the gain on the remaining mic is reduced.
The Dugan speech system functions differently from a limiter or auto level controller. When multiple people are speaking, the engineer can adjust the each level using the faders as normal. Even if nobody is speaking, the system searches for mic audio and automatically distributes gain. Therefore, faders can be left in their raised positions.
Channel display
The auto mix gain meter for each channel and man (yellow), auto (green), and mute (red) settings are shown for channels 1-8 and channels 9-16.
If you select the channel 1-8 or 9-16 region, the display channel for the channel control field will switch to 1-8 or 9-16.
(For 8ch Automixer, only channels 1-8 are shown.)
135
Reference Manual
◆ Channel control field
Each channel is always in man, auto, or mute mode. The indicator for the enabled channel mode will light. To select a mode, either press the button for that mode or press the PRESET button in the master field.
1
2
4
6
7
3
5
8
1
Level indicator
Lights green when the audio is at an optimum level for Automix.
NOTE
• If the level indicator flashes, increase the input gain.
• If the level indicator lights up red, reduce the input gain.
2
Meter indicator
There are three display modes. Pressing the meters button in the master field will switch modes. gain input output
Displays the gain for Automixer.
Displays the input level.
Displays the output level.
Green
Yellow
Blue
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
136
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
3
weight
Adjusts the correlative sensitivity between input channels. When there is no input, adjust the weight setting so that all auto mix gain meters are at about the same level. For example, if you can hear noise near one mic (such as noise from a computer ventilation fan or an air conditioner), you can suppress the noise by reducing the weight setting for that channel.
To change the channel weight settings, use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to adjust the weight slider.
Automixer calculates the ratio of input level for specific channels for all input mixes in the group. The following example explains the weight control mechanism.
◆ When increasing the weight setting in one channel
• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel increases, while the values for other channels are reduced.
• Channels with high weight setting values receive a higher automix gain than other channels.
When reducing the weight setting in one channel
• The value displayed in the auto mix gain meter for that channel decreases, while the values for other channels are increased.
• When speaking into multiple mics at the same time, it is difficult to distinguish between different mics.
4
group
Each channel can be assigned to three groups (a/b/c).
This group function is convenient for the following uses.
•
Using multiple rooms: Assign the mics in each room to their own groups, and use a different Automixer for each.
•
Stereo pan: Assign mics panned to left, right and center to groups a, b, and c, to maintain a stable stereo field.
5
override
If you turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field, the channel will switch to man mode or mute mode according to the settings for that channel's override button.
• When the channel's override button is on, the mode for that channel will switch to man when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.
• When the channel's override is off, the mode for that channel will switch to mute when the master OVERRIDE button is turned on.
• When the master OVERRIDE button is turned off, the channel will return to its previous mode.
The override function is convenient when the moderator of a panel discussion wants to control the system.
Follow the instructions below to change the settings.
1.
Turn on the override button on the moderator's channel.
2.
Turn off the override button on all other channels.
3.
Turn on the OVERRIDE button in the master field as needed.
Reference Manual
6
Channel number
Displays the channel number and channel name of the channel to be inserted.
7
man/auto/mute
Toggles between man/auto/mute. man: Passes the audio through without changing the gain. This mode is used for singing with a mic. auto: Turns on Automixer. This mode is used for conversations. mute: Mutes channels.
8
preset
Selects the channel mode (man/auto/mute) when the PRESET button in the master field is pressed. The preset button lights when a preset is programmed for a channel.
◆ Master field
1
2 3
1
OVERRIDE/PRESET/MUTE
Makes settings for each group (a/b/c) selected in the channel control field. Shows only the selected group.
• OVERRIDE
When you press this button, channels where the channel override button is on will fade in to 0 dB (unity gain). All channels with the override button turned off will be muted.
• PRESET
When you press this button, each channel will switch to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
• MUTE
When you press this button, all channels will fade out immediately (0.5 seconds).
2
meters
Switches the meter indicator in the channel control field. Toggles between gain, input, and output each time you press the button.
NOTE
Meters should normally be set in gain mode.
3
reset
Initializes the Automixer settings.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
Editing the internal effects
The internal effects of the CL series console can be mounted in EFFECT racks 1-8, and patched to an output channel's output or input channel's input, or inserted into a channel. For each effect mounted in a rack, you can choose one of 54 types of effect.
With the default settings, the signals from MIX channels 17-24 are input to racks 1-8, and from the racks are then output to ST IN 1-8 (L/R).
NOTE
Some effect types can be mounted only in racks 1, 3, 5 or 7.
To use an internal effect via send and return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding output channel is used as a master channel for the effect send, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel.
Rack 1
EFFECT
Output of the output channel
Rack 2
EFFECT
Input of the input channel
Rack 7
EFFECT
Rack 8
EFFECT
Alternatively, you can assign the input and output of the internal effect to the insert-out/in of a desired channel (except for a ST IN channel), so that the effect is inserted into that channel.
Insert-out of a desired channel*
EFFECT
Insert-in of a desired channel*
* Excluding a ST IN channel
The internal effects fall into two categories;
“STEREO type” (2-in/2-out) effects that process the L/R channel input signals independently, and
“MIX type” (1-in/2-out) effects that mix the two channels before processing them.
If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows.
137
Reference Manual
◆ STEREO type effects
INPUT L
INPUT R
EFFECT L
EFFECT R
◆ MIX type effects
INPUT L
INPUT R
EFFECT
L RETURN
R RETURN
L RETURN
R RETURN
If a signal is assigned to only one input of a two-input effect, it will be processed as mono-in/ stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. However, please note that this will not apply to COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S,
EQUALIZER601, and OPENDECK.
INPUT L or R
EFFECT
L RETURN
R RETURN
Using an internal effect via send and return
This section explains how to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus and a ST IN channel as an effect return channel, so that the effect can be used in a send and return configuration.
NOTE
• If you want to use a MIX bus as an effect send bus, select “VARI” as the bus type. This will allow you to adjust the send level separately for each input channel.
• If you want to use the input to an effect in stereo, it can be convenient to assign the send-
destination MIX bus to stereo. (For details on bus assignments, refer to page 51 .)
STEP
1.
Follow steps 1-3 described in “ Virtual rack operations ” ( page 125 ), to mount an
effect in a rack.
2.
Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select a MIX
channel as the input source for the rack ( page 125
3. Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the L
input of a ST IN channel as the output destination for the rack ( page 125
4.
Adjust the send level from each channel in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the
OVERVIEW screen.
5. Adjust the master level of the effect send of the MIX channel you selected as the
input source for the rack.
6.
Adjust the effect return level of the ST IN channel you selected as the output
destination for the rack.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
NOTE
• If you're using a stereo source, assign the L/R signals of the stereo MIX channels to the L/R inputs of the rack.
• If you're using the output of the effect in stereo, assign the R input of the ST IN channel selected in step 3 to the R output of the rack.
• You can select more than one output destination for the effect.
• For more information on setting the effect parameters, refer to “
Editing the internal effect parameters
◆ Adjusting the effect send level of a input channel
In the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field in the OVERVIEW screen, press and select the TO MIX SEND
LEVEL knob for the MIX bus set as the input source for the rack, and use the multifunction knob to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to that MIX bus.
NOTE
• If a MATRIX bus is shown in the TO MIX/TO MATRIX field, use the [MIX 1-16] key or the [MIX 17-
24/MATRIX] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the MIX bus at the input source for the rack.
• When adjusting the effect send level, make sure that the send level from the ST IN channel you selected as the output destination for the rack to the corresponding MIX bus is set to 0. If you raise this send level, the output of the effect will be returned to the input of the same effect, possibly causing oscillation.
• If you press the knob once again, the MIX SEND window (8ch) for the send-destination MIX bus will appear. This window contains on/off switches for the signals sent from each channel to the
corresponding bus, and lets you select the send point (PRE or POST) ( page 38 ).
138
Reference Manual
◆ Adjusting the master level of the effect send
To adjust the MIX channel you specified as the input source for the rack, first call it up to the
Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating the fader.
Set the level as high as possible without allowing the post-effect signal to reach the overload point.
NOTE
The input and output levels of the effect are shown by the input/output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT EDIT window.
◆ Adjusting the effect return level
To adjust the effect return level, first call up the ST IN channel you specified as the output destination for the rack to the Centralogic section and then make adjustments by operating the fader.
Inserting an internal effect into a channel
This section explains how to insert an effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the input/output of the desired channel (except for a ST IN channel). For details on editing the effect parameters, refer to
“Editing the internal effect parameters.”
STEP
1.
Follow steps 1-3 described in “ Virtual rack operations ” ( page 125 ), to mount an
effect in a rack.
2. Press the INPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the insert-
out for one of the channels as the input source for the rack ( page 125
3.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button in the VIRTUAL RACK window, and select the
insert in of the same channel as the output destination for the rack ( page 125
4. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
for the channel into which you inserted the effect.
5.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.
6. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for
the channel into which you inserted the effect.
7.
Display the EFFECT EDIT window again, and select the effect type and edit the effect
parameters.
8. Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack's output destination in step
3, adjust the level as appropriate.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
NOTE
• If you are inserting an effect into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out/insert-in to the R input and output of the effect in the same way as step 3.
• For more information about how to operate the INSERT/DIRECT OUT window, refer to “
Inserting an external device into a channel
• The levels before and after the effect are shown by the input and output meters in the upper right of the EFFECT EDIT window.
• Adjust the effect send master level and the effect parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the effect.
Editing the internal effect parameters
This section explains how to change the effect type and edit the parameters. For a rack in which an effect is mounted, the following information is shown in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
1 2
1
Effect title/type
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
2
Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
STEP
1.
Press the rack container in which the effect you want to edit is mounted.
2. To change the effect type, press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window, and
select the effect type in the EFFECT TYPE window.
3.
Press a knob in the effect parameter field in the EFFECT EDIT window to select it,
and turn the multifunction knob to edit the effect parameters.
4.
Edit the settings in the special parameter field as necessary.
139
Reference Manual
EFFECT EDIT window
Allows you to adjust the effect parameters.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
3 4 2 5
0
6
7
1
8
9
A
1
INPUT L/R buttons
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.
2
OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press this button to open the CH SELECT window.
3
Effect type field
Displays the effect title, the name of the type that is used, and a graphic. The number of input and output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown.
Press this field to open the EFFECT TYPE window, in which you can select the effect type.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
NOTE
• You can also change the effect type by recalling a library setting.
• Effect types “HQ.PITCH” and “FREEZE” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7. Also, even if you copy these two effect types, you will not be able to paste them to rack 2, 4, 6, or 8.
4
EFFECT CUE button
Cue-monitors the output of the currently-displayed effect. This Cue function is valid only while this screen is displayed. The cue will be canceled automatically when you switch to a different screen.
NOTE
If the Cue mode is set to MIX CUE, all channels for which the CUE key is turned on will be monitored. However, only the output signal of the effect will be monitored if you turn on the
EFFECT CUE button. (The [CUE] keys that had been turned on until then will be temporarily defeated.)
5
Special parameter field
Indicates special parameters that are specific to some effect types.
◆ TEMPO
This field appears if a tempo-type or modulation-type effect is selected.
• MIDI CLK button
If you turn this button on, the BPM parameter of that effect will be set to match the tempo of the MIDI timing clock being input from the MIDI port.
140
Reference Manual
◆ PLAY/REC
This field appears if FREEZE is selected as the effect type.
• PLAY button/REC button
Enable you to record (sample) and play back when using
the freeze effect. For detailed operations, refer to “ Using the Freeze effect ” ( page 144 ).
◆ SOLO
This field appears if M.BAND DYNA. or M.BAND COMP. is selected as the effect type.
• HIGH/MID/LOW buttons
Allow only the selected frequency band to pass (multiple selections are allowed).
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction for each band.
◆ Gain reduction meter
This field appears if Comp276/276S or Comp260/260S is selected as the effect type.
• Gain reduction meters
Indicate the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
◆ Type
This field is displayed when Equalizer601 is selected as the effect type.
• Type
Select one of two equalizer types that feature different effects.
DRIVE emulates changes in frequency response of analog circuits, creating a driven sound that enhances analog characteristics by adding some distortion.
CLEAN emulates changes in frequency response that are typical of analog circuits, creating a clear non-distorted sound that is inherently digital.
• FLAT button
This button resets the gain of all bands to 0dB.
6
BYPASS button
Temporarily bypasses the effect.
7
Input/output meters
Indicate the level of the signals before and after the effect.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
8
Effect parameter field
This area indicates parameters for the currently-selected effect type. When you press a knob in this field, you will be able to use the multifunction knobs to control the corresponding horizontal row of knobs.
You can also make fine adjustments by rotating a knob while pressing and holding it down.
9
MIX BAL. knob
Adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. If you press this knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob. If you are using the effect via send and return, set this to 100% (effect sound only).
10
Tool buttons
Copy the currently-displayed effect settings to the effect of another rack, or initialize the settings. For details on how to use the tool buttons, refer to “Using the tool buttons” in the separate Owner's Manual.
NOTE
Effect settings can be stored and recalled at any time using the effect library.
A
Rack select tabs
Enable you to switch between EFFECT 1–8.
Using the Tap Tempo function
“Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. The Tap Tempo function can be used for delay-type and modulation-type effects in which the BPM parameter is included, and specify the delay time or modulation speed. To use the Tap function, you must assign Tap Tempo to a USER DEFINED key, and then operate that USER DEFINED key.
NOTE
For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
◆ Assigning the Tap Tempo function to a USER DEFINED key
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
4.
On the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button for the USER DEFINED key to
which you want to assign the Tap Tempo function.
5. Select “TAP TEMPO” in the FUNCTION column, select “CURRENT PAGE” in the
PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, and press the OK
button.
141
Reference Manual
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
◆ Using the Tap Tempo function
The average interval (BPM) at which you press the USER DEFINED key will be calculated, and that value will be applied to the BPM parameter.
The average interval will be input to the parameter.
(the average of a, b, and c)
a b c
SETUP screen USER SETUP window
USER DEFINED KEYS page USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
NOTE
• If you specify “CURRENT PAGE” in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, the Tap Tempo function can be used for the currently-displayed effect (rack).
• If you specify “RACK x” (x=1-8) in the PARAMETER 1 column in the USER DEFINED KEY
SETUP window, you can use the Tap Tempo function only for a specific effect (rack).
• For more information on USER DEFINED keys, refer to “
First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap
NOTE
• If the average value is outside the range of 20-300 BPM, it will be ignored.
• If you turn on the MIDI CLK button in the special parameter field, the BPM parameter value will change in relation to the tempo of the MIDI timing clock received from the MIDI port.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3.
Press the rack container in which the effect you want to control is mounted.
4.
Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window.
5.
In the EFFECT TYPE window, select an effect type that includes a BPM parameter.
6.
Set the SYNC parameter ON in the effect parameter field.
7.
At the desired tempo, repeatedly press the USER DEFINED key to which you
assigned the Tap Tempo function, to set the BPM parameter.
142
Reference Manual
Tap Tempo pop-up window
NOTE
• If the EFFECT EDIT popup window used to set TAP TEMPO is open, this popup window is not displayed.
• With CL V3.0 and later, the delay value (msec) is also shown in the popup window.
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some effects of the CL series can be synchronized with the tempo. There are two such types of effect: delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ..............................This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .........These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ..........DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization calculates the DELAY (or FREQ.) value
*a from the TEMPO and
NOTE.
Turn SYNC ON
Change NOTE DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
Change TEMPO DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
143
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
DELAY = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) sec
FREQ. = (TEMPO/60) / (NOTE x 4) Hz
Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from
8th note to quarter note
DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY= NOTE x 4 x (60/new TEMPO)
= (1/8) x 4 x (60/121)
= 0.2479 (sec)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• Value shared with all effects (However, this applies only if SYNC is ON and if the MIDI CLK button is ON when MIDI clock is input to the MIDI IN jack.)
• You cannot store it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120
Change TEMPO to 60
TEMPO=60
Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly.
However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the CL series does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6
= 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1 = 3/16
Reference Manual
Using the Freeze effect
This section explains how to use the
“FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations on screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.
NOTE
Effect types “FREEZE” and “HQ.PITCH” can be used only in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
Press the EFFECT tab in the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3.
Press the effect container in rack 1, 3, 5, or 7.
4.
Press the effect type field in the EFFECT EDIT window to open the EFFECT TYPE
window, and select “FREEZE.”
5. To begin recording (sampling), press the REC button and then press the PLAY
button.
6.
To play back the recorded sample, press the PLAY button.
NOTE
• The bar in the EFFECT EDIT window reflects the current recording progress. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off.
• You can adjust the parameters in the EFFECT EDIT window to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For details on the parameters, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
• The sampled content will be erased if you record another sample, change the effect, or turn off the power to the CL unit.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
EFFECT EDIT window (when FREEZE is selected)
If the “FREEZE” effect type is selected, a PLAY button, REC button, and progress bar will appear in the special parameter field.
1 3 2
1
PLAY button
2
REC button
3
Progress bar
NOTE
As an alternative to switching the effect type, you can also recall settings that use the
“FREEZE” effect type from the effect library.
Using the Premium Rack
In addition to the graphic EQ and the internal effects, the CL series provides
“Premium Rack” processors that faithfully emulate carefully selected vintage analog processors as well as newly developed processors. The Premium Rack employs VCM technology, which models analog circuitry on a component level to faithfully reproduce and fine-tune amazing analog sounds.
The Premium Rack offers six types of processors.
Name Outline
Portico 5033
Portico 5043
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
Models RND's analog 5-band EQ.
Models RND's analog compressor/limiter.
Models a typical vintage compressor/limiter.
Models a classic vacuum tube (optical type) compressor.
Dynamic EQ
Models a classic vacuum tube passive-type vintage EQ.
Newly-developed EQ that features a dynamically changing gain and enables you to control the cut/boost amount in relation to the input level.
Buss Comp 369 Models a 1970s compressor/limiter with discrete circuitry.
144
Reference Manual
Using the Premium Rack
The procedure to set up the I/O patches for the rack are the same as those for the effect rack
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
2.
Press the PREMIUM tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK window.
3. To mount a Premium Rack in the rack, press the rack mount button for that rack in
the PREMIUM RACK field.
4.
Select the processor to mount and the mounting method in the MODULE SELECT
field in the PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER window, and press the OK button.
5. Press the INPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the
input source.
6.
Press the OUTPUT PATCH L button to open the CH SELECT window, and select the
insert-in of the same channel as the output destination.
7. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to select the channel into which
you inserted the effect.
8.
Press the INSERT/DIRECT OUT field in the OVERVIEW screen.
9. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT popup window, turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for
the channel into which you inserted the processor.
10.
Adjust the processor parameters.
11.
Using the fader of the channel you selected as the rack's output destination in step
6, adjust the level as appropriate.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
NOTE
• If you are inserting a processor into a channel that handles a stereo source, assign the R channel insert-out and insert-in to the R input and output of the processor in the same way as steps 5 and
6.
• For details on editing the parameters, refer to the next section “Editing the Premium Rack parameters.”
• Adjust the digital gain and the processor parameters so that the signal does not reach the overload point at the input or output stage of the processor.
◆ Mounting a processor
There are two ways to mount each processor:
•
DUAL .....................The processor is used on two mono channels.
•
STEREO ................The processor is used on one stereo channel.
The DUAL button and STEREO button indicate how many rack space units are occupied by the Premium Rack processor.
The U76 occupies two rack spaces. Other processors occupy one rack space. If you mount a two-space Premium Rack processor in the rack, you will be unable to mount any more processors below those rack spaces. Also, you cannot mount a two-space processor in an even-numbered rack.
VIRTUAL RACK window
(PREMIUM RACK field)
PREMIUM RACK MOUNTER
window
145
Reference Manual
Editing the Premium Rack parameters
Each Premium Rack window includes the following items:
1 2 3
1
ASSIST button
Press this button to indicate the numbers of the multifunction knobs that control each parameter.
2
LIBRARY button
Press this button to display the Library window for each Premium Rack.
3
DEFAULT button
Restores the default parameter setting.
4
Multifunction knob access field
Indicates the name and value of the parameters that are assigned to the multifunction knobs.
To switch the parameter to control, press the knob in the window.
NOTE
• If the ASSIST button is on, you will be able to easily identify the parameters that are currently available for editing, and the parameters that will be available for editing after you select them.
• You can adjust the parameter in finer steps by turning a multifunction knob while pressing and holding it down.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
◆ Portico 5033
Portico 5033 is a processor that emulates a 5-band analog EQ developed by Rupert Neve
Designs (RND). 5033EQ features a unique tone control response. It inherited the history of the
“1073,” which was praised as one of the greatest devices developed by Mr. Rupert Neve.
Yamaha's VCM technology has modeled the EQ to the last detail, including the input/output transformer that was designed by Rupert Neve himself. As a result, this processor model produces musically high-quality sound even when bypassed. Its response features unique effects. For example, if the Lo setting is cut, the low range becomes tight, and if the Hi setting is raised, the desired range will be boosted without hurting your ears.
8
5
3
1
2 7
4 6
1
ALL BYPASS button
Switches EQ bypass on or off. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
2
TRIM knob
Adjusts the input gain of the effect.
3
LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Frequency knobs
Adjust the frequency for each band.
4
LF/LMF/MF/HMF/HF Gain knobs
Adjust the amount of boost or cut for each band.
5
LMF/MF/HMF Q knobs
Adjust the Q (steepness) of each band. The higher the Q value, the narrower the range in which you can control the gain for the band.
146
Reference Manual
6
LMF/MF/HMF IN button
Turn LMF/MF/HMF EQ on or off respectively.
7
LF/HF IN button
Turn LF and HF EQ on or off simultaneously.
8
Graph
Indicates the graphical EQ response.
◆ Portico 5043
Portico 5043, like Portico 5033, is a processor that emulates RND's analog compressor. The actual 5043 compressor is equipped with the same input/output transformer as that of the
5033 EQ, delivering a natural, analog-like tonality and effect. It enables you to obtain a range of results from hard compression to natural sound, and is suitable for a broad range of audio sources ranging from drums to vocals. The most notable feature of this model is that you can switch the gain reduction type. You can choose either an FF (Feed-Forward) circuit type
(which is the current mainstream), or an FB (Feed-Back) circuit which was typically used in vintage compressors. This allows you to create sounds with various characteristics as appropriate for your applications.
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
1
IN button
Turns the compressor's bypass on or off. When the compressor is bypassed, the button indicator will turn off. However, even if the compressor is bypassed, the signal will pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2
INPUT meter
Indicates the input signal level.
One meter appears in DUAL mode, and two meters appear in STEREO mode.
3
FB button
Switches the gain reduction method between FF (Feed-Forward) circuit and FB (Feed-
Back) circuit. The button will light when FB circuit is selected.
147
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
The FF circuit is used in most contemporary compressors. This type is useful when you want to apply consistent compression while maintaining a consistent tonal color.
The FB circuit is used in vintage compressors. This type is suitable when you want to apply a smooth compression while adding a tonal character that is characteristic of such devices.
4
GAIN REDUCTION meter
Indicates the amount of gain reduction.
5
THRESHOLD knob
Adjusts the threshold at which compression starts to be applied.
6
RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio. If you rotate the knob fully clockwise, the unit will operate as a limiter.
7
ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time.
8
RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time.
9
GAIN knob
Adjusts the output gain.
U76
U76 is a processor that emulates a popular vintage compressor used in a wide range of situations. This processor does not provide the threshold parameter that is found on conventional compressors. Instead, the intensity of compression is determined by the balance between the input gain and the output gain. The
“All mode” setting for the RATIO parameter allows you to create a heavily-compressed sound that is typical of this model. It produces an aggressive tonal character with a rich addition of overtones.
1 2
3 4 5 6
Reference Manual
1
INPUT knob
Adjusts the input level. As the input level gets higher, more compression is applied.
2
ATTACK knob
Adjusts the compressor’s attack time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest attack time.
3
RELEASE knob
Adjusts the compressor’s release time. Fully rotate the knob clockwise to set the fastest release time.
4
RATIO switch buttons
Use these five buttons to set the compression ratio.
A button with a higher number will raise the compression ratio more. Pressing the ALL button selects All mode, in which the RATIO will become high, and sharp compression with a faster release time will be applied, creating substantially-distorted aggressive sound.
5
METER switch buttons
Switch the meter display.
• GR.................Indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
• +4/+8 .............Each meter uses -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, and indicates
“0VU” for the value of the reference level added by +4 dB or
+8 dB.
• OFF ...............Turns off the meter display.
6
OUTPUT knob
Adjusts the output level.
If you have adjusted the amount of gain reduction by changing the INPUT knob, the level of audible volume will also change. In this case, use the OUTPUT knob to adjust the volume level.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
◆ Opt-2A
Opt-2A is a processor that emulates a popular vintage model of tube optical compressors. To control the level, it uses optical components such as a CdS cell and an EL panel to apply smooth compression, with beautiful high-range overtones generated by warm-sounding vacuum tube distortion, delivering an elegant and sophisticated sound.
1 2 3 4
1
GAIN knob
Adjusts the output level.
2
PEAK REDUCTION knob
Adjusts the compression amount of the signal.
3
RATIO knob
Adjusts the compression ratio.
4
METER SELECT knob
Switches the meter display.
GAIN REDUCTION indicates the amount of gain reduction applied by the compressor.
With -18 dB as the reference level of the output signal, the OUTPUT +10 and OUTPUT
+4 settings respectively will cause the value +10 dB or +4 dB from this reference level to be shown as “0VU” on the meter.
148
Reference Manual
◆ EQ-1A
EQ-1A is a processor that emulates a famous passive-type vintage EQ. It features a unique style of operation, allowing you to individually boost and attenuate (cut) each of two frequency ranges (high and low). Its frequency response is utterly unlike that of a conventional EQ, producing a unique character that is distinctive of this model. The input/output circuits and vacuum tubes produce a tonal character that is highly musical and well-balanced.
3 4 5 7 8 9
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
7
(HIGH) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the HIGH
FREQUENCY knob.
8
(HIGH) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the ATTEN
SEL knob.
9
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL knob
Switches the frequency region attenuated by the ATTEN knob.
◆ Dynamic EQ
Dynamic EQ is a newly-developed equalizer that does not emulate any specific model of equalizer. The sidechain has a filter that extracts the same frequency band as the EQ. This allows you to apply EQ in the same way as you might apply a compressor or expander to a specific frequency region, causing the EQ gain to vary dynamically only when a specific frequency region of the input signal becomes too high or too low. For example you could use this on a vocal sound as a de-esser, so that EQ is applied to a specific frequency band only when sibilance or high-frequency consonants reach an unpleasant level, thus preserving a natural sound that does not impair the original tonal character. Two full-band Dynamic EQs are provided, enabling you to process a wide range of audio sources.
1 2 6
1
IN switch
Turns the processor on or off.
When the switch is off, the signal will bypass the filter section, but pass through the input/output transformer and amp circuits.
2
LOW FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the low range filter.
3
(LOW) BOOST knob
Sets the amount of boost applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
4
(LOW) ATTEN knob
Sets the amount of attenuation applied to the frequency band specified by the LOW
FREQUENCY knob.
5
BAND WIDTH knob
Sets the width of the frequency band controlled by the high range filter.
As you rotate the knob toward the right (Broad), the band will become wider and the peak level will decrease. This affects only the response of the boost.
6
HIGH FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency of the high range filter. This affects only the response of the boost.
6
5
9
0
1
3
4
2 8 A 7B
1
BAND ON/OFF button
Turns each band on or off.
C
149
Reference Manual
2
SIDECHAIN CUE button
Turn this button on to monitor the sidechain signal sent to the CUE bus. At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
3
SIDECHAIN LISTEN button
Turn this button on to output the sidechain signal (linked to the dynamics) to the bus
(such as a STEREO bus or MIX/MATRIX bus) to which the insert channel signal is sent.
At this time, the graph indicates the response of the sidechain filters.
4
FILTER TYPE buttons
Switch the type of the main bus equalizers and sidechain filters. Main bus EQ and sidechain filter will link as follows:
FILTER TYPE
Main EQ
Sidechain filter
(Low Shelf)
Low Shelf
LPF
(Bell)
Bell
BPF
(Hi Shelf)
Hi Shelf
HPF
5
FREQUENCY knob
Sets the frequency band that will be controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter.
6
Q knob
Sets the Q value (steepness) of the equalizer and sidechain filter.
As you rotate this knob clockwise, the frequency range to which the equalizer or sidechain filter is applied will become wider.
7
THRESHOLD knob
Specifies the threshold at which the processor will begin taking effect.
8
RATIO knob
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal.
Rotating the knob clockwise will set the ratio for boost, and counter-clockwise for cut.
Fully rotating the knob in either direction will create the maximum effect.
9
ATTACK/RELEASE buttons
Enable you to select one of the three settings as the attack/release time for compression or boost.
Select FAST for a faster attack and faster release. Select SLOW for a faster attack and slower release. Select AUTO to automatically adjust the attack/release time depending on the frequency ranges.
10
MODE buttons
Specify whether the processor is triggered when the sidechain signal level exceeds the threshold value (ABOVE), or when the level does not reach the threshold value (BELOW).
A
EQ GAIN meter
Indicates the dynamically-changing EQ gain.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
B
THRESHOLD meter
Indicates the sidechain signal level in relation to the threshold level.
C
Graph area
Displays the equalizer response.
In most cases, this area displays the reference EQ graph that indicates the frequency and intensity, and the dynamic EQ graph that indicates the dynamically-changing EQ responses.
Dynamic EQ graph
Reference EQ graph
If SIDECHAIN CUE or SIDECHAIN LISTEN is on, this area displays the sidechain filter response.
Sidechain filter graph
150
Reference Manual
◆ Buss Comp 369
Buss Comp 369 emulates a standard bus compressor that has been used in recording studios and broadcasting stations since the 1980s. It produces a smooth and natural compression that does not interfere with the expression in the source signal, in contrast with the aggressive compression of the U76. Buss Comp 369 includes both a compressor and a limiter. You can use both functions individually or in combination, according to your needs. Further, the rich overtones generated by the audio transformers on the input/output circuits and the discrete
Class A amplifier add depth and unity to the sound quality.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
STEREO mounting
1 3 4
> A B
5 6
C
7
9
DUAL mounting
> A B C
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
1
INPUT ADJUST
Used to adjust the input gain. However, the output gain is linked to change in the opposite direction, to prevent changes in pass-through volume (the volume when
COMP IN and LIMIT IN are off). For example, if INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB.
See below for more information about how to use INPUT ADJUST.
• If the level of the input signal sent to effects is too low to reach the threshold,
increase the input gain.
• Adjust the sound quality by changing the input level sent to the input circuitry (audio transformer and Class A amplifier).
INPUT ADJUST structure
INPUT GAIN
INPUT
CIRCUIT
Buss Comp 369
Linked in reverse
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER SECTION
COMPRESSOR LIMITER
IN IN
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
OUTPUT GAIN
INPUT ADJUST COMP THRESHOLD LIMIT THRESHOLD dBFS dBFS
Since there are substantial changes in threshold, the changing display values are linked. However, the internal conditions of the COMPRESSOR/
LIMITER SECTION do not actually change.
151
2
LINK (STEREO mounting)
Stereo link on/off
3
COMP IN
Compressor on/off
4
COMP THRESHOLD
Compressor threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
5
COMP RECOVERY
Compressor release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
Reference Manual
6
COMP GAIN
Compressor make-up gain. Applied before the limiter.
7
COMP RATIO
Compressor ratio
8
METER SELECT (STEREO mounting)
Selects the signal source for the meter. You can select from IN (input level), GR (gain reduction), and OUT (output level). When the source is switched, the design of the meter also switches as follows: VU/GR/VU.
8
When“METER” is IN
8
When“METER” is GR
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
8
When“METER” is OUT
9
VU SELECT (DUAL mounting)
Selects the signal source for the VU meter. You can select from input level or output level.
10
LIMIT IN
Limiter on/off
A
LIMIT ATTACK
Limiter attack time. FAST: 2ms, SLOW: 4ms
B
LIMIT THRESHOLD
Limiter threshold. However, the changing value is linked to INPUT ADJUST.
C
LIMIT RECOVERY
Limiter release time. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
152
Reference Manual
Using the graphic EQ, parametric EQ, effect, and
Premium Rack libraries
◆ GEQ/PEQ library
Use the
“GEQ library” or “PEQ library” to store and recall GEQ and PEQ settings. All GEQ and PEQ units used in the CL series console can use this GEQ library or PEQ library.
Although are two types, 31BandGEQ and Flex15GEQ in the GEQ library, you are free to recall items between differing types. However, only 31BandGEQ settings that use less than fifteen bands can be recalled to a Flex15GEQ.
200 items can be recalled from the library. Number 000 is a read-only preset, and the remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the GEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
GEQ EDIT window.
Similarly, to recall an item from the PEQ library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the PEQ EDIT window.
Graphic EQ, Parametric EQ, Effects, and PREMIUM RACK
◆ Premium Rack library
You can use the Premium Rack library to store and recall Premium Rack settings. The library contains 101 items (from #000 through #100). Item #000 is a preset. All library items other than #000 can be freely read and written.
To recall an item from the Premium Rack library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the window for the corresponding type.
NOTE
• Store and recall operations are performed on individual GEQ units. For one rack, you can store and recall two Flex15GEQ or 8BandPEQ units independently as A and B.
• To access the GEQ EDIT window or the PEQ EDIT window, press the rack container in the GEQ field.
◆ Effect library
Use the
“Effect library” to store and recall effect settings. 199 items can be recalled from the effect library. Library items 1-27 are read-only presets, and correspond to effect types 1-27 respectively. The remaining library numbers can be freely read or written.
To recall an item from the effect library, press the LIBRARY button located at the top of the
EFFECT EDIT window.
153
Reference Manual
I/O devices and external head amps
This chapter explains how to use an I/O device or an external head amp that is connected to the CL series console. Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices
that will be mounted. For details, refer to
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Using an I/O device
CL series consoles enable you to remotely control channel parameters of an I/O device (such as an R series product) connected to the Dante connector.
I/O device patching
Here's how an I/O device connected to the Dante connector can be patched to the Dante audio network.
STEP
1.
Connecting CL series consoles and I/O devices
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the I/O DEVICE button.
3.
Press the DANTE PATCH tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
4. Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH
page).
5.
Press the AUTO SETUP button.
If you want to edit individual patches, press the port select button.
6.
Press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page).
7.
Press the port select button in the OUTPUT PATCH window.
8.
In the PORT SELECT screen, select the output port.
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page)
2
1
3
4
1
I/O device list
This shows the ID number and model name of the I/O devices.
Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can specify patching from the console's output ports to the I/O devices. If a previously set-up device does not currently exist on the Dante audio network, a yellow “VIRTUAL” indicator is shown at the lower left of that device. If devices on the network belong to different DEVICE TYPEs but share the same ID, a red “CONFLICT” indicator will appear to the left, below the device. If multiple devices share the same ID, a yellow “DUPLICATE” indicator will appear to the right, below the device.
2
DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
3
DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this button to open the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, in which you can select the
64 channels that will be input from the I/O device to the console.
4
OUTPUT PORT SETUP button
Press this button to access the PATCH VIEW 1 tab of the OUTPUT PORT window, where you can choose the 64 channels that will be output from the console's output ports to
I/O devices.
154
Reference Manual
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the I/O DEVICE screen
(DANTE PATCH page). Specify the 64 channels that will be input from the I/O devices to the console.
1 2
I/O devices and external head amps
NOTE
• If you've connected a device other than an I/O device supported by the CL series, the upper line of the button will show the first four letters of the Device Label, a dash
“-” , and the channel number
(decimal).
• If a CL series console is mounted, the display for the upper row of buttons will be “CL#X” (where
X is the ID number of the mounted CL unit).
• If no Dante Audio Channel Label has been specified, a value equal to the channel number will be displayed in the lower row.
• You can set the Dante Audio Channel Label using Audinate “Dante Controller” software. For the latest information, refer to the Yamaha pro audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
PORT SELECT window
Displayed when you press the port select button in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window or
OUTPUT PATCH window. When you change a patch, select the I/O port.
3
1
LIBRARY button
Enables you to store or recall the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings to or from the library.
You can store ten sets of settings in the library.
2
AUTO SETUP button
The current I/O device connection status will be ascertained, and input patching to the console will be performed automatically according to the order in which they are registered in the I/O device list.
When you press this button, a confirmation popup dialog will appear, asking you to confirm the execution of auto patching. Press the OK button to execute auto patching.
Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen.
3
Port select buttons
Press this button to open the PORT SELECT window.
“Dante Device ID number (hexadecimal) and channel number
(decimal)” are shown in the upper row on the button.
The first eight characters of the channel label (Dante Audio Channel
Label) for each port are shown in the lower row on the button.
If no patch has been assigned, the upper row will indicate“---” and the lower row will indicate nothing.
155
2
1 3
1
Category select list
Enables you to select the I/O device containing the input port that you want to assign.
2
Port select buttons
Select the input port.
3
CLOSE button
Completes the settings and closes the window.
Reference Manual
OUTPUT PATCH window
Displayed when you press the device in the I/O DEVICE screen (DANTE PATCH page). Set the output patch.
1
1
Port select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the PORT SELECT popup window.
Remotely controlling an R series unit
This section explains how to remotely control an R series unit that's connected to the Dante connector.
STEP
1.
In the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen, press the I/O tab to display the I/O
DEVICE screen (I/O page).
2.
Press the rack in which the I/O device that has head amp functionality is mounted.
3.
Open the I/O DEVICE HA screen to remotely control the head amp of the I/O device.
4.
To remotely control a head amp from an input channel, press a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section to display the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
5. Press the GAIN/PATCH field of the channel you want to adjust. The GAIN/PATCH
window will appear.
6.
Control the head amp of the I/O device in the GAIN/PATCH window.
7.
When you have finished making settings, press the “x” symbol to close the window.
8.
Press the rack in which the I/O device on the OUTPUT side is mounted.
9.
Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “ I/O device patching ” ( page 154 ).
I/O DEVICE screen (I/O page)
1 2
I/O devices and external head amps
3
4
1
Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device. If you press and hold down this button, all LEDs of the corresponding I/O device will blink.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
2
ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
If the WITH RECALL button is turned ON in the REMOTE HA SELECT screen, “w/RECALL” is displayed. If the +48V MASTER switch for the mounted device is turned ON,“+48V
MASTER” is displayed.
3
DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
4
SYSTEM/SYNC indicators
Error, warning, and information messages are displayed. Refer to the list ( page 250 ) for
detailed information about messages.
156
Reference Manual
◆ HA display
This shows the HA settings of the I/O device. Press this area to open the I/O DEVICE HA window, in which you can make detailed head amp settings.
7
6
5
8
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external CL series consoles.)
5
Analog GAIN knob
Indicates the analog gain setting. This screen is only for display; the value cannot be edited.
6
+48V indicator
Indicates the phantom power (+48V) on/off status for each port.
7
OVER indicator
Warns you when the input signal is clipping.
8
HPF indicator
Indicates the high-pass filter on or off status for each port.
◆ INPUT display
This shows the input settings of I/O devices not assigned to REMOTE HA ASSIGN.
If you press the [SEL] key of an input channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external CL series consoles.)
◆ OUTPUT display
This shows the output settings of the I/O device. Press here to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output port settings for the I/O device.
If you press the [SEL] key of an output channel, the corresponding port will light. (It does not light for external CL series consoles.)
157
I/O devices and external head amps
◆ RMio64-D display
Displays the RMio64-D panel. You can press the buttons to change settings.
1 2 3 4 5
9
6 7 8
1
MADI SRC ON indicator
MADI SRC ON button
Switches the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) on and off.
2
MADI SRC WCLK IN indicator
MADI SRC WCLK IN button
Use this button to select whether to use (indicator on) or not use (indicator off) the word clock input from the MADI WCLK IN FOR SRC jack on the rear panel of the RMio64-D as a standard clock for SRC.
3
MADI INPUT RATE Fs 44.1kHz indicator
MADI INPUT RATE Fs 48kHz indicator
Automatically detect and indicate whether the MADI input signal is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
Both indicators remain off if there is no valid MADI input signal.
4
MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 2Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 4Fs indicator
MADI INPUT RATE 1Fs/2Fs/4Fs button
Select either 1Fs (1x), 2Fs (2x), or 4Fs (4x), based on the MADI input frequency. For example, if the MADI input signal is 192 kHz (4x 48 kHz), confirm that the MADI INPUT
RATE Fs 48kHz indicator is on and then select “4Fs”.
NOTE
When
“2Fs” is selected, the unit automatically detects the frame frequency (48 kHz/96 kHz) of the MADI input signal.
Reference Manual
5
MADI STATUS INPUT status
MADI STATUS OUTPUT status
Display information regarding the MADI input and output signals (frame frequency/ number of channels).
6
WORD CLOCK WCLK IN indicator
WORD CLOCK MADI indicator
WORD CLOCK DANTE indicator
WORD CLOCK WCLK IN/MADI/DANTE buttons
Used to select the word clock source.
WCLK IN
MADI
DANTE
Uses the word clock signal being input from the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel of RMio64-D. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock input.
Uses the word clock of the MADI input signal. The indicators flash when there is no valid word clock input.
Uses the word clock of the Dante network.
7
WORD CLOCK Fs indicator
Indicates the word clock frequency at which the unit is operating. Flashes when not synchronized.
8
EXTERNAL CONTROL indicator
This indicator comes on when there is a valid parameter that can be operated only externally by remote control.
Refer to “Remote Control” in the RMio64-D Owner's Manual for details about parameters that can be operated by remote control.
9
OUTPUT PATCH button
Press this button to access the OUTPUT PATCH window, where you can make output port settings for RMio64-D.
I/O devices and external head amps
I/O DEVICE HA window
Displayed when you press the rack in which the I/O device on the head amp side is mounted.
In this window, you can remotely control the head amp of the I/O device from the CL series console by using the on-screen knobs and buttons or the multifunction knobs.
7
1
2
3
8
4
5
6
1
+48V MASTER
Indicates the on/off status of the I/O device's master phantom power. (Switching this on or off is performed on the I/O device itself.)
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3
GAIN knob
Indicates the gain of the head amp on the I/O device. To adjust the value, press the knob to select it, and use the multifunction knobs. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
4
GC button
Switches on or off the Gain Compensation function that maintains a consistent signal level on the audio network.
5
FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the head amp of the I/O device, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
6
Displayed port switch tabs
These tabs switch the port that is displayed in the I/O DEVICE HA window.
7
GC ALL ON button/GC ALL OFF button
Switch Gain Compensation on or off for all input channels simultaneously.
8
GC indicator
Indicates the fixed gain value output to the audio network if the Gain Compensation function is turned on.
158
Reference Manual
◆ Remotely controlling from the input channels
To remotely control the I/O device's head amp from an input channel of the CL series console, operate the GAIN/PATCH window for the channel for which you want to control.
I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page)
1 2
Remotely controlling an amp
This section explains how to remotely control an AMP unit that's connected to the Dante connector.
STEP
1.
Press the AMP tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2.
Press the I/O device displayed on the I/O DEVICE screen (AMP page).
3.
Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “ I/O device patching ” ( page 154 ).
I/O devices and external head amps
3
1
Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
2
ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
3
DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
159
Reference Manual
Remotely controlling WIRELESS unit
This section explains how to remotely control a WIRELESS unit that's connected to the Dante connector.
STEP
1.
Press the WIRELESS tab in the upper part of the I/O DEVICE screen.
2.
Press the I/O device displayed in the I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page).
3.
Set the output port on the OUTPUT PATCH window, as necessary.
Refer to step 7 in “ I/O device patching ” ( page 154 ).
I/O DEVICE screen (WIRELESS page)
1 2
3
I/O devices and external head amps
3
DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window, in which you can make settings for the audio network.
Using an external head amp
If an I/O card (such as an MY16-ES64 card) supports the remote protocol of an external head amp in the CL's slot, you will be able to remotely control from the CL console some parameters of the external head amp (Yamaha SB168-ES or AD8HR), such as phantom power (+48V) on/off status, gain, and HPF.
For details on the I/O card settings, refer to the Owner's Manual for the I/O card.
Connecting the CL series console to an AD8HR
To remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64
EtherSound card in Slot 1 on the CL unit, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL unit to the NAI48-ES. Then, connect the HA REMOTE connector on the NAI48-ES to the HA
REMOTE 1 connector on the AD8HR using an RS422 D-sub 9-pin cable. This connection enables you to remotely control the AD8HR from the CL series console.
To transmit audio signals (input to the AD8HR) to the CL series console, connect the DIGITAL
OUT A (or B) connector on the AD8HR to the AES/EBU connector on the NAI48-ES using a
D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable. Signals will be sent or received between the NAI48-ES and the
CL series console via the MY16-ES64 card.
Alternatively, you can use a
“daisy chain” connection to remotely control multiple AD8HR units simultaneously. To do this, connect the AD8HR's HA REMOTE 2 connector to the second
AD8HR's HA REMOTE 1 connector. If you use the NAI48-ES, you can connect up to six
AD8HR units. In this case, to input AD8HR's audio signals into the CL series console, install two MY16-EX cards on the CL unit since each slot on the CL unit accepts up to 16 channel signals. Then, connect each two of the third and subsequent AD8HRs to each AES/EBU connector using a D-sub 25-pin AES/EBU cable.
1
Display switch buttons
Press one of these buttons to view the corresponding I/O device.
For more information about VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE displayed below this
2
ID/Model name display
This shows the ID number, model name, and version of the I/O device.
160
Reference Manual
MY16-EX
CL5
MY16-EX
MY16- ES64
Audio signal
Remote signal
NAI48-ES
HA REMOTE connector
DIGITAL
OUT A connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 1
HA REMOTE 2 connector
DIGITAL OUT
A connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 2
HA REMOTE 2 connector
DIGITAL OUT
A connector
HA REMOTE 1 connector
AD8HR 3
HA REMOTE 2 connector
Up to six units
161
I/O devices and external head amps
Connecting the CL series console to an SB168-ES
To remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console, install an MY16-ES64
EtherSound card in Slot 1 of the CL, then use an Ethernet cable to connect the CL to the
SB168-ES. This connection enables you to remotely control the SB168-ES from the CL series console.
Alternatively, you can use a daisy chain or ring connection and install two MY16-EX expansion cards in the slots on the CL unit to remotely control up to three SB168-ES units simultaneously.
NOTE
Remote control data will be received and transmitted only at Slot 1 of the CL series console.
◆ Daisy chain network
CL5
Audio signal
Remote signal
MY16-
ES64
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
Reference Manual
◆ Ring connection
CL5
Audio signal
Remote signal
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
MY16-
ES64
IN
SB168-ES
OUT
MY16-
EX
MY16-
EX
NOTE
Please refer to the SB168-ES
Owner’s Manual for information on setting up the MY16-ES64/
MY16-EX cards and EtherSound network.
I/O devices and external head amps
Remotely controlling an external head amp
An external head amp (
“external HA” ) connected via MY16-ES64 or NAI48-ES can be remotely controlled from the CL series console. For details on how to connect a CL series
console with an external head amp, refer to
external head amp's operating manual.
STEP
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external HA.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RACK button.
3.
Press the EXTERNAL HA tab in the upper part of the VIRTUAL RACK screen.
4. Press the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button for the corresponding rack in the
VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
5.
Use the PORT SELECT buttons in the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window to select
the input ports to which the audio output of the external HA is connected.
6.
Press the CLOSE button to close the EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window.
7. In the VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page), press the rack in which the
external HA you want to control is mounted.
8.
Remotely control the external head amp in the EXTERNAL HA window.
VIRTUAL RACK screen
(EXTERNAL HA page)
162
Reference Manual
VIRTUAL RACK screen (EXTERNAL HA page)
5 6
1
2 3 4
1
EXTERNAL HA field
This displays the state of the connected external HA.
2
ID/Model name/+48V master
This displays information for the external HA mounted in the rack. The ID number is automatically assigned in order of the connected devices from 1 to 6. This field also enables you to view the on/off status of the master phantom power.
3
Virtual racks
These are up to six racks in which remotely controllable external HA units can be mounted. If an external HA is mounted, this field will indicate the HA settings (GAIN setting, and on/off status of the phantom power and HPF). Press a rack to open the
EXTERNAL HA window for that rack.
4
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button
Press this button to display the HA PORT SELECT window, in which you can set the input port for the external head amp mounted in the rack.
NOTE
If an external HA is connected to one of the slots on the CL series console, you must specify an appropriate input port manually. If this is set incorrectly, the external HA will not be detected correctly when you patch input ports to input channels.
163
I/O devices and external head amps
5
VIEW switch buttons
Switch the virtual rack display between SB168-ES and AD8HR. Select the view that's appropriate for the connected device.
6
COMM PORT switch buttons
Specify whether the external HA connected to the slot will be controlled remotely. Select
“SLOT1” if you want to remotely control the external HA.
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT window
Select the input port for the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the
EXTERNAL HA PORT SELECT button in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
1
1
PORT SELECT buttons
Specify the input ports to which the external HA is connected.
Reference Manual
EXTERNAL HA window
Remotely control the external head amp. Display this window by pressing the virtual rack in the I/O DEVICE screen (EXTERNAL HA page).
1
2
3
4
5
1
+48V MASTER
If an external HA is connected, the master phantom power on/off status is shown here.
(The on/off setting is made on the external HA unit itself.)
2
+48V button
These switch phantom power on/off for each channel.
3
GAIN knob
These indicate the gain of the external HA. If you press and select the GAIN knob, you can make adjustments to gain using multifunction knobs 1-8. The level meter located at the immediate right of the knob indicates the input level for the corresponding port.
4
FREQUENCY knob/HPF button
These controllers switch on or off the high-pass filter built into the external HA, and adjust its cutoff frequency. If you press the FREQUENCY knob to select it, you will be able to adjust it using the corresponding multifunction knob.
5
Rack select tabs
These tabs switch the rack that is displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window.
NOTE
• If you connect an additional AD8HR, the setting for this AD8HR will be used.
These knobs and buttons are displayed in the EXTERNAL HA window even if an AD8HR is not connected, allowing you to create and store a scene even while the AD8HR is not connected.
• Error messages related to the SB168-ES will not be displayed. In addition, you will be unable to set the EtherSound parameters. Use AVS-ESMonitor for these functions.
I/O devices and external head amps
◆ Remotely controlling an external HA from the input channels on a CL
series console
You will be able to use the external HA in the same way as the head amp on an I/O device or
on the CL console. For details on the GAIN/PATCH window, refer to
STEP
1. Use the Bank Select keys in the Centralogic section to access the OVERVIEW screen
that includes the channel for the head amp that you want to control.
2.
Press the HA/PHASE field of the channel whose external HA you want to adjust.
3.
Press the PATCH button in the GAIN/PATCH window, and select the input port
assigned to the external HA.
4.
Remotely control the external head amp in the GAIN/PATCH window.
OVERVIEW
screen
GAIN/PATCH window
164
Reference Manual
MIDI
This chapter explains how to transmit MIDI messages from an external device to the CL series console to control the CL console's parameters, and how to send out MIDI messages from the CL console as you operate the unit.
The following illustration shows an example of connecting the MIDI IN/OUT connectors to transmit and receive MIDI messages.
MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT
External device
CL5
MIDI functionality on the CL series console
The CL series console can use MIDI to perform the following operations.
◆ Program Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the CL series console, a
Program Change message (a number that is assigned to the event) can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program
Change message is received from an external device.
◆ Control Change transmission and reception
When you execute a specific event (fader, knob, or key operation) on the CL series console, the corresponding Control Change message can be transmitted to an external device.
Conversely, events can be executed when Control Change messages are received from an external device. This allows you to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play them back later.
◆ Parameter Change (SysEx) transmission and reception
When specific events (fader, knob, or key operations, changes in system settings or user settings) are executed,
“Parameter Change” SysEx (system exclusive) messages can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when Parameter
Changes are received from an external device.
Using this capability, CL operations can be recorded and played back on a MIDI sequencer or other external device. In addition, changes in system and user settings can be received and executed by another CL console.
165
NOTE
As the port used for transmission and reception of MIDI messages, you can select either the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors or an I/O card installed in slot 1. All of the functionality described in this section will be available on the port you select.
Basic MIDI settings
You can select the type of MIDI messages the CL series console will transmit and receive, the
MIDI port that will be used, and the MIDI channel.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the MIDI/GPI button in the center of the SETUP screen.
3.
Press the MIDI SETUP tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4.
Press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the MIDI
SETUP page.
5. In the MIDI SETUP window for port selection, select the port type and port number
that will transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
6.
Press the channel select button in the MIDI SETUP page.
7. In the MIDI SETUP window for channel selection, select the channel that will
transmit or receive MIDI messages, and press the OK button.
8. In the MIDI SETUP page, turn transmission/reception on or off for each MIDI
message.
MIDI
SETUP screen MIDI/GPI screen
(MIDI SETUP page)
NOTE
• For details on Program Change operations, refer to the following section “
Using program changes to recall scenes and library items
• For details on using Control Change messages, refer to “
Using control changes to control parameters
Reference Manual
MIDI/GPI screen (MIDI SETUP page)
You can select the type of MIDI messages that will be transmitted and received, and choose the port that will be used.
1
2
4
6
7
3
5
1
PORT/CH field
Enables you to select the port and MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive
MIDI messages.
• Tx PORT/Tx CH..................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to transmit
MIDI messages.
• Rx PORT/Rx CH .................... Press these buttons to open windows in which you can respectively select a port and MIDI channel to receive
MIDI messages.
NOTE
When transmitting or receiving Parameter Changes, the channel number you specify here is used as the device number (a number that identifies the transmitting or receiving unit).
2
PROGRAM CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Program Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx ........................................... Switches program change transmission on/off.
• Rx........................................... Switches program change reception on/off.
• ECHO..................................... Switches on or off echo output of Program Change messages. (If this function is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
166
3
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode.
• SINGLE.............. If this button is on, Program Changes will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).
• MULTI ................ If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).
• OMNI.................. If this button is on, Program Changes on all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode. Multi mode transmission/reception and
Single mode transmission are disabled.
• BANK................. If this button is on, Bank Select messages can be transmitted and received in Single mode. (Bank Select messages switch the group of Program Change messages to be used.)
4
CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch MIDI Control Change message transmission and reception on or off.
• Tx....................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx ...................... Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO................. Switches on or off echo output of Control Change messages. (If this function is on, Control Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
5
CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode.
• NRPN button ..... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/ received as NRPN messages on one MIDI channel (NRPN mode).
• TABLE button ... If this button is on, the CL mix parameters will be transmitted/ received as Control Change messages on one MIDI channel
(TABLE mode).
6
PARAMETER CHANGE field
Enables you to turn transmission/reception of SysEx (system exclusive) messages on or off. (These are special messages used to control the parameter of the CL console.)
• Tx....................... Switches parameter change transmission on/off.
• Rx ...................... Switches parameter change reception on/off.
• ECHO................. Switches on or off echo output of Parameter Change messages. (If this function is on, Parameter Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
7
OTHER COMMAND field
Switches on or off echo output of other MIDI messages. (If this function is on, other
MIDI messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without modification.)
MIDI
Reference Manual
MIDI SETUP window (for port selection)
Here you can select the port that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages. This window appears when you press the port select button for transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) in the PORT/CH field.
1 2
3
1
TERMINAL field
Enables you to select the port that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
You can choose from the following items.
NONE
MIDI
SLOT1
No port will be used.
MIDI IN (Rx) and OUT (Tx) connectors on the rear panel
A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in Slot 1 on the rear panel
2
PORT NO. field
If you select SLOT 1 in the TERMINAL field, choose port number 1-8 in this field. (The number of available ports will vary depending on the card that is installed.) The currently-available card is valid only for port 1.
3
OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
MIDI SETUP window (for channel selection)
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. This window appears when you press the channel select button in the PORT/
CH field.
1
MIDI
2
1
CH field
Enables you to select CH1-CH16 as the channel that will transmit or receive MIDI messages.
2
OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
167
Reference Manual
Using program changes to recall scenes and library
items
The CL series console lets you assign a specific event (scene recall or effect library recall) to each Program Change number, so that when this event is executed on the CL console, a
Program Change message of the corresponding number will be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a Program Change message is received from an external device.
STEP
1. Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2.
As described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” ( page 165 ), select the ports and MIDI channels
that will be used to transmit/receive program changes.
3.
Press the PROGRAM CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4.
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, switch Program Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/reception mode, and set echo output.
5.
To change the event assignment for each program number, press the desired event
in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
MIDI/GPI screen
(PROGRAM CHANGE page)
NOTE
Assignments to program numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
MIDI/GPI screen (PROGRAM CHANGE page)
In the PROGRAM CHANGE page, you can specify how Program Changes will be transmitted and received, and choose the event (scene recall or effect library recall) that will be assigned to each program number.
1
3
2
4
5
6
1
PROGRAM CHANGE field
Switches Program Change transmission and reception on or off. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx..................If this is on, the corresponding Program Change messages will be transmitted when events on the list are executed.
• Rx .................If this is on, the corresponding events will be executed when Program
Change messages are received.
• ECHO............If this button is on, Program Change messages received from an external device will be retransmitted without change.
2
PROGRAM CHANGE MODE field
Enables you to select the Program Change transmit/receive mode. This setting is linked with the PROGRAM CHANGE MODE section of the MIDI SETUP page.
• Multi mode (when the MULTI button is on):
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be transmitted and received. (The transmit/ receive channel specified in the MIDI SETUP page will be ignored.) When a Program
Change is received, the event assigned to the corresponding MIDI channel and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on a CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the MIDI channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on multiple MIDI channels/multiple program numbers, only the lowest-numbered program number on each MIDI channel will be transmitted.)
MIDI
168
Reference Manual
• Single mode (when the SINGLE button is on):
Only Program Changes of the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) channels specified in the
MIDI SETUP page will be transmitted and received. When a program change on the Rx channel is received, the event assigned to that program number of the corresponding channel in the list will be executed.
When you execute the specified event on the CL series console, the Program Change of the corresponding program number will be transmitted on the Tx channel shown in the list. (If an event is assigned to more than one program number on the same channel, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.)
• When the OMNI button is on in SINGLE mode:
Program changes of all MIDI channels will be received. However, regardless of the MIDI channel that is received, the event assigned to the corresponding program number of the Rx channel will be executed. Turning on the OMNI button will not change the operation for Program Change transmission.
• When the BANK button is on in SINGLE mode
The CH indication in the list will change to BANK (bank number), and Bank Select
(Control Change #0, #32) and Program Change messages can be transmitted and received. This can be convenient if you want to control more than 128 events on a single
MIDI channel.
When Bank Select and then Program Change messages (in that order) are received on the Rx channel, the event assigned to that bank number and program number in the list will be executed.
When you execute a specific event on the CL series console, Bank Select and Program
Change messages for the bank number and program number assigned to that event will be transmitted on the Tx channel. (If the same event is assigned more than once in the list, the lowest-numbered bank number and program number will be transmitted.)
NOTE
• The settings of the OMNI and BANK buttons are ignored in Multi mode.
• If the BANK button is on and only a Program Change on an applicable MIDI channel is received, the last-selected bank number will be used.
• If the BANK button is on, the OMNI button can also be turned on at the same time. In this case,
Bank Select and Program Change messages of all MIDI channels will be received.
3
List
Shows the event (scene recall or library recall) assigned to each MIDI channel and MIDI
Program Change number. The list shows the following items.
• CH/BANK...............If “CH” is shown, this column indicates the MIDI channel (1-16) on which Program Changes are transmitted/received. If Program
Change transmission and reception is in Single mode and the
BANK button is on, this will be labeled
“BANK,” and the numerical value in this column will correspond to the bank number (1-128).
• NO. .........................Indicates the program number 1-128.
• PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT
.........................Indicates the type/number/title of the event assigned to each channel (bank number) or program number. Press an individual event display area to access the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window, in which you can select the event that you want to assign.
4
Scroll knob
Press this knob to scroll the list upward or downward using the multifunction knob.
5
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to erase all events from the list.
6
INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE window
You can specify the event assigned to each program number. Display this window by pressing the list in the PROGRAM CHANGE page in the MIDI/GPI screen.
1 2 3
4
MIDI
169
Reference Manual
1
TYPE field
Enables you to select the type of event.
The following table lists the events you can select.
NO ASSIGN
SCENE
EFFECT
PREMIUM RACK
No assignment
Scene memory recall operations
Effect library recall operations
Recall operations for the corresponding Premium Rack library
2
DESTINATION field
Enables you to select the scene or library item to recall. If EFFECT or PREMIUM RACK is selected in the TYPE field, the rack number will be shown. If SCENE is selected, this will indicate - - -, and is not used.
3
LIBRARY NUMBER/LIBRARY TITLE field
Enables you to choose the library that you want to recall.
If SCENE or EFFECT is selected in the TYPE field, the LIBRARY TITLE is shown. If PREMIUM
RACK is selected, the LIBRARY NUMBER is shown.
4
OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
Using control changes to control parameters
You can use MIDI Control Change messages to control specified events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations etc.) on the CL series console. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later.
You can use Control Changes to control events in either of the following two ways.
◆ Using Control Changes
This method uses typical Control Changes (control numbers 1-31, 33-95, 102-119). You can freely assign an event to each control number.
◆ Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)
This method uses a special type of Control Change messages called NRPN.
NRPN uses Control Change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted
Control Change messages of Control Change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter.
The event assigned to each combination of MSB and LSB is pre-defined, and cannot be changed.
NOTE
For details on the events assigned to NRPN messages, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
STEP
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2.
As described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” ( page 165 ), select the ports and MIDI channels
that will be used to transmit/receive control changes.
3.
Press the CONTROL CHANGE tab in the MIDI/GPI screen.
4.
Switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, select transmission/
reception mode, and set echo output.
5. To change the event assignment for each control number, press the desired event
in the list and select an event type and the recall target.
MIDI
MIDI/GPI screen
(CONTROL CHANGE page)
NOTE
Assignments to control numbers are maintained as settings for the entire system, rather than for individual scenes.
170
Reference Manual
MIDI/GPI screen (CONTROL CHANGE page)
You can specify how Control Changes will be transmitted and received, and specify the event
(fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
1 2
3
6
4
5
1
CONTROL CHANGE field
Enables you to switch Control Change transmission/reception on or off, and specify whether Control Changes will be echoed out. This setting is linked with the CONTROL
CHANGE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• Tx button ............................... Switches control change transmission on/off.
• Rx button............................... Switches control change reception on/off.
• ECHO button......................... Selects whether incoming control changes will be echoed out from the MIDI transmit port.
2
CONTROL CHANGE MODE field
This field enables you to select the Control Change transmission/reception mode. This setting is linked with the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field on the MIDI SETUP page.
• NRPN mode (when the NRPN button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as NRPN messages. If you select this mode, the assignments in the list will be ignored.
• TABLE mode (when the TABLE button is on):
Various mix parameters on the CL series console will be transmitted and received on a single MIDI channel as Control Change messages, according to the assignments in the list.
NOTE
The channel on which Control Changes are transmitted and received is specified by the PORT/
CH field on the MIDI SETUP page ( page 166 ).
MIDI
Shows the event (fader/knob operation, [ON] key on/off operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.
• NO..........................This indicates the control number. You can use control numbers 1-
31, 33-95, and 102-119.
• CONTROL CHANGE EVENT
.........................Indicates and enables you to select the type of event assigned to each control number. When you press an event, the MIDI
CONTROL CHANGE window will appear, allowing you to change the control number assignment.
4
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all event assignments on the list.
5
INITIALIZE ALL button
Press this button to restore all event assignments on the list to their default state.
6
Scroll knob
Scrolls the contents of the list. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.
171
Reference Manual
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE window
Display this window by pressing any event in the CONTROL CHANGE page. In this window, you can specify the event assigned to each control number.
1 2
3
Enables you to select the type of event.
2
PARAMETER 1/2 field
In conjunction with the MODE field, this field specifies the type of event.
3
OK button
Confirms the settings and closes the window.
NOTE
• The list shown is the same for all models of the CL series. For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate “Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If NRPN mode is selected as the control change transmission/reception mode, the settings in this window are ignored.
• For details on the events that can be assigned to Control Changes, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
Using Parameter Changes to control parameters
On the CL series console, you can use a type of system exclusive messages called
“Parameter Changes” to control specific events (fader/knob operations, [ON] key on/off operations, system and user settings, etc.) as an alternative to using Control Changes or
NRPN messages.
For details on the Parameter Changes that can be transmitted and received, refer to the data list at the end of this manual.
STEP
1.
Connect the CL series console to an external device.
2.
As described in “ Basic MIDI settings ” ( page 165
), select the ports and MIDI channels
(device number) that will be used to transmit/receive parameter changes.
3. Use the Tx button and Rx button of the PARAMETER CHANGE field in the MIDI
SETUP page to turn on parameter change transmission/reception.
NOTE
• Parameter changes include a “device number” that specifies the transmitting or receiving device.
The transmit (Tx) channel and receive (Rx) channel specified on the MIDI SETUP page are used as the device number.
• Please be aware that if the device number included in the transmitted Parameter Change does not match the device number of the receiving CL console, the message will be ignored.
• Do not turn Parameter Change and Control Change transmission/reception on at the same time.
Otherwise, a large amount of data will flood the MIDI port and may cause overflows or other problems.
MIDI
172
Reference Manual
Recorder
This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the recorder.
About the USB memory recorder
The CL series console features a USB memory recorder function that lets you easily record internal audio signals to a USB flash drive, or play back audio files recorded on a USB flash drive.
As the file format for recording, the CL series console supports MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-
3). For playback, it supports MP3 as well as WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (MPEG-
4 AAC) files. However, DRM (Digital Rights Management) is not supported.
By using the USB memory recorder, the output from the STEREO bus or a MIX bus can be recorded to a USB flash drive, or background music or sound effects saved on the USB flash drive can be played back via an assigned input channel.
◆ Signal flow for the USB memory recorder
MIX1-24
MATRIX1-8
STEREO L/R
MONO
INPUT1-72*
DIRECT OUT
RECORDER
INPUT
L
R
USB
memory
recorder
L
PLAYBACK
OUT
R
INPUT1-72*
ST IN 1L1R-8L8R
* CL3: INPUT1-64, CL1: INPUT1-48
NOTE
• Recording and playback cannot be done simultaneously.
• The signal being recorded cannot be input to an INPUT channel.
Recorder
Assigning channels to the input/output of the
recorder
Follow the steps below to patch the desired channels to the input and output of the USB memory recorder. You can patch any desired output channel or the direct output of an INPUT channel to the recorder input, and you can patch the recorder output to any desired input channel.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2.
Press the USB tab in the RECORDER screen.
3.
Press the RECORDER INPUT L or R button.
4.
Use the category list and the port select buttons in the CH SELECT window to select
the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder input.
5.
When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
6.
Assign a channel to the other input in the same way.
7.
Press the PLAYBACK OUTPUT L or R button.
8.
Use the category list and the channel select buttons in the CH SELECT window to
select the channel that you want to patch to the USB memory recorder output.
9.
When you have finished assigning the channel, press the CLOSE button.
10.
Assign a channel to the other output in the same way.
RECORDER screen
NOTE
• The USB memory recorder always records and plays back in stereo. If you want to record in monaural, with the same signal for left and right, you must assign both of the recorder inputs to the same channel.
• You can patch multiple channels to the recorder output.
• In steps 4 and 8, if you select a channel to which another port is already patched, a dialog box will ask you to confirm the patch change. Press the OK button in the dialog box.
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
173
Reference Manual
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
In this screen you can assign signals to the input and output of the USB memory recorder, and perform recording and playback operations.
7
PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button
Press this button to monitor the signal output from the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the RECORDER INPUT CUE button simultaneously.
8
Meters
Indicate the level of the signals output to the recorder.
CH SELECT window
Display this window by pressing the RECORDER INPUT L or R button or the PLAYBACK
OUTPUT L or R button.
Recorder
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
1
RECORDER INPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder's L/R input channels.
2
RECORDER INPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal input to the recorder.
3
RECORDER INPUT CUE button
When this button is turned on, you can monitor the signal input to the recorder.
NOTE
You cannot turn on this button and the PLAYBACK OUTPUT CUE button simultaneously.
4
Meters
Indicate the level of the signals input to the recorder.
5
PLAYBACK OUTPUT L/R buttons
Press these buttons to open the CH SELECT window, in which you can select the signals patched to the recorder's L/R output channels for playback.
6
PLAYBACK OUTPUT GAIN knob
Sets the level of the signal output to the recorder.
174
1
2
1
2
1
Category List
Enables you to select the type of channel.
2
Channel select button
Select the channels that will be patched to the USB memory recorder's inputs and outputs. The channels that can be patched at input or output are different.
Channels that can be patched to the recorder's inputs
• MIX 1-24................................. MIX channels 1-24
• MTRX 1-8 ............................... MATRIX channels 1-8
• ST L/R.................................... STEREO channel L/R
• ST L+C................................... STEREO channel L mixed with the MONO (C) channel
• ST R+C .................................. STEREO channel R mixed with the MONO(C) channel
• MONO.................................... MONO channel
• CH1-72 ................................... Direct output of an INPUT channel 1-72
Channels that can be patched to the recorder's outputs
• CH1-72 ................................... INPUT channels 1-72
• STIN 1L/1R-STIN 8L/8R ........ ST IN channels 1-8L/R
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Reference Manual
Recording audio to a USB flash drive
You can record the signal of the desired output channels as an audio file (MP3) onto the USB flash drive inserted in the USB connector located to the right of the display.
STEP
1.
Refer to “ Assigning channels to the input/output of the recorder ” ( page 173 ) to
assign channels to the input/output of the recorder.
2.
Connect a USB flash drive with sufficient free capacity to the USB connector.
3.
To monitor the signal being recorded, raise the fader for the channel(s) that are
patched to the input of the recorder.
4. Press the REC RATE button in the lower right of the RECORDER screen, then select
the bit rate for the audio file that will be recorded.
5. Press the REC ( ) button located at the bottom of the screen.
6.
To start recording, press the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button in the lower part of the
screen.
7.
To stop recording, press the STOP ( ) button.
8.
To audition the recorded content, proceed as follows.
8-1.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button to play back the recording.
8-2.
To stop playback, press the STOP ( ) button.
NOTE
• The FREE SIZE field indicates the amount of free capacity in the USB flash drive.
• The signal being recorded will not be output from the recorder output jacks (PLAYBACK OUT).
• The level meter on the RECORDER screen shows the signal level before and after the recorder.
If necessary, use the GAIN knob in the RECORDER INPUT field to adjust the input level to the recorder. Operating the GAIN knob will not affect the level of the signal being output to other ports from the corresponding output channel.
• In the default state, the recorded audio file will be saved in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder in the USB flash drive. However, you may also specify a folder of a level below the SONGS folder.
• The recorded file will be given a default title and file name. You can change this later.
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
1
2
Recorder
7 8 9 0 A 3 4 5 6
◆ TRANSPORT field
This field enables you to control recording and playback of a song.
1
Current song
Indicates the currently-selected song's track number, title and artist name. The following indicators will appear during playback or recording.
The unit is currently playing back.
The unit is currently recording.
2
Elapsed time display
Indicates the elapsed playback time of the current song during playback, and the elapsed recording time during recording.
3
Remaining time display
Indicates the remaining playback time of the current song during playback, and the available recording time during recording.
4
Current song format
Indicates the file format and bit rate of the current song (the file being played back).
175
Reference Manual
5
REC RATE button
Switches the recording rate.
You can choose 96 kbps, 128 kbps, or 192 kbps. Higher bit rates will improve the audio quality, but will increase the size of the data.
NOTE
The word clock rate at which the CL series console is currently operating will automatically be selected as the sampling rate for the audio file.
6
Display Switch Button
Switches between displaying and hiding the RECORDER INPUT/PLAYBACK OUTPUT fields at the bottom of the song list.
7
REW button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the current song and stops playback. If the playback point is already at the beginning, the point will move to the beginning of the preceding song that has been selected for playback.
If the playback point is not at the beginning of the current song, holding down this button for two seconds or longer will rewind the playback point.
If you operate this button during playback, playback will resume from the point at which the button was released.
8
STOP button
The recorder will change from play/record/recording-standby mode to stop mode.
9
PLAY button
Changes the recorder mode as follows.
Stop mode Playback mode, then starts playback from the beginning of the current song.
Playback mode Playback-pause mode
Playback pause mode Playback mode, then starts playback from the paused point.
Recording standby mode Recording mode
Recording mode Recording-pause mode
Recording-pause mode Recording mode, then starts recording from the paused point.
10
FF button
Moves the playback point to the beginning of the next song that is marked with a PLAY check symbol.
The pause indicator of the PLAY/PAUSE( ) button will light.
A
REC button
Places the recorder in recording standby mode.
NOTE
You can also assign the function of each button to a USER DEFINED key ( page 197 ).
Recorder
◆ Directory structure of a USB flash drive
When you connect a USB flash drive to the USB connector, a YPE folder and a SONGS folder within that YPE folder will be created automatically in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
The files created by recording operations will be saved in the above SONGS folder, or in the currently-selected folder below that level.
YPE folder
Root directory
Songs folder
Song
(audio file)
176
Reference Manual
Playing back audio files from a USB flash drive
You can play back audio files that have been saved on your USB flash drive. In addition to files that were recorded on the CL series console, you can also play files that were copied from your computer to the USB flash drive.
The three types of file format that can be played are MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio), and AAC (MPEG-4 AAC). The playable sampling rates are 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz. The supported bit rate ranges from 64 kbps to 320 kbps.
NOTE
• If you want to play back an audio file, you must save it in the SONGS folder within the YPE folder, or in a folder you have created below the SONGS folder. Files located in other folders and files of unsupported formats will not be recognized.
• The CL series console can recognize a file name that is a maximum of 64 single-byte characters.
If the file name is longer than this, the desired file may not play correctly.
• A maximum of 300 songs can be managed in a single directory. A maximum of 64 subdirectories can be managed.
STEP
1.
Connect a USB flash drive that contains the audio files to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3. You can use the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen and the folder icon
in the No. field to view a content list of the folder that includes the desired file.
4.
Use the multifunction knob or press the on-screen file name to select the desired file.
5.
Press a button in the PLAY MODE field to select the playback mode.
6. If you turned on the REPEAT button in step 5, press the PLAY checkmark for the song
you want to play.
7. Press the PLAY/PAUSE (
) button to play back the song.
8.
To stop playback, press the STOP (?) button.
NOTE
• Even if the sampling rate at which the CL series console is operating differs from the sampling rate of the audio file being played, the SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) function will automatically convert the rate so that the file will be played back correctly.
• If the REPEAT button is on, playback will continue until you stop playback.
Recorder
RECORDER screen
3 5 4
2
1
A
0
C
B
6 7 8 9
◆ Title list
This list enables you to perform operations related to the songs and directories that are saved on the USB flash drive.
1
Selected song
The currently selected song will appear in a blue frame.
2
Status indicator
Displays a symbol to indicate whether the currently-selected file is playing or paused.
: Playing, : Paused
3
Track number
Indicates the file number in the title list.
177
Reference Manual
4
Sub-directory
Indicates each song's track number, the name of upper level directory, and whether a sub-directory exists (in the case that the directory has been selected).
• Upper level ............Press this to move up to the directory that is one level higher than the current one.
• Sub-directory ................Press this to move to that sub-directory.
NOTE
• If you switch folders, that folder will be selected as the recording destination.
• The folders that can be selected are restricted to the SONGS folder inside the YPE folder, and folders located below the SONGS folder.
5
PLAY check symbol
Enables you to select multiple files that will be played back consecutively.
6
SELECT knob
Use the multifunction knob to select a song.
7
NOW PLAYING button
Press this button to always select the currently-playing song on the list.
8
MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons
Change the order of the selected song in the list.
9
Display switch buttons
Switch the list between the SONG TITLE display and the FILE NAME display.
10
SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the current title list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist.
A
RELOAD button
Loads the playlist that was saved most recently. Use this button to revert the current playlist you are editing back to the previous state.
◆ PLAY MODE field
Sets the playback method of the currently selected song.
B
SINGLE button
If this button is on, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete.
If this button is off, the recorder will play the next song on the list after playback of the current song is complete.
Recorder
C
REPEAT button
If this button is on, after playback of the current song is complete, the recorder will play the first song on the list that is marked with a PLAY check symbol (unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol).
If this button is off, the recorder will stop after playback of the current song is complete
(unless there are no subsequent songs that are marked with a PLAY check symbol). One of the following playback methods is selected according to the on/off settings of the
SINGLE button and the REPEAT button.
SINGLE
button
REPEAT
button
Mode
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
The currently-selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
The currently-selected song will play once and then stop.
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order, starting with the currently-selected song, and then they are played again from the first song in the title list. The currently- selected song will play repeatedly until you stop playback.
Songs with the PLAY checkmark selected are played in order, starting with the currently-selected song. After the final song in the title list is played, playback stops.
Editing the title list
You can change the order of the audio files shown in the title list, and edit the titles or artist names.
STEP
1.
Connect a USB flash drive containing audio files to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
3. Press the No. button and the change directory icon in the RECORDER screen to view
a list of the contents of the folder that includes the desired file.
4.
If you want to edit a title in the title list, press the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT
button. If you want to edit the artist name, press the ARTIST EDIT button.
5.
Edit the title or artist name, and press the OK button.
6. If necessary, use the SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button, ARTIST SORT button,
and MOVE UP/MOVE DOWN buttons on screen to change the order of the title list.
7.
When editing is complete, press the SAVE LIST button to save the changes.
NOTE
• If the title or artist name contains characters that cannot be displayed, these characters will be converted into ? for display.
• The title and the artist name can be edited only for MP3 format audio files.
178
Reference Manual
RECORDER screen (when selecting the USB tab)
3 4
1
2
5
6
1
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME EDIT button
Enables you to edit the title of the song selected in the list.
2
ARTIST EDIT button
Enables you to edit the artist name of the song selected in the list.
NOTE
A maximum of 128 single-byte characters (64 double-byte characters) can be input for both the title and for the artist name. If the title cannot be shown completely, scroll horizontally.
3
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the title.
4
ARTIST SORT button
Sorts the list in alphabetical order of the artist name.
5
SAVE LIST button
Saves the order of the list and PLAY check symbol settings as a playlist on the USB flash drive.
6
SONG TITLE/FILE NAME button
Enables you to select either song title or file name to be displayed in the SONG TITLE/
FILE NAME field.
Recorder
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW
If you plan to add DAW software, such as Steinberg Nuendo, to an audio network that includes a CL console and I/O devices, you must use Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) driver software.
DVS works as an audio interface, making it possible to transmit signals between a DAW and an audio network (that includes a CL series console and I/O devices). In this way, you will be able to make multi-track recordings of live performances or use live recordings that were made a day earlier for a virtual sound check.
This section explains the steps required when adding DAW software to an audio network.
Required devices and software
• CL series console and I/O devices
• A computer (Windows or Mac) equipped with an Ethernet port that supports a Giga-bit
Ethernet (GbE) network; DAW software
• A GbE-compatible network switch
• CAT5e cable
• Dante Virtual Soundcard driver software
• Dante Controller control software
NOTE
• You must have a license ID to use Dante Virtual Soundcard. A sheet with the DVS token needed to acquire the license ID is included in the CL unit package.
• The latest information about the Dante Virtual Soundcard and the Dante Controller is available at the following website: http://proaudio.yamaha.co.jp
179
Reference Manual
Word clock settings
In a Dante network, the master device supplies accurate word clock to other devices on the network. If the master device is removed from the network or breaks down, another device will automatically take over as the clock master.
To make this setting, in the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button, then the WORD
CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button to access the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window.
Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
Install Dante Virtual Soundcard (DVS) and
Dante Controller in the computer that you want to use for audio recording.
Make the following settings before turning
DVS on.
• Connect the GbE-compatible network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch.
• Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically
(this is the default setting).
• Set the audio format.
(Example: 48kHz, 24 bit)
• Set the Dante latency. (Use a high setting to ensure stability when using multiple channels.)
• In the Advanced settings, select the number of channels to be used for recording and playback (the default is 8 x 8).
V3.7 and earlier
V3.7
Recorder
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Virtual Soundcard User's Guide for more information on ASIO settings
(Windows).
Dante Accelerator settings
After mounting a Dante Accelerator card on the computer, install the Dante Accelerator Driver and make the following settings. For information about how to install the driver, refer to the
Installation Guide included with the driver.
•
Use a network cable to connect the Dante jack on the Dante Accelerator card to the Dante network, and then connect the computer's network port to the same network.
•
Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
NOTE
For more information about selecting a computer for remote control from a CL series console,
Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator
When setup method selection button =
180
Reference Manual
Setting up Dante Controller
Connect the network port of the computer to a GbE-compatible network switch. Configure the computer to obtain an IP address automatically (this is the default setting).
You must make the following settings for Dante Controller.
• For multi-track recording, patch audio signals from the I/O device to DVS or the Dante
Accelerator card.
• For virtual sound check: Patch audio signals in such a way that they will be output from the computer to the Dante audio network, then routed to the channels on the CL console.
The following example shows Dante Controller settings for when channels 1-16 of an I/O device are patched to DVS.
Recorder
Setting up DAW software
You must make driver settings in your DAW software. You must make driver settings in your
DAW software. In the device setting window, select
“Dante Virtual Sound Card-ASIO” (“Dante” for Mac) or
“Yamaha AIC128-D” as the sound card (or audio driver) used for input/output.
Some DAW software may require internal patching for the driver and the DAW software. For more information, refer to the DAW software manual.
◆ Setting up Nuendo Live
If you install the
“Yamaha Console Extension” software for linking Nuendo Live to a console, and then start up Nuendo Live and create a new project, tracks corresponding to the number of channels specified in DVS will be created automatically, and the channel names and colors from the CL series console will automatically be assigned as each track name.
Audio recording and playback
After you have made driver settings in your DAW software, you can record and play back audio.
For multi-track recording, set the input ports for the tracks of the DAW software to the ports that receive audio signals from the I/O devices.
For a virtual sound check, you must route recorded audio signals to the input channels on the
CL console. To do so, use Dante Controller to patch the signals so that the signals will be output from the DAW software to DANTE 1-64 on the CL console. It may be convenient for you later if you store two sets of the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in the library: one set for routing audio signals from the I/O devices, and another set for routing audio signals from DAW software. In this way, you will be able to switch between patch settings without starting Dante
Controller. In addition, you will be able to patch a specific channel (such as a vocal) to the I/
O device to monitor during a virtual sound check.
In this case, you'll need to switch the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings of the CL series console depending on whether you're performing multitrack recording or multitrack playback. If you've
saved these different sets of settings in the DANTE INPUT PATCH LIBRARY ( page 155 ),
you'll be able to switch between them conveniently.
NOTE
Please refer to the Dante Controller manual for more information about operations and settings of the Dante Controller.
181
Reference Manual
Using the CL console with Nuendo Live
The CL series consoles can operate in an integrated manner with Steinberg's Nuendo Live
DAW software.
The
“Yamaha Console Extension” software which integrates the CL series and Nuendo Live can be installed in your computer, allowing you to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console to easily perform multi-track recording operations.
Here we explain how to operate Nuendo Live from the CL series console.
Preparing the project
Recording or playing back using a computer DAW
” ( page 179 ) to make the following
settings.
• Setting up Dante Virtual Soundcard
• Setting up Dante Controller
• Setting up Nuendo Live
Recording into a project
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the RECORDER button.
2.
Press the Nuendo Live tab in the upper right of the RECORDER screen.
3.
Press the EASY RECORDING button to start recording.
4. When you finish recording, press the record lock button and then press the STOP
button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
Recorder
RECORDER screen (when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
1
2
3
F
I
G
4
5
6
7 8 9 0 A B C D E H
1
Nuendo meter display field
This shows the channel levels of Nuendo Live.
2
PEAK CLEAR button
Clears the peak levels indicated by the peak hold function.
3
Marker list field
Lists the marker information recorded in the current Nuendo Live project.
The markers can be selected by pressing the on-screen list or by using the multifunction knobs.
When you press this field, a keyboard window allowing you to edit the marker information will appear.
4
Nuendo Live SETUP button
Specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with
5
DANTE INPUT PATCH button
Press this to access the DANTE INPUT PATCH window ( page 155 ).
6
Location information display
This displays information for the current location of the Nuendo Live project. You can press the button at the right to switch the time display format.
182
Reference Manual
◆ Transport field
Here you can operate the transport of Nuendo Live.
7
GO TO PROJECT START button
Returns the location to the start of the project.
8
GO TO PREVIOUS MARKER button
Returns the location to the previous marker.
9
GO TO NEXT MARKER button
Advances the location to the next marker.
10
GO TO PROJECT END button
Advances the location to the end of the project.
A
CYCLE button
Turns repeat on/off for the project.
B
STOP button
Stops playback/recording of the project.
C
PLAY button
Starts playback of the project.
D
RECORD button
Starts/stops recording of the project.
E
EASY RECORDING button
Immediately starts recording on all tracks.
When you press this, the location will move to the last-recorded position, all tracks will be set to record mode, recording will begin, the record panel will be displayed, and the panel will be locked. The recording will be started retrospectively.
(Default setting: 10 seconds)
F
ADD MARKER button
Adds a marker to the project at the current location.
G
RECALL LINK button
Specifies whether a marker will be created when you recall a scene. If this function is turned on, the button will be lit.
H
Record lock button
Turns recording status lock on/off. This prevents recording from being accidentally stopped during recording.
NOTE
Transport functions can also be controlled from USER DEFINED keys ( page 197 ).
I
DVS information display
Shows the device label of the selected DVS.
Recorder
Specifying DVS or Dante Accelerator
Before you proceed, use DANTE SETUP to specify the I/O devices that will be mounted. For details, refer to
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
STEP
1.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the NUENDO Live SETUP button.
2.
In the NUENDO LIVE SETUP screen, press the setting method select button.
3.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
NOTE
• You can specify either DVS or Dante Accelerator in the NUENDO LIVE SETUP window.
• However, do not select the same DVS or Dante Accelerator from multiple CL series consoles.
NUENDO LIVE SETUP window
In this window, specify the device that the console will use for communication when working with Nuendo Live.
1
183
Reference Manual
1
2
1
Setup method select buttons
Choose one of the following methods by which to specify DVS or Dante Accelerator.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not assigned
• DVS ..................................... Select a DVS from the device list
• SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS .. When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer
◆ When setup method selection button = DVS
To choose from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the DVS button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
1
DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the DVS that you want to use with Nuendo Live.
2
DEVICE LIST select knob
Operate the multifunction knob to choose the DVS that you want to select.
Recorder
◆ When setup method selection button = SPECIFIED IP ADDRESS
When using Dante Accelerator, specify the IP address of the computer in the SPECIFIED IP
ADDRESS field. Since the IP address of Dante Accelerator will differ from the IP address used by Yamaha Console Extension, you must specify the IP address manually.
1
1
IP ADDRESS knobs
Use the multifunction knobs to specify the IP address.
NOTE
• As the IP address, specify the IP address of the computer that is running Nuendo Live.
• Set the address of that computer in the range of 169.254.0.0 - 169.254.255.255, and set the subnet mask as 255.255.0.0.
• For the computer in which Dante Accelerator is installed, the Dante port of Dante Accelerator as well as the Ethernet port of the computer must both be connected to the same network.
Refer to the illustration below.
Computer
Ethernet
SW
(Primary)
Dante Accelerator P
S
CL
Dante
P
S
SW
(Secondary)
184
Reference Manual
NOTE
• Depending on the firmware version, Dante Accelerator might not support redundant networking.
Refer to the following website to check whether your version of the Dante Accelerator firmware supports redundant networking. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Playing a multi-track project
STEP
1.
Press the DANTE INPUT PATCH button in the RECORDER screen (Nuendo Live page).
2. In the DANTE INPUT PATCH window, press the PORT SELECT button for the port to
which you want to assign the signal from Nuendo Live.
3.
In the list at the left of the PORT SELECT window, select the DVS you're using with
Nuendo Live, and select the port you want to assign it to.
4. Press the + button located in the upper part of the window to switch the port, and
assign a DVS port to it in the same way.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the CLOSE button to exit the
window.
6. Press the “X” symbol in the upper right of the DANTE INPUT PATCH window to close
it.
7.
In the Nuendo Live screen, press the START button.
8.
Operate the channels so that sound is output.
9.
To stop playback, press the STOP button.
RECORDER screen
(when selecting the Nuendo Live tab)
DANTE INPUT PATCH window
Recorder
PORT SELECT window
NOTE
If you save the DANTE INPUT PATCH settings in a library, the settings of the CL series console
can be switched conveniently ( page 155 ).
185
Reference Manual
Setup
About the SETUP screen
The SETUP screen enables you to set various parameters that apply to the entire CL console.
To access the SETUP screen, press the SETUP button in the Function Access Area. The screen contains the following items.
1 3 2 54 6 7
8
A
E
B
D
9
0
C
F
H
G
I J
◆ CURRENT USER field
K
This field enables you to make various user-related settings.
1
USER SETUP button
Press this button to open the USER SETUP window, in which you can make various settings for each user.
2
CURRENT USER button
Press this button to open the LOG IN window, in which you can switch log-in users.
3
COMMENT EDIT button
Press this button to open the COMMENT EDIT window, in which you can enter comments that will be displayed in the comment area.
4
PASSWORD CHANGE button
Press this button to open the PASSWORD CHANGE window, in which you can change the password.
5
SAVE KEY button
Press this button to open the SAVE KEY window, in which you can overwrite (save) the
user authentication key ( page 193 ).
◆ STORAGE field
This field enables you to create, save, or load a user authentication key.
6
CREATE USER KEY button
Press this button to open the CREATE USER KEY window, in which you can create a new user authentication key.
7
SAVE/LOAD button
Press this button to open the SAVE/LOAD window, in which you can save or load user authentication keys and console files.
◆ SYSTEM SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings that globally apply to the CL series console.
Setup
8
+48V MASTER button
Switches the console's master +48V master phantom power on or off. When this button is off, +48V phantom power for all the head amps turns off.
NOTE
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of each channel is on.
9
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP button
Press this button to open the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window, in which you can make word clock settings and various settings for each slot.
10
CASCADE button
Press this button to open the CASCADE window, in which you can make patch settings for cascade connections.
A
OUTPUT PORT button
Press this button to open the OUTPUT PORT window, in which you can make output port settings.
B
MIDI/GPI button
Press this button to open the MIDI/GPI window, in which you can make MIDI and GPI- related settings.
C
DANTE SETUP button
Press this button to open the DANTE SETUP window. This window enables you to make various audio network settings (console ID setting; SECONDARY PORT functionality setting; audio bit rate; latency setting; DANTE device ID and device type settings for devices controlled via the I/O RACK screen).
186
Reference Manual
◆ BUS SETUP field
This field enables you to make bus-related settings.
D
BUS SETUP button
Press this button to open the BUS SETUP window, in which you can make MIX bus/
MATRIX bus-related settings.
E
SURROUND SETUP button
Press this button to call up the SURROUND SETUP screen. In this screen, you can switch the bus settings from Stereo mode to Surround mode. If set to Stereo mode, the bus settings for MIX1-6 will be grayed out. If you press the 5.1 SURROUND button to switch to Surround mode, you can then set the bus settings for MIX1-6.
For Surround mode
Assign channels to MIX 1 - 6 for surround output. You can press the APPLY button to open the CONFIRMATION dialog box. Press the OK button to set the bus to Surround mode.
NOTE
• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 change to MONO x2.
• When you switch from Surround mode to Stereo mode, the signals for MIX1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 remain as MONO x2.
• When you switch from Stereo mode to Surround mode, the STEREO and MONO(C) inserts are turned off.
Setup
For Stereo mode
187
Reference Manual
If you set Surround mode, the BUS SETUP screen appears as shown below.
◆ DATE/TIME button
Press this button to open the DATE/TIME window, in which you can set the date and time.
◆ NETWORK button
Press this button to open the NETWORK window, in which you can set the network address.
◆ Indicator field
This field displays various information about the console.
F
BATTERY indicator
Indicates the status of the internal battery.
NOTE
The LOW or NO indication will appear if the battery runs down. In this case, immediately contact your Yamaha dealer or a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the operating manual
(separate document) to have the backup battery replaced.
G
POWER SUPPLY indicator
Indicates the currently-running power supply.
• INT .........................Internal
• EXT ........................PW800
H
Version indicator
Indicates the version number of the main CPU, sub CPU, and Dante module.
188
◆ CONSOLE LOCK button
This button executes the Console Lock function. If the console password has been set, pressing this button will open the AUTHORIZATION window. Enter the correct password to execute Console Lock.
If the console password has not been set, pressing this button will execute Console Lock immediately.
◆ CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS field
This field enables you to set the LCD brightness and contrast.
Setup
Select a bank to which you want to save the brightness and contrast settings. You can save two different settings in bank A and B, and switch between them if desired.
J
CONTRAST NAME knob
Adjusts the contrast of the channel name display.
K
BRIGHTNESS NAME knob
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS CH COLOR knob
Adjusts the brightness balance of the channel color and the channel name display.
BRIGHTNESS SCREEN knob
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
BRIGHTNESS PANEL knob
Adjusts the brightness of the panel LEDs.
BRIGHTNESS LAMP knob
Adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector.
User settings
User Level settings allow you to restrict the parameters that can be operated by each user, or to change the settings of USER DEFINED keys and preference settings for each user.
Settings for each user can be stored as a
“user authentication key” inside the console or together on a USB flash drive, allowing users to be switched easily. This can be convenient in the following situations.
• Unintended or mistaken operation can be prevented.
• The range of functionality operable by an outside engineer (guest engineer) can be limited.
• In situations in which multiple operators alternate with each other, output settings etc. can be locked to prevent unintended operations.
• Preferences of each operator can easily be switched.
Reference Manual
Setup
User types and user authentication keys
There are three types of user, as follows. To operate the CL series console, you must log-in as a user.
• Administrator ...... The administrator of the CL console can use all of its functionality.
Only one set of Administrator settings is internally maintained in the console. The Administrator can create user authentication keys for other users.
• Guest...... A Guest can use only the range of functionality permitted by the Administrator.
Only one set of Guest settings is maintained inside the console.
• User ........ A User can use only the range of functionality permitted by the
Administrator. User settings are saved internally or on a USB flash drive as user authentication keys. Multiple sets of user settings (up to ten in internal memory) can be saved, each with the desired user name.
A User who has Power User privileges can create or edit user authentication keys with a specified user level.
Setting the Administrator password
With the factory settings, the Administrator password is not set, meaning that anyone can log in with Administrator privileges and perform all operations. If you want to restrict the operations of other users, you must specify an Administrator password.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
3. In the keyboard window, enter the password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and
finally press the OK button.
When a user logs in, the user settings for that user are applied. User settings include the following information.
• Password (except for Guest)
• User Level settings (except for Administrator)
• Preferences
• USER DEFINED keys
• USER DEFINED knobs
• Assignable encoders
• Custom fader bank
• MASTER fader
Privileges for each user are as follows.
Administrator
User
Logged-in user
Power user
Normal user
(User without
Power User
privileges)
Editing user setup data, such as
USER DEFINED
keys and
Preferences
Editing User
Level settings
Password
setting
Editing commen
ts
User authentication key
Create
new
Overwrite-save
Available
(Can edit the settings for
Administrator and for Guest.)
Available
(Cannot edit the user level, since the administrator can always perform all operations. Can edit the settings for Guest.)
Available - Available -
Available
Available
Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
Available Available Available
Available Available -
Available
Available
(Excluding User
Level settings)
Guest Available
N/A
(Viewing only)
- Available - -
189
SETUP screen
Keyboard window
NOTE
• The password can be up to eight characters. If the two passwords that were entered match, the
Administrator password will be set.
• For details on entering a password, refer to “Entering names” in the separate Owner's Manual.
Creating a user authentication key
You can create a user authentication key and save it on a USB flash drive or in the console's internal memory. A user authentication key can be created only by an Administrator or Power
User. The user level can be specified when the authentication key is created, but the USER
DEFINED key settings and preference settings will be carried over from the user who is currently logged-in.
NOTE
• You can store ten keys in the console's internal memory.
• The file name of the user authentication key will be specified as the current user name, and its location will be specified as the root directory.
Reference Manual
STEP
1.
To create a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive
to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the CREATE USER KEY button.
4.
In the CREATE USER KEY window, when you have specified the user name, comment,
password, power user privileges on/off, and user rights, press the CREATE button.
5. If you want to create a user authentication key in the console's internal memory, press a button in the CREATE TO INTERNAL STORAGE field in the CREATE KEY window. If you want to create a user authentication key on your USB flash drive,
press the PATCH button in the CREATE TO USB STORAGE field.
6.
Press the CREATE TO button.
7.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
SETUP screen
CREATE USER KEY window
CREATE USER KEY window
2
1
5
CREATE KEY window
3 4
1
USER NAME
Displays the user name. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a user name of up to eight characters.
2
COMMENT
Displays a comment about the user. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
3
PASSWORD
Enables you to specify a password. Press this area to access a keyboard window, in which you can enter a password of up to eight characters.
4
POWER USER
Specifies whether Power User privileges will be granted to this user.
5
ACCESS PERMISSION
These settings specify the range of operations that the user can perform. For details on
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Setup
190
Reference Manual
Logging-in
To operate the CL series console, you must log in as the Administrator, Guest, or a User.
User settings for the Administrator and Guest are saved in the console itself. However, to log in as a User you must either select a key that is saved in the console itself, or connect the
USB flash drive in which a user authentication key has been saved. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in. If you use a user authentication key on a USB flash drive, you will continue as the logged-in user even if you remove the USB flash drive after logging-in.
NOTE
If the power is turned off and then on again, the console will generally start up in the log-in state in which the power was turned off. If a user password has been assigned, you will need to enter the password. However if you cancel the input, you will be forcibly logged-in as Guest.
◆ Logging-in as Administrator
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3.
In the LOGIN window, press the ADMINISTRATOR button.
4.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
Setup
◆ Logging-in as Guest
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3.
In the LOGIN window, press the GUEST button, and then press the LOGIN button.
SETUP screen
LOGIN window
◆ Logging-in as a User
To log-in as a User, you will use a user authentication key saved in the console or on a USB flash drive. If using a USB flash drive, you may also log-in using a user authentication key created on a different CL series console.
With a user authentication key stored in the console
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
3. In the LOAD FROM INTERNAL STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, choose the user
authentication key with which you want to log in, and press the LOGIN button.
4.
Enter the password and press the OK button.
SETUP screen
LOGIN window
NOTE
• If no Administrator password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN button. If a password has been set, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
191
Reference Manual
SETUP screen
LOGIN window
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 3 when you press the LOGIN button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
With a user authentication key stored in a USB flash drive
STEP
1.
Connect the USB flash drive to the USB connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the CURRENT USER button.
4.
In the LOAD FROM USB STORAGE field of the LOGIN window, press the (LOAD .CLU
FILE) button.
5. In the SAVE/LOAD window, choose the user authentication key with which you want
to log in.
6.
Press the LOAD button.
7. Enter the password and press the OK button.
Setup
NOTE
• If no password has been set, you will simply be logged-in in step 6 when you press the LOAD button.
• If the password was incorrect, a message of “WRONG PASSWORD” will appear near the bottom of the screen.
• If you have selected a user authentication key that was created on a different CL series console, a keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the Administrator password of the CL series console that you will be using. (If the Administrator passwords are identical, this window will not appear.) When you enter the correct Administrator password, another keyboard window will appear, allowing you to enter the password for the selected user. If you re-save the user authentication key, you will not be asked for the Administrator password the next time. Refer to
Editing a user authentication key
• For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to “
Loading a file from a USB flash drive
Changing the password
Follow the steps below to change the password of the logged-in user. The Guest account does not have a password.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the PASSWORD CHANGE button.
3.
In the keyboard window, enter the current password and press the OK button.
4. Enter the new password in the NEW PASSWORD field, then enter the same password in the RE-ENTER PASSWORD field for verification, and finally press the OK
button.
5.
Refer to “ Editing a user authentication key ” ( page 193
authentication key.
NOTE
After you change the password, if you log out from the console without saving the user authentication key, the changed password will be discarded.
LOGIN window
SAVE/LOAD window
192
Reference Manual
Editing a user authentication key
If you are logged-in as a user, you can edit your USER DEFINED keys, preference settings, comments and password, and save them onto your user authentication key. If you are logged- in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
STEP
1.
Log-in as a user, and edit the USER DEFINED keys ( page 197 ) and Preference settings
2.
Close the USER SETUP window.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE KEY button.
4.
In the SAVE KEY window, choose the save-destination button, and then press the
SAVE TO button.
5. If you selected the same location as the current user authentication key, press the
OK button in the dialog box that asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite that
user authentication key.
Setup
Changing the user level
You can view or change the user level.
• Administrator................The Administrator does not have a user level setting, but can change the user level setting of the Guest account.
• Guest .............................The Guest can view the user level setting of the Guest account. It cannot be changed.
• Normal user ..................A normal user can view the user level setting of his or her
User account. It cannot be changed.
• Power User ...................A power user can view and change his or her User account.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER LEVEL tab. (If you are logged-in as the
Administrator, press the FOR GUEST button to switch to the USER LEVEL for Guest
page.)
4.
Specify the user level by pressing the button for each item that will be permitted.
5.
When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP
button in the Function Access Area.
SETUP screen
SAVE KEY window
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as a Power User, you can also change the user level.
• If you loaded a user authentication key from a USB flash drive, press the SAVE KEY button before removing the USB flash drive. If you do remove the USB flash drive before pressing this button, load the user authentication key again.
SETUP screen
USER SETUP window
193
Reference Manual
USER SETUP window
8
1
3
4
2
6
7
5
1
CH OPERATION
Here you can specify (for each channel) the operations that will be permitted for input channels, output channels, and DCA groups. The settings will apply to the currently- selected channel. Settings for currently-selected channels will be displayed below the
CH OPERATION section. Use the panel [SEL] keys or the Selected Channel field in the
Function Access Area to select the channel for which you want to make settings.
The type of buttons shown will depend on the selected channel or group.
• INPUT channel................... [HA], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• MIX/MATRIX channel......... [WITH SEND], [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• STEREO/MONO channel
......................... ............ [PROCESSING], [FADER/ON]
• DCA group ......................... [DCA MASTER], [DCA GROUP ASSIGN]
• HA ....................................... Restricts operation of the HA (Head Amp) patched to that channel.
• PROCESSING .................... Restricts operation of all signal processing parameters for that channel (excluding the fader, [ON] key, and send level).
• FADER/ON.......................... Restricts operation of that channel's fader, [ON] key, and send level.
• WITH SEND........................ Restricts operation of that channel's send parameters.
(From MIX, From MATRIX)
• DCA MASTER .................... Restricts operation of that channel's DCA group fader,
ON/OFF, and ICON/COLOR/NAME.
• DCA GROUP ASSIGN........ Restricts changes of assignment to that DCA group.
• SET BY SEL ....................... If this button is on, you can press the panel [SEL] key of a channel to enable or disable the above-mentioned operating restrictions for that channel.
2
CURRENT SCENE
Specifies the operations that can be performed on the current scene memory.
• INPUT PATCH/NAME ......... Restricts operations for input channel patching and names.
• OUTPUT PATCH/NAME ..... Restricts operations for output channel patching and names.
• BUS SETUP ....................... Restricts operations for bus setup.
• GEQ RACK/EFFECT RACK/PREMIUM RACK
..................... Restricts operations for the racks. Press this area to open the RACK USER LEVEL window, in which you can set this restriction.
However, there will be no restriction on operating the
MIDI CLK button displayed for delay-type and modulation-type effects, or the PLAY/REC button displayed for the FREEZE effect.
• MUTE GROUP ASSIGN/MASTER
..................... Operations for mute group assignment and mute group master will be restricted.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, faders that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
3
SCENE LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on scene memories.
• STORE/SORT operations
• RECALL operations
4
LIBRARY LIST
Specifies the operations that can be performed on libraries.
• STORE/CLEAR operations
• RECALL operations
Setup
194
Reference Manual
5
FILE LOAD
Specifies the types of file that can be loaded from USB flash drives. The user authentication key contains the user level, USER DEFINED keys, and Preference settings.
Other data is saved in an “ALL” file. The “ALL” file also includes the USER SETUP settings of the Administrator and the Guest.
• USER SETUP (USER DEFINED keys and Preferences settings)
• SYSTEM SETUP/MONITOR SETUP
• CURRENT SCENE
• SCENE LIST
• LIBRARY LIST
6
MONITOR SETUP
Specifies the monitor setup operations that can be performed.
• OSCILLATOR
• TALKBACK
7
SYSTEM SETUP
Specifies the system setup operations that can be performed.
• MIXER SETUP
• OUTPUT PORT
• MIDI/GPI
• DANTE SETUP
NOTE
• The content that is restricted with the DANTE SETUP button is as shown below.
• Changing the CONSOLE ID
• Changing the SECONDARY PORT setting
• Changing control of DANTE PATCH changes (THIS CONSOLE or DANTE CONTROLLER)
• Changing BIT DEPTH
• Changing LATENCY
• Changing DEVICE MOUNT
• Changing REMOTE HA ASSIGN
• Changing the Dante Input Patch
• Changing the Dante Output Patch
• Changing the Dante Input Patch Library (Changing Store, Recall, Clear, Library Name)
• If an operation is restricted, the message “This operation is not allowed.” is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
• With the factory settings, this is turned off (no restrictions).
8
SET ALL/CLEAR ALL button
Permits/clears all items.
Preferences
Follow the steps below to make various settings for the CL console operating environment, such as how windows appear, and whether [SEL] key on/off operations will be linked. These settings are changed for the user who is logged-in, but if you are logged-in as the
Administrator, you will also be able to change the Guest settings.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the PREFERENCE tab.
4.
Use the buttons on screen to make Preference settings.
5.
When you have finished making settings, close the window and press the SETUP
button in the Function Access Area.
NOTE
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the PREFERENCE for Guest page and make preference settings for the Guest account.
USER SETUP window (PREFERENCE page)
1
2
5
3
4
Setup
1
STORE/RECALL field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to scene store/recall operations.
195
Reference Manual
• STORE CONFIRMATION
• RECALL CONFIRMATION
If these ON buttons are lit, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a
Store or Recall operation respectively.
2
PATCH field
Enables you to turn on or off options related to patch operations.
• PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch.
• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION
If this ON button is lit, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input or output patch item that is already patched to a port.
3
LOCALE SETUP field
Enables you to select the language used in Help files. Select “EN” to display Help files in
English.
4
ERROR MESSAGE field
Enables you to specify whether certain error messages should be displayed.
• DIGITAL I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a digital audio I/O error occurs.
• MIDI I/O ERROR
If this is on, an error message will appear when a MIDI I/O error occurs.
5
PANEL OPERATION field
Enables you to make settings for options related to panel operation.
• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT
Specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate the
[ON] key or fader for the channel. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels) and OUTPUT (output channels).
• [CUE][SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If the LINK button is on, channels for which cue operations were performed will be selected.
• [FADER BANK][SEL] LINK
Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with fader bank selection. You can set this parameter separately for INPUT (input channels), OUTPUT (output channels), and
CUSTOM (Custom fader bank).
If the LINK button is on, and you select the corresponding fader bank, the channel in that bank that was selected most recently will be selected, and its [SEL] key will light.
• IDENTIFY I/O RACK PORT BY [SEL]
Specifies whether to enable a function that allows you to identify the I/O device port connected to a channel by pressing the [SEL] key for that channel.
Setup
If this ON button is lit, pressing a [SEL] key on the panel will cause the signal indicator to flash for the port of the I/O device that is assigned to the corresponding channel by the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH settings.
• POPUP APPEARS WHEN KNOB(S) PRESSED
Specifies whether pressing a knob in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel while the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen is displayed will cause a window (1ch) to appear.
If the ON button is lit, a window (1ch) will open (or close) whenever you press a knob.
NOTE
If you press the SEND or PAN knob, a window (8ch) will open.
• GAIN KNOB FUNCTION
Specifies what will happen when you operate the GAIN knob in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section on the panel. When ANALOG GAIN button is lit, you can adjust analog gain on the head amp. When DIGITAL GAIN button is lit, you can adjust digital gain on the console.
• SCENE UP/DOWN
Specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys will do when pressed in the
SCENE windows.
When the SCENE +1/-1 button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will increment or decrement the scene number.
When the LIST UP/DOWN button is lit, pressing the [INC] or [DEC] key will scroll the list upward or downward.
• LIST ORDER
Specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear on the list.
When the NORMAL button is lit, the list appears in ascending numerical order. When the REVERSE button is lit, the list appears in descending numerical order.
• NAME DISPLAY
Specifies the content of the name display in the Channel Strip section.
When the NAME ONLY button is lit, the channel name and the channel number appear.
Select GR METER to display the GR meter and fader level value.
Select ENCODER INFO to display the information of a function that has been assigned to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the channel fader strip. This option is the same as the FULL FUNCTION option in CL version 1.7 or earlier.
NOTE
• You can now view the gain reduction meter for DYNAMICS 1 and 2, as well as other information, on the channel name display.
• In addition, if a channel is off during SENDS ON FADER mode, the channel name display will be highlighted.
• The GR meters function enables you to easily view the movement of the gain reduction.
196
Reference Manual
GR meter indicator
Highlighted display
- The channel is off in SENDS ON FADER mode.
- The channel is assigned to a DCA group, and that DCA [ON] key is off.
- The channel is assigned to a mute group, and that mute group master is on.
USER DEFINED keys
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED keys in the
USER DEFINED KEYS section on the top panel, and to press these keys to execute the defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED key settings for the user. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab.
4. Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED key to which you want to
assign a function.
5.
In the FUNCTION field of the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window, select the function
you want to assign.
6. If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7.
Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window.
8. To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[16]
key on the panel.
USER SETUP screen
(USER DEFINED KEYS page)
USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KEYS for Guest page and make USER DEFINED key settings for the Guest account.
• The 16 buttons in the USER DEFINED KEYS page correspond to USER DEFINED keys [1]-[16] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each key appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of
“---” is shown.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KEY SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate
“Cannot Assign!” if you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED key, nothing will occur when the key is operated.
Using the Alternate function
If you assign the Alternate function (ALTERNATE FUNCTION) to a USER DEFINED key, you will be able to switch parameters on or off by operating the knobs in the SELECTED
CHANNEL section while pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
The console enters Alternate mode when you press and hold down the USER DEFINED key to which the Alternate function has been assigned (the key will light).
The Alternate function features two options: LATCH and UNLATCH.
• UNLATCH ..............Alternate mode is turned on only while you are pressing and holding down the USER DEFINED key.
• LATCH ...................Each press of the USER DEFINED key will turn Alternate mode on or off. You do not need to hold down the key.
NOTE
• If you select LATCH for the Alternate function, the console disables the Alternate function when you switch the display between the OVERVIEW screen and the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or when you open a window.
• In Alternate mode, “ALT” will be displayed in the user name field of the Function Access Area.
Setup
197
Reference Manual
In Alternate mode, the following knobs change their behavior.
• [GAIN] knob
Rotate the knob to adjust the digital gain value. If DIGITAL GAIN has been selected for
HA KNOB FUNCTION on the PREFERENCE page in the USER SETUP window, rotate this knob to adjust the analog gain value of the head amp.
• [MIX/MATRIX] knob
Rotate this knob to switch between PRE and POST for the corresponding send signal.
Press this knob to switch the corresponding send signal on or off.
• [HPF] knob
Press this knob to switch the high-pass filter on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 1] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 1 on or off.
• [DYNAMICS 2] knob
Press this knob to switch DYNAMICS 2 on or off.
NOTE
In Alternate mode, all knobs in the SELECTED CHANNEL section other than those knobs mentioned above will be disabled.
Switching banks for USER DEFINED key settings
You can register the USER DEFINED key settings (16 keys for CL series consoles) to a maximum of four banks.
Use the four BANK SELECT buttons on the left to select a bank.
You can press the CLEAR ALL button on the top right side to clear the content of the selected bank.
Setup
198
Reference Manual
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED keys
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
NO ASSIGN -
ALTERNATE
FUNCTION
LATCH
UNLATCH
AUTOMIXER group a OVERRIDE ON group a PRESET ON group b OVERRIDE ON
-
-
- group b PRESET ON -
BRIGHTNESS BANK CHANGE
CH ON
CH SELECT
CUE
DANTE
INPUT
PATCH LIB group c OVERRIDE ON - group c PRESET ON
SPECIFIC CH
INC
DEC
SPECIFIC CH
OUTPUT
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
CUE MODE
CUE INTERRUPTION
FADER CUE RELEASE
DIRECT RECALL
-
-
-
-
-
*4)
-
*1)
-
-
*2)
-
-
-
PARAMETER 2
LIBRARY #000-#010
Description
No assignment.
Toggle ALTERNATE FUNCTION each time it is pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Switch to ALTERNATE FUNCTION only while pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group a where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off.
Switch the channels in group a to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/ mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group b where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off.
Switch the channels in group b to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/ mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
Apply a fade-in to the channels in group c where the override button is on, until the level drops to 0 dB (the unity gain). Mute all channels with the button turned off.
Switch the channels in group c to the mode indicated by the mode button (man/auto/ mute) next to the lit preset indicator.
Toggle between the brightness settings stored in A and B.
Switch the CH ON/OFF.
Increment or decrement the selected channel number.
Select a channel from list 1).
Switch CUE on/off.
This clears the CUE.
CUE the channel selected from list 2).
This function switches the cue mode. In
Surround mode, it toggles between MIX, LAST, and 5.1 SOLO with each press. When set to
MIX, the lamp is off. When set to LAST, the lamp is on. When set to 5.1 SOLO, the lamp flashes.
Switches the CUE INTERRUPTION function on or off.
Switches the FADER CUE RELEASE function on or off.
Directly recalls the desired number of the
DANTE INPUT PATCH library. However, it does not function during a scene recall.
EDITOR
CONTROL
FUNCTION
DCA ROLL-
OUT
PARAMETER 1
LAST DCA SEL
DCA1
:
DCA16
MASTER
SENDS ON FADER
OVERVIEW
Custom fader bank
Custom fader bank
SELECTED CHANNEL
LIBRARY
PARAMETER 2 Description
-
-
-
This function rolls out or retracts the selected
DCA group.
-
-
-
CH 1-16 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH17-32 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH33-48 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
CH49-64 {CL5/CL3}
CH65-72 {CL5}
ST IN
MIX1-16
MIX17-24
MATRIX
STEREO/MONO
DCA
A1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
A2 {CL5/CL3}
A3 {CL3}
B1 {CL5/CL3/CL1}
B2 {CL3/CL1}
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
B3 {CL1}
B4 {CL1}
C1 {CL5}
C2 {CL5}
C3 {CL5}
C4 {CL5}
C5 {CL5}
C6 {CL5}
-
DYNAMICS LIBRARY
INPUT EQ LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
EFFECT LIBRARY
GEQ LIBRARY
INPUT CH LIBRARY
OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY
PEQ LIBRARY
Setup
199
Reference Manual
FUNCTION
EDITOR
CONTROL
PARAMETER 1
PREMIUM RACK
LIBRARY
PATCH EDITOR
RACK EDITOR
METER
GROUP/LINK
SCENE
EFFECT
BYPASS
EFFECT RACK1-8
PREMIUM RACK1A
PREMIUM RACK1B
:
PREMIUM RACK8A
FADER BANK
SNAPSHOT
PREMIUM RACK8B
-
PARAMETER 2 Description
Portico5033 LIBRARY
Portico5043 LIBRARY
U76 LIBRARY
Opt-2A LIBRARY
EQ-1A LIBRARY
DynamicEQ LIBRARY
Buss Comp 369 LIBRARY
INPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH
OUTPUT INSERT PATCH
DIRECT OUT PATCH
PATCH LIST
RACK
GEQ 1-16
EFFECT 1-8
PREMIUM 1A
PREMIUM 1B
:
PREMIUM 8A
PREMIUM 8B
INPUT METER
OUTPUT METER
Access the corresponding screen of CL Editor.
-
-
-
-
-
-
DCA GROUP
MUTE GROUP
CHANNEL LINK
OUTPUT CHANNEL LINK
SCENE MEMORY
RECALL SAFE
Fade time
FOCUS RECALL
-
Turns BYPASS for each RACK on and off. Lit when ON.
Takes a snapshot of the bank settings for all A, B, and C blocks (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or displays the last bank for which a snapshot was taken (press and release the key within two seconds).
Setup
FUNCTION
GAIN KNOB
FUNCTION
GEQ FREQ
BANK
GPI OUT
HELP
HOME
METER
MIDI
MONITOR
PARAMETER 1
LATCH
UNLATCH
INC
DEC
LATCH
UNLATCH
-
SELECTED CH VIEW
OVERVIEW
TOGGLE
PEAK HOLD ON
SURROUND METER
PROGRAM CHANGE
CONTROL CHANGE
NOTE ON
OUTPUT
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
DIMMER ON
PARAMETER 2 Description
-
-
Toggle the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL GAIN). Lit when DIGITAL GAIN is selected.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Assign the function of the GAIN knob (ANALOG
GAIN/DIGITAL) to DIGITAL GAIN only while held down.
* However if the GAIN KNOB FUNCTION is switched to DIGITAL GAIN in the PREFERENCE screen etc., this will remain lit until the next time it is pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
-
-
-
-
Adds or removes a frequency bank in the GEQ
EDIT screen.
-
PORT1-PORT5
-
-
-
Toggle the GPI OUT function. Lit when active.
Make GPI OUT active only while pressed.
Opens and closes the HELP window. Operating the controllers on the panel (excluding faders), or controllers on the screen, while holding down this key will display the related information.
Displays the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen.
Displays the OVERVIEW screen.
Each press of the key will alternately display the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen and the
OVERVIEW screen.
-
-
Turns the meter’s peak hold function on/off. Lit when ON.
For Surround mode, toggle between the content to be shown in meters displayed in the
Function Access Area. The lamp is off for MIX 1-
6, and on for SURROUND MONITOR.
PGM 1-128
CC 1-31, 33-95, 102-119
NOTE ON C-2 (0)
:
Transmit the corresponding MIDI message.
For NOTE ON, it goes OFF when the bank is switched.
NOTE ON G 8 (127)
Switch the monitor output on/off.
While holding down this key, press the SEL key of a MIX or MATRIX channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL]
LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Enable the dimmer and attenuate the monitor signal.
200
Reference Manual
FUNCTION
MONITOR
PARAMETER 1
SOURCE SELECT
SURROUND SOURCE
SELECT
SURROUND DOWN-
MIX
SURROUND SPEAKER
MUTE
MASTER
NUENDO
LIVE
NUENDO
LIVE
MUTE GROUP 1
:
MUTE GROUP 8
ALL MUTE
TRANSPORT
TRANSPORT
PEAK CLEAR
ADD MARKER
STEREO MONO
SOLO
L, R, C, Ls, Rs, LFE
-
PARAMETER 2
STEREO L/R
MONO (C)
LCR
PB OUT
OMNI1-2
OMNI3-4
OMNI5-6
OMNI7-8
DEFINE
*6)
Description
Recall the selected signal to the monitor.
Recall the selected signal to the surround monitor.
When this function is off (the lamp is off), the setting returns to 5.1 monitor.
When this function is on (the lamp is on), the
SURROUND MONITOR screen opens. When this function is off (the lamp is off), the SURROUND
MONITOR screen closes.
This functionality is the same as the SPEAKER
MUTE function in the SURROUND MONITOR screen. When the SOLO button is on, it functions as a SOLO key.
Switch MUTE GROUP MASTER on/off.
-
Turns all MUTE GROUP MASTER settings on/off together.
GO TO PROJECT START
GO TO PREV MARKER
REWIND Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.
FAST FORWARD
GO TO NEXT MARKER
GO TO PROJECT END
CYCLE
STOP
START
REC
EASY RECORDING
Operate the transport functions of Nuendo Live.
-
-
Clear the peak indicators of the Nuendo Live screen.
This function executes ADD MARKER of
NUENDO Live.
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1
OSCILLATOR
OSCILLATOR ON
SELECTED CH ASSIGN
-
-
PAGE
CHANGE
RECORDER
DIRECT ASSIGN
BOOKMARK
DIRECT PLAY
201
SCENE
INC RECALL
REC RECALL
SCENE
DIRECT RECALL
RECALL UNDO
STORE UNDO
INC
DEC
RECALL
STORE
SEND MODE
MIX1-16/MIX17-24,
MATRIX
*1)
-
REC & START
NO ASSIGN
(TITLE 1)
:
-
-
PARAMETER 2
BOOKMARK with “SEL” -
PREVIOUS PAGE
NEXT PAGE
CLOSE POPUP
TRANSPORT
-
-
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP,
FF/NEXT,
REW/PREVIOUS, REC
AUTO REC
SCENE #000-#300
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Setup
Description
Switch the OSC on/off.
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of a channel to switch the assignment on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Assign the oscillator to the channel selected from list 1).
Memorize the currently-selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (Hold down the key, then release it within two seconds).
Popup windows can also be memorized. In the case of a rack, the number of that rack is also memorized.
Memorize the above BOOKMARK with the addition of the SEL status.
Display the previous/next page.
Close the displayed window.
Recorder transport functions.
Shortcut function for STOP REC PLAY.
Recording will be initiated in a single action. If this is executed during recording, the file being recorded will first be closed, and then recording will continue with a new file.
Start recording immediately without entering record-ready mode.
The specified audio file will be played once from the beginning.
Audio files to be played should be saved in the
SONGS folder inside the YPE folder. Please note that a file cannot be specified if it is saved in the root directory or in any other folder. When you execute playback, the path in the TITLE LIST screen will move to \YPE\SONGS\.
Recall the scene of the next existing number.
Recall the scene of the previous existing number.
Directly recall the scene of the specified number.
Execute RECALL UNDO.
Execute STORE UNDO.
Select the scene of the next existing number.
Select the scene of the previous existing number.
This function recalls the currently-selected scene.
Store the current settings.
If INPUT or ST IN is selected, switch the function of the Selected Channel section's send encoders from TO MIX1-16, TO MIX17-24, and MATRIX.
Reference Manual
FUNCTION
SENDS ON
FADER
PARAMETER 1
MIX1-MIX24
MTRX 1-MTRX 8
MIX ON FADER
MATRIX ON FADER
SENDS ON FADER
SET BY SEL
+48V
Ø
INSERT ON
DIRECT OUT ON
PRE SEND
SET DEFAULT
VALUE
-
TO STEREO
TO MONO
TO LCR
GAIN COMPENSATION
-
-
PARAMETER 2
NORMAL/WITH CUE
SET NOMI-
NAL VALUE
- -
Description
This function switches between the normal function on/off (NORMAL), and the function with cue on/off (WITH CUE). With the WITH
CUE option, cue will be enabled if SENDS ON
FADER mode is engaged or if you switch mode during SENDS ON FADER mode. Also, with the
WITH CUE option, cue for all output channels will be canceled if SENDS ON FADER mode is disengaged.
Hold down this key and press SEL to switch it on/off.
During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if on or dark if off.
If SET [PRE SEND] is selected, “SEND ON
FADER” mode is engaged while you are holding down the [SEL] key.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
Press and hold this key, and then press any of the following knobs on the panel to reset that knob to its default value: a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section, a knob in the
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen, or a knob in the Centralogic section.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
While holding down this key, press a [SEL] key to set the fader of that channel to nominal level.
You can also push a knob in the SEND field of the SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen to set the send level to nominal level.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
In Surround mode, this is used to switch the bus assign on and off for the channel selected in list
5).
SURROUND
PAN
SURROUND
PAN
L ON
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
*5)
PANNING L
PANNING R
PANNING Front Center
PANNING Ls
PANNING Rs
*5)
PANNING Back
PANNING Side L
PANNING Side R
PANNING Center
*5)
In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
In Surround mode, this is used to set hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
FUNCTION
SURROUND
PAN
PARAMETER 1
PANNING TOGGLE *5)
PARAMETER 2
TALKBACK
TALKBACK ON
LATCH
UNLATCH
SELECTED CH ASSIGN -
DIRECT ASSIGN
TAP TEMPO
CURRENT PAGE
EFFECT RACK1-8
*3)
TALKBACK
DIRECT ASSIGN WITH
ON
*3)
-
WITH POPUP
WITHOUT POPUP
Setup
Description
In Surround mode, this is used to toggle the settings for hard panning for the channel selected in list 5).
With each press, the setting is toggled in the following order: Center L Front Center R
Side R Rs Back, Ls Side L (Center).
Switch TALKBACK on/off.
Turn TALKBACK on while pressed.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
While holding down this key, press a SEL key of an OUTPUT channel to switch the assignment on/off. During this time, the [SEL] LED will be lit if assign is ON, or dark if OFF.
The assignment setting made while holding down this key will be stored. Pressing the key again will recall the stored setting. Settings can be stored in multiple keys to facilitate rapid assignment switching.
It goes OFF when the bank is switched.
The operations performed when this key is pressed are as follows.
- Toggle assignment of channel selected in list
3) ON and OFF.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned, the LED will be on.
Otherwise, the LED will be off.
The operations performed when this key is pressed are as follows.
- Assignments other than for the channel selected in list 3) are removed.
- If a channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at the same time, TALKBACK is turned OFF and the channel assignment is removed.
- Otherwise, TALKBACK will be ON and the channel assignment will be ON.
At this time, the LED display is as shown below.
- If the channel is assigned and TALKBACK is ON at the same time, the LED will be on.
- Otherwise, the LED will be off.
Use the tap tempo function in the displayed screen.
Use the tap tempo function for the specified effect. If WITH POPUP is selected, the Tap
Tempo screen is displayed. If WITHOUT POPUP is selected, the Tap Tempo screen is not displayed.
202
Reference Manual
FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
USER
DEFINED
KEYS
BANK SELECT
BANK A
BANK B
BANK C
BANK D
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
When selected, the lamp for the corresponding key comes on.
PREVIOUS BANK
Switches to the previous bank. If the current bank is BANK A, it switches to BANK D.
NEXT BANK
Switches to the next bank. If the current bank is
BANK D, it switches to BANK A.
*1) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST
R, MONO
*2) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,
MONO(C)
*3) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*4) CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO,
MONO(C), DCA1-DCA16
*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*6) MIX1-6, EXT5.1 1, EXT5.1 2, EXT5.1 3, EXT ST 1, EXT ST 2, EXT ST 3, EXT ST 4, MIX1/2, MIX3/4, MIX5/6,
MIX7/8, MIX9/10, MIX11/12, MIX13/14, MIX15/16, MIX17/18, MIX19/20, MIX21/22, MIX23/24, MATRIX1/2,
MATRIX3/4, MATRIX5/6, MATRIX7/8, STEREO, MONO, PB OUT
Setup
USER DEFINED knobs
This section explains how to assign the desired functions to the USER DEFINED knobs in the
USER DEFINED KNOBS section on the top panel, and press these knobs to execute the defined function.
If you are logged-in as a user, you can make USER DEFINED knob settings for the user. If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also make the USER DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
NOTE
For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED knobs
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.
4.
Press the button corresponding to the USER DEFINED knob to which you want to
assign a function.
5. In the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window, make sure that the FUNCTION field is
enclosed by a frame, then select the function that you want to assign.
6.
If the selected function has parameters, press the PARAMETER 1 or 2 field to move
the frame, then select parameters 1 and 2 in the same way.
7.
Press the OK button to close the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window.
8.
To execute an assigned function, press the corresponding USER DEFINED [1]-[4]
knob on the panel.
USER SETUP screen
(USER DEFINED KNOBS page)
USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window
203
Reference Manual
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make USER
DEFINED knob settings for the Guest account.
• The 4 knobs in the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page correspond to
USER DEFINED knobs [1]-[4] on the top panel. The name of the function or parameter assigned to each knob appears to the right of the corresponding button. If nothing is assigned to the button, an indication of “---” is shown.
• The list shown in the USER DEFINED KNOB SETUP window is the same for all models of the CL series.
For the CL3/CL1, the display will indicate
“Cannot Assign!” you specify a parameter that does not exist on that model.
• If there are no parameters for the registered USER DEFINED knob, nothing will occur when the knob is operated.
About TOUCH AND TURN
The TOUCH AND TURN function is assigned to the USER DEFINED [4] knob by default. If this function is assigned to one of the USER DEFINED knobs, you can press a desired knob in the touch screen and then immediately use the USER DEFINED knob to operate it.
At this time, a pink frame is shown around the knob in the touch screen, indicating that you can operate that knob.
Functions that can be assigned to USER DEFINED
knobs
Function
NO ASSIGN
AUTOMIXER
BRIGHTNESS
CUE
DIRECT OUT LEVEL
DYNAMICS1
DYNAMICS2
EFFECT
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
-
WEIGHT
LAMP
PANEL
SCREEN
CH COLOR
NAME
INPUT PFL TRIM
DCA TRIM
OUTPUT PFL TRIM
CUE LEVEL
LEVEL
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RATIO
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
THRESHOLD
RATIO
FREQUENCY
ATTACK
RELEASE
OUTGAIN
KNEE
WIDTH
Displays the EFFECT RACK No. (1-8) for the target operation as well as the name of the mounted EFFECT TYPE or the name of the GEQ/PEQ TYPE *a).
-
*1)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*14)
*2)
*4)
*2)
*4)
*2)
*13)
*4)
Displays the names of the 32 parame- ters for the EFFECT TYPE *b). Displays
“----” if a GEQ/PEQ is mounted.
Setup
204
Reference Manual
EQ
Function
EXTERNAL HA
HPF
I/O DEVICE
INPUT DELAY
INPUT GAIN
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE
MONITOR
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT LEVEL
OUTPUT PORT
PREMIUM RACK
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
ATT
LOW Q
LOW FREQUENCY
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQUENCY
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQUENCY
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQUENCY
HIGH GAIN
GAIN1-GAIN8
FREQUENCY
GAIN1-GAIN32
DELAY TIME
ANALOG GAIN
DIGITAL GAIN
CTRL 1-CTRL 31
CTRL 33-CTRL 95
CTRL 102-CTRL 119
DIMMER LEVEL
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL
MONITOR DELAY
MONITOR FADER
LEVEL
FREQUENCY
LEVEL(EVEN)
FREQUENCY(EVEN)
HPF
*2)
*10)
*4)
*11)
*3)
*4)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LPF
WIDTH
INTERVAL
LEVEL
-
-
-
*6)
*12)
DELAY TIME
GAIN
Displays the PREMIUM RACK No. (1A-
8B) for the corresponding operation, as well as the name of the mounted PRO-
CESSOR *a).
Displays the names of the 64 parame- ters for the PROCESSOR *b).
205
Function
RECORDER
SCENE
TO MIX LEVEL
TO MATRIX LEVEL
TO MIX PAN
TO MATRIX PAN
TO ST/MONO
TOUCH AND TURN
PARAMETER 1
INPUT GAIN
OUTPUT GAIN
SELECT
MIX1-MIX24
MATRIX1-MATRIX8
MIX1/2-MIX15/16
MATRIX1/2-MATRIX7/8
PAN/BAL
CSR
-
-
-
-
*3)
*7)
*3)
*7)
*5)
-
PARAMETER 2
*1) SELECTED CH, Automixer ch1-16
*2) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-
MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*3) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R
*4) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1-ST IN 8
*5) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24
*6) MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, ST L, ST R, MONO
*7) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48, ST IN 1L-ST IN 8R, MIX1-MIX24, ST L, ST
R, MONO
*10) # 1-# 6
*11) REMOTE HA #1-#8
*12) DANTE 1-DANTE64, OMNI 1-OMNI 8, SLOT1 1-SLOT1 16, SLOT2 1-SLOT2 16, SLOT3 1-SLOT3 16, DIGITAL
OUT L, DIGITAL OUT R
*13) SELECTED CH, MIX1-MIX24, MTRX1-MTRX8, STEREO, MONO (C)
*14) SELECTED CH, CL5: CH1-CH72, CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48
*a) If not mounted in the RACK, “----” is displayed.
*b) If there are no parameters, “----” is displayed.
Setup
Reference Manual
Assignable encoders
You can assign the desired function to the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on the fader strip of each channel, and control the function using the knob. For details on the assignable functions and their parameters, refer to
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the USER DEFINED KNOBS tab.
4.
Press the button in the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER field on the USER DEFINED KNOB
page.
5. In the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window, select the function you want to
assign.
6.
Press the OK button to close the ASSIGNABLE ENCODER SETUP window.
7.
Press the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key on the top panel repeatedly to select ASSIGN.
8.
Operate the GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob on each channel strip.
• The CL3 and CL1 have only one [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] key, so the function of all GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knobs will change simultaneously. On the CL5, you can switch the knob function in block A (left side) and block C/Master fader section (right side) independently by using the corresponding [GAIN/
PAN/ASSIGN] keys.
• This assignment does not apply to the multifunction knobs in the
Centralogic section, since these knobs are used to control on-screen parameters.
USER SETUP screen
(USER DEFINED KNOBS and
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER page)
ASSIGNABLE ENCODER
SETUP window
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the USER DEFINED KNOBS and ASSIGNABLE ENCODER for Guest page and make assignable knob settings for the Guest account.
• SELECTED SEND is the default setting. If SELECTED SEND is selected, you can use the assignable encoders to adjust the send level to the MIX/MATRIX channel that is selected for
SENDS ON FADER in the Function Access Area.
206
Setup
Reference Manual
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable
encoders
PAN
O
GAIN
O
O
ASSIGN
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Function
PAN/BALANCE
ANALOG GAIN
DIGITAL GAIN
NO ASSIGN
SELECTED SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MIX17 SEND
MIX18 SEND
MIX19 SEND
MIX20 SEND
MIX21 SEND
MIX22 SEND
MIX23 SEND
MIX24 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
PAN
BAL
A.GAIN
D.GAIN
MIX1-MTRX8
Depends on status
MIX1
MIX2
MIX3
MIX4
MIX5
MIX6
MIX7
MIX8
MIX9
MIX10
MIX11
MIX12
MIX13
MIX14
MIX15
MIX16
MIX17
MIX18
MIX19
MIX20
MIX21
MIX22
MIX23
MIX24
MTRX1
MTRX2
MTRX3
MTRX4
MTRX5
MTRX6
MTRX7
*1
*1
(Nothing will be displayed.)
*2
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
207
PAN GAIN ASSIGN
Function
PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MATRIX8 SEND
HPF FREQUENCY
DYNAMICS1 THRESHOLD
DYNAMICS2 THRESHOLD
DIGITAL GAIN
EQ ATT
INPUT DELAY
MTRX8
HPF
THRE1
THRE2
D.GAIN
ATT
DELAY
*3
*4
*5
*6
Units of scale are m, ms, ft, and fr. No description for samples.
O
O
O
DIRECT OUT LEVEL
SURROUND L-R PAN
SURROUND F-R PAN
D.OUT
L/R
F/R
*7
*8
O
O
SURROUND ROUND PAN
SURROUND DIV
L/R and F/R
DIV
O SURROUND LFE LFE
*1 Preference setting and the state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether this will be analog gain or digital gain.
*2 The send destination that is the target of Sends On Fader will be selected.
*3 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch the PRE/POST setting of the corresponding send or will switch the corresponding send on/off when pressed.
*4 The state of the ALT function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch the high-pass filter on/off.
*5 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 1 on/off.
*6 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether pressing the encoder will switch DYNAMICS 2 on/off.
*7 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to F/R.
*8 The state of the ALTERNATE function will determine whether turning the encoder will switch to L/R.
Setup
Reference Manual
GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN knob (assignable encoder)
functions
In CL V1.7 and later, the following functions have been added to SENDS ON FADER mode.
◆ When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select
ASSIGN
Use assignable encoders to adjust the level of channels.
Channel name display indication
Channel levels
Adjust with assignable encoder.
Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus
Adjust with the fader on the top panel.
◆ When using the [GAIN/PAN/ASSIGN] keys on the top panel to select
PAN
Use assignable encoders to adjust PAN sent from channels to the MIX/MATRIX bus (bus set for Stereo send in the BUS SETUP screen).
Channel name display indication
PAN sent from channel to MIX/MATRIX bus
Adjust with assignable encoder.
Send level to MIX/MATRIX bus
Adjust with the fader on the top panel.
Setup
Custom fader bank
Groups that organize channels routed to the top-panel faders are called
“fader banks.”
There are input and output channel banks, as well as custom fader banks. Custom fader banks enable you to select various combinations of channels, regardless of channel types.
This section explains how to set up a custom fader bank.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.
4.
Use the Bank Select keys to recall the fader settings to the top panel for the channels
you want to add to the custom fader bank.
5.
In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page, press the bank select button for
the custom fader bank you want to set up.
6.
In the FADER field, press the select button for the fader you want to set up.
7. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected
in step 6.
8.
To assign channels to other faders, repeat steps 5 through 7.
USER SETUP window (CUSTOM
FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)
NOTE
• If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make custom fader bank settings for the Guest account.
• You can also press the fader assign select buttons to assign channels to faders.
208
Reference Manual
USER SETUP screen
(CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)
1
3
2
6
4
5
◆ CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER field
1
Bank select buttons
Enable you to select a custom fader bank to which you want to assign a group of channels.
The number and name of the custom fader banks vary depending on the console model.
CL5:
A1, A2, B1, C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
CL3:
A1, A2, A3, B1, B2
CL1:
A1, B1, B2, B3, B4
2
MASTER button
Press this button to set channels that will be controlled by the faders in the Master fader section.
3
Block indicators
Display the graphics of the top panel block and faders that are the current target for editing.
The graphics vary depending on the console model.
CL5:
A (16 faders), B, C, MASTER
CL3:
A (16 faders), B, MASTER
CL1:
A (8 faders), B, MASTER
Setup
◆ FADER field
4
Fader select button
Selects the target fader. Press this button to select it, then press [SEL] keys on the top panel to add the corresponding channels to the selected fader bank.
5
Fader assign select button
Opens the Fader assign select window, in which you can change the channel assigned to the fader.
6
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all the current fader bank assignment. Pressing this button will open a confirmation dialog box. Press OK to clear the assignment. Otherwise, press CANCEL to return to the previous screen without changing the setting.
Master fader
You can set the channels that will be controlled by the two faders in the Master fader section.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the USER SETUP button.
3.
In the USER SETUP window, press the CUSTOM FADER tab.
4.
In the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page, press the MASTER button.
5.
In the FADER field, press the number button for the fader you want to set up.
6.
Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to assign a channel to the fader number selected
in step 5.
USER SETUP window (CUSTOM
FADER BANK/MASTER FADER page)
NOTE
If you are logged-in as the Administrator, you can also turn on the FOR GUEST button to access the CUSTOM FADER BANK/MASTER FADER for Guest page, and make master fader settings for the Guest account.
209
Reference Manual
Custom fader bank functions
Custom fader bank settings can be stored/recalled for individual scenes.
Custom fader bank settings are stored in scene data in separate regions for each model.
Custom fader bank settings
CL5 CL3 CL1
Recall Store Recall Store Recall Store
CL5 console CL3 console CL1 console
NOTE
Custom fader bank settings differ between models, and are not compatible. For example, custom fader bank settings included in scenes stored in CL5 cannot be reproduced if that same scene is recalled in CL3 or CL1. You must create and store custom fader bank settings in CL3 and CL1.
Precautions for when Loading Console Data
In V2.0 and later, custom fader bank settings are not only included in user settings, but in scene data as well. The custom fader bank settings that are called up vary depending on the logged-in user, the type of the loaded data, and the version. Please note the following points:
• If you load console data of the ALL type as Administrator, the custom fader bank settings for the saved Administrator are called up.
If you load ALL data as Guest or another user, the custom fader bank settings for the saved current scene are called up.
• If you load ALL data that was saved in CL V1.70 or earlier, since scenes do not include custom fader bank settings, the custom fader bank settings for the current scene when the load was performed are applied to all scenes. Therefore, before loading ALL data, we recommend that you either change users to set the custom fader bank to the desired setting, or that you enable Recall Safe for the custom fader bank.
Console Lock
You can temporarily prohibit console operations in order to prevent unwanted operation. This setting disables operations of the panel, so that controllers cannot be operated by an accidental touch or by an unauthorized third party while the operator is taking a break.
If a password is set for the currently logged-in user, that password will be used for the Console
Lock function. When the Console Lock function is enabled, the CONSOLE LOCK screen will appear and all controllers (excluding the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will become inoperable.
Setup
NOTE
• If you have forgotten the password, refer to “
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
• The Guest cannot set a password.
• Even while the console is locked, control from an external device via MIDI or CL Editor will still operate as usual.
Locking the console
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the CONSOLE LOCK button.
3.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the
user.
4.
Press the OK button to enable Console Lock function.
210
Reference Manual
SETUP screen
Unlocking the console
STEP
1.
Press the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
2.
If you are logged-in as a user for whom a password is set, enter the password for the
user, then press the OK button.
NOTE
If you are logged-in as a user for whom no password is set, the console will be unlocked when you touch the CONSOLE LOCK screen.
Specifying the CONSOLE LOCK screen image
If an image file has been saved on the USB flash drive, you can view that image on the
CONSOLE LOCK screen.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, specify the image file that you want to display, and then load it from the USB flash drive. For details about loading files from the USB flash drive, refer to
Loading a file from a USB flash drive
NOTE
Supported image file format is BMP in 800 x 600 pixels and 16/24/32-bit, but they will be converted into 16-bit for display.
Setup
Saving and loading setup data to and from a USB
flash drive
You can connect a commercially-available USB flash drive to the USB connector located to the right of the display, and save the internal settings and user authentication keys of the CL series console to the USB flash drive or load them from the USB flash drive.
CAUTION
An ACCESS indicator is shown in the Function Access Area while data is being accessed (saved, loaded, or deleted). During this time, do not disconnect the USB port or power-off the CL unit.
Doing so may damage the data in the flash drive.
NOTE
• Operation is guaranteed only for USB flash drives.
• The operation of USB flash drives with capacities of up to 32GB has been verified. (However, this does not necessarily guarantee the operation of all USB flash drives.) The FAT16 and FAT32 formats are supported. A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in
FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
◆ Basic operation
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
3.
Save/load/edit the data.
SETUP screen
211
Reference Manual
SAVE/LOAD window
The list will show the files and sub-directories that have been saved.
5 1 2 3 4 6
7
8 9 0 C A B
1
COPY button
Copies a file into a memory buffer (a temporary holding area).
2
PASTE button
Pastes the file that has been copied into a buffer memory.
3
DELETE button
Deletes the currently selected file.
NOTE
A directory cannot be deleted unless it is empty. The message
“Directory Not Empty!” will appear.
4
MAKE DIR button
Creates a new directory.
5
PATH
Indicates the name of the current directory. Press the arrow button to move to the next higher level. If the current directory is the top level, the arrow button is dimmed.
6
VOLUME NAME/FREE SIZE
Indicates the volume name and the amount of free space on the USB flash drive. If the
USB flash drive is write-protected, a protect symbol will appear in the VOLUME NAME field.
7
File list
This area lists the files and sub-directories that are saved on the USB flash drive. The highlighted line indicates the file selected for operations.
The file list contains the following items. When you press an item name, it will turn orange, and the list will be sorted by that item. Each time you press the item name, the sorting order will alternate between ascending and descending order.
•
FILE NAME................. Indicates the file name or directory name, and shows an icon indicating its type.
•
COMMENT ................. The comment added to the CL console setting file is displayed here. You can press this area to open a keyboard window, allowing you to enter a comment for the file.
•
READ ONLY ............... A lock symbol in this column indicates that the corresponding file is protected. You can press this area to enable or disable the protect setting.
Protected files cannot be overwritten.
• TYPE........................... Indicates the file type.
ALL: File containing CL internal settings
KEY: User authentication key
XML: Help file
BMP: Bitmap image file
MP3: MP3 file
[DIR]: Directory
NOTE
The file format version will be displayed in this field.
• TIME STAMP .............. Indicates the date and time at which the file was modified most recently.
8
File selection knob
Selects a file on the file list. You can operate this knob using the multifunction knob.
9
SAVE button
Saves all of the CL console internal settings together ( page 213 ).
10
LOAD button
Loads the selected CL setting file ( page 214 ).
A
CREATE USER KEY button
Creates a user authentication key ( page 189 ).
B
FORMAT button
Initializes the USB flash drive.
If an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, this button will become a USB
REMOUNT button. Press this button to remount a USB flash drive ( page 217 ).
C
WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O RACK button
If this is off, the DANTE SETUP and I/O device settings as well as word clock settings will be omitted when a settings file is loaded.
NOTE
The DANTE SETUP settings SECONDARY PORT and CONSOLE ID will not be changed even if the “WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O RACK” button is on.
Setup
212
Reference Manual
Saving the CL console's internal data on a USB flash drive
All of the CL series console’s internal data can be saved on a USB flash drive as a setting file.
The saved file will have an extension of
“.CLF”.
STEP
1.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the SAVE button.
2.
In the SAVE SELECT screen, select the data to be saved, the data type, and the save
destination.
3.
In the SAVE SELECT screen, press the SAVE button.
4.
Enter a file name and comment.
5.
Press the SAVE button to execute the Save operation.
SAVE SELECT screen
1
2
4 5 6 7 4
3
1
TYPE field
Specifies the types of data to be saved. The view of the TYPE field will vary depending on the tab you select.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
IN CH LIB
OUT CH LIB
IN EQ LIB
OUT EQ LIB
Input channel library
Output channel library
Input EQ library
Output EQ library
Data content
DYNA LIB Dynamics library
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
EFFECT LIB
GEQ LIB
8PEQ LIB
Effect library
GEQ library
8Band PEQ library
Data content
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Data content
5033 LIB
5043 LIB
Button
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQ-1A LIB
DynaEQ LIB
BussComp LIB
Portico 5033 library
Portico 5043 library
U76 library
Opt-2A library
EQ-1A library
DynamicEQ library
Buss Comp 369 library
Setup
213
Reference Manual
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
MIXER SETUP
OUTPUT PORT
MONITOR
MIDI SETUP
MIDI PGM
MIDI CTL
Dante In Patch
Data content
Mixer setup
Output port
CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI setup
MIDI program changes
MIDI control changes
Dante input patch library
NOTE
When the output port items are saved individually, channel assignments for the port will not be saved. To prevent this, save the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel assignment as well.
2
SOURCE field
Indicates the internal data of the CL series console.
3
DESTINATION field
Indicates the save destination.
4
Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
5
MULTI SELECT button
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
6
SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
7
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
NOTE
• To select a different directory as a save destination, in the SAVE/LOAD window, press a directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field.
• If you are going to overwrite a file or save a file with the same name in the same folder, a dialog will ask you to confirm the overwrite.
• You can enter a comment of up to 32 characters.
• You may enter a file name of more than eight characters. However, the drive name, path name, and file name are limited to a total of 256 characters. If you exceed this limit, you may be unable to save the file, depending on the length of the file name. If this error indication appears at the bottom of the screen, shorten the file name and try saving the file again.
Setup
Loading a file from a USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to load a CL settings file (extension .CLF) from the USB flash drive into the CL series console.
You can use the same procedure to load the following files as well as settings files.
Extension
.CLF
.CLU
.XML
.TXT
.BMP
ALL
KEY
Type
XML
TEXT
BMP
Contents of file
CL console internal setting file
CL console user authentication key
XML file for displaying Help
Text file for displaying Help
Image file for display in the CONSOLE LOCK screen (256 or more colors, uncompressed bitmap format)
CAUTION
Some data may contain settings that will cause the console to output signals immediately after the data is loaded. Before you load, turn off the power of the equipment connected to the CL series console and/or lower the volume of such equipment so that there will not be a problem even if a signal is output from the CL console.
NOTE
• When the file has finished being loaded, the window that shows the progress of the loading operation and the type of data will close. If you cancel this procedure while it is in progress, data up to the cancellation point will still be loaded.
• Some setting data may not be loaded, depending on the USER LEVEL setting during the load operation.
STEP
1.
To select the file that you want to load, press the name of the desired file in the file
list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or rotate the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob.
2. If you want the DANTE SETUP and I/O device-related settings saved in the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF) and the word clock settings to be applied to
the CL console, press the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button to turn it on.
3.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the LOAD button.
4. In the LOAD SELECT screen, select the data to load, the data type, and the load
destination.
5.
Press the LOAD button to load the selected file.
214
Reference Manual
LOAD SELECT screen
1
2
3
4 5 6 7 4
1
TYPE field
Indicates the type of data to be loaded. The view will vary depending on the tab you select.
• ALL tab
This button selects all the items.
• SCENE tab
This button selects scene memories.
• INPUT/OUTPUT tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Data content Button
IN CH LIB
OUT CH LIB
IN EQ LIB
OUT EQ LIB
DYNA LIB
Input channel library
Output channel library
Input EQ library
Output EQ library
Dynamics library
Setup
• EFFECT/GEQ tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
EFFECT LIB
GEQ LIB
8PEQ LIB
Effect library
GEQ library
8Band PEQ library
Data content
• PREMIUM tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
5033 LIB
5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Button
Opt-2A LIB
EQ-1A LIB
DynaEQ LIB
BussComp LIB
Portico 5033 library
Portico 5043 library
U76 library
Opt-2A library
EQ-1A library
DynamicEQ library
Buss Comp 369 library
Data content
• SETUP tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Button
MIXER SETUP
OUTPUT PORT
MONITOR
MIDI SETUP
MIDI PGM
MIDI CTL
Dante In Patch
Data content
Mixer setup
Output port
CUE/MONITOR/OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK
MIDI setup
MIDI program changes
MIDI control changes
Dante input patch library
NOTE
When the output port items are loaded individually, channel assignments for the port will not be applied. To prevent this, load and then recall the scene that contains input/output patching for the channel assignment.
215
Reference Manual
• ADMIN tab
The following table lists the items that you can select.
Type
ADMIN PREF
ADMIN UDEF
ADMIN FADER
GUEST PREF
GUEST UDEF
GUEST FADER
GUEST LEVEL
Data content
PREFERENCE (for the Administrator)
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the
Administrator)
CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Administrator)
PREFERENCE (for the Guest)
USER DEFINED KEYS/USER DEFINED KNOBS (for the Guest)
CUSTOM FADER BANK (for the Guest)
USER LEVEL (for the Guest)
2
SOURCE field
This area lists the data that is saved on the USB flash drive.
3
DESTINATION field
Indicates the load destination.
4
Data selection knob
This knob selects the data shown in the field.
5
MULTI SELECT button
Press this button to make a selection containing multiple items of data.
6
SELECT ALL button
Press this button to select all items.
7
CLEAR ALL button
Press this button to clear all selections.
Setup
Editing the files saved on the USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to perform editing operations such as sorting the files and directories on the USB flash drive, editing the file names or comments, copying, and pasting.
◆ Sorting files
To sort the files, press one of the headings “FILE NAME,” “COMMENT,” “READ ONLY,”
“TYPE,” or “TIME STAMP” at the top of each column on the SAVE/LOAD window. The list will be sorted as follows, according to the column heading you press.
1 2 3 4 5
1
FILE NAME
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the file names.
2
COMMENT
Sort the list in numerical/alphabetical order of the comment.
3
READ ONLY
Sort the list by Write Protect on/off status.
4
TYPE
Sort the list by file type.
5
TIME STAMP
Sort the list by date and time of update.
NOTE
By pressing the same location again, you can change the direction (ascending order or descending order) in which the list is sorted.
◆ Editing file names/comments
STEP
1. In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FILE NAME field or COMMENT field of each
file.
2.
Enter a file name or comment in the keyboard window, and press the RENAME
button or SET button.
NOTE
You cannot edit the file name or comment of a write-protected file.
216
Reference Manual
◆ Copying and pasting a file
Follow the steps below to copy a desired file into buffer memory, and then paste it with a different file name.
STEP
1. Turn the multifunction knob to select the copy-source file, and press the COPY
button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2. Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field to move to the
directory into which you want to paste the file.
3.
Press the PASTE button.
4.
Enter the file name, and press the PASTE button.
NOTE
You cannot use a file name that already exists when you paste a file.
◆ Deleting a file
STEP
1.
Rotate the multifunction knob to select a file to delete, then press the DELETE
button in the SAVE/LOAD window.
2.
To execute the Delete operation, press the OK button.
NOTE
You cannot delete a protected file.
◆ Creating a directory
STEP
1.
Press the directory icon or press the arrow button in the PATH field in the SAVE/
LOAD window to change the directory.
2.
Press the MAKE DIR button.
3.
Enter the name of the directory you want to create, then press the MAKE button.
NOTE
You cannot create a directory using a directory name that already exists.
Setup
Formatting a USB flash drive
Follow the steps below to format a USB flash drive.
A USB flash drive with a capacity of 4GB or larger will be formatted in FAT32, and a USB flash drive with a capacity of 2GB or smaller will be formatted in FAT16.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
3.
In the SAVE/LOAD window, press the FORMAT button.
4.
Enter a volume name, and press the FORMAT button.
5.
To execute the Format operation, press the OK button.
SAVE/LOAD window
217
Reference Manual
Recovering after overcurrent at the USB port
Even if the connection with the USB device was stopped because an overcurrent condition occurred at the USB port, it is possible to use the USB device again without turning the console power off and back on.
Setup
Word clock and slot settings
“Word clock” refers to the clock that provides the basis of timing for digital audio signal processing. To send and receive digital audio signals between devices, those devices must be synchronized to the same word clock. If digital audio signals are transferred in an unsynchronized state, the data may not be transmitted or received correctly, and noise may be present in the signal, even if the sampling rates are the same.
Specifically, you must first decide which device will transmit the reference word clock for the entire system (the word clock master), and then set the remaining devices (the word clock slaves) so that they synchronize to the word clock master.
If you wish to use the CL series console as a word clock slave that is synchronized to the word clock supplied from an external device, you must specify the appropriate clock source (the port through which the word clock is obtained).
This section explains how to select the clock source that the CL series console will use.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2. In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the WORD CLOCK/SLOT
SETUP button.
3. In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT field of the WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window,
select a clock source.
4.
Press the “x” symbol located in the upper right to close the window.
◆ Recovery procedure
After removing the cause of the overcurrent at the USB port, press the location that shows
“USB REMOUNT” at the FORMAT button of the SAVE/LOAD window.
SETUP screen
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window
218
Reference Manual
WORD CLOCK/SLOT SETUP window
1
2
3
5
4
7
6
8
◆ MASTER CLOCK SELECT field
1
Master clock frequency display
Indicates the frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) of the currently-selected master clock. If the unit is not synching to the master clock, “UNLOCK” will appear.
NOTE
• If sample rate pull-up/down has been specified in the Dante
Controller application, this area indicates the change in the sample rate as a percentage, such as -4.0%, -0.1%, +0.1%, and
+4.1667%.
• To change the master clock when sample rate pull-up/down has been specified, disable the pull- up/down in the Dante Controller, change the master clock, then specify pull-up/down again.
2
Master clock select buttons
Use the buttons to select the clock source that you want to use as the word clock master from the following options:
• INT 48 k
• INT 44.1 k
The CL console internal clock (sampling rate 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz) will be the clock source.
• WORD CLOCK IN
The word clock supplied from the WORD CLOCK IN jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source.
Setup
• DANTE 48 k
• DANTE 44.1 k
The word clock supplied from the Dante jack on the rear panel of the console will be used as the clock source.
NOTE
With CL V2.03 and later, if you initialize the console to factory settings, the default value for the word clock is set to DANTE 48k. This allows you to synchronize word clock even when using multiple CL and QL consoles at their default settings.
• SLOT 1-3
The word clock supplied via a digital I/O card installed in a console slot will be used as the clock source. Word clock can be selected in pairs for each slot.
3
Clock status Indicator
Indicates the console's status as a master or a slave in the Dante audio network.
Master
Slave
NOTE
When is displayed and the specified word clock is not synchronized with a device acting as a Dante master, the audio might cut out.
4
Clock status display
Indicates the status of synchronization with the master clock for each clock source. Each indicator is explained below:
• LOCKED (light blue)
Indicates that a clock synchronized with the selected clock source is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring properly between that device and the CL series console. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized.
• LOCKED, BUT NOT SYNC'ED (yellow)
A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the selected clock source. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console.
• SRC ON (green)
This is a special status that applies only to SLOT1-3. It indicates that SCR (Sample Rate
Converter) is enabled for the corresponding channel. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/output with the CL series console is occurring.
• UNLOCKED (red)
A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the CL series console.
219
Reference Manual
• UNKNOWN (black)
This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established.
NOTE
• If the indicator for the selected clock does not turn light blue, make sure that the external device is correctly connected, and that the external device is set to transmit clock data.
• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. To protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp volume before changing the word clock setting.
• If you attempt to select a channel (for which SRC is on) as the word clock source, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled.
◆ SLOT SETUP field
This field enables you to make various settings related to the MY slots on the rear panel of the console.
5
Card name
Indicates the type of card installed in the slot. If nothing is installed, “----” will appear.
6
SRC buttons
The SCR (Sampling Rate Converter) function can be switched on or off for a slot in which an MY card (MY8-AE96S) that features the SRC function is installed. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, no SRC button will appear.
7
FREQUENCY display
Indicates the sampling frequency of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
8
EMPHASIS STATUS display
Indicates the emphasis information of input signals if the installed card can detect the substatus of input signals, such as an AES/EBU card. If another type of card is installed, or if no card is installed, “----” will appear.
Audio signals of unit A
DIGITAL
OUT
CL A
(Cascade slave)
Audio signals of
A + B
DIGITAL
IN
CL B
(Cascade master)
Digital I/O card
In this example, up to twenty four buses chosen from MIX bus 1-24, MATRIX bus 1-8,
STEREO bus (L/R), MONO (C) bus, and CUE bus (L/R) can be shared, and the mixed signals transmitted from the cascade master CL unit. (If you use three 16-ch digital I/O cards, all buses can be shared among the devices.) When the required settings are made for the cascade slave and for the cascade master, the bus signals of the cascade slave will be sent via the slot to the buses of the cascade master, and the combined signals of both buses will be output from the cascade master. If the Cascade Link function is enabled, the specified operations or parameter changes performed on either CL series console will be followed by the other CL console.
You must specify bus assignments for each slot or channel on each CL unit. The procedure below is given separately for the cascade slave and the cascade master.
Setup
Using cascade connections
Using multiple CL series consoles, or a CL console and an external mixing console (such as a Yamaha PM5D) in a cascade connection enables buses to be shared among the devices.
This can be convenient if you want to use an external mixer to increase the number of inputs.
This section explains cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two CL units are connected in a cascade configuration.
About cascade connections
To cascade two CL series consoles, you must first install digital I/O cards in the appropriate slots, and connect the output ports of the sending unit (the cascade slave) to the input ports of the receiving unit (the cascade master).
The following illustration shows an example in which three eight-channel digital I/O cards for each unit are installed in the cascade slave CL unit and in the cascade master CL unit. The
DIGITAL OUT jacks of the sending unit are connected to the DIGITAL IN jacks of the receiving unit.
220
Reference Manual
NOTE
• In Surround mode, you cannot use cascade output on MIX buses1-6. In addition, if you have selected 5.1 SOLO in CUE mode, you cannot monitor CUE from the cascade slave at the cascade master.
• If you are making a cascade connection between the CL unit and the PM5D, you can use the CL unit as the cascade slave by setting the PM5D's CASCADE IN PORT SELECT to a slot. However, only the audio signals will be cascaded, and the control signals cannot be linked.
• You can also use an AD/DA card to make cascade connections with an analog mixer.
• There is no limit to the number of units that can be cascade-connected, but the signal delay at the cascade slave will increase in accordance with the number of units from the cascade master.
Operations on a cascade slave CL unit
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3.
In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE OUT PATCH tab.
4. In the CASCADE OUT PATCH page, press the OUT PATCH button for the bus to which
you want to assign the port.
5. Use the slot select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and output ports
that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE button.
6. In the CASCADE COMM PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive
control signals for cascade link.
7. Use the CASCADE LINK MODE buttons to select the item that you want to link.
NOTE
• You cannot assign two or more buses to the same output port. If you select a port to which a signal route has already been assigned, the previous assignment will be canceled.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
CASCADE window (CASCADE OUT PATCH page)
You can select the slot and output port that will output each bus.
2
3
Setup
1
4
1
OUT PATCH buttons (CASCADE OUT PATCH section)
Enable you to select the output port for cascade connections for each of MIX 1-24,
MATRIX 1-8, STEREO L/R, MONO, and CUE L/R buses. Press the button to open the
PORT SELECT window, in which you can select a port.
2
CASCADE LINK MODE buttons
Specify whether cue operations or scene store/recall operations will be linked on the CL series consoles in a cascade connection.
• OFF
No link operation
• CUE
The following cue-related parameters and events will be linked.
• Cue enable/disable
• Cue mode (MIX CUE or LAST CUE)
• Cue point settings for input channels and output channels
• ALL
All linkable parameters and events (including cue-related parameters) will be linked.
• Cue-related parameters and events (see above)
• Scene recall operations
• Scene store operations
221
Reference Manual
• DIMMER (MONITOR screen) operations
• Panel LED and display brightness (SETUP screen) operations
• Master mute group operations
3
CASCADE COMM PORT buttons
Specify the communication port used for transmitting and receiving link information when cue operations or scene store/recall operations are linked on the CL series consoles in a cascade connection.
• NONE.....................No link operation
• MIDI........................Use MIDI port
• SLOT1 ....................Use SLOT1
4
Tabs
Enable you to switch between items.
PORT SELECT window
Press the OUT PATCH button to open this window.
Setup
Operations on the cascade master CL unit
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SYSTEM SETUP field of the SETUP screen, press the CASCADE button.
3.
In the CASCADE window, press the CASCADE IN PATCH tab.
4. In the CASCADE IN PATCH page, press the IN PATCH button for the bus to which you
want to assign the port.
5. In the PORT SELECT screen, use the slot select list and the port select buttons to select the slot and input ports that you want to assign, and then press the CLOSE
button.
6.
As described in step 6 of “ Operations on a cascade slave CL unit ” ( page 221 ), in the
CASCADE LINK PORT field, select the port that will transmit and receive control
signals for cascade link.
7.
As described in step 7 of “ Operations on a cascade slave CL unit ” ( page 221
CASCADE COMM LINK field, select the same item as the cascade slave.
NOTE
• You can assign the same input port to two or more buses.
• Control signals for the cascade link and MIDI messages cannot share the same port. If you select a port that is already specified for transmission/reception of MIDI messages, a dialog box will ask whether it is OK to cancel the existing settings.
1
1
Slot select list
This list selects slots 1-3.
2
Port select buttons
These buttons select the port of the specified slot.
2
222
Reference Manual
Basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses
Follow the steps below to change the basic settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses, such as switching between stereo and monaural, and selecting the send point from which the signal of an input channel will be sent. The settings you make in the following procedure are saved as part of the scene.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the SETUP screen, press the BUS SETUP button.
3.
Use the tabs in the BUS SETUP window to select the MIX bus or MATRIX bus.
4.
Use the SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons to specify whether each bus will function as
STEREO (main parameters will be linked for two adjacent odd-numbered/even-
numbered buses) or MONOx2 (use as two monaural channels).
5. Use the bus type/send point select buttons to select the bus type and the position
from which the signal of the input channel will be sent.
6.
As desired, turn the buttons in the PAN LINK field on or off.
SETUP screen
BUS SETUP window
BUS SETUP window
You can make various settings for MIX buses and MATRIX buses.
1 2 4 1 3 4
5
MIX 1-16 page
5
MIX BUS 17-24/MATRIX BUS page
1
SIGNAL TYPE switch buttons
Select how signals are processed for every adjacent pair of buses. Select either STEREO
(stereo signal) or MONOx2 (monaural signal x 2).
2
Bus type/send point select buttons (MIX bus only)
For every adjacent pair of buses, you can select the bus type and (for vari-type) the send point. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
VARI [PRE EQ] VARI
VARI [PRE FADER] VARI
FIXED FIXED
Bus type Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
---
3
Send point select buttons (MATRIX bus only)
Select the pre-fader send point from the input channel. These buttons correspond to the following parameters.
Button
PRE EQ
PRE FADER
Pre-fader send point
Immediately before the EQ
Immediately before the fader
Setup
223
Reference Manual
4
PAN LINK button
This button appears if SIGNAL TYPE is set to STEREO and VARI is set. If the button is on, the pan setting of signals sent from input channels to the corresponding two buses will link with the STEREO bus pan setting.
5
Tabs
Enable you to switch between the MIX and MATRIX buses.
Switching the entire phantom power supply on/off
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2.
In the center of the SETUP screen, press the +48V MASTER field's ON button or OFF
button.
If this button is off, phantom power will not be supplied even if the +48V button of an
OMNI jack input channel or TALKBACK IN is on.
Setup
Specifying the brightness of the touch screen,
LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps
Follow the steps below to specify the brightness of the touch screen, top panel LEDs, channel name displays, and lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP connectors. You can save two different brightness settings in bank A and B, and switch between them rapidly if desired.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
In the field located in the right of the bottom row of the SETUP screen, press the
BANK A or BANK B button.
3.
Use the multifunction knob to adjust the brightness of each item.
NOTE
You can also assign this parameter to a USER DEFINED key, and press that key to switch between banks A and B.
SETUP screen (brightness setting field)
SETUP screen
NOTE
This +48V MASTER setting does not affect the inputs of external racks such as DANTE inputs (I/
O devices). Each rack has a +48V MASTER switch, and will operate according to its setting.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
BANK A/B buttons
Switch between the brightness settings.
◆ CONTRAST field
2
NAME
Adjusts the contrast of the characters of the channel name displays on the top panel.
◆ BRIGHTNESS field
3
NAME
Adjusts the brightness of the channel name displays on the top panel.
This will also change the CH COLOR brightness. If you want to adjust the CH COLOR brightness after setting the name display brightness, use the CH COLOR knob.
4
CH COLOR
Adjusts the brightness of the channel colors on the top panel.
This lets you apply a relative adjustment to only the channel color brightness without changing the channel name display brightness.
224
Reference Manual
5
SCREEN
This knob adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
If you have set the brightness to lower than level 2, the CL will start up next time with a brightness setting of 2 so that you will be able to see the screen.
6
PANEL
Adjusts the brightness of the top panel LEDs. If the optional MBCL meter bridge is installed on the CL3/CL1, this knob setting will also affect the LEDs on the meter bridge.
NOTE
If the AD8HR is connected, the brightness of the AD8HR's LEDs will also change.
7
LAMP
This knob adjusts the brightness of the lamps connected to the rear panel LAMP jacks.
Setting the date and time of the internal clock
This section explains how to set the date and time of the CL console’s internal clock, and how to select the date and time display format. The date and time you specify here will affect the time stamp used when saving a scene.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the DATE/TIME button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3. In the FORMAT field of the DATE/TIME window, press the MODE buttons several
times to select the desired format for date and time display.
4.
Use multifunction knobs 1-6 in the Centralogic section to specify the current date
and time.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
DATE/TIME window
Press the DATE/TIME button in the SETUP screen to open this window.
Setup
3
FORMAT (Display format)
Specifies the format in which the date and time of the internal clock are displayed.
You can select from the following display formats.
• Date
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year)
DD/MM/YYYY (Day/Month/Year)
YYYY/MM/DD (Year/Month/Day)
• Time
24-Hour (hours shown in the range of 0-23)
12-Hour (hours shown from 0am-11am, and 0pm-11pm)
Setting the network address
This section explains how to set the network address that will be required when you use the
NETWORK connector on the CL series console to connect it to a computer.
If you plan to connect the CL series console to your computer in a one-to-one connection, we recommend that you use the following default values.
IP Address: 192.168.0.128
Gateway address: 192.168.0.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Make sure that the IP address and Gateway address do not match the addresses of any other device on the network.
NOTE
• Only the Administrator can change network settings.
• For details on settings related to connecting to a LAN, refer to the CL Editor Installation Guide.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
2.
Press the NETWORK button at the lower part of the SETUP screen.
3. Press a knob in the NETWORK screen to select it, and use the multifunction knobs in
the Centralogic section to specify the address.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button.
5.
Restart the CL series console.
1 2 3
1
DATE
This field specifies the date of the internal clock.
2
TIME
This field specifies the time of the internal clock.
225
Reference Manual
NETWORK window
1
3
2
4
1
IP ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies an individual device on the Internet or LAN network.
2
GATEWAY ADDRESS
Specifies an address that identifies a device (gateway) that converts data between different media or protocols to allow communication within the network.
3
SUBNET MASK
Within the IP address used in the network, this defines the bits that are used for the network address that distinguishes the network.
4
MAC ADDRESS
Indicates the MAC (Machine Access Control) address, which identifies a host in a network. This address is for display only, and cannot be edited.
NOTE
The NETWORK connector on the CL series console transmits data via either 100BASE-TX
(transmission speed: maximum 100 Mbps) or 10BASE-T (transmission speed: max 10 Mbps).
Dante audio network settings
You will use the CL series console to make Dante audio network settings for the console itself and the I/O devices connected to the Dante connector of the CL series console. This section explains how to make Dante audio network settings.
STEP
1.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to access the SETUP screen.
2. In the DANTE field at the center of the screen, press the DANTE SETUP button to
open the DANTE SETUP window.
3.
Press the SETUP tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
SETUP screen
DANTE SETUP window
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
1
2 3
4
5
6
8 7
9
1
STATUS indicators
Show the operating status of the CL series console and the Dante network.
2
CONSOLE ID select buttons
Set the IDs for the CL series consoles.
If five or more CL units are connected to a network, and you plan not to assign IDs to some of the units, press the OFF button of each of those units to turn off the ID.
3
SECONDARY PORT select buttons
Specify how the Dante audio network is configured.
Setup
226
Reference Manual
4
CANCEL button
When editing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, you can press this button to cancel the changes you made.
5
APPLY button
After changing the CONSOLE ID or SECONDARY PORT settings, press this button to apply the changes you made.
6
BIT select buttons
Enable you to set the audio bit depth to 24-bit or 32-bit.
• 24bit................... Use this when transmitting and receiving data to or from an R series unit. When using a CL series system, you will normally use this setting.
• 32bit................... This is effective when transmitting and receiving 25-bit or larger data
(when using cascade or gain compensation), but the amount of data being transmitted will increase 20-30% compared to 24-bit.
7
LATENCY select buttons
Enable you to set the Dante audio network latency to 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, or 5.0 ms.
The latency setting varies depending on the network connection method and size. For
details, refer to “ Setting the Dante audio network latency ” ( page 228 ).
8
DANTE PATCH BY select buttons
If the THIS CONSOLE button is selected, the DANTE INPUT PATCH and DANTE OUTPUT
PATCH settings can be edited from the CL series console.
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected, it will not be possible to edit the Dante patch settings. You can operate these buttons regardless of the state of the DANTE
PATCH BY select buttons on other CL/QL series consoles on the network.
9
PREFERRED MASTER button
If this button is turned ON, the console's status as a master is given greater priority in the Dante audio network.
If this button is turned OFF, the console's status as a master is given less priority in the
Dante audio network.
•
If there is only one CL console for which this button is turned ON, that console will become the master.
•
If there are multiple CL consoles for which this button is turned ON, only one of them will become the master.
•
If this button is turned OFF for all CL consoles, one unit out of all Dante devices, including I/O devices, will become the master.
NOTE
•
Settings that are shared with the I/O device (BIT/LATENCY/W.CLOCK) will reflect the settings of the CL series console whose CONSOLE ID is set to #1.
•
If the DANTE CONTROLLER button is selected in the DANTE PATCH BY section, and you attempt to edit the Dante patching or related settings, the message
“This Operation is Not
Allowed” will appear at the bottom of the screen.
227
Setup
• DANTE patch information is applied to the device if the CL settings file (file name extension .CLF) is loaded under the following conditions. Otherwise, the information is not applied and the current state will be maintained.
• In the SAVE/LOAD window ( page 211 ), the WITH DANTE SETUP AND I/O DEVICE button is
on.
• Either #1, #2, #3, or #4 CONSOLE ID select button is on.
• The THIS CONSOLE button of the DANTE PATCH BY select buttons is on.
• With CL V2.03 and later, when settings are initialized, including Dante audio network settings, or a firmware update is installed, the Preferred Master setting is turned on. This setting is not changed when console settings are changed or when the console is restarted. It can be turned off using the Dante Controller, if necessary. If this default setting is used to change CL or QL word clock settings for anything other than Dante, that console is given priority as the clock master for the Dante network to prevent clock synchronization errors. Further, you can use Dante Controller to clearly specify the master by turning on only Preferred Master for the device that will always be running (off for all other devices).
Reference Manual
Switching the CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT
STEP
1.
In the DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page), select the CONSOLE ID and the
SECONDARY PORT.
2.
Press the APPLY button.
3.
In the window to confirm the change, press the OK button.
DANTE SETUP window (SETUP page)
The button you switched is shown in red.
When the Dante audio network settings have been applied, the button you selected will return to its original appearance.
• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, the DANTE PATCH BY field is fixed to “DANTE
CONTROLLER.” Also, patching cannot be changed in the DANTE INPUT PATCH window.
• When the CONSOLE ID is set to OFF, all the mounted devices will be “virtual.”
You can edit HA GAIN and other settings for R series units, but notification of the settings will not be sent to the device. This is the same as when the devices are not connected.
Setting the Dante audio network latency
An appropriate latency setting for signals transmitted over a Dante audio network varies depending on the network connection method and size. This section explains how to set an appropriate latency setting depending on the connection method of Dante-enabled devices that are connected to the CL series console.
◆ Relationship between the switches and the number of hops
An appropriate latency setting on a Dante audio network varies depending on the number of hops in the network. One hop is the step from one router (switch) to the next. You count the number of hops starting from the master device to the most distant device (assuming that all devices are connected in series).
Switches mean switching hubs as well as the switches that are built into CL series consoles and I/O devices. Set the latency value based on the number of hops. The following table shows typical latency settings based on the number of hops.
Number of hops
Up to 3
Up to 5
Up to 10
Up to 20
21 or more (or if a problem occurs)
Latency (ms)
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
5.0
NOTE
• Depending on network conditions, you may want to raise the latency value even if the number of hops is small.
• If a problem occurs, select 5.0 ms so that you will be able to identify whether the latency setting is the cause of the problem.
Setup
NOTE
• If you change the SECONDARY PORT, you must also change the method of connection between the CL series console and the I/O devices. For example if the connections used for the
REDUNDANT setting are left as they are when you change the setting to DAISY CHAIN, it will become impossible to send and receive audio. Be sure to disconnect the cables before you change the setting.
• The CONSOLE ID and SECONDARY PORT settings will not be changed even if you initialize the
CL series console.
• When the CONSOLE ID is OFF or is set to 2, 3, or 4 for a CL series console, the console's BIT/
LATENCY will not change even if the BIT/LATENCY is changed in the DANTE SETUP window for the CL series console within a network for which the CONSOLE ID is set to 1.
228
Reference Manual
◆ Connection examples and latency settings
Daisy chain connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
1
3
2
3
1
2
3 hops = 0.25 ms 3 hops = 0.25 ms
Daisy chain connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
4
3
2
3
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
1
2
3 hops = 0.25 ms
Redundant connections
Simple 64-in/48-out
4
3
1 2
4 hops = 0.5 ms
Redundant connections
FOH and monitor consoles are sharing 64-in/48-out.
3
4
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
2
229
Setup
Reference Manual
Daisy chain connections
256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
1
9 hops = 1.0 ms
4
3
2
1
4 hops = 0.5 ms
Redundant connections
Two CL series consoles are sharing 256-ch HA remote (maximum size)
5
4
3
1
5 hops = 0.5 ms
2
Setup
230
Reference Manual
Mounting an I/O device on the Dante audio network
Here's how to select which of the multiple I/O devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 24 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
STEP
1.
Press the DEVICE MOUNT tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2.
Press the I/O device select button.
3.
In the DEVICE SELECT window, press the setup method select button.
4.
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to make settings.
5.
When you have finished making settings, press the OK button to close the window.
DANTE SETUP window (DEVICE MOUNT page)
1 2
3
I/O device select buttons
Press one of the buttons to open the DEVICE SELECT window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,
DANTE SETUP window
Setup
1
1
Setup method select buttons
Choose one of the following methods for mounting the I/O device.
• NO ASSIGN ........................ Not mounted
• DEVICE LIST ...................... Select and mount from the device list
• SUPPORTED DEVICE ....... Select and mount a supported device
• DVS..................................... Enter a device label and mount (only for DVS)
• MANUAL............................. Enter a device label and mount
3
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all I/O devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2
REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
231
Reference Manual
◆ When the setup method select button is DEVICE LIST
To mount by choosing from a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network, press the
DEVICE LIST button to display the DEVICE LIST field.
3
1
2
1
DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the I/O devices on the Dante audio network.
From the list, choose the I/O device that you want to mount.
2
DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the I/O device that you want to mount.
3
INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the
Dante audio network. If the selected I/O device is supported by the CL series, the inputs and outputs will be entered and displayed automatically.
◆ When the setup method select button is SUPPORTED DEVICE
If you want to select and mount an I/O device that is supported by the CL series, press the
SUPPORTED DEVICE button to see the SUPPORTED DEVICE field. These settings can be made even when not connected to a Dante audio network.
Setup
1
2
3
4
1
DEVICE TYPE
This area shows a list of the I/O device types that are supported by the CL series.
From the list, choose the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
2
DEVICE TYPE select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the type of I/O device that you want to mount.
3
I/O device indication
This area shows the selected I/O device.
The upper line shows the front panel of the I/O device.
The lower line shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs.
4
UNIT ID knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the UNIT ID.
The indicator shows the UNIT ID.
232
Reference Manual
NOTE
• If there is one I/O device, set the I/O device's UNIT ID to “1.”
• If multiple devices are connected, assign the ID numbers so that there is no conflict between devices.
• For devices other than the R series, it is possible for devices of differing models to be assigned to the same ID as an R series unit or the same ID as a different model of device. However, since the I/O device input/output port screen shows the UNIT ID, this will make it difficult to distinguish between the units, so we recommend that whenever possible, you avoid allowing the ID numbers to overlap.
• If you have a device whose UNIT ID or device label cannot be changed from its panel or its edit screen etc. (such as the Dante-MY16-AUD card or Dante Accelerator), and you want to use that device as a SUPPORTED DEVICE, you must change its device label via Dante Controller.
• An I/O device will be recognized as a SUPPORTED DEVICE if you assign the device label as follows.
Y###-**********
# is a three-digit hexadecimal number containing the digits 0 - 9 and uppercase A to F (000 -
FFF)
* indicates any desired character (alphabetical uppercase or lowercase, numerals, or - (hyphen) may be used)
• If you are controlling the CL series console from an R series unit, we recommend that you set the
R unit's START UP MODE to
“REFRESH.” Operation will be safer with the “REFRESH” setting, since mute will be cleared after synchronization has been completed with CL units whose system setting for REMOTE HA ASSIGN is set to “WITH RECALL.”
With the
“RESUME” setting, mute will be cleared and the unit will start operating with the settings that were backed up by the R series unit itself, which could allow unexpected audio to be output.
• A single CL series console can control the HA of up to eight R series units.
If nine or more R series units are connected, you can either divide the HA control between multiple CL series consoles, or you can omit specifying REMOTE HA ASSIGN for the R series units whose HA does not need to be controlled, and use them with START UP MODE set to
“RESUME.”
◆ When the setup method select button is DVS or MANUAL
If you want to enter the device label of an I/O device and mount it, press the DVS or MANUAL button to access the DVS/MANUAL field.
1
3
2
1
DEVICE LABEL
Displays the device label of the I/O device which you entered from the keyboard.
2
INPUT/OUTPUT knobs
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knobs to specify the number of inputs and outputs on the
Dante audio network.
3
Device label entry keyboard
Use this keyboard to enter the device label of the I/O device.
NOTE
• If the I/O device is a DVS, mount it by pressing the DVS button.
• If DEVICE LABEL is left blank, the first DVS detected is automatically mounted.
• If the device label you entered is detected automatically, the INPUT/OUTPUT knob settings will be ignored, and the rated number of inputs and outputs will be specified.
Setup
233
Reference Manual
REMOTE HA settings
Here's how to select which of the multiple HA devices on the Dante audio network will be mounted so that they can be used. Up to 8 units can be mounted for one CL series console.
STEP
1.
Press the REMOTE HA ASSIGN tab in the lower part of the DANTE SETUP window.
2.
Press a HA device select button to access the REMOTE HA SELECT window.
3.
Select the HA device to mount and press the OK button.
If you have changed the setting by pressing the WITH RECALL button, a
confirmation dialog box will appear. Press the OK button.
DANTE SETUP window (REMOTE HA page)
3 1 2
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all HA devices in the list to an unmounted state.
2
REFRESH button
Updates the displayed list of HA devices on the Dante audio network.
3
HA device select buttons
Press one of these buttons to open the REMOTE HA SELECT window. The upper line of the button shows the device label. The lower line of the button shows the model name and the number of inputs and outputs. If no device has been mounted, the upper row will indicate “---” and the lower row will show nothing.
For more information on VIRTUAL/CONFLICT/DUPLICATE shown below these buttons,
REMOTE HA SELECT window
Setup
1
3
2
1
DEVICE LIST
Shows a list of the HA devices on the Dante audio network.
2
WITH RECALL button
If this button is on, the settings saved in the CL series console will be applied to the HA device when the CL series console starts up and when a scene is recalled.
3
DEVICE LIST select knob
Use the [TOUCH AND TURN] knob to select the HA device that you want to mount.
NOTE
• Do not specify “WITH RECALL” if an HA device is shared by multiple CL series consoles and settings have already been made on a different CL series console.
• The HA device can also be operated from a CL series console that is not set to “WITH RECALL.”
234
Reference Manual
Displaying the device status
You can use the touch screen to verify the status of a connected CL series or R-series unit
(except the Ro8-D) or the Dante status. In order to verify the status of an R-series unit from the console, it must be assigned to REMOTE HA in DANTE SETUP.
◆ CL series
The SETUP field of the DANTE SETUP window shows indicators for the status of the CL series console and the Dante network.
◆ R-series
The I/O field of the I/O DEVICE screen shows indicators for the status of the R-series units and the Dante network.
For firmware that predates support for V1.60, the version indication will be yellow and the indicator will be unlit.
Setup
Messages
Error, warning, and information messages are displayed.
Messages are also displayed in the Dante Controller Error Status field.
Each indicator lights or flashes as described below:
No call-out
Lit
Blinking
Flash x2
Flash x3
Unlit
The indicator remains lit steadily.
The indicator continues to flash.
The indicator flashes twice cyclically.
The indicator flashes three times cyclically.
235
Reference Manual
◆ Error messages
The SYSTEM indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically as follows until the problem has been resolved.
If service is necessary, please contact the Yamaha service center listed in the CL5/CL3/CL1
Owner's Manual.
[SYSTEM] indicators
Flash x2
Meaning
An internal error has occurred.
Possible solution
The device has failed. Contact your Yamaha dealer for repair.
The MAC address setting has been corrupted and no communication can occur via
Dante.
Flash x3
Lit
Flash x3
The internal memory has been corrupted.
UNIT ID is not unique.
If the problem persists after setting START UP MODE back to
RESUME and turning the power on again, consult your Yamaha dealer.
Set a unique UNIT ID number for the Dante network.
Lit
The DIP switches are not set correctly.
Check the DIP switch settings, and set them correctly.
flash
Lit
Blinking
Dante flow number limit was exceeded.
Examine the Dante network routing.
◆ Warning messages
The indicators will remain lit/blinking cyclically until the problem has been resolved.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device's word clock is not defined.
[SYNC] indicators Meaning Possible solution
The word clock is not set correctly.
Set the word clock master and the sampling frequency correctly on the CL5/CL3/CL1-native device or in Dante Controller.
Blinking
Dante Network circuit is broken.
Make sure that the Ethernet cables are not removed or short- circuited.
Flash x2
Dante Network is connected incorrectly. Other Dante devices cannot be found.
Make sure that the Ethernet cables are connected correctly.
Flash x3
If the green indicator is blinking, the unit is operating as the word clock master.
If the green indicator lights, the unit is operating as a word clock slave and synching to the word clock.
Setup
[SYNC] indicators
Lit or
blinking
Lit
Meaning Possible solution
A non-GbE-compatible device is connected.
If audio is transmitted over the
Dante network, use a GbE- compatible device.
Lit or
g blinking
Blinkin
The SECONDARY connector has taken over communications during redundant network operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
PRIMARY connector.
236
Reference Manual
Lit or
blinking
Flash x2
◆ Information messages
An abnormality has occurred on the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector during redundant network operation.
Check the circuit connected to the
SECONDARY connector.
The indicators will remain lit /blinking cyclically to report the status.
If the orange [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the unit is operating correctly.
If the green [SYNC] indicator is not lit, the device's word clock is not defined.
[SYNC] indicators
Lit
Meaning
Muted during startup, or in the process of synchronization.
Possible solution
Please wait until started has completed or until the unit has finished synchronization. It may take up to 45 seconds for completion.
The device is operating correctly as a word clock master.
This indicates that the device is operating as a word clock master.
Blinking
The device is operating correctly as a word clock slave.
This indicates that the device is operating as a word clock slave and synching to the word clock.
Lit
Setup
Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The rear panel GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector can be used as an input/output connector. This connector provides five GPI IN ports and five GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch to control internal parameters of the CL series console or to switch scenes. Conversely, operations or scene changes performed on the CL series console can send control signals to an external device.
For details on how to send control signals to an external device when you switch scenes, refer to
Outputting a control signal to an external device in tandem with scene recall (GPI OUT)
Using GPI IN
You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control the parameters of the CL series console from an external device. For example, you could use an external switch to turn the CL series console's Talkback on/off, operate the Tap Tempo function, or switch scenes.
STEP
1.
Connect an external device to the CL series console's GPI connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4.
In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5.
Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of
the external device you're using.
6. To assign the function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI IN
SETUP button.
7.
In each field of the GPI IN SETUP window, select the desired function and parameter,
then press the OK button.
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen
237
Reference Manual
NOTE
• With latched operation, the function will switch between active and inactive each time a trigger is input from the external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of external switch.
• With unlatched operation, the function will be active only while the signal from the external switch is at the high level or low level. In this case, you may use either a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your needs.
• Settings in the GPI page of the MIDI/GPI screen are common to all scenes. They can be saved as SETUP data.
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
3
1
2
4
3
GPI IN SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this button to display the GPI IN SETUP window.
Setup
NOTE
The items that can be selected in the GPI IN SETUP window are the same as for the USER
4
Switch attribute select button
This button selects the switch attribute. Each time you press the button, its indication will alternate between LATCH and UNLATCH.
................. LATCH (a switch that alternately turns on/off each time it is pressed) is selected.
................. UNLATCH (a switch that is on only while pressed and is off when released) is selected.
1
GPI IN status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage being input to the GPI IN port.
2
POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI IN port.
............... (Low active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is grounded.
............... (High active) When operating an on/off-type parameter, it will become active when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input.
238
Reference Manual
Using GPI OUT
The GPI OUT ports of the GPI OUT connector allow you to control an external device by performing operations on the CL series console.
STEP
1. Connect an external device to the CL series console's GPI connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4.
In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the GPI tab.
5.
Specify the POLARITY MODE for each port as appropriate for the specifications of
the external device you're using.
6. To assign a function or parameter that you want to control, press the GPI OUT
SETUP button.
7.
In each field of the GPI OUT SETUP window, select the desired function and
parameter, then press the OK button.
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen
MIDI/GPI screen (GPI page)
4 3 2
1
1
GPI OUT status indicator
This indicates the status of the voltage that is being output from each GPI OUT port.
2
POLARITY MODE select button
This button selects the polarity of the GPI OUT port.
............... (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.
............... (High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active.
Setup
239
Reference Manual
3
GPI OUT SETUP button
The button shows the name of the currently-selected function or parameter. Press this button to display the GPI OUT SETUP window.
Setup
Using FADER START
Make FADER START settings if you want a device connected to a GPI OUT port to operate in tandem with fader operations.
STEP
1.
Connect an external device to the CL series console's GPI connector.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the MIDI/GPI button.
4.
In the MIDI/GPI screen, press the FADER START tab.
5.
For each GPI OUT port, specify the channel that will cause the external device to
operate, and the type of operation.
You can assign the following functions.
Function PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Description
NO ASSIGN
CUE ACTIVE
-
CUE ON
DCA ONLY
INPUT ONLY
-
-
-
-
No assignment
Turn on the [CUE] key of the selected channel
Turn on the DCA [CUE] key
Turn on the [CUE] key of an input channel
DANTE
GPI IN ACTIVE
IND.
POWER ON
USER DEF.
KEY ACTIVE
IND.
OUTPUT ONLY -
REDUNDANCY
IND.
This function activates when the unit is operating on the secondary
Dante audio network with a star connection (redundancy network).
SPECIFIC PORT PORT 1 to PORT 5 The function assigned to GPI IN port 1 - 5 becomes active
-
SPECIFIC
NUMBER
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
-
USER DEFINED
KEY 1 to USER
DEFINED KEY 16
Turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel
This function activates when the unit is operating on the primary
Dante audio network with a star connection (redundancy network).
The power of the CL series console is turned on
The function assigned to the
USER DEFINED key becomes active
4
TEST button
While this is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will be active and will output a control signal.
SETUP screen
MIDI/GPI screen
240
Reference Manual
MIDI/GPI screen (FADER START page)
1
2
3
4
8 5 6 7
1
CLEAR ALL button
Clears all selections.
◆ OUTPUT DESTINATION field
2
GPI OUT1 to GPI OUT5 buttons
Select the GPI OUT port for which you want to make settings.
3
Fader indicator
This indicates the selected fader. Use the [SEL] keys on the panel to select a fader.
NOTE
In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
Setup
◆ THRESHOLD field
4
UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE
These specify the level that will be the threshold for outputting a trigger signal. A trigger signal will be output when the fader exceeds the UPSTROKE level, or when the fader falls below the DOWNSTROKE level. You can use the multifunction knobs to operate this.
NOTE
• The THRESHOLD values specified by the UPSTROKE/DOWNSTROKE knobs are common to all channels (faders) and all GPI OUT ports. However, you can individually choose the channel (fader) for each GPI OUT port.
• Only the UPSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER START, and only the
DOWNSTROKE value will be valid if MODE is set to FADER STOP. If MODE is set to FADER
TALLY, both the UPSTROKE and DOWNSTROKE values will be valid.
◆ MODE field
Here you can select the mode of fader operation that will be the trigger for signal output from the GPI OUT port.
You can choose from the following fader modes.
5
FADER START
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to+10.0 dB) from a point below it.
6
FADER STOP
A trigger signal 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB).
7
FADER TALLY
A trigger signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves upward through the specified UPSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) from a point below it. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger. This signal will be held until the fader reaches the specified DOWNSTROKE level (-∞ to +10.0 dB) or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger.
8
NO ASSIGN
Operating the fader of the selected channel will not cause a signal to be output.
241
Reference Manual
The following illustration shows how the signal that is output from the GPI PORT will change in each fader mode when a fader is operated. In this example, UPSTROKE in the
THRESHOLD field is set to -60.00, and DOWNSTROKE is set to -
∞. (This illustration shows the case in which
is selected as the polarity of the GPI OUT port. If the polarity is
, the polarity of the output signal will be reversed.)
FADER
START
250 msec
FADER
STOP
250 msec
FADER
TALLY
NOTE
At the high level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires high level, take it from the +5V power supply pin. However in this case, the amount of current is limited;
For details, refer to the control I/O specification in the CL data list (at the end of this manual).
242
Setup
Reference Manual
Help function
You can view Help files (file extension .xml) provided by Yamaha. For the latest information on help files, refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
In addition, using a commercially available text editor or the
“Notepad” included with Microsoft
Windows, you can create a text file (file extension .txt) and display it on the console*.
* We accept no responsibility for any damage that may occur as a result of using Help files created by a third party other than Yamaha.
Loading a Help/text file from a USB flash drive
NOTE
A help file for only one language is stored in the console's internal memory. Once you load the help file, it will be preserved in internal memory even if the power is turned off. The first time you press the HELP button to view the help file after turning the power on, it will take a while for the help file to be loaded from internal memory. Once the data has finished loading, subsequently pressing the HELP button will display the help file instantly.
STEP
1. Save the Help file provided by Yamaha or a user-created text file on your USB flash
drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
In the SETUP screen, press the SAVE/LOAD button.
4. To select the Help/text file that you want to load, press one of the Help/text files in the file list in the SAVE/LOAD window, or turn the multifunction knob in the
Centralogic section.
5.
Press the LOAD button.
6.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to load the file.
Help function
NOTE
By default, the character code set of the text file will be detected as UTF-8. However, by adding a line consisting of [ISO-8859-1] or [Shift_JIS] at the beginning of the file, you can force recognition of the file using that character code set. You can specify the desired character code set when using your text editor to save the text file.
The Help function is able to display the following text files (character code sets /languages).
• Text files written in the ISO-8859-1 character code set (English, German, French, Spanish, etc.)
• Text files written in the Shift_JIS character code set (Japanese)
• Text files of the above languages written in the UTF-8 character code set
Viewing Help
STEP
1.
Load the Help file or text file from your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the
(Help) button.
3. To close the HELP window, press the (Help) button of the Function Access
Area or the “x” symbol of the HELP window.
◆ Operation in the HELP window
You can use the multifunction knob or screen buttons to access the HELP window.
•
Turn multifunction knobs 1 and 2.
.............Scrolls the index area at the left.
•
Turn multifunction knobs 3 - 8.
.............Scrolls the main area at the right.
•
Pressing a link (underlined text) in the text
.............Scrolls to the linked destination.
•
Pressing a window link (a location with an
symbol and underlined text)
.............Closes the HELP window and opens the corresponding window.
•
Pressing the button ........ Scrolls to the chapter that precedes the currently- displayed location.
•
Pressing the button ........ Returns to the preceding item in the history of links you pressed.
•
Pressing the button ........ Advances to the next item in the history of links you pressed.
SAVE/LOAD window
243
Reference Manual
Using USER DEFINED keys to recall Help directly
◆ Assigning the Help function to USER DEFINED keys
STEP
1.
Load the Help file from your USB flash drive.
2.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button.
3.
Press the USER SETUP button in the upper left of the SETUP screen.
4.
Press the USER DEFINED KEYS tab in the USER SETUP window.
5. In the USER DEFINED KEYS page, press the button corresponding to the USER
DEFINED key to which you want to assign the Help function.
6.
In the FUNCTION column, choose “HELP” and press the OK button.
7.
Press the “x” symbol to close the USER DEFINED KEYS page.
8.
In the Function Access Area, press the SETUP button to close the SETUP screen.
SETUP screen USER SETUP window (USER
DEFINED KEYS page)
◆ Recalling the HELP window using only a USER DEFINED key
Press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned. The HELP window will appear. To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
Help function
◆ Directly recalling the Help for a specific panel controller
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press (or rotate) the panel controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
NOTE
• Panel controllers (other than the faders and the MONITOR LEVEL knob) will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to successively display these explanations.
◆ Directly recalling the Help for a specific controller in the LCD screen
While holding down the USER DEFINED key to which you have assigned the Help function, press the on-screen controller for which you want to recall Help. If the explanation is available for the controller, the help for the corresponding item will appear.
To close the window, once again press the USER DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
NOTE
• The on-screen controllers will not function as long as you continue holding down the USER
DEFINED key to which the Help function is assigned.
• If there are multiple explanations for the same controller, you can repeat the steps above to successively display these explanations.
244
Reference Manual
Other functions
This chapter explains various functions of CL series consoles that are not covered in other chapters.
Initializing the unit to factory default settings
If an error occurs in the CL console internal memory, or if you forget the password and cannot operate the unit, you can use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.
There are two types of initialization of the internal memory as shown below.
INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES
The entire memory, including scene memories and libraries, will be returned to factory default settings.
INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES
The contents of memory - except for scene memories and libraries - will be returned to its factory default settings.
CAUTION
The entire memory will be deleted if you initialize the internal memory! Proceed with the operation only if you are very sure you want to delete the entire memory.
However, the settings in DANTE SETUP will not be initialized. To initialize these settings, refer to
Initializing the console settings and Dante audio network settings
STEP
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, select the initialization method.
3.
Press the INITIALIZE button in the dialog box to confirm initialization.
4.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start initialization.
5. A message indicates that the initialization process is complete. Press the EXIT button
on the startup menu screen.
Other functions
NOTE
• Do not press any buttons until initialization is complete.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
Adjusting the detection point of the touch screen
(Calibration function)
Follow the steps below to correctly align the positions of the LCD display and the touch screen.
STEP
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button.
3.
Press the START button in the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION MODE screen.
4.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box to start calibration.
5. A cross-shaped cursor will appear in the screen (a total of three times). Press each
location at which it appears.
6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
Startup menu screen TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
MODE screen
NOTE
• If you are unable to start calibration by pressing the TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION button, you can use the SCENE MEMORY [INC]/[DEC] keys to select TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION, and then press the [STORE] key to start.
• To set the detection points accurately, press the cross-shaped cursor from the position and posture in which you normally operate the unit.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
Startup menu screen
245
Reference Manual
Adjusting the faders (Calibration function)
Depending on the environment in which you use the CL series console, discrepancies may occur in the motion of the motor faders. You can use the Calibration function to correct these discrepancies.
NOTE
The specified faders in the channel strip section, Centralogic section, and Master section will be semi-automatically calibrated. This window will also appear if a problem is detected in the fader settings while the CL is starting up.
STEP
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the FADER CALIBRATION button.
3.
Press a [SEL] key to select the faders that you want to calibrate.
4.
Press the START button in the FADER CALIBRATION MODE screen.
5.
Press the OK button in the confirmation dialog box.
6. Each of the specified faders will move to -∞ (all the way down). If the fader positions
are not correct, move them manually to -∞ (all the way down).
7.
After you adjust the fader position, press the NEXT button.
8.
Repeat steps 6 to 7 to adjust three fader positions at 20 dB, 0 dB, +10 dB (all the way
up).
When adjustment to the +10 dB position is complete, calibration starts.
9.
When calibration has been completed, press the APPLY button.
10. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
Startup menu screen
Other functions
NOTE
• Faders for which a problem was detected at start-up will already be selected in step 3.
• If the RESTART button appears, calibration has failed. Press the RESTART button to execute calibration once again.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
Fine-tuning the input and output gain (Calibration
function)
If necessary, you can make fine adjustments to the input and output gain.
STEP
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2. In the MODE SELECT field on the startup menu screen, press the button for the item
you want to adjust.
3.
Press an on-screen knob to select it, and then use the corresponding multifunction
knob to adjust the value.
4. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
Startup menu screen
NOTE
• If you press the RESET ALL button provided in each screen, all settings in the screen will be reset to 0 dB.
The factory settings are also 0 dB.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
246
Reference Manual
• INPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the analog input gain)
Access the INPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port in 0.1 dB steps.
Other functions
• SLOT OUTPUT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the slot output port gain)
Access the SLOT OUTPUT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the output ports of the specified slot in 0.01 dB steps.
• OUTPUT PORT TRIM (Fine adjustment of the output port gain)
Access the OUTPUT PORT TRIM window, and make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog output port in 0.01 dB steps.
247
Reference Manual
Adjusting the channel color (Calibration function)
If necessary, you can adjust the channel colors. Adjust the channel colors one by one.
STEP
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the
power to the CL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Press a [SEL] key on the top panel to select the indicator for which you want to adjust
the color.
4.
Press one of the color buttons in the CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION MODE screen
to select the desired color.
5.
While comparing the color of the selected channel's indicator with the color of the other channel indicators (for which the [SEL] keys are turned off), use multifunction
knobs 6, 7, and 8 to adjust the color.
6. When you have finished adjusting the color, press the APPLY button located in the
right of the screen to confirm the change.
7.
Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
Other functions
Adjusting the brightness of the channel name
display
If necessary, you can adjust the brightness of the channel name display.
STEP
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMOR Y [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power
to the CL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Press the [CUE] key or [ON] key of the channel whose brightness you want to adjust.
Pressing the [CUE] key will increase the brightness, and pressing the [ON] key will decrease the brightness.
4. When you have finished adjusting the brightness, press the APPLY button located in the
right of the screen to confirm the change.
5. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
CHANNEL COLOR CALIBRATION
MODE screen
NOTE
• In the case of the CL3/CL1, channels that do not exist on those models will not be shown.
• You cannot adjust more than one channel simultaneously.
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the RGB values.
• To reset all channel color indicators to the factory default setting, press the RESET ALL button.
• Once initialization is complete, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the EXIT button.
248
Reference Manual
Adjusting the contrast of the channel name
display
If necessary, you can adjust the contrast of the channel name display.
STEP
1. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key on the panel, turn on the power
to the CL unit.
2.
On the startup menu screen, press the LED COLOR CALIBRATION button.
3. Hold down a [SEL] key on the panel, and turn multifunction knob 1 in the Centralogic
section.
Turning the knob toward the left will lighten the contrast of all channels; turning it toward the right will darken the contrast of all channels.
4.
If you want to adjust a channel whose contrast differs from that of the other channels,
hold down the [SEL] key of the desired channel and press its [CUE] key or [ON] key.
Pressing the [CUE] key will darken the contrast, and pressing the [ON] key will lighten the contrast.
5. When you have finished adjusting the contrast, press the APPLY button located in the
right of the screen to confirm the change.
6. Press the EXIT button on the startup menu screen to start up the CL unit in normal
operating mode.
Other functions
Initializing the console settings and Dante audio
network settings
It is possible for Dante-related settings to be initialized to their factory-set state when an error occurs on the Dante audio network.
CAUTION
When you initialize, all console settings including the Dante audio network settings that had been previously saved in memory will be lost.
Disconnect all connections from the Dante audio network before initializing.
STEP
1.
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key and [INC] key on the panel,
turn on the power to the CL unit.
2.
A message indicates that initialization process is complete. Press the CLOSE button.
NOTE
• The APPLY button appears only if you change the setting.
• Alternatively, you can continue operation by selecting a different menu instead of pressing the
EXIT button.
249
Reference Manual
Warning/Error Messages
Message
xxx Parameters Copied.
xxx Parameters Initialized.
xxx Parameters Pasted.
xxx Parameters Swapped with Copy
Buffer.
Meaning
Parameter xxx was copied to the copy buffer.
Parameter xxx was initialized.
Parameter xxx was pasted from the copy buffer.
Parameter xxx was exchanged with the contents of the copy buffer.
ALTERNATE FUNCTION: Turned off!
Cannot Assign!
Cannot Bookmark This Popup.
Cannot Mount This Type of Device in
This Position.
Cannot Open This Page.
Cannot Paste to Different Parameter
Type!
Cannot Paste!
Cannot Recall!
ALTERNATE FUNCTION was turned off.
In the USER DEFINED KEYS popup of the CL3/CL1, you attempted to edit an item that cannot be edited for that model.
This popup window cannot be bookmarked.
You attempted to mount a specific device at a position where it cannot be mounted.
This window cannot be opened.
The parameter cannot be pasted to a different type.
Cannot Select This Channel.
Cannot Store!
Cannot Undo!
Channel Copied.
Channel Moved.
Channel Returned to Default Settings.
Console initialized due to memory
mismatch.
Corrupted data fixed!
Couldn’t Access File.
Couldn’t Write File.
Current User Changed. [xxx]
DANTE audio resource overflow.
DANTE Connection Error!
DANTE is not working by GIGA bit.
DANTE is working at Secondary.
DANTE module Error!
Cannot paste the character string.
Failed to recall a scene memory or library.
You attempted to select a channel that cannot be operated due to your user level or some other reason.
Failed to store a scene memory or library.
You pressed the UNDO button when Undo was not available.
Channel settings have been copied.
Channel settings have been moved.
Channel settings have been returned to the default settings.
All data has been initialized because the data in internal backup memory has been lost, due to an update or failure of the backup battery or some other reason. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner's Manual (separate document).
The data was fixed.
File on the USB flash drive could not be accessed for some reason.
File could not be saved to the USB flash drive.
Current user was changed to [xxx].
There are insufficient audio resources on the Dante audio network.
The primary and secondary connections are incorrect in the daisy chain connections.
GIGA bit is not working on the Dante audio network.
The Dante audio network is working on a secondary port.
An error has occurred in a Dante module.
Message
Different File Format! Some Data was
not Loaded.
Directory Not Empty!
Editor: Data Framing Error!
Editor: Data Overrun!
Editor: Rx Buffer Full!
Editor: Tx Buffer Full!
EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.
Error occurred at Secondary Port.
External HA Connection Conflict!
External Power Supply is Cut Off!
Fader Bank Snapshot is Done.
File Access is Busy!
File Already Exists!
File Error [xx]!
File Protected!
Flash Memory Initializing Finished.
Help File Not Found!
Illegal Address!
Illegal DIP Switch Setting.
Illegal MAC Address! Cannot Use
Ethernet.
Illegal MAC Address!
Illegal Storage Format!
Internal Power Supply is Cut Off!
Internal Power Supply is Turned On.
KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.
250
LIBRARY #xxx is Empty!
Warning/Error Messages
Meaning
Data in an unsupported format was loaded.
You attempted to delete a directory, but failed because there were files remaining in the directory.
Invalid signals are being exchanged with CL Editor.
Too much data is being received at CL Editor's input port.
Too much data is being sent from CL Editor's output port.
CUE was defeated because you switched from the EFFECT popup window or the premium rack popup window to a different screen.
The network cable of a redundant secondary port has been disconnected.
External HA data could not be recalled, because the state of connections to the external HA has changed since the scene was stored.
The PW800 (EXT) power supply connected to the CL series console has stopped operating.
A snapshot was taken of the current bank settings.
The following operation has not been performed yet because the USB flash drive is being accessed.
The USB flash drive already contains a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create.
Internal file access error
Overwriting was not possible because the file on the USB flash drive is write-protected.
Memory initialization has been completed.
The help file has not been loaded.
The IP address or gateway address settings are invalid.
The R series DIP switch settings are invalid.
Communication via the Network connector is not possible because the MAC address setting has been damaged for some reason.
Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the
Owner's Manual (separate document).
The MAC Address is invalid.
The USB flash drive could not be accessed because its format is invalid or unsupported.
The internal (INT) power supply has stopped operating. Alternatively, some other problem has occurred. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner's Manual (separate document).
The internal (INT) power supply has started up normally.
KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the
DYNAMICS 1 popup window of an input channel to a different screen.
No data has been stored in library #xxx that you attempted to recall.
Reference Manual
Message
Loading Aborted.
Loading Finished.
Low Battery!
Maximum Number of Audio Files
Exceeded!
Memory Error.
MIDI: Data Framing Error!
MIDI: Data Overrun!
MIDI: Rx Buffer Full!
MIDI: Tx Buffer Full!
Monitor Assignment is Restricted to
Max. 8 Sources!
No Access From Recorder!
No Channel Selected.
No Copy Item Selected.
No Corresponding Help Items.
No ID3 Tag exists. You can not edit.
No Response from External HA.
No Response from I/O DEVICE.
Operating as the word clock master.
Page Bookmarked.
Parameter out of range!
Password Changed.
PlayBack Failed: Recorder is Busy!
PLAYBACK OUT CUE: Turned Off.
Please use Dante Controller.
Please wait, Dante patch is proceeding
now.
Power Supply Fan has Malfunctioned!
PREVIEW Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
PREVIEW Mode : Disabled
PREVIEW Mode : Enabled
Warning/Error Messages
Meaning
Loading from USB flash drive was aborted.
Finished loading from USB flash drive.
The backup battery voltage is low.
The number of songs that can be managed by the USB memory recorder has been exceeded.
The R series backup memory is corrupted.
An inappropriate signal is being input to the MIDI input port.
Too much data is being received at the MIDI input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the MIDI output port.
The Monitor Define function allows a maximum of eight sources to be selected, but you attempted to assign more than eight.
In the RECORDER screen, it is not possible to move to a level higher than \YPE\SONGS\.
A copy-source channel was not selected in the GLOBAL PASTE screen.
In the GLOBAL PASTE screen, you attempted to paste without having selected an item to paste.
The corresponding section was not found in the Help file.
The music file cannot be edited because it has no ID3 tag.
No response from an external AD8HR.
The I/O devices not responding.
This console is the Clock Master.
The current screen or popup has been bookmarked.
Some data could not be loaded because the parameters do not match.
The password has been changed.
Audio file link playback is not possible because recording is in progress.
CUE was canceled for PLAYBACK OUT because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen.
The Dante Patch settings from the console are not valid.
You attempted to edit in the DANTE PATCH screen at a time when patching was not possible.
The cooling fan of the internal power supply has stopped. Please contact your Yamaha service center listed at the end of the Owner's
Manual (separate document).
The operation was ignored because this function cannot be used during Preview.
Preview was disabled.
Preview was enabled.
251
Message
Processing Aborted.
Recorder Busy: Operation Aborted!
RECORDER: CODEC Error [0x%08X] !
Some Song Files Are Unidentified.
Song File Not Found!
Meaning
Processing was interrupted.
The button operation was canceled because recorder processing required time.
A codec error occurred in the RECORDER screen.
RECORDER IN CUE: Turned Off.
Re-Enter Password!
CUE was canceled for RECORDER IN because you switched from the RECORDER screen to another screen.
When specifying the user password, the password was not entered a second time.
REMOTE: Data Framing Error!
REMOTE: Data Overrun!
Invalid signals are being input to the Remote connector.
REMOTE: Rx Buffer Full!
REMOTE: Tx Buffer Full!
Too much data is being received at the Remote connector.
Too much data is being sent from the Remote connector.
Removed from the Channel Link group.
The channel was removed from the link group.
Saving Aborted. Saving to the USB flash drive has been interrupted.
Saving Finished. Finished saving to USB flash drive.
SCENE #xxx is Empty!
SCENE #xxx is Protected!
SCENE #xxx is Read Only!
Scene Playback Link Canceled!
SLOT x: Data Framing Error!
SLOT x: Data Overrun!
SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full!
SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full!
No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.
You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.
The audio playback link for the scene was canceled.
Invalid signals are being input to the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the SLOT x output port.
Some songs were not identified. Songs that have not been specified might be used for DIRECT PLAY or SCENE PLAY BACK LINK.
The file specified for SCENE LINK or DIRECT PLAY assigned to a
USER DEFINED key does not exist.
STAGEMIX: Data Framing Error!
STAGEMIX: Data Overrun!
STAGEMIX: Rx Buffer Full!
STAGEMIX: Tx Buffer Full!
STEREO Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
STEREO MODE ON.
Invalid signals are being exchanged with StageMix.
Too much data is being received at the StageMix input port.
Too much data is being transmitted from the StageMix output port.
You cannot use this function in Stereo mode.
Storage Full!
Storage Not Found!
Storage Not Ready!
SURROUND Mode : Cannot Use This
Function.
The console has switched to Stereo mode.
The file could not be saved because there is insufficient space on the
USB flash drive.
The USB flash drive could not be recognized.
Access is not possible because the USB flash drive is not ready.
You cannot use this function in Surround mode.
Reference Manual
Message
SURROUND MODE ON.
Sync Error! [xxx]
Tap Operation Ignored.
This Operation is Not Allowed.
Version Changed. All Memories were
Initialized.
Version mismatch.
Meaning
The console has switched to Surround mode.
The CL series console is not synchronized to the [xxx] signal.
Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.
This operation has been ignored because the current user does not have permission.
This Operation is Not Allowed in This
View.
Too Large Files! Loading Failed.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot
Compare.
Too Many Bands Used! Cannot Paste to
Flex15GEQ.
Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded!
Unassigned Encoder.
Unit Fan has Malfunctioned
Unit ID Duplicated!
Unsupported File Format!
USB Currently Active for Recorder
function!
USB Currently Active for SAVE or LOAD!
USB Memory Busy: Recorder Stopped!
USB Memory Full !
USB Memory Full! Recorder Stopped.
USB Memory is Protected!
USB Memory Unmounted! Recorder
Stopped.
USB over current Error! Disconnect USB
device.
USER DEFINED KEY BANK CHANGED [x].
This function is not allowed in this screen.
Loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 307,256 Bytes.
Or loading is not possible because the bitmap file is too large. The maximum supported file size is 1024 kilobytes.
Copying 31BandGEQ and comparing it to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Copying and pasting 31BandGEQ to Flex15GEQ has failed because more than 15 bands are included in the copy source.
Power consumption of the I/O cards installed in the slots has exceeded the rated value.
Your operation has been ignored because there is no parameter that corresponds to the knob you operated.
The fan in the R series console has malfunctioned.
The UNIT ID is duplicated on the Dante audio network.
The file you attempted to load from the USB flash drive is of an unsupported format.
Save or Load operations are unavailable because the USB memory recorder is recording or playing.
The recorder cannot operate, since mixer scene memory or library data is being saved to or loaded from the USB flash drive.
Recording/playback stopped because time is required for USB flash drive processing.
Can't save the RECORDER playlist because there is insufficient free space on the USB flash drive.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive capacity ran out while the USB memory recorder was operating.
The USB flash drive's Protect setting is turned on.
Recorder processing was halted because the USB flash drive was disconnected while the USB memory recorder was operating.
The USB device was disconnected because of excessive USB current.
The bank for the USER DEFINED KEY has switched to [x]. (x is A, B,
C, or D.)
The current memory was initialized when the version was updated.
The versions of this console and the R series console do not match.
252
Message
Word Clock Error! Recorder Stopped!
Wrong Audio File Format!
Wrong Password!
Wrong Word Clock!
You Cannot Create User Key.
Warning/Error Messages
Meaning
Recorder was halted because synchronization to the word clock was lost.
The format of the audio file is invalid.
The password you input was incorrect.
The CL series console cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate.
The current user does not have permission to create a user authentication key.
Reference Manual
Index
Numerics
8BandPEQ
...................................................... 132
A
Assignable encoders
................................... 206
Audio file (links to a scene recall)
AUTOMIXER
................................................... 135
Automixer
........................................................ 135
C
Calibration ................................... 245 ,
Cascade connections
.................................. 220
Centralogic section
........................................ 12
Channel color ........................................ 28 ,
Channel colors
............................................. 224
Channel Job
.................................................. 65
Channel library ........................................ 48
Channel Link
................................................. 76
Console Lock
............................................... 210
Control change control parameters
................................... 170
Copying, moving, or initializing a channel
Cue...................................................... 102 ,
Operating
.................................................... 110
Custom fader bank
...................................... 208
D
Dante audio network
.................................... 226
Dante audio network
...................................... 16
DAW
............................................................ 179
DCA group
..................................................... 65
Directly outputting
.......................................... 23
Dynamics................................................. 58
Libraries
........................................................ 64
E
Effect
............................................................... 124
Libraries
...................................................... 153
Effects and tempo synchronization
EQ
..................................................................... 58
Libraries
........................................................ 64
External head amps ............................ 154
F
Factory set
.................................................. 245
Fade function
................................................ 96
Focus Recall function
.................................... 94
Function Tree
.................................................. 4
Functions that can be assigned to the assignable encoders
............................ 207
G
Gain
.............................................................. 29
Analog gain
................................................ 29
Gain Compensation
....................................... 33
Global Paste function
.................................... 93
GPI
.............................................................. 237
Graphic EQ .......................................... 124
Libraries
...................................................... 153
H
HA
..................................................................... 29
Head Amp
..................................................... 29
Help function
............................................... 243
I
I/O devices
.................................................. 154
Initializing
........................................................ 245
INPUT channels
Sending to MIX/MATRIX bus
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus
Input channels
............................................... 26
Channel library
.......................................... 48
Specifying channel name and icon
Input Delay
.................................................... 40
Input patch
.................................................... 17
Inserting
............................................................ 20
Internal clock
............................................... 225
Internal effects
............................................. 137
L
Lamp brightness
.......................................... 224
LED
................................................................. 224
Libraries ................................................. 64
Library
............................................................. 168
M
Master fader
................................................ 209
MATRIX buses ...................................... 53
MBCL (option)
............................................. 123
Meter bridge (option)
................................... 123
METER screen
............................................ 119
Meters
......................................................... 119
MIDI
............................................................ 165
MIX buses
................................................... 223
MIX channels
Sending to MATRIX buses
Sending to STEREO/MONO bus
MIX MINUS
................................................... 84
MIX/MATRIX buses
....................................... 37
Monitor................................................. 102
Mute group
.................................................... 70
N
Name displays
............................................. 224
Network address
......................................... 225
Nuendo Live
................................................ 182
O
Oscillator.............................................. 114
Output channels
............................................ 49
Channel library
.......................................... 57
Specifying channel name and icon
Output Delay
................................................. 56
Output patch
................................................. 18
OVERVIEW Screen
....................................... 13
P
Patching
........................................................ 16
Pink frame (TOUCH AND TURN)
Preferences
................................................. 195
PREMIUM RACK
........................................ 144
Premium Rack
Libraries
.................................................. 153
Using
....................................................... 144
PREVIEW mode
.......................................... 100
Program change recall operation
........................................ 168
R
Recall Safe function
...................................... 73
Appendices
S
Scene
Editing
....................................................... 90
SELECTED CHANNEL section
SELECTED CHANNEL VIEW screen
Setup
.......................................................... 186
SETUP screen.
........................................... 186
Slot
............................................................. 218
STEREO/MONO bus............................... 33
STEREO/MONO channels
Sending to MATRIX buses
Surround.
.................................................... 107
T
Talkback
..................................................... 114
Title list
........................................................ 178
TOUCH AND TURN
.................................... 204
Touch screen.
............................................. 224
U
USB flash drive
Formatting
.................................................. 217
Help/text file loading
................................ 243
Loading a file
........................................... 214
Playing back audio files
........................... 177
Recording
................................................... 175
Saving and loading setup data
USB memory recorder
................................. 173
Assigning channels
................................. 173
USER DEFINED keys
................................. 197
Functions that can be assigned
Recalling Help
......................................... 244
USER DEFINED knobs
............................... 203
Functions that can be assigned
User settings
............................................... 188
V
Viewing Help
............................................... 243
Virtual rack
.................................................. 124
operations
................................................... 125
W
Warning/Error Messages.
............................ 250
WIRELESS
..................................................... 160
Word clock.
................................................. 218
253
Reference Manual
Data List
Table of
Contents
EQ Library List ...................................................................... 2
DYNAMICS Library List ........................................................ 3
Dynamics Parameters .............................................................. 5
Effect Type List ...................................................................... 7
Effects Parameters ................................................................... 8
Premium Rack Processor Parameters ................................... 20
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to
Control Changes .............................................................. 22
NRPN Parameter Assignments ............................................ 26
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability ............................ 30
MIDI Data Format ................................................................ 36
Input/output characteristics .................................................. 43
Electrical Characteristics ...................................................... 45
Mixer Basic Parameters .......................................................... 46
Pin Assignment Chart .......................................................... 47
................................................. 48
EN
EQ Library List
# Title
01 Bass Drum 1
02 Bass Drum 2
03 Snare Drum 1
04 Snare Drum 2
05 Tom-tom 1
06 Cymbal
07 High Hat
08 Percussion
09 E. Bass 1
10 E. Bass 2
Parameter
LOW
G +3.5 dB
L-MID
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
-3.5 dB
H-MID
0.0 dB
HIGH
+4.0 dB
F 100 Hz
Q 1.25
265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz
10.0 0.90 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +8.0 dB -7.0 dB
F 80.0 Hz
Q 1.4
+6.0 dB
LPF
ON
400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz
4.5 2.2 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB
F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz
Q 1.25 4.5 0.11 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +1.5 dB -8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 180 Hz
Q -
335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz
10.0 0.70 0.10
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +2.0 dB -7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB
F 212 Hz
Q 1.4
670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz
10.0 1.25 0.28
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz
Q - 8.0 0.90 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -4.0 dB -2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q - 0.50 1.0 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q - 4.5 0.56 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q - 5.0 4.5 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB
F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q 0.10 5.0 6.3 -
# Title
11 Syn. Bass 1
12 Syn. Bass 2
13 Piano 1
14 Piano 2
15 E. G. Clean
16 E. G. Crunch 1
17 E. G. Crunch 2
18 E. G. Dist. 1
19 E. G. Dist. 2
20 A. G. Stroke 1
21 A. G. Stroke 2
Parameter
LOW L-MID
G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB
H-MID
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
0.0 dB
HIGH
0.0 dB
F 85.0 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 0.10 8.0 4.5 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 1.6 8.0 2.2 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz
Q - 8.0 0.90 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +3.5 dB -8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 5.6 10.0 0.70 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB -5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 0.18 10.0 6.3 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz
Q 8.0 4.5 0.63 9.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 125 Hz
Q 8.0
450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz
0.40 0.16 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 355 Hz
Q -
950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz
9.0 10.0 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +6.0 dB -8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q - 10.0 4.0 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz
Q 0.90 4.5 3.5 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -3.5 dB -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB
F 300 Hz
Q -
750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz
9.0 4.5 -
2
# Title
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
24 Brass Sec.
25 Male Vocal 1
26 Male Vocal 2
27 Female Vo. 1
28 Female Vo. 2
Parameter
LOW
G -0.5 dB
L-MID
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
0.0 dB
H-MID
0.0 dB
HIGH
+2.0 dB
F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q - 4.5 4.5 0.125
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G 0.0 dB -5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz
Q - 7.0 4.5 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB
F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +2.0 dB -5.0 dB -2.5 dB +4.0 dB
F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz
Q 0.11 10.0 5.6 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB
F 118 Hz
Q 0.18
400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz
0.45 0.56 0.14
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 112 Hz
Q -
335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz
0.16 0.20 -
29 Chorus & Harmo
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz
Q 2.8 2.0 0.70 7.0
30 Total EQ 1
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -0.5 dB
F 95.0 Hz
Q 7.0
0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB
950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz
2.2 5.6 -
31 Total EQ 2
32 Total EQ 3
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB
F 95.0 Hz
Q 7.0
750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz
2.8 5.6 -
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB
F 67.0 Hz
Q -
850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz
0.28 0.70 -
Data List
# Title
33 Bass Drum 3
34 Snare Drum 3
35 Tom-tom 2
36 Piano 3
37 Piano Low
38 Piano High
39 Fine-EQ Cass
40 Narrator
Parameter
LOW L-MID H-MID
G +3.5 dB -10.0 dB +3.5 dB
HIGH
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
0.0 dB
F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz
Q 2.0 10.0 0.40 0.40
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB
F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz
Q - 4.5 2.8 0.10
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 90.0 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz
Q - 4.5 1.25 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G +4.5 dB -13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB
F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz
Q 8.0 10.0 9.0 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q 10.0 6.3 2.2 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING
G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 190 Hz
Q 10.0
400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz
6.3 2.2 0.10
L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB
F 75.0 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz
Q - 4.5 1.8 -
PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF
G -4.0 dB -1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB
F 106 Hz
Q 4.0
710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz
7.0 0.63 -
DYNAMICS Library List
#
1 Gate
2
3
4
5
6
7
Title
Ducking
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
De-Esser
GATE
Type
DUCKING
GATE
GATE
8 Compander (H) COMPANDER-H
9
Comp
Expand
DE-ESSER
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
Compander (S) COMPANDER-S
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Range (dB)
Attack (ms)
Hold (ms)
Decay (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Frequency (kHz)
Type
Q
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Value
-26
-56
0
2.56
331
-19
-22
93
1.20 S
6.32 S
-11
-53
0
1.93
400
-8
-23
1
0.63
238
-8
2.00
HPF
1.6
-8
4
25
0.0
24
180
-10
3.5
1
0.0
6
250
-23
1.7
1
3.5
2
70
-8
2.5
30
0.0
2
250
# Title
10 A. Dr. BD
11
12
13
14
15
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. Tom
16 A. Dr. OverTop
17
A. Dr. SN
E. B. Finger
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-S
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
-24
2
38
-3.5
54
842
-20
2
2
5.0
2
749
-12
2
15
4.5
2
470
-8
1.7
11
0.0
10
128
-23
2
0
0.5
2
151
-17
2.5
8
3.5
2
12
-11
3.5
1
-1.5
7
192
Value
-24
3
9
5.5
2
58
3
Data List
# Title
18 E. B. Slap
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Syn. Bass
Piano1
Piano2
E. Guitar
A. Guitar
Strings1
Strings2
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
-11
2
33
1.5
2
749
-10
2.5
5
1.5
2
238
-8
3.5
7
2.5
4
261
-18
3.5
7
6.0
2
174
-12
1.5
93
1.5
4
1.35 S
-9
2.5
17
1.0 hard
238
-10
3.5
9
3.0 hard
250
Value
-12
1.7
6
4.0 hard
133
#
26 Strings3
27
28
BrassSection
Syn. Pad
29 SamplingPerc
30
31
32
33
Title
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
-23
20
15
0.0
15
163
-18
4
8
8.0 hard
354
-20
2.5
31
2.0
1
342
-14
2
2
3.5
4
35
-18
1.7
8
-2.5
18
238
-13
2
58
2.0
1
238
-18
1.7
18
4.0
1
226
Value
-17
1.5
76
2.5
2
186
#
34 Solo Vocal2
35
36
37
38
39
Title
Chorus
Click Erase
Announcer
Limiter1
Limiter2
40 Total Comp1
41 Total Comp2
Type
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
COMPANDER-S
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
* At fs=44.1 kHz
-18
3.5
94
2.5 hard
447
0
∞
0
0.0 hard
319
-14
2.5
1
-2.5
18
180
-9
3
20
-3.0
90
3.90 s
-16
6
11
6.0
1
180
-33
2
1
2.0
2
284
-9
1.7
39
2.5
2
226
Value
-8
2.5
26
1.5
3
331
4
Data List
Dynamics Parameters
Dynamics Parameters are the following types.
DYNAMIC section 1
Input channels
DYNAMIC section 2
Time
Output channels
DYNAMIC section 1
Type
GATE
DUCKING
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPRESSOR
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft)
DE-ESSER
COMPRESSOR
EXPANDER
COMPANDER-H
(Compander Hard)
COMPANDER-S
(Compander Soft)
◆ GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
THRESHOLD (dB) -72 to 0 (73 points)
-∞, -69 to 0 (71 points)
0-120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
Description
This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.
This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.
This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level.
This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• I/O Characteristics
THRESHOLD
• Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level Time
◆ DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks.
When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
RANGE (dB)
ATTACK (ms)
HOLD (ms)
DECAY (ms)
Range
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
-70 to 0 (71 points)
0-120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms - 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms - 1.96 sec (160 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
Description
This determines the level of trigger signal
(KEY IN) required to activate ducking.
This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.
This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.
This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the THRESHOLD level.
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
• I/O Characteristics
• Time Series Analysis
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
RANGE
THRESHOLD
Input Level Time
RANGE
Time
5
Data List
◆ COMPRESSOR
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO.
The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of
∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter's output level never actually exceeds the threshold.
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
RATIO
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
Range
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
0-120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
KNEE Hard, 1-5 (6 points)
Description
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level.
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the compressor's output signal level.
This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
THRESHOLD
RATIO
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Signal
Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level Time Time
◆ EXPANDER
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
RATIO
ATTACK (ms)
Range
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)
0-120 (121 points)
Description
This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.
This determines the amount of expansion.
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
KNEE
44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
0.0 to +18.0 (181 points)
Hard, 1-5 (6 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold.
This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the expander's output signal level.
This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
• I/O Characteristics
(KNEE= hard,
OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)
THRESHOLD
• Time Series Analysis
(RATIO= ∞:1)
Input Signal
Output Signal
ATTACK RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Input Level Time Time
6
Data List
◆ COMPANDER HARD (COMPANDER-H), COMPANDER SOFT (COMPANDER-S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
WIDTH
0dB
Input Level
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1
0 dB and higher ..................................Functions as a limiter.
2
Exceeding the threshold ....................Functions as a compressor.
3
Below the threshold and width ..........Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter
THRESHOLD (dB) -54 to 0 (55 points)
RATIO
Range
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,
2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1 (15 points)
Description
This determines the level at which compression is applied.
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
RELEASE (ms)
OUT GAIN (dB)
WIDTH (dB)
0-120 (121 points)
44.1kHz: 6 ms - 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms - 42.3 sec (160 points)
-18.0 to 0.0 (181 points)
1-90 (90 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered.
This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
This sets the compressor's output signal level.
This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.
◆ DE-ESSER
This detects and compresses only the sibilants and other high-frequency consonants of the vocal.
Parameter Range Description
THRESHOLD -54 to 0 (55 points)
FREQUENCY
TYPE
Q
1kHz-12.5kHz (45 points)
HPF, BPF
10.0-0.10 (41 points)
Threshold level at which the de-esser effect is applied.
Cutoff frequency of the filter used to detect the high frequencies.
Type of filter used to detect the frequency band.
Q (steepness) of the filter when TYPE is BPF.
Effect Type List
7
Title Type Description
REV-X Hall
REV-X Room
REV-X Plate
Reverb Hall
REV-X HALL
REV-X ROOM
REV-X PLATE
REVERB HALL
New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound.
Choose from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X HALL,
REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate
Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE
Stereo Reverb ST REVERB
Early Ref.
Gate Reverb
EARLY REF.
GATE REVERB
Plate reverb simulation with gate
Stereo reverb
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
Gated early reflections
Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections
Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay
Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay
Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation
Delay LCR
Echo
Chorus
Flange
Symphonic
DELAY LCR
ECHO
CHORUS
FLANGE
SYMPHONIC
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
Chorus
Flanger
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus
Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter
Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger
Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter
HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
Dual Pitch
Tremolo
Auto Pan
Rotary
DUAL PITCH
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
ROTARY
Stereo pitch shifter
Tremolo
Auto-panner
Rotary speaker simulation
Ring Mod.
Mod.Filter
RING MOD.
MOD.FILTER
Ring modulator
Modulated filter
Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter
Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel
Rev
Chorus REV
CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series
Rev+Flange
Rev
Flange
Delay+Er.
Delay
Er.
REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel
REV
FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series
Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel
Rev
Sympho. REV
SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series
Rev
Pan REV
PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series
DELAY+ER.
DELAY
ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
Delay and early reflections in series
Data List
Title Type Description
Delay+Rev
Delay
Rev
Dist
Delay
Multi Filter
Freeze
Distortion
DELAY+REV
DELAY
REV
DIST
DELAY
MULTI FILTER
FREEZE
DISTORTION
Delay and reverb in parallel
Delay and reverb in series
Distortion and delay in series
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
Simple sampler
Distortion
Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation
Comp276
Comp276S
COMP276
COMP276S
This compressor emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a sought-after classic in recording studios.
This is a stereo model of COMP276.
Comp260
Comp260S
Equalizer601
OpenDeck
COMP260
COMP260S
EQUALIZER601
OPENDECK
This compressor emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the latter
1970s that has become a sought-after classic for live SR.
This is a stereo model of the COMP260.
This equalizer emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. It can be used to obtain a sense of drive.
This is a tape saturation effect that emulates the tape compression produced by two open-reel tape recorders: a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor
M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor
Effects Parameters
◆ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE
Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs: REV-X
HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME
INI. DLY
0.28-27.94 s
*1
0.0-120.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1-1.4
LO.FREQ
DIFF.
22.0 Hz-18.0 kHz
0-10
ROOM SIZE 0-28
DECAY 0-53
HPF
LPF
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Size of room
Gate closing speed
THRU, 22.0 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
1.00 kHz-18.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting.
◆ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
DECAY
Range
Gate closing speed
Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4
DIFF.
DENSITY
E/R DLY
0-10
0-100%
0.0-100.0 ms
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Reverb density
Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL. 0-100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
HOLD
0-120 ms
*1
Gate opening speed
Gate open time
*2
*1. 0.02 ms-2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms-1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)
*2. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
8
Data List
◆ STEREO REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter
INI. DLY
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
LO. RATIO 0.1-2.4
DIFF.
DENSITY 0-100%
E/R BAL.
HPF
LPF
0-10
Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
0.0-100.0 ms
Reverb time
REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type
Reverb density
Description
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
0-100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
◆ EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter Range Description
TYPE
HPF
LPF
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0
LIVENESS
INI. DLY
DIFF.
DENSITY
ER NUM.
0-10
0.0-500.0 ms
0-10
0-100%
1-19
FB GAIN -99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
High-frequency feedback ratio
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
9
◆ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter Range
TYPE Type-A, Type-B
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0
LIVENESS 0-10
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0.0-500.0 ms
0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)
Reflection density
High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM. 1-19
FB GAIN -99 to +99%
HPF
LPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
Number of early reflections
Feedback gain
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
◆ MONO DELAY
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
HPF
LPF
SYNC
Range
0.0-2730.0 ms
-99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
NOTE
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
*1
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Description
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
*1. setting)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
◆ STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
*1
Range Description
DELAY L
DELAY R
LPF
SYNC
NOTE L
0.0-1350.0 ms
0.0-1350.0 ms
FB. G L
FB. G R
-99 to +99%
-99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
OFF/ON
*1
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
◆ MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
DELAY
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
HPF
LPF
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
0.0-2725.0 ms
-99 to +99%
0.1-1.0
Range
Delay time
Feedback gain
High-frequency feedback ratio
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Sine/Tri Modulation waveform
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Description
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
*2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
*2.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY C
DELAY R
FB. DLY
LEVEL L
LEVEL C
Range
0.0-2730.0 ms
0.0-2730.0 ms
0.0-2730.0 ms
0.0-2730.0 ms
-100 to +100%
-100 to +100%
Left channel delay time
Center channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Left channel delay level
Center channel delay level
Description
LEVEL R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE C
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1.
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
OFF/ON
*1
*1
*1
*1
High-frequency feedback ratio
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine center channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
NOTE R
NOTE FBL
NOTE FBR
*1
*1
*1
Range Description
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB.DLY L
0.0-1350.0 ms
0.0-1350.0 ms
0.0-1350.0 ms
FB.DLY R 0.0-1350.0 ms
FB. G L
FB. G R
-99 to +99%
-99 to +99%
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Left channel feedback delay time
Right channel feedback delay time
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
L
R
R FBG
L FBG
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
HPF
LPF
SYNC
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
-99 to +99%
-99 to +99%
OFF/ON
*1
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel feedback
DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel feedback
DELAY
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter Range
FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0-100%
PM DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
*1.
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0-0.10
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
10
Data List
◆ FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter Range
FREQ.
DEPTH
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0-0.10
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
*1.
-12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
◆ SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
Range
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
*1.
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0-0.10
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
Description
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
◆ PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
FB. GAIN
OFFSET
PHASE
STAGE
SYNC
NOTE
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
Range
-99 to +99%
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
0-100
0.00-354.38 degrees
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
Left and right modulation phase balance
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
*1.
◆ DYNA.FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
Range
INPUT, MIDI
0-100
UP, DOWN
*1
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
0-100
-99 to +99%
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0-0.10
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
Delay time offset
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
11
Data List
◆ DYNA.PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
SOURCE
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
OFFSET
FB.GAIN
STAGE
LSH F
LSH G
HSH F
HSH G
0-100
UP, DOWN
*1
Range
INPUT, MIDI
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Decay speed
0-100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
MODE
SYNC
NOTE
*1.
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
◆ HQ.PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH
FINE
DELAY
Range
-12 to +12 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
0.0-1000.0 ms
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
1-10
OFF/ON
*1
Description
Pitch shift
Pitch shift fine
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
PITCH 1
FINE 1
Range
-24 to +24 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
LEVEL 1 -100 to +100%
PAN 1
DELAY 1
FB. G 1
MODE
PITCH 2
FINE 2
LEVEL 2
PAN 2
DELAY 2
FB. G 2
SYNC
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
*1.
L63 to R63
0.0-1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
1-10
-24 to +24 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
-100 to +100%
L63 to R63
0.0-1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
OFF/ON
*1
*1
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #1 pan
Channel #1 delay time
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift precision
Channel #2 pitch shift
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)
Channel #2 pan
Channel #2 delay time
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Range
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*1
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
*1.
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0-0.10
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
12
Data List
◆ AUTOPAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Range
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
*1
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*2
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
LSH F
LSH G
EQ F
21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
Low shelving filter gain
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ Q
HSH F
HSH G
10.0-0.10
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
*1. L
R, L
R, L
R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
◆ ROTARY
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
ROTATE
Range
STOP, START
SPEED SLOW, FAST
Description
Rotation stop, start
Rotation speed
(see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW
FAST
0.05-10.00 Hz
0.05-10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST rotation speed
0-100
0-10
0-100
0-100
Overdrive level
Acceleration at speed changes
Low-frequency filter
High-frequency filter
DRIVE
ACCEL
LOW
HIGH
13
◆ RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter Range
SOURCE OSC, SELF
OSC FREQ 0.0-5000.0 Hz
FM FREQ. 0.05-40.00 Hz
FM DEPTH 0-100%
SYNC OFF/ON
FM NOTE
*1
Description
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Oscillator frequency
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
*1.
Two input, two output modulation filter.
◆ MOD.FILTER
Parameter
FREQ.
DEPTH
PHASE
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
SYNC
NOTE
Range
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
0.00-354.38 degrees
LPF, HPF, BPF
0-100
0-20
0-100
OFF/ON
*1
*1.
Description
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output level
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
◆ DYNA.FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
SOURCE
Range
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
DIR.
DECAY
TYPE
OFFSET
RESO.
LEVEL
0-100
UP, DOWN
*1
LPF, HPF, BPF
0-100
0-20
0-100
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
Description
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
Upward or downward frequency change
Filter frequency change decay speed
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Filter frequency offset
Filter resonance
Output level
Data List
◆ REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
DENSITY
0-10
0-100%
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
REV/CHO
HPF
0-100%
Reverb and chorus balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0-100%
PM DEPTH 0-100%
Amplitude modulation depth
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
◆ REV
CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Description
REV.BAL 0-100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance
(0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU
0.05-40.00 Hz
AM DEPTH 0-100%
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Modulation speed
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC
NOTE
OFF/ON
*1
Pitch modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
14
◆ REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
REV/FLG 0-100%
Reverb and flange balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
WAVE
SYNC
-99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
*1.
*1
◆ REV
FLANGE
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
REV.BAL 0-100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance
(0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
*1.
-99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Data List
*1.
◆ REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter Range
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
Description
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
REV/SYM
HPF
0-100%
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
FREQ.
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05-40.00 Hz Modulation speed
DEPTH 0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri
OFF/ON
*1
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1.
◆ REV
SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY
REV.BAL
HPF
LPF
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
0-100%
0-100%
Reverb density
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance
(0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
DEPTH
NOTE
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
MOD. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
WAVE Sine, Tri
SYNC OFF/ON
*1
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Modulation delay time
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
15
◆ REV
PAN
This is a 1-in/2-out series-connected reverb and auto-pan effect.
Parameter Range Description
REV TIME
INI. DLY
REV.BAL
HPF
LPF
FREQ.
DEPTH
DIR.
0.3-99.0 s
0.0-500.0 ms
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DIFF.
DENSITY
0-10
0-100%
0-100%
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
*1
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Panning direction
WAVE
SYNC
NOTE
Sine, Tri, Square
OFF/ON
*2
Modulation waveform
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
*1. L
R, L
R, L
R, Turn L, Turn R
*2.
◆ DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
TYPE
-99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DLY/ER
HPF
LPF
0-100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0
LIVENESS 0-10
INI. DLY
DIFF.
0.0-500.0 ms
0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
ER NUM. 1-19
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Diffusion (spread)
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
SYNC OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
*1
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
*1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
◆ DELAY
ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
Range
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Description
FB. GAIN -99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO 0.1-1.0
DLY.BAL
HPF
LPF
TYPE
INI. DLY
DIFF.
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1.
0-100%
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
High-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and early reflected delay balance
(0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
ROOMSIZE 0.1-20.0
LIVENESS 0-10
0.0-500.0 ms
0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
ER NUM. 1-19
OFF/ON
*1
*1
*1
Type of early reflection simulation
Reflection spacing
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
Initial delay before reverb begins
Diffusion (spread)
Reflection density
Number of early reflections
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter Range Description
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
DLY/REV
HPF
LPF
0.1-1.0
0-100%
High-frequency feedback ratio
Delay and reverb balance
(0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s
INI. DLY 0.0-500.0 ms
REV HI
DIFF.
0.1-1.0
0-10
DENSITY
SYNC
0-100%
OFF/ON
Reverb time
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
16
Parameter
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1.
*1
*1
*1
Range Description
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
◆ DELAY
REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
DELAY L
DELAY R
FB. DLY
FB. GAIN
Range
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
0.0-1000.0 ms
-99 to +99%
Description
Left channel delay time
Right channel delay time
Feedback delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio DELAY HI 0.1-1.0
DLY.BAL 0-100%
Delay and delayed reverb balance
(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
THRU, 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF
LPF 50.0 Hz-16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV TIME 0.3-99.0 s Reverb time
INI. DLY
REV HI
NOTE L
0.0-500.0 ms
0.1-1.0
DIFF. 0-10
DENSITY 0-100%
SYNC OFF/ON
*1
Initial delay before reverb begins
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diffusion (spread)
Reverb density
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
NOTE FB
*1.
*1
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine feedback DELAY
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Data List
◆ DIST
DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0-100
0-100
-10 to +10
0-20
OFF/ON
*1
Range
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
SYNC
DLY.NOTE
MOD.NOTE
*2
DELAY 0.0-2725.0 ms
FB. GAIN
HI. RATIO
FREQ.
DEPTH
DLY.BAL
-99 to +99%
0.1-1.0
0.05-40.00 Hz
0-100%
0-100%
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
Delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
High-frequency feedback ratio
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)
*1. setting)
*2.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
◆ MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
TYPE 1
FREQ. 1
LEVEL 1
RESO. 1
TYPE 2
FREQ. 2
LEVEL 2
RESO. 2
TYPE 3
FREQ. 3
LEVEL 3
RESO. 3
Range
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
0-100
0-20
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
0-100
0-20
LPF, HPF, BPF
28.0 Hz-16.0 kHz
0-100
0-20
Description
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 1 frequency
Filter 1 level
Filter 1 resonance
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 2 frequency
Filter 2 level
Filter 2 resonance
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Filter 3 frequency
Filter 3 level
Filter 3 resonance
◆ FREEZE
One input, two output basic sampler.
Parameter Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
REC DLY
PLY MODE
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
TRG LVL
-1000 to +1000 ms
-60 to 0 dB
TRG MASK 0-1000 ms
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the
REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal.
Recording delay.
For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received.
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP
NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback)
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time.
Playback start point in milliseconds START
*1
END
LOOP
LOOP
NUM
PITCH
FINE
*1
*1
0-100
MIDI TRG OFF, C1-C6, ALL
START
[SAMPLE]
0-131000
END
[SAMPLE]
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
-12 to +12 semitones
-50 to +50 cents
0-131000
0-131000
Playback end point in milliseconds
Loop start point in milliseconds
Number of times the sample plays
Playback pitch shift
Playback pitch shift fine
The PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
Playback start point in samples
Playback end point in samples
Loop start point in samples
*1. 0.0-5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms-5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz)
◆ DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
DST TYPE
DRIVE
MASTER
TONE
N. GATE
Range
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0-100
0-100
-10 to +10
0-20
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Tone control
Noise reduction
17
Data List
◆ AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter Range
AMP TYPE
*1
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
0-100 DRIVE
MASTER
BASS
MIDDLE
TREBLE
0-100
0-100
0-100
0-100
N. GATE 0-20
CAB DEP 0-100%
EQ F
EQ G
EQ Q
100 Hz-8.00 kHz
-12.0 to +12.0 dB
10.0-0.10
Guitar amp simulation type
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Distortion drive
Master volume
Bass tone control
Middle tone control
High tone control
Noise reduction
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
◆ COMP276
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can control two monaural channels independently.
Parameter Range
INPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB
OUTPUT 1 -180 to 0 dB
RATIO 1
Adjusts the CH1 input level
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio for CH1 compressor
ATTACK 1 0.022-50.4 ms
RELEASE1 10.88-544.22 ms
MAKE UP1 OFF, ON
SIDEHPF1 OFF, ON
Description
Attack time of CH1 compressor
Release time of CH1 compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when CH1 compressor is applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH1 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
INPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB
OUTPUT 2 -180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the CH2 input level
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
RATIO 2 2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of CH2 compressor
ATTACK 2 0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of CH2 compressor
RELEASE2 10.88-544.22 ms Release time of CH2 compressor
MAKE UP2 OFF, ON
SIDEHPF2 OFF, ON
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the CH2 compressor is applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the CH2 compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
18
◆ COMP276S
This effect emulates the characteristics of analog compressors that are widely used in recording studios. It produces a thick, strong frame sound suitable for drums and bass. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter Range Description
INPUT
OUTPUT
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
MAKE UP
SIDE HPF
-180 to 0 dB
-180 to 0 dB
1:2, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1, 20:1 Ratio of the compressor
0.022-50.4 ms Attack time of the compressor
10.88-544.22 ms
Adjusts the input level
Adjusts the output gain
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Release time of the compressor
Automatically corrects output gain reduction when the compressor is applied
When the HPF in the side chain of the compressor is turned on, the compression applied to the low range will be weakened, thus emphasizing the low range.
◆ COMP260
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can control two monaural channels independently. You can also link several parameters via stereo links.
Parameter Range
THRE.1
KNEE1
-60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK1 0.01-80.0 ms
RELEASE1 6.2-999 ms
RATIO1 1.0-500, ∞
OUTPUT1 -20 to 40 dB
THRE.2 -60 to 0.0 dB
KNEE2 SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
ATTACK2 0.01-80.0 ms
RELEASE2 6.2-999 ms
RATIO2 1.0-500, ∞
OUTPUT2 -20 to 40 dB
Threshold of CH compressor
Knee of CH1 compressor
Attack time of CH1 compressor
Description
Release time of CH1 compressor
Ratio for CH1 compressor
Adjusts the CH1 output gain
Threshold of CH2 compressor
Knee of CH2 compressor
Attack time of CH2 compressor
Release time of CH2 compressor
Ratio of CH2 compressor
Adjusts the CH2 output gain
ST LINK OFF, ON
Links CH1 and CH2 as a stereo pair. THRE., KNEE, ATTACK, RELEASE, and
RATIO parameters are linked; OUTPUT parameter is not linked
◆ COMP260S
This effect emulates the characteristics of mid 70's compressors/limiters that are the standard for live SR. You can link and control the L and R channel parameters.
Parameter
THRE.
KNEE
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
OUTPUT
Range
-60 to 0.0 dB
SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
0.01-80.0 ms
6.2-999 ms
1.0-500, ∞
-20 to 40 dB
Threshold of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Adjusts the output gain
Description
Data List
◆ EQUALIZER601
This effect emulates the characteristics of 70's analog equalizers. Re-creating the distortion of typical analog circuits will add drive to the sound.
Parameter Range Description
LO TYPE
LO F
LO G
MID1 Q
MID1 F
MID1 G
MID2 Q
MID2 F
MID2 G
INPUT
OUTPUT
MID3 Q
MID3 F
MID3 G
MID4 Q
MID4 F
MID4 G
HI TYPE
HI F
HPF-2/1, LSH-1/2
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50-16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50-16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50-16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
0.50-16.0
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
-18.0 to +18.0 dB
LPF-2/1, HSH-1/2
16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz
*1
Type of EQ1
Cut-off frequency of EQ1
Gain of EQ1
Q of EQ2
Center frequency of EQ2
Gain of EQ2
Q of EQ3
Center frequency of EQ3
Gain of EQ3
Input gain
Output gain
Q of EQ4
Center frequency of EQ4
Gain of EQ4
Q of EQ5
Center frequency of EQ5
Gain of EQ5
Type of EQ6
Cut-off frequency of EQ6
HI G -18.0 to +18.0 dB Gain of EQ6
LO SW OFF, ON
MID1 SW OFF, ON
MID2 SW OFF, ON
MID3 SW OFF, ON
MID4 SW OFF, ON
HI SW
TYPE
OFF, ON
CLEAN, DRIVE
Switches EQ1 on/off
Switches EQ2 on/off
Switches EQ3 on/off
Switches EQ4 on/off
Switches EQ5 on/off
Switches EQ6 on/off
Selects the equalizer type.
The CLEAN equalizer provides non-distorted, clear, typical digital sound, emulating variations in frequency response in the analog circuits. The
DRIVE equalizer provides distorted, driven sound that enhances analog flavor, emulating changes in frequency response in the analog circuits.
*1. 16.0 Hz to 20.0 kHz (LPF-1, LPF-2), 1.0 kHz to 20.0 kHz (HSH-1, HSH-2)
19
◆ OPENDECK
It emulates the tape compression created by two open reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a playback deck). You can change the sound quality by adjusting various elements, such as the deck type, tape quality, playback speed, etc.
Parameter Range Description
REC DEC
REC LVL
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
-96.0 to +18.0 dB
REC HI -6.0 to +6.0 dB
REC BIAS -1.00 to +1.00
REPR DEC
Swss70, Swss78, Swss85,
Amer70
REPR LVL -96.0 to +18.0 dB
REPR HI
REPR LO
MAKE UP
-6.0 to +6.0 dB
-6.0 to +6.0 dB
Off, On
TP SPEED 15ips, 30ips
TP KIND Old, New
Selects the recording deck type
Adjusts the input level of the recording deck. As you raise the level, tape compression is generated, which narrows the dynamic range and distorts the sound.
Adjusts the high range gain of the recording deck
Adjusts the bias of the recording deck
Selects the playback deck type
Adjusts the output level of the playback deck
Adjusts the high range gain of the playback deck
Adjusts the low range gain of the playback deck
When you adjust the REC LVL, the REPR LVL reflects the change, maintaining the relative output level. You can change the amount of distortion without changing the output level.
Selects the tape speed
Selects the tape type
◆ M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamically controlled processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB
LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
TOTAL
CEILING
-72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
CMP.THRE -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
CMP.RAT 1:1 to 20:1
CMP.ATK
CMP.REL
0-120 ms
*1
CMP.KNEE 0-5
CMP.BYP OFF/ON
EXP.THRE
EXP.RAT
-54.0 dB to -24.0 dB
1:1 to 5:1
EXP.REL
EXP.BYP
LIM.THRE
*1
OFF/ON
-12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the compressor
Ratio of the compressor
Attack time of the compressor
Release time of the compressor
Knee of the compressor
Bypasses the compressor
Threshold of the expander
Ratio of the expander
Release time of the expander
Bypasses the expander
Threshold of the limiter
Data List
Parameter Range Description
LIM.ATK
LIM.REL
0-120 ms
*1
Attack time of the limiter
Release time of the limiter
LIM.KNEE 0-5 Knee of the limiter
LIM.BYP
PRESENCE
LOOKUP
MAKE UP
OFF/ON
-10 to +10
0.0-100.0 ms
OFF/ON
Bypasses the limiter
Positive (+) values lower the threshold of the high band and raise the threshold of the low band. Negative (-) values do the opposite. If this is set to 0, the high, mid, and low bands will be affected in the same way.
Lookup delay
Automatically adjusts the output level
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
◆ M.BAND COMP
Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter Range
L-M XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
M-H XOVER 21.2 Hz-8.00 kHz
SLOPE -6 dB, -12 dB
LOW GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
MID GAIN -12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
HI. GAIN
TOTAL
-12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
-72.0 dB to +12.0 dB
CEILING -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
LOW THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
LOW RAT
LOW ATK
1:1 to 20:1
0-120 ms
LOW REL
*1
Description
Crossover frequency between the low and mid bands
Crossover frequency between the mid and high bands
Filter slope
Low band gain
Mid band gain
High band gain
Overall gain
Restricts the output so that it will not exceed the specified level
Threshold of the low band compressor
Ratio of the low band compressor
Attack time of the low band compressor
Release time of the low band compressor
LOW KNEE 0-5
LOW BYP OFF/ON
MID THRE -54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
MID RAT
MID ATK
1:1 to 20:1
0-120 ms
MID REL
*1
MID KNEE 0-5
MID BYP
HI. THRE
OFF/ON
-54.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Knee of the low band compressor
Bypasses the low band compressor
Threshold of the mid band compressor
Ratio of the mid band compressor
Attack time of the mid band compressor
Release time of the mid band compressor
Knee of the mid band compressor
Bypasses the mid band compressor
Threshold of the high band compressor
HI. RAT
HI. ATK
HI. RAT
HI. KNEE
HI. BYP
1:1 to 20:1
0-120 ms
*1
0-5
OFF/ON
Ratio of the high band compressor
Attack time of the high band compressor
Release time of the high band compressor
Knee of the high band compressor
Bypasses the high band compressor
LOOKUP
MAKE UP
0.0-100.0 ms
OFF/ON
Lookup delay
Automatically adjusts the output level
*1. 6.0 ms-46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms-42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)
20
Premium Rack Processor Parameters
◆ Portico5033
This models an analog 5-band EQ made by the RND company.
Parameter Range Description
ALL BYPASS OFF, ON
TRIM
LF FREQ
LF GAIN
-12.0 to 12.0 dB
30.00 to 300.0 Hz
-12.0 to 12.0 dB
LMF IN
LMF Q
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
LMF FREQ 50.00 to 400.0 Hz
LMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
MF IN
MF Q
MF FREQ
MF GAIN
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
330.0 to 2500 Hz
-12.0 to 12.0 dB
HMF IN
HMF Q
OFF, ON
0.70 to 5.00
HMF FREQ 1.80k to 16.0k Hz
HMF GAIN -12.0 to 12.0 dB
LF/HF IN OFF, ON
HF FREQ
HF GAIN
2.50k to 25.0k Hz
-12.0 to 12.0 dB
Turns bypass on/off for the EQ. Even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Input gain
Center frequency of the LF band
Gain of the LF band
Switches the LMF band on/off
Q of the LMF band
Center frequency of the LMF band
Gain of the LMF band
Switches the MF band on/off
Q of the MF band
Center frequency of the MF band
Gain of the MF band
Switches the HMF band on/off
Q of the HMF band
Center frequency of the HMF band
Gain of the HMF band
Switches the LF/HF bands on/off
Center frequency of the HF band
Gain of the HF band
◆ Portico5043
This models an analog compressor/limiter made by the RND company.
Parameter Range Description
IN
FB
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Turns bypass on/off for the compressor. When bypassed, the button will be unlit. However even in the bypassed state, the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
Switches between feed-forward type and feed-back type
THRESHOLD -50.0 to 0.0 dB
RATIO
Threshold level
1.10 : 1 to 28.9 : 1, LIMIT Compression ratio
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
20 to 75 ms
100 ms to 2.50 sec
-6.0 to 20.0 dB
Attack time
Release time
Output level
Data List
U76
This models a well-known vintage compressor/limiter used in a wide range of situations.
Parameter
INPUT
OUTPUT
ATTACK
RELEASE
RATIO
METER
Range
-96.0 to 0.0 dB
-96.0 to 0.0 dB
5.50 to 0.10 ms
1100.0 to 56.4 ms
ALL, 4, 8, 12, 20
OFF, +4, +8, GR
Description
Input level
Output level
Attack time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest attack.
Release time of the compressor. Turning this all the way to the right produces the fastest release.
Switches the compression ratio. Pressing ALL produces the strongest effect.
Switches the meter display
◆ Opt-2A
This processor emulates a well-known vintage model of vacuum tube opto compressor.
Parameter Range
GAIN -56.0 dB to 40.0 dB
PEAK REDUCTION -48.0 dB to 48.0 dB
RATIO 2.00 to 10.00
METER SELECT
OUTPUT+10,
GAIN REDUCTION,
OUTPUT+4
Output level
Amount of gain reduction
Compression ratio
Switches the meter display
Description
◆ EQ-1A
This processor emulates a vintage EQ that's considered a classic example of a passive EQ.
Parameter Range Description
LOW FREQUENCY
(LOW) BOOST
(LOW) ATTEN
HIGH FREQUENCY
(HIGH) BOOST 0.0 to 10.0
(HIGH) BAND WIDTH 0.0 to 10.0
(HIGH) ATTEN SEL 5k, 10k, 20k Hz
(HIGH) ATTEN
IN
20, 30, 60, 100 Hz
0.0 to 10.0
Frequency range of the low range filter
Boost amount of the low range filter
0.0 to 10.0 Attenuation amount of the low range filter
3k, 4k, 5k, 8k, 10k, 12k, 16k Hz Frequency range of the high range filter
0.0 to 10.0
OFF, ON
Boost amount of the high range filter
Band width of the high range filter
Frequency range attenuated by the high range filter
Attenuation amount of the high range filter
Turns the processor on/off. If this is off, the filter section will be bypassed, but the signal will pass through the input/output transformers and the amp circuit.
◆ Dynamic EQ
This is a newly developed equalizer that dynamically changes the EQ gain in response to the input signal, controlling the amount of EQ cut or boost in a way similar to a compressor or expander.
Parameter Range Description
BAND ON/OFF
SIDECHAIN CUE
SIDECHAIN LISTEN
FILTER TYPE
FREQUENCY
Q
THRESHOLD
RATIO
MODE
ATTACK/RELEASE
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
Turns the corresponding band on/off
If this is on, the sidechain signal that controls the dynamics will be sent to the CUE bus for monitoring.
If this is on, the sidechain signal that is linked to the dynamics will be output to the bus (such as the STEREO bus or a MIX/
MATRIX bus) to which the inserted channel is being sent.
Low Shelf, Bell, Hi Shelf Switches the type of equalizer and sidechain filter
20.0 to 20.0k Hz
15.0 to 0.50
Frequency controlled by the equalizer and sidechain filter
Q of the equalizer and sidechain filter
-80.0 to 10.0 dB
∞ : 1 to 1 : 1.50
BELOW, ABOVE
FAST, SLOW, AUTO
Threshold value at which processing begins to apply
Sets the boost/cut ratio relative to the input signal
Specifies whether the processor will operate when the sidechain signal exceeds the threshold setting (ABOVE) or when it falls below the threshold setting (BELOW)
Attack time/release time for when compression or boost is applied
◆ Buss Comp 369
Parameter
INPUT ADJUST
LINK
METER
VU
COMP IN
COMP RATIO
COMP GAIN
COMP RECOVERY
COMP THRESHOLD
LIMIT IN
LIMIT ATTACK
LIMIT RECOVERY
Range
-15.0 to +15.0dB
ON, OFF
IN, GR, OUT
IN, OUT
ON, OFF
1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 6:1
0.0 to +20.0dB
100ms, 400ms, 800ms,
1500ms, a1, a2
-40 to -5dBFS
ON, OFF
FAST, SLOW
50ms, 100ms, 200ms,
800ms, a1, a2
-16 to -5 dBFS
Description
Input gain. However, the output gain is also linked so that there is no change in the pass-through volume. For example, if
INPUT ADJUST is +5dB, the input gain is +5dB and the output gain is -5dB.
Stereo link function (STEREO only)
Meter switch (STEREO only)
Meter switch (DUAL only)
Compressor on/off
Ratio of the compressor
Compressor gain
Compressor release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2
(auto 2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between 100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
Threshold of the compressor
Limiter on/off
Attack time of the limiter FAST: 2 ms, SLOW: 4 ms
Limiter release. The release times for a1 (auto 1) and a2 (auto
2) change automatically. a1: Changes automatically between
100 ms and 2 sec. a2: Changes automatically between 50 ms and 5 sec.
Threshold of the limiter LIMIT THRESHOLD
21
Data List
◆ Automixer Parameters
Parameter Range
Group
Override
ChMode
ChModePreset a, b, c
OFF, ON man, auto, mute man, auto, mute
Weight
MeterType
MasterOverride
MasterMute
Gain
-100 to 15 gain, input, output
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
0 to 127
InputLevel
OutputLevel
PostWeightingFilter
0 to 127
0 to 127
0 to 127
Description
Channel control field group
Turns on/off overriding of the channel control field
Channel control field mode (man/auto/mute)
Preset setting of the channel control field
Relative sensitivity among input channels in the channel control field
Meter type of the master field
Turns on/off overriding of the master field
Turns on/off the mute setting of the master field
Automixer gain displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “gain”
Input level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “input”
Output level displayed for each channel when the meter button of the master field is set to “output”
Level indicator of the channel control field
22
Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes
Mode Parameter 1 Parameter 2
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
CH ON
CUE
DCA
—
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
CUE MODE
SURROUND CUE MODE
FADER CUE RELEASE ON
INPUT CUE POINT
DCA CUE POINT
OUTPUT CUE POINT
DCA UNITY
OUTPUT LEVEL H
OUTPUT LEVEL L
ACTIVE CUE
CLEAR CUE
SPECIFIC CH
ON
FADER H
FADER L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-STEREO R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
—
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
DCA 1-DCA16
DCA 1-DCA 16
DIRECT OUT
EFFECT
ON
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM 1 H - PARAM 32 L
CH 1-CH 72
*1
RACK1-8
FADER H
INPUT
OUTPUT
FADER L
GEQ
INPUT
OUTPUT
ON A
ON B
GAIN 1A-GAIN 31A
GAIN 1B-GAIN 31B
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
GEQ RACK1-GEQ RACK16
EFFECT RACK1- EFFECT
RACK8
Data List
Mode
INPUT ATT
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
INPUT EQ
Parameter 1
INPUT
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD H
HOLD L
DECAY/RELEASE H
DECAY/RELEASE L
RATIO
KNEE
GAIN H
GAIN L
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO/TYPE
GAIN H
GAIN L/Q
KNEE/WIDTH
FILTER FREQ
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
ON
FREQ
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT HPF
INSERT
Parameter 2
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
23
Mode
LCR
MIX/MATRIX SEND
MIX TO MATRIX
MIX TO STEREO
MONITOR
MUTE MASTER
OUTPUT ATT
OUTPUT DYNAMICS1
DIMMER ON
PHONES LEVEL LINK
CUE INTERRUPTION
MONO MONITOR
MONITOR FADER H
MONITOR FADER L
DELAY AUTO BYPASS
DELAY ON
ON
OUTPUT
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE H
RELEASE L
RATIO
GAIN H
GAIN L
KNEE/WIDTH
Parameter 1
ON
CSR
MIX 1 ON - MIX24 ON
MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON
MIX 1 POINT - MIX 24 POINT
MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT
MIX 1 H - MIX24H
MATRIX1 H - MATRIX8 H
MIX 1 L - MIX24L
MATRIX1 L - MATRIX8 L
MIX 1/2 PAN - MIX 23/24 PAN
MATRIX1/2 PAN - MATRIX7/8 PAN
MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN
TO STEREO ON
TO MONO ON
PAN
OUTPUT
SOURCE SELECT
DEFINE ASSIGN
Parameter 2
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MIX 1-MIX 24
—
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
OMNI 1-2-OMNI 7-8
PB OUT
—
MASTER 1-MASTER 8
MIX1-MIX24
MATRIX1-MATRIX8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
Data List
Mode
OUTPUT EQ
PAN/BALANCE
PEQ
A/B LINK
ON
BAND1 BYPASS
BAND1 GAIN H
BAND1 GAIN L
BAND1 FREQ
BAND1 Q
BAND2 BYPASS
BAND2 GAIN H
BAND2 GAIN L
BAND2 FREQ
BAND2 Q
BAND3 BYPASS
BAND3 GAIN H
BAND3 GAIN L
BAND3 FREQ
BAND3 Q
BAND4 BYPASS
BAND4 GAIN H
Parameter 1
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW HPF ON
HIGH LPF ON
INPUT
Parameter 2
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
GEQ RACK 1A-16B
EFFECT RACK 1A-8B
PEQ
Mode
PHASE
PREMIUM EFFECT A
24
PREMIUM EFFECT B
BAND4 GAIN L
BAND4 FREQ
BAND4 Q
Parameter 1
BAND5 BYPASS
BAND5 GAIN H
BAND5 GAIN L
BAND5 FREQ
BAND5 Q
BAND6 BYPASS
BAND6 GAIN H
BAND6 GAIN L
BAND6 FREQ
BAND6 Q
BAND7 BYPASS
BAND7 GAIN H
BAND7 GAIN L
BAND7 FREQ
BAND7 Q
BAND8 BYPASS
BAND8 GAIN H
BAND8 GAIN L
BAND8 FREQ
BAND8 Q
HPF ON
HPF FREQ
HPF SLOPE
LPF ON
LPF FREQ
LPF SLOPE
NOTCH A ON
NOTCH A FREQ H
NOTCH A FREQ L
NOTCH A Q
NOTCH B ON
NOTCH B FREQ H
NOTCH B FREQ L
NOTCH B Q
NOTCH C ON
NOTCH C FREQ H
NOTCH C FREQ L
NOTCH C Q
INPUT
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H - PARAM 64 L
BYPASS
PARAM 1 H - PARAM 64 L
Parameter 2
GEQ RACK 1A-16B
EFFECT RACK 1A-8B
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
RACK1-8
RACK1-8
Data List
Mode
RECALL SAFE ON
Parameter 1
STEREO TO MATRIX
SURROUND MONITOR
SURROUND PAN
TO MONO
MATRIX 1 POINT - MATRIX 8 POINT
MATRIX 1 ON - MATRIX 8 ON
MATRIX 1 LEVEL H - MATRIX 8 LEVEL H
MATRIX 1 LEVEL L - MATRIX 8 LEVEL L
MATRIX 1/2 PAN - MATRIX 7/8 PAN
SOURCE SELECT
2CH MONITOR ASSIGN
DOWNMIX
SURROUND SPEAKER SOLO
SURROUND SPEAKER L
SURROUND SPEAKER R
SURROUND SPEAKER C
SURROUND SPEAKER LFE
SURROUND SPEAKER Ls
SURROUND SPEAKER Rs
LR PAN
FR PAN
FR PAN REVERSE
DIV
L ON
R ON
C ON
LFE ON
Ls ON
Rs ON
LFE LEVEL H
LFE LEVEL L
ON
TO STEREO ON
*1. CL3: CH1-CH64, CL1: CH1-CH48
—
Parameter 2
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
MIX 1-MIX 24
MATRIX 1-MATRIX 8
STEREO L-MONO(C)
GEQ RACK 1A-16B
EFFECT RACK 1A-8B
PREMIUM RACK 1A-8B
DCA 1-DCA16
STEREO L-MONO(C)
SELECTED CH
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
CH 1-CH 72
*1
STIN1L-STIN8R
25
Data List
NRPN Parameter Assignments
FADER
INPUT to MIX9-16 LEVEL
INPUT to MATRIX1 - 4
LEVEL
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX LEVEL
ON
INPUT to MIX9-16 ON
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX ON
MIX1-8 to STEREO ON
PHASE
Parameter
INPUT to MATRIX1-4 ON
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX TO ST
INPUT
From (HEX) To (HEX)
0000 0057
0060 007D
007E
00DE
013E
019E
01FE
025E
02BE
031E
037E
03DE
043E
049E
04FE
0514
052A
0540
0556
056C
0582
0598
05B6
0616
00D5
0135
0195
01F5
0255
02B5
0315
0375
03D5
0435
0495
04F5
0513
0529
053F
0555
056B
0581
0597
05AD
060D
0634
0694
06F4
0754
07B4
0814
0874
08D4
0934
0994
09F4
0A54
0AB4
0ACA
0AE0
0AF6
0B0C
0B22
0B38
0B4E
0B64
0B6C
0633
068B
06EB
074B
07AB
080B
086B
08CB
092B
098B
09EB
0A4B
0AAB
0AC9
0ADF
0AF5
0B0B
0B21
0B37
0B4D
0B63
0B6B
0BC3
INSERT ON
Parameter
INPUT
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
INPUT to MIX9-16 PRE/
POST
INPUT to MATRIX1-4
PRE/POST
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
LEVEL
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
ON
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
INPUT57-64 to MIX1-8
PRE/POST
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
MIX9 SEND
MIX10 SEND
MIX11 SEND
MIX12 SEND
MIX13 SEND
MIX14 SEND
MIX15 SEND
MIX16 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
26
From (HEX) To (HEX)
0BCC 0C13
0C2C 0C49
10DA
10E2
10EA
10F2
10FA
1102
110A
1112
111A
1122
112A
1132
113A
1142
114A
1152
115A
1162
116A
1172
117A
1182
118A
1192
119A
11A2
11AA
11B2
11BA
11C2
11CA
11D2
11DA
11E2
0C4A
0CAA
0D0A
0D6A
0DCA
0E2A
0E8A
0EEA
0F4A
0FAA
100A
106A
10CA
10D2
10E1
10E9
10F1
10F9
1101
1109
1111
1119
1121
1129
1131
1139
1141
1149
1151
1159
1161
1169
1171
1179
1181
1189
1191
1199
11A1
11A9
11B1
11B9
11C1
11C9
11D1
11D9
11E1
11E9
0CA1
0D01
0D61
0DC1
0E21
0E81
0EE1
0F41
0FA1
1001
1061
10C1
10D1
10D9
Parameter
INPUT57-64 EQ
INPUT57-64 HPF
INPUT57-64 to MIX1/2-
7/8 PAN
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
FREQ
MIX1/2
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
INPUT57-64 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS2
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
INPUT57-64 to STEREO ON
INPUT57-64 RECALL
SAFE
ON
INPUT57-64 to MONO ON
RATIO
INPUT49-64
DYNAMICS1
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
RECALL SAFE
ON
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
EQ INPUT, MIX1-20,
MATRIX, STEREO LR
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR DYNAMICS1
PAN/BALANCE
HIGH GAIN
ATT
HPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RANGE
HOLD
DECAY/RELEASE
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
INPUT
1242
124A
125A
126A
127A
128A
129A
18EC
196A
19E8
1A66
1AE4
1B44
1BA4
1C04
1C64
1CC4
1D24
1DA2
1E20
1E9E
1F1C
1F9A
2018
2096
1304
1382
1400
147E
14FC
157A
15F8
1676
16F4
1772
17F0
186E
From (HEX) To (HEX)
11EA
11F2
11FA
1202
120A
1212
121A
1222
122A
1232
11F1
11F9
1201
1209
1211
1219
1221
1229
1231
1239
123A 1241
1249
1259
1269
1279
1289
1299
12A9
1969
19C1
1A65
1AE3
1B3B
1B9B
1BFB
1C5B
1CBB
1D1B
1DA1
1E1F
1E9D
1F1B
1F99
2017
2095
20ED
1381
13FF
147D
14FB
1579
15F7
1675
16F3
1771
17EF
186D
18EB
Data List
Parameter
INPUT to MIX9/10-15/16
PAN
MIX9/10
MIX11/12
MIX13/14
INPUT to MATRIX1/2,
3/4 PAN
MIX1-20, STEREO LR to
MATRIX PAN
MIX15/16
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
MIX1-8 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST
BALANCE
MIX1-20, MATRIX,
STEREO LR
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MIX, STEREO LR, MONO to MATRIX PRE/POST
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX ON
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 ON
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
24D4
24E4
24F4
2504
2514
2524
2534
2544
2554
2564
2574
2584
2594
25A4
25B4
23B4
23D0
23EC
2408
2424
2440
245C
2478
2494
249A
24A0
24A6
24AC
24B2
24B8
24BE
24C4
From (HEX) To (HEX)
20F6
2156
21B6
2216
2276
22D6
2336
234C
2362
2378
238E
214D
21AD
220D
226D
22CD
232D
234B
2361
2377
238D
2395
2396 23B3
24E3
24F3
2503
2513
2523
2533
2543
2553
2563
2573
2583
2593
25A3
25B3
25C3
23CE
23EA
2406
2422
243E
245A
2476
2492
2498
249E
24A4
24AA
24B0
24B6
24BC
24C2
24D3
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
EFFECT RACK1-8
Parameter
PARAM12
PARAM13
PARAM14
PARAM15
PARAM16
PARAM17
PARAM18
PARAM19
PARAM20
PARAM21
PARAM22
PARAM23
PARAM24
PARAM25
PARAM26
PARAM27
PARAM28
PARAM29
PARAM30
PARAM31
PARAM32
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MIX1/2
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
BYPASS
MIX BALANCE
PARAM1
PARAM2
PARAM3
PARAM4
PARAM5
PARAM6
PARAM7
PARAM8
PARAM9
PARAM10
PARAM11
From (HEX) To (HEX)
2774
277C
2784
278C
2794
279C
27A4
27AC
27B4
27BC
271C
2724
272C
2734
273C
2744
274C
2754
275C
2764
276C
2644
2654
2664
2674
26B4
26BC
26C4
26CC
26D4
26DC
26E4
26EC
26F4
26FC
2704
270C
2714
25C4
25D4
25E4
25F4
2604
2614
2624
2634
277B
2783
278B
2793
279B
27A3
27AB
27B3
27BB
27C3
2723
272B
2733
273B
2743
274B
2753
275B
2763
276B
2773
2653
2663
2673
2683
26BB
26C3
26CB
26D3
26DB
26E3
26EB
26F3
26FB
2703
270B
2713
271B
25D3
25E3
25F3
2603
2613
2623
2633
2643
GEQ RACK1A-3B
FADER
Parameter
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 LEVEL
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
MIX21-24, MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
From (HEX) To (HEX)
29AA
29EA
2A2A
2A6A
2AAA
2AEA
2B2A
2B6A
2BAA
285A
2860
2866
286C
2872
2878
287E
28E4
28EA
292A
296A
27F4
27FA
2800
2806
280C
2812
2818
281E
2824
282A
2830
2836
283C
2842
2848
284E
2854
27C4
27CA
27D0
27D6
27DC
27E2
27E8
27EE
29E9
2A29
2A69
2AA9
2AE9
2B29
2B69
2BA9
2BE9
285F
2865
286B
2871
2877
287D
2883
28E8
2929
2969
29A9
27F9
27FF
2805
280B
2811
2817
281D
2823
2829
282F
2835
283B
2841
2847
284D
2853
2859
27C9
27CF
27D5
27DB
27E1
27E7
27ED
27F3
27
Data List
Parameter
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX LEVEL
ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 ON
MATRIX1 SEND
MATRIX2 SEND
MATRIX3 SEND
MATRIX4 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX21-24, MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MIX9-24 to STEREO ON MIX TO ST
INSERT MIX21-24, MONO
MIX1 SEND
MIX2 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1-8 PRE/POST
MIX3 SEND
MIX4 SEND
MIX5 SEND
MIX6 SEND
MIX7 SEND
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
DCA13-16
BALANCE
MIX21-24, MONO EQ
MIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
ON
FADER
MIX21-24 (,MONO)
ON
LOW Q
LOW FREQ
LOW GAIN
LOW MID Q
LOW MID FREQ
LOW MID GAIN
HIGH MID Q
HIGH MID FREQ
HIGH MID GAIN
HIGH Q
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3252
3258
325E
3264
326A
3270
3276
327C
3282
3288
328E
3294
329A
32A0
32A6
2FCC
300C
304C
308C
30CC
310C
314C
318C
31CC
320C
324C
2C2A
2C30
2C70
2CB0
2CF0
2D30
2D70
2DB0
2DF0
2E30
2E70
2EB0
2EF0
2F36
2F46
2F4C
2F8C
2BEA
2BF0
2BF6
2BFC
2C02
2C08
2C0E
2C14
3255
325C
3262
3268
326E
3274
327A
3280
3286
328C
3292
3298
329E
32A4
32AA
300B
304B
308B
30CB
310B
314B
318B
31CB
320B
324B
324F
2C2E
2C6F
2CAF
2CEF
2D2F
2D6F
2DAF
2DEF
2E2F
2E6F
2EAF
2EEF
2F2F
2F45
2F4A
2F8B
2FCB
2BEE
2BF4
2BFA
2C00
2C06
2C0C
2C12
2C18
Parameter
MIX21-24, MONO EQ
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 EQ
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 EQ
HPF ON
LPF ON
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
LOW TYPE
HIGH TYPE
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
HPF
DIRECT OUT INPUT65-
72
FREQ
ON
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 LEVEL
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 ON
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5-8 PRE/POST
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MONITOR
SURROUND MONITOR
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX5 SEND
MATRIX6 SEND
MATRIX7 SEND
MATRIX8 SEND
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
FADER
SPEAKER MUTE
SOLO
SPEAKER MUTE L
SPEAKER MUTE R
SPEAKER MUTE C
SPEAKER MUTE LFE
SPEAKER MUTE Ls
SPEAKER MUTE Rs
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 HPF FREQ
MIX21-24, MONO
DYNAMICS1
ON
ATTACK
THRESHOLD
RELEASE
RATIO
GAIN
KNEE/WIDTH
MIX1/2
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MIX1/2-7/8 PAN
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 to
MATRIX5/6, 7/8 PAN
MIX3/4
MIX5/6
MIX7/8
MATRIX5/6
MATRIX7/8
From (HEX) To (HEX)
32AC
32B2
3440
3480
34C0
34E4
3508
3518
32B0
32B6
347F
34BF
34E2
3506
3517
3527
3528 3537
3538
3540
3550
3560
3570
3580
3590
35A0
35B0
35C0
35D0
35E0
35F0
3600
3610
3620
3621
3698
369E
36A4
36AA
36EA
372A
376A
37AA
37EA
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3640
3680
3686
368C
3692
353F
354F
355F
356F
357F
358F
359F
35AF
35BF
35CF
35DF
35EF
35FF
360F
361F
3620
3621
369C
36A2
36A8
36E9
3729
3769
37A9
37E9
3829
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
367F
3684
368A
3690
3696
28
Parameter
MIX21-24, MONO to
MATRIX1/2-7/8 PAN
MATRIX7/8
MIX9-24 to STEREO PAN MIX TO ST
GEQ RACK4A-6B
MATRIX1/2
MATRIX3/4
MATRIX5/6
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
DCA1-12
MUTE MASTER
RECALL SAFE
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
LCR INPUT1-64, STIN1-4,
MIX1-16
ON
CSR
DIRECT OUT INPUT1-64 ON
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
STEREO
ON
ON
FADER
ON
ON
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3864
386A
3870
3876
387C
3882
3888
388E
3894
389A
38A0
38A6
38AC
38B2
38B8
38BE
38C4
382A
3830
3836
383C
3842
3852
3858
385E
38CA
38D0
38D6
38DC
38E2
38E8
38EE
38F4
38FA
3900
3906
390C
3912
396A
39C2
3869
386F
3875
387B
3881
3887
388D
3893
3899
389F
38A5
38AB
38B1
38B7
38BD
38C3
38C9
382E
3834
383A
3840
3851
3857
385D
3863
38CF
38D5
38DB
38E1
38E7
38ED
38F3
38F9
38FF
3905
390B
3911
3969
39C1
3A01
3A02 3A41
3A42
3A4E
3A5A
3A66
3A4D
3A59
3A61
3B05
Data List
HA
Parameter
INPUT +48V 5
EXTERNAL +48V 6
INPUT +48V 6
EXTERNAL +48V 7
INPUT +48V 7
EXTERNAL +48V 8
INPUT +48V 8
EXTERNAL HPF1
INPUT HPF1
EXTERNAL HPF2
INPUT HPF2
EXTERNAL HPF3
INPUT HPF3
EXTERNAL HPF4
INPUT HPF4
EXTERNAL HPF5
INPUT HPF5
EXTERNAL HPF6
INPUT HPF6
EXTERNAL HPF7
INPUT HPF7
EXTERNAL HPF8
INPUT HPF8
EXTERNAL GAIN1
INPUT GAIN 1
EXTERNAL GAIN2
INPUT GAIN 2
EXTERNAL GAIN3
INPUT GAIN 3
EXTERNAL GAIN4
INPUT GAIN 4
EXTERNAL GAIN5
INPUT GAIN 5
EXTERNAL GAIN6
INPUT GAIN 6
EXTERNAL GAIN7
INPUT GAIN 7
EXTERNAL GAIN8
INPUT GAIN 8
EXTERNAL +48V 1
INPUT +48V 1
EXTERNAL +48V 2
INPUT +48V 2
EXTERNAL +48V 3
INPUT +48V 3
EXTERNAL +48V 4
INPUT +48V 4
EXTERNAL +48V 5
INPUT1-56, STIN1-4 TO
MONO
MIX1-16 TO MONO
ON
ON
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3C26
3C2F
3C36
3C3F
3C46
3C4F
3C56
3C5F
3C66
3C6F
3C76
3C7F
3BCF
3BD6
3BDF
3BE6
3BEF
3BF6
3BFF
3C06
3C0F
3C16
3C1F
3B46
3B4F
3B56
3B5F
3B66
3B6F
3B76
3B7F
3B86
3B8F
3B96
3B9F
3BA6
3BAF
3BB6
3BBF
3BC6
3B06
3B0F
3B16
3B1F
3B26
3B2F
3B36
3B3F
3C2B
3C35
3C3B
3C45
3C4B
3C55
3C5B
3C65
3C6B
3C75
3C7B
3C85
3BD5
3BDB
3BE5
3BEB
3BF5
3BFB
3C05
3C0B
3C15
3C1B
3C25
3B4B
3B55
3B5B
3B65
3B6B
3B75
3B7B
3B85
3B8B
3B95
3B9B
3BA5
3BAB
3BB5
3BBB
3BC5
3BCB
3B0B
3B15
3B1B
3B25
3B2B
3B35
3B3B
3B45
3C86 3CC5
3CC6 3CD5
SLOT OUT DELAY
OMNI OUT DELAY
DIGITAL OUT DELAY
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS1
INPUT1-48, STIN1-4
DYNAMICS2
GEQ RACK7A-8B
Parameter
GAIN22
GAIN23
GAIN24
GAIN25
GAIN26
GAIN27
GAIN28
GAIN29
GAIN30
GAIN31
GAIN11
GAIN12
GAIN13
GAIN14
GAIN15
GAIN16
GAIN17
GAIN18
GAIN19
GAIN20
GAIN21
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME LOW
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
ON
GAIN1
GAIN2
GAIN3
GAIN4
GAIN5
GAIN6
GAIN7
GAIN8
GAIN9
GAIN10
29
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3F0C
3F10
3F14
3F18
3F1C
3F20
3F24
3F28
3F2C
3F30
3EE0
3EE4
3EE8
3EEC
3EF0
3EF4
3EF8
3EFC
3F00
3F04
3F08
3D9A
3D9C
3DD4
3E0C
3E44
3E7C
3EB4
3EB8
3EBC
3EC0
3EC4
3EC8
3ECC
3ED0
3ED4
3ED8
3EDC
3CD6
3D06
3D36
3D66
3D76
3D86
3D96
3D98
3F0F
3F13
3F17
3F1B
3F1F
3F23
3F27
3F2B
3F2F
3F33
3EE3
3EE7
3EEB
3EEF
3EF3
3EF7
3EFB
3EFF
3F03
3F07
3F0B
3D9B
3DD3
3E0B
3E43
3E7B
3EB3
3EB7
3EBB
3EBF
3EC3
3EC7
3ECB
3ECF
3ED3
3ED7
3EDB
3EDF
3D05
3D35
3D65
3D6D
3D7D
3D8D
3D97
3D99
Parameter
MIX, MATRIX, STEREO
LR, MONO EQ
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8 TO
STEREO
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24 TO MONO
LCR IN65-72, STIN5-8,
MIX17-24
ATT
ON
ON
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS1
INPUT65-72, STIN5-8
DYNAMICS2
ON
CSR
RATIO
KNEE/WIDTH
GAIN reserved
FILTER FREQ
From (HEX) To (HEX)
3F34 3F56
3F58 3F67
3F68
3F80
3F98
3FB0
3FC0
3FD0
3FE0
3FF0
3F7F
3F97
3FAF
3FBF
3FCF
3FDF
3FEF
3FFF
Data List
Mixing Parameter Operation Applicability
This table indicates which settings affect the behavior of each input channel and output channel parameter.
It also indicates whether or not they can be linked as stereo, and whether or not they are relevant to the RECALL SAFE, GLOBAL PASTE, and USER LEVEL settings, and a channel library.
◆ Input channels
Parameter
Stereo
*1
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
ALL Parameter Select button
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
HA
Digital Gain
Gain
Gain Compensation
+48V
Phase
AG-DG Link
O
*10
O
O
O
*10
HA
*10
HA
HA
DIGITAL GAIN
*10
O
O
O
O
O
O
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
HA, GLOBAL HA
DIGITAL GAIN
HA
HA
HA
HA
HA
HA
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ALL
INPUT NAME, GLOBAL INPUT NAME
INPUT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
*14
INPUT NAME
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
Name, Icon, Color
Input Patch
LR-
MONO
SELECT
Insert1,
Insert2
Direct Out
* ST IN channels only
Out Patch
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Out Patch
On, Level
Point
HPF
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Dynamics2
Key-In Source
Key-In Filter
Others
Key-In Source
Others
To Mix
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Surround
Pre/Post
Pan
Divergence
LFE
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
O
O
INPUT INSERT
INPUT INSERT
DIRECT OUT
DIRECT OUT
INPUT HPF
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS1
INPUT DYNAMICS2
INPUT MIX ON
*2
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
INPUT MIX SEND
*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
INPUT INSERT
INPUT INSERT
INPUT DIRECT OUT, GLOBAL INPUT PATCH
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT DIRECT OUT
INPUT HPF
INPUT EQ
INPUT EQ
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA1
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT DYNA2
INPUT MIX ON
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
*7
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT MIX SEND
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PATCH
HA
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PATCH
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
30
Data List
Parameter
To Matrix
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
DELAY ms
ON
To Stereo
To Mono
Pan/balance
Pan Mode
LCR
On
Fader
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On
Channel Link
Cue
Key In Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Focus Recall
Global Paste
On
CSR
Mode
Stereo
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
O
O
O
*6
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*10
O
*10
O
O
O
O
*11
CHANNEL LINK
INPUT MATRIX ON
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*3
INPUT DELAY
*10
INPUT DELAY
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER
*10
INPUT MUTE
INPUT DCA
EACH PARAMETER
EACH PARAMETER
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8
ALL Parameter Select button
O
O
O
O
INPUT MATRIX ON
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT MATRIX SEND
*7
INPUT DELAY
INPUT DELAY
INPUT TO ST
INPUT TO MONO
INPUT TO ST
*5
*5
*5
*5
INPUT CH ON
INPUT FADER
*5
*5
*9
GLOBAL CH LINK
USER LEVEL
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT FADER/ON
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
*4
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT PROCESSING
INPUT FADER/ON
INPUT FADER/ON
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
*1 These parameters can be linked between L and R of ST IN channels 1-8.
*2 Applies to parameters for which the MIX channel 1-24 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*3 Applies to parameters for which the MATRIX channel 1-8 individual Send Parameter setting and the item in the table are both enabled.
*4 These parameters are available if
“FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*10 Operates differentially
*11 Balance only
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
31
Data List
◆ MIX Channels
Parameters
Linked for a stereo
pair
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
ALL Parameter Select button
USER LEVEL
Channel
Library
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Insert1,
Insert2
Out Patch
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain Compensation
On
Point
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
Key-In Source
Others
On
To Matrix
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*13
O
O
INSERT
INSERT
EQ
EQ
DYNAMICS
TO MATRIX ON
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MIX NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
MIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MIX INSERT
MIX INSERT
MIX EQ
MIX EQ
MIX DYNA1
MIX DYNA1
MIX MATRIX ON
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX MATRIX SEND
*7
MIX TO ST
MIX MONO
OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX FADER/ON
*4
MIX PROCESSING
*4
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
To Stereo
To Mono
Pan/Balance
LCR
On
CSR
Mode
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
TO STEREO
CH ON
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MIX TO ST, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
*5
*5
*5
MIX FADER/ON
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX PROCESSING
MIX FADER/ON
O
O
O
O
O
O
O On MIX CH ON
Fader
From Input
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
O
O
O
O
*11
O
FADER
MUTE
DCA
O MIX FADER MIX FADER/ON
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
WITH MIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MIX SEND
*4
O
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
O
O
O
O
*5
*14
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
O
O
Fade Time, On
O
*6
O
*9
STORE
O
*6
Channel Link
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Focus Recall
O
O
O
O
O
EACH PARAMETER
EACH PARAMETER
GLOBAL CH LINK
Global Paste O
*4 These parameters are available if
“FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
32
Data List
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*13 Linked only for stereo MATRIX
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
◆ MATRIX Channels
Parameters
Linked for a stereo
pair
CHANNEL LINK
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
ALL Parameter Select button
O
O
O
O
MATRIX NAME,GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME
MATRIX OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Insert1, Insert2
Out Patch
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain
Compensation
On
Point
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
To Matrix
Key-In Source
Others
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
Balance
On
Fader
On
From Input
From Mix
From Stereo/Mono
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*11
O
INSERT
INSERT
EQ
EQ
DYNAMICS
TO MATRIX ON
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
TO MATRIX SEND
CH ON
FADER
MUTE
DCA
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
MATRIX INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX INSERT
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX EQ
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX DYNA1
MATRIX BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
MATRIX CH ON
MATRIX FADER
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
WITH MATRIX SEND, WITH SEND FROM SOURCE CHs
*5
*14
Fade Time, On
Channel Link
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe
Focus Recall
Global Paste
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
EACH PARAMETER
EACH PARAMETER
O
*9
GLOBAL CH LINK
USER LEVEL
OUTPUT NAME
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
OUTPUT PATCH
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX PROCESSING
MATRIX FADER/ON
MATRIX FADER/ON
MATRIX FADER/ON
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
WITH MATRIX SEND
*4
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
*4 These parameters are available if
“FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
33
Data List
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*11 Balance only
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
◆ STEREO, MONO Channels
Parameter
Linked for a stereo
pair
ALL
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
*8, *12
Parameter Select button
USER LEVEL
Name, Icon, Color
Output Patch
Insert1, Insert2
Att
EQ
Dynamics1
To Matrix
Balance
On
Fader
Mute Assign
DCA Assign
Fade Time, On
Out Patch
In Patch
+48V, Gain, Gain
Compensation
On
Point
Key-In Source
Others
On
Level
Pan/Balance
Pre/Post O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*13
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
STEREO, MONO NAME, GLOBAL OUTPUT NAME OUTPUT NAME
STEREO, MONO OUTPUT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL OUTPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH
STEREO, MONO INSERT PATCH, GLOBAL HA
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO INSERT
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO EQ
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO DYNA1
STEREO, MONO MATRIX ON
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO MATRIX SEND
*7
STEREO, MONO BAL, TO ST/BAL (GLOBAL PASTE ONLY)
STEREO, MONO CH ON
STEREO, MONO FADER
*5
*14
*9
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
*4
STEREO, MONO PROCESSING
*4
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
STEREO, MONO FADER/ON
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
STORE
Channel
Library
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*6
Cue
Mute Safe
Recall Safe, Focus Recall, Global Paste
O
O
O
*4 These parameters are available if
“FADER/ON” or “PROCESSING” for the Send source channel is set to ON. At that time, “WITH SEND” for the Send destination channel must also be set to ON.
*5 Applicable to parameters that function only when ALL is selected.
*6 Applicable only to On/Off.
*7 Valid when they are set for either the Send source channel or Send destination channel.
*8 Settings marked GLOBAL in this table apply to all channels; these settings are GLOBAL RECALL SAFE, FOCUS PARAMETER, and GLOBAL PASTE for PATCH/NAME.
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
*12 For GLOBAL PASTE, the MIX, MATRIX, STEREO, and MONO settings of each channel will be set in common as the OUTPUT.
*14 Applicable to parameters only when ALL is selected.
34
Data List
◆ DCA
Fader
Parameters
Name, Icon, Color
On
RECALL SAFE, FOCUS RECALL, GLOBAL PASTE
ALL
O
O
O
Parameter Select button
DCA NAME
DCA LEVEL/ON
DCA LEVEL/ON
Fade Time, On O *9
Input DCA Assign
*9 Applies to ALL only when using GLOBAL PASTE, and only to ON/OFF.
USER LEVEL
DCA MASTER
DCA MASTER
DCA MASTER
STORE
DCA GROUP ASSIGN
◆ MUTE
Parameters
Name
On
Dimmer
MUTE Assign
RECALL SAFE
ALL
O
USER LEVEL
MUTE GROUP MASTER
MUTE GROUP MASTER
MUTE GROUP MASTER
MUTE GROUP ASSIGN
35
Data List
MIDI Data Format
This section explains the format of the data that the CL series is able to understand, send, and receive.
1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
1.1 NOTE OFF
(8n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n
Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn
Note number
0vvvvvvv vv
Velocity (ignored)
1.2 NOTE ON
(9n)
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER COMMAND ECHO] is ON.
They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n
Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn
Note number
0vvvvvvv vv
Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
1.3 CONTROL CHANGE
(Bn)
Two types of CONTROL CHANGE can be transmitted and received; [NRPN]
(Non-Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (1CH x 110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].
Reception
These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [CONTROL CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
If [TABLE] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST]. For the parameters that can be
assigned, refer to “ Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes ”
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [CONTROL CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,
63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [CONTROL CHANGE EVENT LIST], these messages will be transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can
be assigned, refer to “ Parameters That Can Be Assigned to Control Changes ”
If [NRPN] is selected, and if [CONTROL CHANGE Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and
DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to “ Parameters That Can Be
Assigned to Control Changes ” ( page 22 ).
CONTROL CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
CONTROL CHANGE numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.
STATUS 1011nnnn Bn
Control change
DATA
STATUS
DATA
00
Control number (00)
0vvvvvvv vv
Control Value (0-127)
1011nnnn Bn
Control change
20
Control number (32)
0vvvvvvv vv
Control Value (0-127)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
Control change
0nnnnnnn nn
Control number (1-5, 7-31, 33-37, 38-95,
102-119) *
0vvvvvvv vv
Control Value (0-127)
* Numbers 0, 32, and 96-101 cannot be used.
* Control number 6, 38 can be used.
Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps = paramMax-paramMin + 1; add = paramWidth / paramSteps; mod curValue
= paramWidth-add * paramSteps;
= paramSteps * add + mod / 2;
(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;
(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps paramWidth = 16384;
(2-1) When High and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152
steps paramWidth = 2097152;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-2) When only Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);
(3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;
(3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;
(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low);
(3-6) When only High and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);
(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue-mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
01100010 62
Control change
NRPN LSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter number LSB
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
Control change *
01100011 63
NRPN MSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter number MSB
1011nnnn Bn
Control change *
00000110 06
Data entry MSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter data MSB
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn
00100110 26
Control change *
Data entry LSB
0vvvvvvv vv
Parameter data LSB
* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission.
Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted.
1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE
(Cn)
Reception
If [PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [PROGRAM CHANGE Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled according to the settings of the [PROGRAM CHANGE EVENT LIST].
Transmission
If [PROGRAM CHANGE Tx] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE Table] settings when scene memory, effect library and premium rack library are recalled.
If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel.
If the recalled scene memory, effect library and premium rack library have been assigned to more than one PROGRAM NUMBER, the lowest-numbered
PROGRAM NUMBER for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.
PROGRAM CHANGE messages are not used for transmission to CL Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match.
(PARAMETER CHANGE messages are always used.)
You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.
If SINGLE is selected
You can choose the Rx CH, OMNI CH, and Tx CH.
You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.
A bank of up to 16 can be specified.
If MULTI is selected
The Rx and Tx channels will be the same.
The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added.
You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn
Program change
0nnnnnnn nn
Program number (0-127)
36
Data List
2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
2.1 SONG SELECT
(F3)
Reception
Select the track number shown in the TITLE LIST screen of the USB memory recorder.
STATUS 11110011 F3
Song select
Song number 0sssssss ss
Song number (0-127)
2.2 TIMING CLOCK
(F8)
Reception
This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note.
Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.
STATUS 11111000 F8
Timing clock
2.3 ACTIVE SENSING
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized
(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of
400 ms.
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS 11111110 FE
Active sensing
2.4 SYSTEM RESET
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,
Running Status will be cleared).
This message is not subject to echoing.
STATUS 11111111 FF
System reset
3 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
3.1 MMC
< MMC STOP >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and stops.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00000001 01
Stop(MCS)
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
< MMC PLAY >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00000010 02
Play(MCS)
11110111 F7
< MMC DEFERED PLAY >
End of exclusive
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message and starts playback.
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No. 01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000011 03
Deferred Play(MCS)
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
< MMC RECORD STROBE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if stopped, starts recording.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
00000110 06
Record strobe
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
< MMC PAUSE >
Reception
If the [DEVICE NO.] matches or is 7F, receives this message, and if playing, pauses.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01111111 7F
Real time System exclusive
Device ID 0ddddddd dd
Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)
COMMAND 00000110 06
Machine Control Command(MCC) sub-id
EOX
00001001 09
Pause(MCS)
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
3.2 BULK DUMP
This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the unit.
The basic format is as follows.
Command rx/tx Function
F0 43 0n 3E cc cc 19 mm ... mm dd dd ... ee F7
F0 43 2n 3E 19 mm ... mm dd dd F7 rx/tx rx
BULK DUMP DATA
BULK DUMP REQUEST
The CL series console uses the following data types for a bulk dump.
Module Name(mm)
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect
Portico5033 LIB
“SCENE ”
“INEQ ”
“OUTEQ ”
“DYNA ”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ_ ”
“8PEQ ”
“EFFECT ”
“PEFFECT_”
“P5033_ ”
Data Number(dd)
*1) *15) *16) *17)
*2) *7) *8)
*3) *9) *10) *11)
*4) *7) *8) *9) *10) *11) *22) *23)
*18) *7) *8)
*19) *9) *10) *11)
*5) *12)
*13)
*6) *14)
*20)
*21)
37
Module Name(mm)
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
Mixer Setup
Outport Setup
Monitor Setup
MIDI Setup
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“P5043 ”
“U76 ”
“OPT-2A ”
“EQ-1A ”
“DYNAEQ ”
“BSCMP369”
“DANTEIN_”
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
“LIB_NUM_” Fix (512)
“PRGMCHG_” Fix (512)
“CTRLCHG_” Fix (512)
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
*21)
Data Number(dd)
*21)
*24)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512) include Knob, Encoder
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
Fix (512)
*1) 0-300 Scene Number (0 Request Only),
*2) 1-199 Input EQ Library Number (1-40 Request Only)
*3) 1-199 Output EQ Library Number (1-3 Request Only)
*4) 1-199 Dynamics Library Number (1-41 Request Only)
*5) 0-199 GEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*6) 1-199 Effect Library Number (1-27 Request Only)
*7) 512-583 Input 1-72,
*8) 584-599 STIN 1L-8R,
*9) 768-791 MIX 1-24,
*10) 1024-1031 MATRIX 1-8,
*11) 1280-1282 STEREO L-C,
*12) 512-530 GEQ 1-19, 531-538 EFFECT GEQ 1-8,
*13) 0-199 8BandPEQ Library Number (0 Request Only)
*14) 512-519 EFFECT 1-8,
*15) 512 Current Data,
*16) 768 Current Data with Recall Safe,
*17) 8192 Store Undo Data, 8193 Recall Undo Data, 8194 Clear Undo Data,
*18) 0-199 Input CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*19) 0-199 Output CH Library Number (0 Request Only),
*20) 512-527 Premium Rack 1A, 1B, 2A, … 8A, 8B
*21) 0-100 Each Premium Effect Library Number (0 Request Only)
*22) 1536-1607 Input 1-72 (for Dynamics2),
*23) 1608-1623 STIN 1L-8R (for Dynamics2),
*24) 0-10 Dante Input Patch Library Number (0 Request Only)
Data is lost when you write to the preset library.
The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a CL series.
To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE
COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump
Request.
In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of
7-bit data.
Data List
[Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
} b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
[Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0-6]: actual data b[0-7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
3.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
This message is echoed if [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is ON.
This message is received if [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a PARAMETER CHANGE is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a PARAMETER
REQUEST is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a PARAMETER CHANGE with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].
Transmission
If [PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which
CONTROL CHANGE transmission has not been enabled, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.
In response to a PARAMETER REQUEST, a PARAMETER CHANGE will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number.
Command rx/tx Function
F0 43 1n 3E 19 ... F7 rx/tx CL series native parameter change
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 19 ... F7 rx/tx CL series native parameter request
PARAMETER REQUEST
4 PARAMETER CHANGE
details
4.1 CURRENT SCENE, SETUP, BACKUP, USER SETUP
4.1.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on and the parameter is not registered on the [CONTROL
CHANGE EVENT LIST].
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS
DATA
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
00011001 19
CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
0eeeeeee eh
Element no High.
0eeeeeee el
Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih
Index no High.
0iiiiiii il
Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch
Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl
Channel no Low.
0ddddddd dd
Data
: :
EOX 11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.1.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed via PARAMETER CHANGE immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000 F0
01000011 43
System exclusive message
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n
00111110 3E n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19
CL Series
DATA Category 0ccccccc cc
DATA
EOX
0eeeeeee eh
Element no High.
0eeeeeee el
Element no Low.
0iiiiiii ih
Index no High.
0iiiiiii il
Index no Low.
0ccccccc ch
Channel no High.
0ccccccc cl
Channel no Low.
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.1.3 Data category
Data Category
0x01 00000001
Name
Current Scene /Setup/Backup/
User Setup Data
4.2 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY STORE, RECALL -
4.2.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding parameter will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] (MIDI CH) in [Tx CH] when
[PARAMETER CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Number Low
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
EOX
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.2.2 Function Name
Function Name
Store
Recall
Unknown Factor Store
Unknown Factor Recall
Store Undo (only Score)
Recall Undo (only Scene)
“LibStr ”
“LibRcl ”
“LibUnStr”
“LibUnRcl”
“LibStrUd”
“LibRclUd”
38
Data List
4.2.3 Module Name
“LibRcl ”
Module Name
Scene
Input EQ
Output EQ
Dynamics
Input CH
Output CH
GEQ
8BandPEQ
Effect
Portico5033
Portico5043
U76
Opt-2A
EQP-1A
“SCENE ”
“INEQ ”
“OUTEQ ”
“DYNA ”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ
“8PEQ
”
”
“EFFECT ”
“P5033 ”
“P5043 ”
“U76 ”
“OPT-2A ”
“EQ-1A ”
Dynamic EQ
Buss Comp 369
“DYNAEQ ”
“BSCMP369”
Dante Input Patch “DANTEIN_”
Function
“LibStr ” SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“LibUnStr” SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
1-199
1-199
1-199
28-199
1-100
1-10
0-300
1-199
1-199
1-199
0-199
0-199
0-199
1-199
1-199
Number
1-300
41-199
4-199
42-199
1-199
1-199
1-199
1-199
28-199
1-100
1-10
0
0
0
0
0
*5)
0
0
0
0
0
0
*5)
Channel*1)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
*6)
*7)
*9)
*5)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
*6)
*7) tx tx tx tx tx tx tx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx
tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx
Function
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“LibUnRcl” SCENE
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Premium Effect LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“LibStrUd” SCENE
“LibRclUd” SCENE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Number
0-100
0-10
*9)
*5)
0
0
*9)
Channel*1)
*5)
*5)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*1) *2) *3) *4) *8)
*1)
*2) *3) *4)
*6)
*6)
*7)
*1) 0:CH1 - 71:CH72
72:ST IN 1L
*2) 256:MIX 1
*3) 512:MATRIX 1
- 87:ST IN 8R
- 279:MIX 24
- 519: MATRIX 8
*4) 1024:STEREO L - 1026:STEREO C
*5) 512: will be used if the recalling or storing data is only one.
*6) 0: GEQ1A, 1: GEQ1B, 2: GEQ2A, ... 36: GEQ19A, 37:GEQ19B
38: EFFECT GEQ1A, 39: EFFECT GEQ1B,
40: EFFECT GEQ2A, ... 52: EFFECT GEQ8A, 53: EFFECT GEQ8B
*7) 0:Effect1- 7:Effect8
*8) 1280:CH1 - 1351:CH72
1352:ST IN 1L - 1367:ST IN 8R
*9) 0: Premium Rack 1A, 1: Premium Rack 1B,
2: Premium Rack 2A, ... 14: Premium Rack 8A, 15: Premium Rack 8B
4.3 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY EDIT -
4.3.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding memory/library will be changed immediately the data is received.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000 F0
01000011 43
00111110 3E
System exclusive message
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA tx tx tx tx tx tx
tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx tx tx tx tx
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0sssssss sh number -source start High
0sssssss sl number -source start Low
0eeeeeee eh number -source end High
0eeeeeee el number -source end Low
0ddddddd dh number -destination start High
0ddddddd dl number -destination to start Low
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.3.2 Function Name
Function Name
Copy
Paste
Clear
Cut
Insert
Edit Undo
“LibCpy ”
“LibPst ”
“LibClr ”
“LibCut ”
“LibIns ”
“LibEdtUd”
4.3.3 Module Name
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“SCENE ”
“INEQ ”
“OUTEQ ”
“DYNA ”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ ”
“8PEQ ”
“EFFECT ”
“P5033 ”
“P5043 ”
“U76 ”
“OPT-2A__”
“EQ-1A ”
“DYNAEQ ”
“BSCMP369”
“DANTEIN_”
Function
Copy, Paste, Clear, Cut, Insert, EditUndo
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
Clear Only
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
0fffffff ff
(ASCII CODE)
39
Data List
4.4 FUNCTION CALL - LIBRARY ATTRIBUTE -
4.4.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
When the message is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be edited.
Transmission
PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent in reply to Request.
If [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
0001nnnn 1n
00111110 3E n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh
Element High
0eeeeeee el
Element Low
0iiiiiii ih
Index High
0iiiiiii il
Index Low
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
0000dddd dd
Data28~31bit
0ddddddd dd
Data21~27bit
EOX
0ddddddd dd
Data14~20bit
0ddddddd dd
Data7~13bit
0ddddddd dd
Data0~6bit
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.4.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000 F0
01000011 43
System exclusive message
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n
00111110 3E n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Scene/Library number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Scene/Library number Low
0eeeeeee eh
Element High
0eeeeeee el
Element Low
0iiiiiii ih
Index High
0iiiiiii il
Index Low
EOX
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.4.3 Module Name
“SCENE ”
“INEQ ”
“OUTEQ ”
“DYNA ”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNNL”
“GEQ ”
“8PEQ ”
“EFFECT ”
“P5033 ”
“P5043 ”
“U76 ”
“OPT-2A ”
“EQ-1A ”
Number
0-300 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-40:response only)
1-200 (1-3:response only)
1-200 (1-41:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-200 (0:response only)
0-199 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-27:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
40
Module Name
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
“DYNAEQ ”
“BSCMP369”
“DANTEIN_”
Number
0-100 (0:response only)
0-100 (0:response only)
0-10 (0:response only)
4.5 EXIST LIBRARY RANGE
4.5.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
When CL series receives Library Exist request command from outside, the answer will be sent back with the following Parameter change.
This packet shows smallest library number range that exists and not read only.
Top number is requested number or more.
-Example-
SCENE is stored 5,6,7,10,100 and 101
Request Number: 0
Data : Valid, Top Number : 5, End Number 7
Request Number: 8
Data : Valid, Top Number : 10, End Number 10
Request Number: 11
Data : Valid, Top Number : 100, End Number 101
Request Number: 102
Data : Invalid, Top Number : 0, End Number 0
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01000011 43
0001nnnn 1n
00111110 3E
00011001 19 n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Digital mixer
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
01111000 “x”
01101001 “i”
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0sssssss ss
Data Status ( 0:Invalid data,1:Valid Data )
0nnnnnnn nh
Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Request Number Low
0ttttttt th
Top Number High
0ttttttt tl
Top Number Low
0eeeeeee eh
End Number High
0eeeeeee el
End Number Low
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
Data List
4.5.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
The PARAMETER CHANGE will be sent with Device number [Rx CH] immediately the data is received.
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No.
SUB STATUS
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0nnnnnnn nh
Request Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Request Number Low
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.5.3 Module Name
“SCENE ”
“INEQ ”
“OUTEQ ”
“DYNA ”
“INCHNNL_”
“OUTCHNL”
“GEQ ”
“8PEQ ”
“EFFECT ”
“P5033 ”
“P5043 ”
“U76 ”
“OPT-2A ”
“EQ-1A ”
“DYNAEQ ”
“BSCMP369”
“DANTEIN_”
Number
1-300
41-200
4-200
42-200
1-200
1-200
1-200
1-199
55-200
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-100
1-10
Module Name
SCENE LIB
INPUT EQ LIB
OUTPUT EQ LIB
Dynamics LIB
INPUT CH LIB
OUTPUT CH LIB
GEQ LIB
8BandPEQ LIB
EFFECT LIB
Portico5033 LIB
Portico5043 LIB
U76 LIB
Opt-2A LIB
EQP-1A LIB
DynamicEQ LIB
Buss Comp 369 LIB
Dante Input Patch LIB
4.6 FUNCTION CALL - COLLECTION STORE -
4.6.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Transmission
Data will be transmitted with the [Device Number] in [Tx CH] when [PARAMETER
CHANGE Tx] is on.
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No.
SUB STATUS
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA 0nnnnnnn nh
Number High
0nnnnnnn nl
Number Low
EOX
0ccccccc ch
Channel High
0ccccccc cl
Channel Low
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.6.2 Function Name
Function
“ColUnStr” Setup
User Defined Key
Program Change
Control Change
Number
0
0
0
0
4.6.3 Module Name
Module Name
Mixer Setting
Outport Setting
Monitor Setting
MIDI Setting
Lib Number
Program Change Table
Control Change Table
Preference (Current)
Preference (Admin)
Preference (Guest)
User Defined Keys (Current)
“MIXERSET”
“OUT_PORT”
“MONITOR_”
“MIDI_SET”
“LIB_NUM_”
“PRGMCHG_”
“CTRLCHG_”
“PREF_CUR”
“PREF_ADM”
“PREF_GST”
“UDEF_CUR”
41
tx/rx tx tx tx tx
Module Name
User Defined Keys (Admin)
User Defined Keys (Guest)
Custom Fader Bank (Current)
Custom Fader Bank (Admin)
Custom Fader Bank (Guest)
User Level (Current)
User Level (Guest)
“UDEF_ADM”
“UDEF_GST”
“CFAD_CUR”
“CFAD_ADM”
“CFAD_GST”
“UKEY_CUR”
“UKEY_GST”
4.7 FUNCTION CALL - MODULE -
4.7.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding effect will function immediately the data is received
(depending on the effect type).
STATUS
ID No.
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01001101 “M”
01101111 “o”
01100100 “d”
01000110 “F”
01111000 “x”
01010100 “T”
01110010 “r”
01100111 “g”
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0eeeeeee ee
Effect number (0:RACK1-7:RACK8)
0ppppppp pp
Release:0, Press:1
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.7.2 Module Name
Module Name
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
“FRZPLAY_”
“FRZREC ”
Number
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
0:RACK1, 2:RACK3, 4:RACK5, 6:RACK7
This will not work when the Effect Type is different.
Data List
4.8 FUNCTION CALL - CHANNEL -
4.8.1 Pair ON/OFF Trigger Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00000000 00
OTHER DATA
FUNCTION NAME 01000011 “C”
01101000 “h”
01101100 “l”
01010000 “P”
01101001 “i”
01110010 “r”
01000011 “C”
01110000 “p”
MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
DATA
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm
(ASCII CODE)
0sssssss sh
Source Channel Number H *1)
0sssssss sl
Source Channel Number L *1)
0ddddddd dh
Destination Channel Number H *1)
0ddddddd dl
Destination Channel Number L *1)
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.8.2 Module Name
Module Name
Pair On (with Copy)
Pair On (with Reset Both)
Pair Off
“PAIRONCP”
“PAIRONRS”
“PAIROFF_”
*1) 0:CH1 - 71:CH72
256:MIX 1 - 279:MIX 24
512:MATRIX 1-519:MATRIX 8
4.9 LEVEL METER DATA
4.9.1 Format (PARAMETER CHANGE)
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request for Level Meter, the corresponding metering data will be sent in every 50 millisecond for 10 seconds.
If metering information is expected to be continuously sent, Request is needed to be sent in at least every 10 seconds.
Reception
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving Request, the corresponding metering data will be sent in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
When rebooted or port setting is changed, the transmission will be disabled.
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS 11110000 F0
System exclusive message
ID No.
SUB STATUS
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0001nnnn 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21
REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LU
EOX
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LL
0ddddddd dd
Data1
: :
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
4.9.2 Format (PARAMETER REQUEST)
Reception
Data will be received when [PARAMETER CHANGE Rx] is on and the Device number of both [Rx CH] and SUB STATUS match.
The data will be echoed when [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on.
The corresponding metering data will be sent via [Rx CH] in constant interval for a given period of time (The interval and time will vary depending on devices).
If this is received with an Address UL = 0x7F, transmission of all meter data will stop (will be disabled) immediately.
Transmission
When [PARAMETER CHANGE ECHO] is on, the message will be sent as it is.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
EOX
11110000 F0
System exclusive message
01000011 43
Manufacturer's ID number (YAMAHA)
0011nnnn 3n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
00111110 3E
Digital mixer
MODEL ID 00011001 19
CL Series
DATA CATEGORY 00100001 21
REMOTE LEVEL METER
DATA 0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS UL
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LU
0mmmmmmm mm
ADDRESS LL
0ccccccc ch
Count H
0ccccccc cl
Count L
11110111 F7
End of exclusive
42
Data List
Input/output characteristics
ANALOG INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Input
Terminals
GAIN
OMNI IN
1-8
TALKBACK
+66dB
-6dB
+64dB
+20dB
Actual
Load
Impedance
7.5kΩ
10kΩ
For Use
With
Nominal
Sensitivity
*1
50-600Ω
Mics &
600Ω
Lines
50-600Ω
Mics &
600Ω
Lines
-82dBu
(61.6μV)
-10dBu
(245mV)
-70dBu
(0.245mV)
-26dBu
(38.8mV)
Input Level
Nominal
-62dBu
(0.616mV)
+10dBu
(2.45V)
-60dBu
(0.775mV)
-16dBu
(0.123V)
Max. before
clip
-42dBu
(6.16mV)
+30dBu
(24.5V)
-40dBu
(7.75mV)
+4dBu
(1.23V)
Connector
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)
*2
XLR-3-31 type
(Balanced)
*2
*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4dBu (1.23V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (all faders and level controls are maximum position.)
*2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
* In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms.
* All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128times oversampling.
* +48V DC ( phantom power ) is supplied to ONI IN (1-8) and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via each individual software controlled switches.
ANALOG OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Output
Terminals
Actual
Source
Impedanc
e
For Use
With
Nominal
GAIN
SW
*3
Output Level
Nominal
Max. before
clip
Connector
OMNI
OUT 1-8
75Ω
600Ω
Lines
+24dB
(default)
+18dB
+4dBu
(1.23V)
-2dBu
(616mV)
+24dBu
(12.3V)
+18dBu
(6.16V)
XLR-3-32 type
(Balanced)
*1
PHONES 15Ω
8Ω
Phones
40Ω
Phones
-
-
75mW
65mW
*4
*4
150mW
150mW
Stereo Phone Jack
(TRS)
(Unbalanced)
*2
*1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
*2. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced. (Tip= LEFT, Ring= RIGHT, Sleeve= GND)
*3. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.
*4. The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max.
* In these specifications, 0dBu= 0.775 Vrms.
* All output DA converters are 24bit, 128times oversampling.
DIGITAL INPUT & OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Terminal Format
Data
length
Level Audio Connector
Primary/
Secondary
Dante
24bit or
32bit
1000Base
-T
64ch Input/64ch Output
@48kHz
DIGITAL OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Terminal Format
Data
Length
Level
EtherCON Cat5e
Connector
DIGITAL
OUT
*1
AES/EBU
AES/EBU Professional Use
*1. Channel Status of DIGITAL OUT
Byte Bit Field Name
24bit RS422 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)
Fixed/Variable Data Description
*2
0 Block Format
1 Mode
2-4 Emphasis fixed
1
0
0x4
0 professional use audio off lock
0
5 Fs Lock
6-7 Sampling Frequency variable
0x0
0x3
0x2
0x1 others
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
1
2
0-3 Channel Mode
4-7 Users Bit Management
0-2 Use of AUX
3-7 Source fixed fixed
0x1
0x0
2ch mode
-
0x1 24 bits Audio Data
0x00 -
- 3 0-7 Multi Channel
0-1 Digital Audio Reference Signal
4
2 -
3-6 Sampling Frequency fixed 0x00
0x0 fixed
7 Sampling Frequency Scan Flag variable fixed
0
0x0
0
*2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1= GND, 2= HOT, 3= COLD)
- others
-
43
Data List
I/O SLOT (1-3) CHARACTERISTICS
Each I/O Slot accepts a mini-YGDAI card. Only Slot1 has a serial interface.
CONTROL I/O CHARACTERISTICS
Terminal Format Level Connector
MIDI
WORD
CLOCK
GPI (5IN/5OUT)
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MIDI
MIDI
-
-
-
-
-
TTL/75Ω terminated
TTL/75Ω
DIN Connector 5P
DIN Connector 5P
BNC Connector
BNC Connector
-
D Sub Connector 15P
(Female)
*1
10BASE-T/100Base-TX RJ-45 NETWORK
LAMP (CL5: x3, CL3: x2, CL1: x1)
USB HOST
DC POWER INPUT
METER (CL3/CL1 only)
IEEE802.3
-
USB 2.0
-
-
0V-12V
-
-
-
*2
XLR-4-31 type
*2
USB A Connector (Female)
JL05 Connector
D Sub Connector 9P
(Female)
*1. Input pin: TTL level, w/ internal pull-up
(47kΩ)
Output pin: Open drain output (Vmax=12V, maximum sink current/pin=75mA)
Power supply pin: Output voltage Vp=5V, Max. output current Imax=300mA
*2. 4 pin=+12V, 3 pin=GND, Lamp rating 5W. Voltage control by software.
44
Data List
Electrical Characteristics
All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms
◆
Frequency Response.
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz-20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz
Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI IN 1-8
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
GAIN: +66dB
-1.5 0.0 0.5 dB
PHONES 8 Ω -3.0 0.0 0.5
◆
Total Harmonic Distortion.
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
Internal OSC
Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit
OMNI OUT 1-8
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Full Scale Output @1 kHz
PHONES
600 Ω
8 Ω
+4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: +66dB
+4 dBu @20 Hz-20 kHz, GAIN: -6dB
Full Scale Output @1 kHz, PHONES Level
Control: Max.
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.2
%
* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz
◆
Hum & Noise.
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, EIN= Equivalent Input Noise
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
All INPUTs
-
-
Output
OMNI OUT 1-8
RL
600 Ω
Conditions
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: +66dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB
Master fader at nominal level and one
Ch fader at nominal level.
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω
Rs= 150 Ω, GAIN: -6dB
Master fader at nominal level and all
OMNI IN 1-8 in faders at nominal level.
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off
PHONES 8 Ω
Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level
Control Min.
* Hum & Noise are measured with A-weight filter.
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
-128
EIN
-62
-84 -79
-70
-88
-88 dBu
◆
Dynamic Range.
Input
OMNI IN 1-8
-
Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Output RL Conditions
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω AD + DA, GAIN: -6dB
OMNI OUT 1-8 600 Ω DA Converter
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
108
112 dB dB
* Dynamic Range are measured with A-weight filter.
◆
Sampling Frequency
Parameter
Frequency
Range
External Clock
Internal Clock
Jitter of PLL
Frequency
Accuracy
Jitter
Conditions
Fs= 44.1 kHz
Fs= 45.9375 kHz (44.1 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 44.1441 kHz (44.1 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 44.0559 kHz (44.1 kHz -0.1%)
Fs= 42.336 kHz (44.1 kHz -4.0%)
Fs= 48 kHz
Fs= 50 kHz (48 kHz +4.1667%)
Fs= 48.048 kHz (48 kHz +0.1%)
Fs= 47.952 kHz (48 kHz -0.1%)
Fs= 46.080 kHz (48 kHz -4.0%)
DIGITAL IN Fs= 44.1 kHz
DIGITAL IN Fs= 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Word Clock : Int 44.1 kHz
Word Clock : Int 48 kHz
Min. Typ. Max. Unit
-200 +200 ppm
-50
10 ns
44.1
48
+50
4.429
4.069 kHz ppm ns
45
Data List
Mixer Basic Parameters
◆
Libraries
Name
Scene Memory
Number
Preset 1 + User 300
Input CH Library
Output CH Library
Input EQ Library
Output EQ Library
Dynamics Library
Effect Library
GEQ Library
Premium Rack Library
Portico5033
Portico5043
U76
Opt-2A
EQ-1A
Dynamic EQ
Dante Input Patch Library
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 40 + User 159
Preset 3 + User 196
Preset 41 + User 158
Preset 27 + User 172
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 199
Preset 1 + User 10
200
11
◆
Input Function
Function
Phase
Digital Gain
L,R-MONO
HPF
Attenuator
4 Band
Equalizer
Normal/Reverse
-96 dB to +24 dB
Parameter
L-MONO/R-MONO/LR-MONO/STEREO IN
Slope= -12dB/Oct, -6dB/Oct
Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz
-96 dB to 0 dB
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
Insert
Direct Out
Dynamics 1
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Gate/Ducking/Comp/Expander
Threshold=Gate: -72 dB to 0 dB
Others: -54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Hold= 48 kHz: 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec
44.1 kHz: 0.02 msec to 2.13 sec
Decay= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Total
301
200
200
199
199
199
199
200
Function
Dynamics 1
Dynamics2
Fader
On
Pan/Balance
DCA Group
Mute Group
Mix Send
Matrix Send
LCR Pan
DELAY
Function
Attenuator
Parameter
Releace= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Range= Gate: -∞ dB to 0 dB
Ducking: -70 dB to 0 dB
Gain= 0.0 dB to +8dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF
Type: Comp/De-Esser/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24
Ch1-STIN8R (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Frequency= 1.0 KHz to 12.5KHz
TYPE= HPF, BPF
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
On/Off
Position L63 to R63
Pan Mode: Pan/Balance
16 Groups
8 Groups
24 sends
Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes
(Surround Pan can be set 1 to 6 mixes)
Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
(Position L63 to R63, R63 to F63 for Surround)
8 Sends
Matrix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
CSR= 0% to 100%
0 ms to 1000 msec
◆
Output Function
Parameter
-96 dB to 0 dB
46
Function
4 Band
Equalizer
Insert
Dynamics 1
Fader
On
Pan/Balance
DCA Group
Mute Group
Mix to Matrix
Stereo to Matrix
Parameter
Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Gain= -18 dB to +18 dB
Q= 0.10 to 10.0
Low Shelving (Low Band)
High Shelving, LPF (High Band)
Type I/Type II
Insert Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On
Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S
Threshold= -54 dB to 0 dB
Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1
Compander: 1:1 to 20:1
Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec
Release= 48 kHz: 5 msec to 42.3 sec
44.1 kHz: 6 msec to 46.1 sec
Gain= -18 dB to 0 dB, 0 dB to +18 dB
Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)
Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix Out21-24 MIX24/
MTRX1-8/STIN LR/MONO(C) (8ch block)
Width= 1 dB to 90 dB
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
On/Off
Position L63 to R63
16 Groups
8 Groups
Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post On
Level: 1024 steps, ∞, -138 dB to +10 dB
Oscillator
Level= 0 to -96dB (1 dB step)
On/Off= Software control
◆
Output Port
Function
Out Port Delay 0 msec to 1000 msec
Parameter
Out Port Phase Normal/Reverse
Gain -96 to +24 dB
◆
Processor
Function
GEQ
PEQ
AUTOMIXER
Effects
Premium Rack
Parameter
Parameter
31 bands x 16(24) or 15 bands x 32(48) systems
(8 bands PEQ + 3 notchs + HPF, LPF) x 32(48) systems
8(16) channels
Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems
Stereo(Dual) In/Stereo(Dual) Out Premium Rack x
8 systems
Data List
Pin Assignment
4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6 5
15 14 13 12 11 10
20 19 18 17 16
23 22 21
DC POWER INPUT
Pin Signal Name
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
Pin
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
Signal Name
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CAUTION(+)
CAUTION(-)
DETECT A
DETECT B
DETECT GND
Frame GND
8 3 2 1
5 1
15 11 10 9
GPI
Pin
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Signal Name
GPO1
GPO3
GPO5
GND
+5V
GPI1
GPI3
GPI5
Pin
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
Signal Name
GPO2
GPO4
GND
GND
+5V
GPI2
GPI4
9 6
METER (CL3/CL1 only)
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
Signal Name
RESET
SDA
DGND
SCL
+3.3D
Pin
6
7
8
9
Signal Name
+3.3LD
+3.3LD
LDGND
LDGND
47
Data List
YAMAHA [ Digital Mixing Console ]
Model: CL5/CL3/CL1
Function...
Date: 1 Mar.
2012
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic Default
Channel Changed
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
Note
Number
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch
Bend
Control
Change
True Voice
Note On
Note Off
Key’s
Ch’s
0,32
6,38
98,99
1-31,33-95, 102-
119
1–16
1–16
X
X
**************
1–16
1–16
1, 3
X
X
Memorized
Memorized
0–127
X
O 9nH, v=0,127
X
X
X
X
0–127
X
O 9nH, v=1-127
O
Effect Control
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Bank Select
Data Entry
NRPN LSB,MSB
Assignable Cntrl
Prog
Change :True#
O 0–127
**************
O 0–127
0–300
Assignable
System Exclusive
Common
:Song Pos.
:Song Sel.
:Tune
O *1
X
X
X
O *1,*2
X
O
X
Recorder Control
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
O
X
Effect Control
:All Sound Off
:Reset All Cntrls
Aux :Local ON/OFF
Messages :All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
Notes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
*1 Bulk Dump/Request and Parameter Change/Request.
*2 MMC
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Manual Development Department
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2015 MA-D1
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement